60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74 60182000L 1700 System Maintenance Monitor Volume 2 Feb74

60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74 60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74

User Manual: 60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 776

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

CONTROL DATA
CORPORATION

CONTROL DATA®
1700 SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE MONITOR (SMM17)

VOLUME 2
REFERENCE MANUAL

RECORD of REVISIONS
REVISION
01

NOTES
Originai Printing, preliminary edition.

( 5-13-66)
02
(8-8-66)

Reprint with revision which obsoletes all previous editions.
Tests were u[>dated and the following_ new tests were added: 1711/1712 Teletype, 1729 Card Reader
1731 Mae;netic Tape 1706/1716 Buffered Data" Channel and Coupling, Random Protect, 1700 SMM

Publications Chane;e Order 14307.

and Enter Proe;ram.
Manual released. Publication Chane;e Order 16368. The following new tests are added: OB (1718
Satellite Coupler Test) OC (1742 Line Printer Test), and 3D (Enter Proe;ram). Other tests were
extensively revised and updated. This edition obsoletes all previous editions
Publication Change Order 17146. To revise existing tests and add new tests. Introduction' oa{1'e 5
revised. Description: pages 7, 12, 15, 18, 25, 26, 27, 30 and 35 revised. Pages 30-a and 30-b
Edit Routine

_(5-1-67)
B
(9-14-67)

added.

Tests: pages 90-1, 90-2, 100-7, 100-8, 100-10, 101-2, 101-7, 202-1, 202-7, 205-2, 206-6

thru 206-10, 207-3, 208-2 and 208-6 revised.
212, 213 and 214 added.

Page 100-8a added.

Tests sections: 102, 201, 203,

Sections 102 Rev A, 201 Rev A and 203 Rev A removed.

C
(2-28-68)

Publications Change Order 18929.

D
(6-11-68)

Publications Change Order 19818, to make miscellaneous publication corrections. Pages 37,
100-2, 100-18, 101-9, 102-7, 200-10, 201-6, 202-9, 203-7, 204-1, 204:.. 12, 205-14, 206-9, 206-10

Manual Revised, Engineering Change Order 21307, publications change orui.:· Information included

To add 1728 Card Reader/Punch test, No. D.

207-4, 208-21, 210-4, 210-6, 211-13, and 215-23 revised.
(1-6-69)

through Edition 2. 1.

Pages 207-5 and 212-24 added.

Pages 35, 90-1, 90-2, 90-6, 101-10, and 208-1 thru 208-21 revised;

page~

30-c through 30-f, 51 through 60, 103, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222 and red tab dividers
added.
F

Manual divided into two volumes.

Manual revised, Engineering Change Oruel' 21383.

This ruanual is ccrr.plete through Edition 2 .1~ ..

(12-15-69)
G
(2-15-70)

Manual revised.

Manuals revised.

(12-15-70)
J
(2-5-73)
K

New tests are added and editorial corrections made.
This publication is comJ)lete throue;h Ed. 2. 3.

All previous editions are obsolete.

Manuals revised. New tests are. added and minor corrections are made.
complete through Ed. 3.0;
Manuals revised.

Tests are added. deleted

Manuals revised.

Tests are added. deleted. and corrected.

This publication is

and corrected

(9-20-73
L
(2-1-74J

This manual is c.omplete

through Edition 2·2·

...

This publication is complete through

Edition 3 1

1&.1

0::

oIf)
N

..
Address comments concerning this
manual to:

Pub. No. 60182000
© 1966, 1967, 1968, 1969, 1973, 1974
by Control Data Corporation
Printed in United States of America

Control Data Corporation
Technical Publications Department
4201 North Lexington Ave.
Arden Bills, Minnesota 55112
or use Comment Sheet in the back of
this manual.

PREFACE

MANUAL STRUCTURE
This manual is intended to serve as a reference aid for field and checkout personnel
involved in the running of the CONTROL DATA® 1700 System Maintenance Monitor (SMM17).
It consists of two sections:

SMM17 DESCRIPTION
A detailed description of the operation and use of the monitor. instructions for the
operator. restrictions and necessary parameters.
page will highlight operator tasks.

An asterisk

(~:~)

on the left of the

Supplements are included in the back of this section.

TESTS
Detailed test descriptions complete the three volume reference manual.

60182000 J

iii

CONTENTS

VOLUME 1
SYSTEM FLOW CHART

SMM17 DESCRIPTION
I.

SMM DEFINITION

II.

LOADER DEFINITION

III. LOADING SMM

Quick Look Load

Quick Look Stops for SMM Information

Dis abling System Interrupts

IV. LOADING AND EXECUTING TESTS

Test List Construction

Test List Execution

SMM/OPERATORINTERFACE

Programmed Information Stops

Stop! Jump Parameter

SMM Parameter

System Messages

VI. SYSTEM USAGE

Test Restart

TTY Input Package Selection

Worst-Case Setups

Load and Execution Automation

VII. MONITOR ERROR CODES

VIII.G ENERAL OPERA TING INSTRUC TIONS

60182000 L

IX. TELETYPE INPUT PACKAGE
Supplement A.

Hand-Entered Bootstraps

A-I

Supplement B.

SMM17 Library Format

B-1

Supplement C.

Quick Look Command Test

C-l

Supplement D.

SMM17 Programming Specifications

D-1

Supplement E.

Monitor Based Subroutines Programming Specification

E-l

SERVICE ROUTINES

MNEMONIC NUMBER

PAGE

Printer / Teletype Dump,
T ape to Print Routine

DMP

100-1

LST

101-1

3000 Channel Simulator Assembler

SAS

102-1

SMM Edit Routine
3000 Channel Simulator Program Update

EDT
UD3

3E
2D

103-1
104-1

1700 Source/6000 TVC Update

UD1

105-1

1700 Source/6000 BUCAL Update

UD2

106-1

1700 Command Test

COM

200-1

1700 Memory Test

MEM

201-1

1 700 Protect Test

RPT

202-1

1774 System Controller Command Test

CAR

204-1

1700 Memory Test

MYI

205-1

1 700 Memory Test

MY2

206-1

1723 Paper Tape Punch Test

PTP

300-1

1721 Paper Tape Reader Test

PTR

301-1

1711/12/13 Teletypewriter Test

TTY

350-1

1740/501, 1742 Line Printer Test

LP1

351-1

FF524-A/1742-120/512 Printer Test

LP5

352-1

1729 Card Reader (Lo Speed Package)

CRI

400-1

1728/430 Card Reader Punch Test

CRP

401-1

1729-2 Card Reader Test

CR3

402-1

1726/405 Card Reader Test

CR2

403-1

INTERNAL TESTS

EXTERNAL TESTS
Paper Tape Equipment

Printing Equipment

Card Equipment

60182000 L

Magnetic Tape Equipment
1731/601,602,612 Magnetic Tape Test

MT1

450-1

1731/601,602,612 Magnetic Tape Test

MT2

451-1

1732/608,609-1732-2/658,659 Magnetic
Tape Test

MT3

452-1

1731/601,602,612-1732/608,609 Special
Magnetic Tape Test

MTS

453-1

1706 Data Channel Test

BD1

500-1

1706/16 Data Channel Test

BD2

501-1

1738/853/854 Disk Drive Test

DP1

550-1

1739 Cartridge Disk Drive Controller

VOLUME 2
Data Channel

Rotating Mass Storage

CDD

551-1

BG504A/H Drum Controller Diagnostic

DRM

552-1

1738 Disk Quick Look Test

DP5

553-1

1733-1/1738/853, 854 and QSE 4730

DP3

554-1

1733-2 Multiple Cartridge Disk Driver
Controller

MDC

555-1

1745/6-1,210 Display Test

DDC

600-1

1745/6-2,311 Display Test

DDT

601-1

1 700/8000 Data Transfer Buffer Display

DTB

602-1

1744/274 Digigraphics Display Test

DIG

603-1

1744/274 Digigraphics Display System:

DG4

604-1

General Purpose Graphics Terminal (GPGT)

N/A

610-1

GPGT Troubleshooting Program

GTO

611-1

GPGT Command Test

GT1

612-1

GPGT Display Quality Test

GT2

613-1

GPGT Ligh_t Pen and Keyboard Test

GT3

614-1

GPGT Communications Test

GT4

615-1

GPGT Communications Test (12 Bit Interface)

GT5

616-1

GPGT Specification Verification Test

GT6

617-1

Displays

60182000 L

vii

Optical Readers
1735/915 Optical Character Reader

OCR

650-1

935-2 Read Transport Test

OC2

652-1

FF406/935 Module Test

OC3

653-1

935 System Test

OC4

654-1

FF406/1700 I/O Interface Test

BC1

655-1

1700/FF104/955 System Test

RXI

656-1

1700/955 Module Test

RX3

657-1

SC17/1700 FR101 MEM/COM/IFP Test

BC2

658-1

1700/ FR101/955 Transport Test

RX4

660-1

SC/1700/FR101/FRl13 Interface Test

BC3

661-1

1 718 Satellite Coupler Test

SCI

700-1

1747/6000 Data Set Controller Test

DSC

701-1

VOLUME 3
Communication Equipment

1747 Data Set Controller Test

DS1

702-1

1749 Communications Terminal Test

CTC

703-1

1 748 - 2 Multiplexer Controller CSPL
Communications Adapter

MCC

704-1

DJ814A A/Q Communications Multiplexer
(NUMOD)

AQM

706-1

Analog/ Digital

Event Counter Subsystem

CTR

753-1

Digital Input/Output Subsystem

DIO

754-1

10M Mother Unit Diagnostic

10M

755-1

1500 Series R emote Peripheral Controller
Diagnostic

HOR

756-1

CLK

850-1

1700/6600 (QSE 3604/3308) Rover Multiplexer Test

RMT

900-1

1 706 Buffered Data Channel Test
W/QSE 3247

BD3

901-1

Misc ellaneous
10126 Clock Test
QSE TESTS

viii

60182000 L

1738/853,854 Dual Access Disk Test

DAD

902-1

1700/415 Card Punch - QSE 5986

CP1
CP2

21
22

903-1

1 738 Disk Pack Test - QSE 1811

DP2

904-1

1706/1716 Channel Test - QSE 3311

BD4

905-1

1738/853, 854 Disk Pack Test - QSE 4777

DP4

907-1

1 706 Buffered Data Channel Test with
Non-Terminating Buffer - QSE 3694

BD5

908-1

DC 215 Data Transfer /405 Card Reader

CR4

909-1

FFT Algorithm - QSE 3116, 6693

FFT

910-1

1700/200 Remoter User Terminal
Diagnostic - QSE 4557

CTU

911-1

1700/1749/332/ 2-103s/ Remote Teletype
Test - QSE 4557

CTT

912-1

High Speed Data Set Controller Test
QSE 8249

HCA

913-1

FV219 Plotter Controller Test QSE 6340

PLT

914-1

Operand Bank Test - QSE 7812

QOB

915-1

1745-1746/210 Display Station Test QSE 7698

DDD

916-1

DC215 Data Transfer Buffer/415 Card
Punch Test (QSE)

CP4

917-1

Ponya Parking Lot Data Acquisi tion
and Revenue Control System

PNY

918-1

DC216A/ 3555/ 512 Printer Test
House of Representatives Vote

LPX

919-1

Station Exerciser

VSD

920-1

60182000 L

1706 BUFFERED DATA CHANNEL TEST
(BDIOOA Test No.

OA)

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
Sections 3, 4, and 5 do not select density on the MT units.

However, it is recom-

mended that 200 BPI be selected to allow greater accuracy in testing the CWA
register.
B.

LOADING PROCEDURE

The test operates under control of 1700 System Maintenance Monitor (SlWVI17).

The calling sequence is that specified by SMM17.

3. The test can be restarted after loading from Initial address.
PARAMETERS
1.

If bit 0 of the Stop/ Jump word is set, the program will have one monitor stop

displaying $A31 in the A register and the Stop/ Jump word in the Q register.
Two additional stops with the test parameters displayed in the A and Q registers
are defined as follows:
Stop 2

= WEOl,

where the W field is bits 15-11 and defines the BDC
to be tested.

Enter 2, 7, or C for the BDC numbers

1, 2, or 3 respectively.

The E field is bits 10-7 and

specifies the equipment number of the 1731/1732
Magnetic Tape Controller.
Q = OOOU,

where U specifies the 601/608/609 Tape Unit which will

be used for 1/ O.
Stop 3

= XXXX,

the End of Operation interrupt line for the BDC.

Only

1 bit is set in this word which must indicate the interrupt
line.

For example if the End of Operation interrupts

are to be received on line 5, Bit 5 would be set.
Q = XXXX,

the sections of the BDC test to run.
select Section 1 to be run, etc.
in all.

Stop 4

= XXXX.

Bit 0 of Q will

There are five sections

If all five sections were to be run, Q would l?e

set to 001F.
illegal equipment (enter into A an equipment
address that is unused on your system.

This

equipment address is used to check internal
rej ects)
60182000 L

Q = XXXX, unused (prestored as 0001)

500-1

If bit 0 of the Stop/ Jump word is not set, the test will be run using the prestored
parameters.
a.

These parameters assume the following:

BDC number 1 is to be tested and the tape controller is number 3.
(WE01 = 1181)

Tape unit 7 is the tape to use for

1/ O.

The interrupts on End of Operation from the BDC are received on line 3.

All five sections of the test will be run.

3. A typeout of selected parameters will occur after last stop.
SELECTIVE SKIP AND STOP SETTINGS
1.

STOP - must be set for running of SMM17.

SKIP - when the Stop/ Jump word is displayed in Q.

MESSAGES
1.

Typeouts or Alarms
a.

Normal Program Typeouts
1)

Test identification at start of test
BD100A, 1706 BUFFERED DATA CHANNEL TEST IA = XXXX, FC = XX

End of test typeout

A
OA24
b.

S/J

Pass No.

Q
Return Addres s

Error Alarms
1)

The following is typed out:
a)

Identification word

Stop/ Jump parameter

Section/Error number

Return address

Information dependent upon specific error

Error Codes
An error code is displayed in the lower two digits of the A register on the

second stop of all error stop sequences.

A description of the error codes

used and the data displayed in the A and Q registers of the third stop is listed
as follows:
500-2

60182000 J

Error 01 -

Incorrect equipment parameter was entered.

Program will make

another parameter stop if placed in Run..
A = the equipment parameter entered
Q = 0000
Error 02 -

External reject on input of BDC status.

If the error condition

is not repeated (Bit 4 of Stop/ Jump word set) the test will be
terminated.
A
Q

= the contents
= 0000

of Q when the input instruction was executed

Error 03 - Internal reject on input of BDC status.

If the error condition

is not repeated, the test is terminated.
Error 04 -

Ready not set on BDC status.

If the condition is not repeated, the

test is terminated.
A
Q

= BDC
= 0000

status

Error 05 - External reject on input of BDC current address.
A
Q

Error 06 -

= conten~s
= 0000

of Q when the input instruction was executed

Internal reject on input of BDC current address.
A = contents of Q when the input instruction was executed
Q = 0000

Error 07

External reject on Terminate Buffer.
A = contents of Q when the input instruction was executed
Q = 0000

Error 08

Internal reject on Terminate Buffer.
A

= contents

of Q when the input instruction was executed

Q = 0000

Error 09

External reject on attempt to output a function to the BDC.
A = contents of Q when output was attempted
Q = contents of A when output was attempted

60182000 H

500-3

Error OA -

Internal reject on attempt to output a function to the BDC.
A
Q

Error OB -

= contents
= contents

of Q when output was attempted
of A when output was attempted

External reject on direct output of a function to the 1731 Tape
Controller.
A

= contents

of A when ouput was executed
Q = contents of Q when output was executed

Error OC -

Internal reject on direct output of a function to the 1731 Tape
Controller.
A = contents of A when output was executed
Q

Error OD -

= the contents
= 0000

of Q when the input was executed

Internal reject on input of status 1 of the 1731 Tape Controller.
A
Q

Error OF -

of Q when output was executed

External reject on input of status 1 of the 1731 Tape Controller.
A

Error OE -

= contents

= the contents
= 0000

of Q when the input was executed

External reject on input of status 2 of the 1731 Tape Controller.
A = the contents of Q when the input was executed
Q = 0000

Error 10 -

Internal reject on input of status 2 of the 1731 Tape Controller.
A = the contents of Q when the input was executed
Q = 0000

Error 11 -

No write ring in selected tape unit.

If this error condition is not

repeated, the test is terminated.
A = the selected tape unit
Q = status 2 of the selected tape unit

Error 12 -

The selected tape unit is protected.

If this error condition is

not repeated, the test will be terminated.
A = the selected tape unit
Q

500-4

= status

1 of the selected tape unit

60182000 H

Error 13 -

External reject on attempt to initiate buffered output to tape.
A

= the

first word address minus 1 of the buffer area

Q = contents of Q when the output instruction was executed

Error 14 -

Internal reject on attempt to initiate buffered output to tape.
A
Q

Error 15 -

Error 16 -

= the first
= contents

word address minus 1 of the buffer ·area
of Q when the output instruction was executed

External reject on the attempt to initiate a buffered input from
tape.
A

= the

first word address minus 1 of the buffer area
contents of Q when the output instruction was executed

Internal reject on the attempt to initiate a buffered input from tape.
A = the first word address minus one of the buffer area
Q = the contents of Q when the output instruction was executed

Error 1 7 -

Busy bit (bit 1) of the BDe status was not set after initiating a
buffered output.
A = BDe status
Q

Error 18 -

= 0000

Busy bit (bit 1) of the BDe status was not set after initiating a
buffered input.
A = BDe status
Q

= 0000

Error 19 - Reply hit (bit 9) of the BDe status was not set after initiating a
buffered output.
A

= BDe

status

Q = 0000

Error 20 - Reply bit (bit 9) of the BDe status was not set after initiating a
buffered input.
A

= BDe

status

Q = 0000

Error 21 - Reject bit (bit 8) of the BDe status was never set (over an
arbitrary length of time) after initiating a buffered output.

60182000 H

BDe status

= 0000

500-5

Error 22 - Reject bit (bit 8) of the BDC status was never set (over an
arbitrary length of time) after initiating a buffered input.
A = BDC status
Q = 0000
Error 23 - End of Operation bit (bit 4) of the BDC status is set at the same
time as the Busy bit.

Error 24 -

= BDC

= 0000

status

End of Operation bit (bit 4) of the BDC status is not set after the
Busy cleared at the end of a buffered output.

Error 25 -

= BDC

= 0000

status

End of Operation bit (bit 4) of the BDC status is not set after the
Busy cleared at the end of a buffered input.
A = BDC status
Q = 0000

Error 26 -

Error 27 -

No reject received from the BDC when attempting a direct output
when the BDC was Busy.
A

= BDC

= 0000

status

No interrupt received from the BDC on End of Operation (buffered
output).
A

= BDC

= 0000

status

Error 28 - Alarm bit set in tape status 1 after a buffered output was complete.
A = Tape status 1
Q

Error 29 -

No interrupt received from the BDC on End of Operation (buffered
input).
A
Q

500-6

= 0000

= BDC
= 0000

status

60182000 B

Error 2A - Interrupt bit (bit 2) of the BDC status was not set after an End of
Operation interrupt occurred.
A

BDC status when interrupted

Q = 0000
Error 2B - Data error
A = Data read
Q

Expected value

A = Failing address
Q = 0000
Error 2C - Current address of the BDC was not equal to one greater than the
FWA-1 after initiating a buffered output.
A = Current address which was input
Q = 0000
Error 2D - The current address which was input from the BDe was neither
the same as or up to two greater than the previous current address
input.

= Previous current address
Q = Current address
A

Error 2E - End of Operation status bit (bit 4) was not set in the BDC status
when an Interrupt on End of Operation occurred.
A = BDC status
Q

= 0000

Error 2F - Buffer terminated at incorrect address.
A3

= Actual address buffer terminated at

Q3 = Expected last word address, at EOP
Error 33 - Incorrect status after initiating buffer to non-existent equipment
(parameter A4) on this 17X6..

= Expected channel status after initiating a buffer
Q3 = Actual channel status after initiating a buffer
A4 = Expected address register status

Q4 = Actual address register status
A5 = Equipment address when error occurred
Q5

60182000 K

= Iteration count (range

FFFC-0003)

500-7

Error 34 - Current word address was not one greater than FWA-l after
initiating a buffer to illegal equipment on BDC.
A3 = Expected channel status
Q3 = Actual channel status
A4 = FWA-1 output to BDC to initiate buffer
Q4 = CWA of BDC on terminate buffer command
A5 = Same as error 33
Q5
Error 35 - Internal reject on clear controlled direct through BDC
A 3 = BDC expected status
Q3 = BDC actual status
A4 = Equipment expected status
Q4 = Equipment actual status
A5= Equipment address when error detected
Q5 = Not available
Error 36 - External reject on clear controller
Same as error 35
Error 37 ., Channel busy or not ready
A3 = 0
Q3 = BDC actual status
A4 = 0
Q4 = 0
A 5 = Same as error 33
Q5
Error 38 - Unitt Equipment busy
A3

Q3 = BDC actual status
A4 = 0
Q4 = Unit status
A 5 = Same as error 33

Q5 = Same as error 33

500-8

60182000 K

Error 39 - Buffer terminated before programmed LWA+l
A3 = Not available
Q3 = BDC status
A4 = Actual CWA status at EOP
Q4

Expected CWA status at EOP

A5 = Same as error 33
Q5
Error 3A - Buffer did not terminate at last word ADDES+l
A3

= Not

available

Q3 = BDC status
A4 = Current word address when buffer was terminated
Q4 = Expected LWA register
Error 3C - 17X6 not busy before CWA =LWA + 1
A3 = Expected BDC status
Q3 = Actual BDC status
A4 = CWA register status
Q4 = LWA+l sent to BDC
A 5 = Same as error 33
Q5
Error 3D - 17X6 buffer hung before CWA=LWA+l when doing buffered equipment
status inputs or buffered clear controller outputs.
A 3 = Expected status of BDC
Q3 = Actual status of BDC
A4 = CWA register status of hung buffer
Q4 = Expected LWA+1 of buffer
A 5 = Same as error 33
Q5 = Same as error 33
3.

Error Stops
Error stops will occur if bit 3 of the Stop/ Jump word is set and an error occurs
in the test.

II.

DESCRIPTION
A.

INITIALIZATION (UNIT)

Convert bias value and frequency count to ASCII and store in typeout routine.

Type out test title, initial address, and frequency count.

60182000 K

500-9

Set up return address (:IA+5).

Parameter entry stop.

Check for correct W field in equipment code.

Exit to SMM.

Error stop if incorrect.

SECTION ONE (Sl)
This section checks static conditions of BDC then proceeds to check the CWA register, LWA register, adder, buffer read capabilities, and buffer write capabilities.
1.

Check status for ready.

Input current address; no Reject expected.

Execute terminate buffer and input current address to
a.

No Reject expected.

Check EOP interrupt select and clear.

Attempt buffer output to non-existent equipment on channel.
a.

Start with FWA-1=0.
FWA-l.

Expect BDC to hang with CWA one greater than

Expect status to be busy.

Do until FWA-1 = $7FFF.

Do a and b three times

Attempt buffer input from non-existent equipment on channel (same as 5).

Do direct FCN clear controller to selected Equipment Expect Reply.

Do 500

word buffer out of clear controller.

Monitor CWA.

Expect termination when CWA=LWA+1.

Monitor BDC status.

Do 100 10 times.

Expect busy until CWA=LWA+1.

Do direct input status 1 of selected equipments.

Save for use in next step.

Expect reply.
10.

500-10

Do 500

word buffer input of status 1 from selected device.

Same as· 8a and 8b.

Compare data from step 9 and report errors.

Do 100 10 times.

60182000 K

SECTION TWO (S2)
This section checks static conditions on the BDC, tape controller, and tape unit.

Connect selected tape unit.

Check for write enable.

Check for tape unit unprotected.

Rewind tape.

Exit section two.

Error if not present.
Error if protected.

SECTION THREE (S3)
This section does a 500-word buffered Write and Read.
1.

Request interrupt line from SMM.

Select tape unit and rewind it.

Select binary mode.

Initiate a 500-word buffered write.

Check BDC status for Busy.

Check BDC status for Reply.

Check BDC status for Reject during output.

Exit to SMM until buffer is complete.

60182000 K

Repeat from item 2 if Not Busy.
Should be set.
Should be set.

500-11

Rewind tape.

10.

Repeat from item 4 for a 500-word read.

11.

Clear interrupt request in SMM.

12.

Exit section three.

SECTION FOUR (S4)
This section writes and reads ten 500-word records for each of fifteen patterns.
End of Operation interrupt is checked after each record.

Request interrupt line from SMM.

Select tape.

Pick up current data pattern.

Select binary mode if pattern number is Odd.

Select BCD mode if pattern

number is Even.
5.

Clear interrupt flag.

Select EOP interrupt on BDC.

Initiate 500-word buffered write.

Check for reject during buffered operation.

Exit to SMM until buffer is complete.

10.

Check for EOP interrupt.

11.

Check tape

12.

Repeat from item 5 for 10 records.

13.

Update data pattern.

14.

Repeat from item 2 for 15 patterns.

15.

Rewind tape.

16.

Blank out storage data.

17.

Repeat from item 5 using a Read instead of a Write.

stat1~s

Error if not present.

for EOT, Parity, Lost Data, and Alarm.

Data is checked for each

record.
18.

500-1~

Exit section four.

60182000 K

SECTION FIVE (S5)
This section tests the current word address.
1.

Request interrupt line from SMM.

Rewind tape, select binary mode.

Initiate buffered output.

Input current address to A.

Store current address.

Input current address to A.
than previous address.

Word Count = 7FFE 1B -LOCSEX.
Address should be one greater than the CV/A.

This address should be equal to or up to two greater

Error if not one of these two conditions.

If current address is one greater than previous address, repeat from item 4.

If current address equals previous address, check BDC status for EOP.

Loop

to item 4 if not set.
9.

Check tape status for EOT, Parity, Lost Data, and Alarm.

Error if

any of these are set.
10.

Clear interrupt request.

11.

Exit section five.

III. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

SPACE REQUIRED
Approximately 2000 locations.

INPUT AND OUTPUT TAPE MOUNTINGS

The B01/B08/B09 Tape Unit Eelected for I/O must have a w rite ring and must
be ready.
C.

B0182000

TIMING - approximately 1 minute 15 seconds.

500-13

500-14

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

17X4 Computer

17X5 Interrupt Data Channel

1706 Buffer·Data Channel

1731/1732 Magnetic Tape Controller

601/608/609 Magnetic Tape Unit

60182000 L

1706/1716 CHANNEL TEST
(BD200F Test No. OF)

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
None available

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

The test operates under control of 1700 System Maintenance Monitor (SMM17).

The calling sequence is that specified by SMM17.

The test number for the

1706/1716 test is F.
3.
C.

The test can be restarted after loading from ini tial address.

PARAMETERS

If bit 0 of the Stop/ Jump word is set, the program will allow for test parameter

display and/ or entry.

The first stop made in the parameter sequence displays

the identification word in A (OF31) and the Stop/ Jump word in Q.
The second and third stops display the test parameters.

The test parameters

can be changed by the operator at the time when they are displayed.

The

contents of the A and Q registers on the second and third stops is defined
below.
a.

(Parameter typeout will occur after last stop.)

Stop 2
A

WE01, where the W field is bits 15-11 and identifies the 17X6 ~:~

equipment address.

The allowable values for the 5- bit W field are:

00010 - for 17X6 number 1
00111 - for 17X6 number 2
01100 - for 17X6 number 3
The E field is bits 10-7 and identifies the 173J/1732 Magnetic Tape Controller
Q = OOOU, where U specifies the 601 or 602 Magnetic Tape Unit which will

be used for I/O in sections 2, 3, and 4.

~:c17X6

60182000 L

refers to either 1706 or 1716, whichever is being used or

te~ted.

501~1

Stop 3
A

= The

End of Operation interrupt line for the 17X6.

in this word.

Only one bit is set

The bit position must identify the interrupt line.

For

example, if the End of Operation interrupts from the 17X6 are to be
received on line 5, only bit 5 of this word would be set.
contents are described below:
Bit 15
Bit 15

= 1:
= 0:

Bit 14 = 1:

Q register

A 1716 is connected to this computer.
A 1706 is connected to this computer.
This computer will initiate the first output if section 6
is selected to be run.

Bit 14 = 0:
Bit 5

= 1:

The other computer will initiate the first data transfer
if section 6 is selected to be run.
Run testsection. 6. This section will use the 1716 to

transfer data between two computers which are
necessary to run this section.

A common 1716 must

be connected to both the computers. Bit 14 of this
parameter must be set in one of the computers. Bit
14 of the other computer must be equal to zero.

The

decision to repeat Section 6 must be made in the computer
which has bit 14
Bit 4

= 1:

= O.

Run test Section 5.

This section will use the 1716 to

make block transfers of data within a computer's core
Bit 3

= 1:

storage.
Run test Section 4.

This section uses the 17X6

1731/1732 and a 601/608/609 to test direct output/
input of data.
Bit 2

= 1:

Run test Section 3.

This section uses the 17X6,

1731/1732 and a 601/608/609 to test the current
word .address of the 17X6.
Bit 1

= 1:

Run test Section 2.

This section will use the 17X6,

1731/1732 and a 601/608/609 to test buffered
output/ input.
Bit 0

= 1:

Run test Section 1.

This section will check the

ability of the 17X6 to accept all legal functions
(reject should not be received).

If a 1716 is

connected, this section will also test the flags,
masks, and interrupts when corresponding masks
and flags are both set.

501-2

60182000 L

If bit 0 of the Stop! Jump word is not set, the test will be run using the set of

prestored parameters.
a.

These parameters assume the following:

1706 number 1 and equipment number of the 1 731!1 73 2 Magnetic Tape
Controller is 3.

Tape unit 7 is ready and write-enabled.

The End of Operation interrupts from the 17X6 will be received on line 4.

Test Sections 1, 2, 3, and 4 will be run.

Selective Skip and Stop Settings
a.

STOP switch must be set for running SMM17.

SKIP switch, when set, displays the Stop! Jump word in Q.

MESSAGES
1.

Typeouts or Alarms
a.

Normal Program Typeouts
1)

Test identification at start of test
BD200F, 1706/1716 DATA CHANNEL TEST
IA

= XXXX.

= XX

End of te st typeout
A

OF24

S/ J word

Pass number

Return Address

Error Typeouts
If an error occurs, the following information is typed out:

Identifica tion word

Stop/Jump word

Test section! error number

Return address

Additional information related to the specific error

A sample error typeout is shown and described as follows:

60182000 L

501-3

OF38

OOOF

0107

0507

0201

1800

OF38 is the identification word where
F is the test number
3 is the number of stops in this error stop sequence
8 identifies the stop as an error stop (bit 3 set)
OOOF is the Stop/ Jump word
0107 is the section number and error number (Section I, error number 7)
0507 is the address in the program (list address) where the error occurred.
0201 was the status of the 17X6 prior to the attempt to terminate the buffer
(see information under error number 7).
1800 was the contents of Q when the attempt to terminate the buffer was
made (see information under error 7).
2.

Error Codes
An error code is displayed in the lower two digits of the A register on the
second stop of all error stop sequences. A description of the error codes
used and the additional information displayed on each error is described
below.
Description

Error
01

Incorrect test parameter was entered.

The program will

make another parameter stop when restarted.
02/03

External/ internal reject on attempt to input 17X6 status.

this error condition is not repeated (bit 4 of the Stop/ Jump
word set), the test will make a final exit to SMM.
A
Q

of Q when the input was attempted

Ready not set on 17X6 status.
the test will be terminated.
A
Q

501-4

= 0000
= Contents

= 17X6 status
= Equipment address

If the condition is not repeated

of the 17X6

60182000 H

Error
05/06

Description
External/ internal reject on input of the 17X6 current address
A = 0000
Q = Contents of Q when input was attempted

07/08

09/0A

External/ internal reject on Terminate Buffer operation on 17X6
A

= 17X6

= Contents

status prior to the Terminate Buffer operation
of Q when Terminate Buffer was attempted

External/ internal reject on attempt to output a function to the
17X6

= Contents

of A when output was attempted

Q = Contents of Q when output was attempted

A = Status of the 17X6 prior to the output
Q
OB/OC

= 0000

External/internal reject on direct output of a function to the 1731'l1732
A

= Contents

= Status
= Status

of A when the output was attempted (function)
Q = Contents of Q when output was attempted

Q
OD/OE

OF/I0

1 of the 1731/1732 prior to output

of the 17X6 prior to the output

External/internal reject on input of status one of the 1731/1732
A

= Contents

Status of the 17X6 prior to the input,
of Q when the input was attempted

External/ internal reject on input of status two of the 1731/1732

A = Status of the 17X6 prior to the input
Q = Contents of Q when the input was attempted
11

No write ring in selected tape unit
A = Status 2 of the tape unit

= WEOU,

where W is the address of the 17X6, E is the
equipment number of the 1731/ 1732 and U is the selected tape unit.
Q

Selected tape unit is protected
A = Status 1 of the tape unit
Q

60182000

= WEOU

501-5

Error
13/14

Description
External/ internal reject on attempt to initiate a buffered output
to the 601/608/609.

15/16

Contents of A when output was attempted (FWA-1)

= Contents

= Status

of Q when output was attempted

Status 1 of the tape unit prior to the output
of the 17X6 prior to the output

External/ internal reject on attempt to initiate a buffered input
from the 601/608/609.
A
Q

A
Q

17/18

= Contents
= Contents
= Status
= Status

of A when the output was attempted (FWA-1)
of Q when the output was attempted

1 of the tape unit prior to the output
of the 17X6 prior to the output

Busy bit of the 17X6 status did not set after initiating a buffered
output/ input
A
Q

19/1A

= 17X6
= 0000

status

The Device Reply bit (bit 9) of the 17X6 status was never set
within a time period after initiating a buffered output/ input.

1B/1C

= the

= 0000

last 17X6 status input

The Device Reject bit (bit 8) of the 17X6 status was never set
within a time period after initiating a buffered output/ input.
A
Q

= The last
= 0000

17X6 status input

The End of Operation bit (bit 4) of the 17X6 status is set at the
same time as Busy (bit 1) is set.
A
Q

1E/1F

= 17X6
= 0000

status

The End of Operation bit (bit 4) of the 17X6 status is not set
after the Busy dropped at the completion of a buffered output/
input.
A

= 17X6

status

Q = 0000

501-6

60182000

Description

Error
20/21

No reject received from the 17X6 on an attempt to execute a
direct output/input to the 17X6 when the 17X6 was Busy.

22/23

= Status

= 0000

of the 17X6 prior to the output

No interrupt received from the 17X6 on end of operation after
a buffer was completed.
A

= Status

1 of the tape after the buffer was completed

Q = Status of the 17X6 after the buffer was completed

24/25

Alarm bit set in tape status 1 after a buffered output/ input
was completed
A

= Status

1 of the tape after the buffer was completed

Q = Status of the 17X6 after the buffer was completed
26/27

Interrupt bit (bit 2) of the 17X6 status was not set after an End
of Operation interrupt occurred when a buffer output/ input was
completed.
A = Status 1 of the tape unit after the buffer was completed
Q = Status of the 17X6 after the buffer was completed

Data error occurred
A = Data read

= Expected

A
Q

= Word

value

number within the block which is incorrect

= 0000

Current address of the 17X6 was not equal to 0008 after initiating
a buffered output with first word address equal to 0007. (The
1731/1732 will accept the first data word and the 17X6 will
increment the current address prior to the program inputting
the current address. )
A = The current address which was input
Q = 0000

60182000

501-7

Error
2A

Description
The current address input from the 17X6 was neither greater
nor the same as the previous current address input while a
buffered output was active.

= The previous current address
Q = The last current address input

2B/2C

The End of Operation status bit (bit 4) was not set in the 17X6
status when an Interrupt on End of Operation occurred after a
buffered output / input was completed.

Reserve bit (bit 3) in the 1716 status is still set after executing a
Terminate Buffer.
A = 1716 status
Q = 0000

Reserve bit (bit 3) in the 1716 status is still set after executing
the function to clear it.
A = Contents of A when the function was output
Q = Contents of Q on the output

A = 1716 status after the function
Q = 0000
2F

Flag bit not set in the 1716 status after executing function to
set it.
A = Contents of A when function was output
Q = Contents of Q when function was output

= 1716

status after the function

Q = 0000

Flag bit set in the 1716 status after executing function to clear it.
A = Contents of A when function was output
Q = Contents of Q when function was output

= 1716
Q = 1716

501-8

status prior to function
status after executing function

60182000 H

Description

Error

No interrupt received from the 1716 after setting a Mask bit
and then setting the corresponding flag bit.

= Contents
= Contents

of A to set mask
of Q used when setting the Mask and the Flag bits

= Contents

of A to set Flag bit

Q = Present status of the 1716

32!33

External! internal reject received from the 1716 when attempting
to initiate a buffered transfer.
A

Contents of A when output was attempted

= Contents

of Q when output was attempted

A = Status of the 1716 prior to attempting the buffered transfer
Q = Status of the 1716 after receiving the reject

Flag status bits are not equal to the expected flags.

The other

computer set a cretain configuration of flags and then s'tored a
word in this computer's core storage indicating the present
state of the flag bits. The flags did not correspond to the
indication word.
A
Q

= Status of the 1716
= Expected status of the

1716 (flag bits are in bits 10-14)

Data error in data the other computer sent this one. If the
error condition is to be repeated, set bit 4 in the Stop! Jump
word of the other computer when it types out error number 36.
A = Data received from other computer
Q = Data expected
A

= Word

number within data block

Q = 0000

The other computer detected at least one data error in·the data
this computer sent it.

(The other computer has typed out

error number 35 (one or more times).
A
Q

60182000 H

= Number
= 0000

of errors found by other computer

501-9

Error
37

Description
Data error in data this computer sent the other computer and
then read back to this one.
A

= Data

= Word

= 0000

word read back
Q = Data word originally sent to other computer

number within block

Interrupt bit not set in the 1716 status after an interrupt occurred
because the corresponding mask bit and flag bit were both set.
A
Q

39/3A

of the 1 716 after the interrupt occurred

Alarm bit set in status 1 of the 1731/ 1732 after a direct output I input
A
Q

= Status
= Status

1 of the 1731/1732
of the 1716

Interrupt not received after a data transfer was completed.

A
Q

= Status
= 0000

of the 1716

ERROR STOPS
Error stops will occur if bit 3 of the Stop 1Jump word is set, the STOP switch is
set, and an error occurs.

II.

DESCRIPTION
A.

METHOD

501-10

Initialization
a.

Convert bias value and frequency count and store in typeout routine.

Type out the test title. and frequency count.

Store return address.

Make parameter stop if bit 1 of Stopl Jump word is set.

Set up for control to be given to distributor on return from SMM.

Return control to SMM.

60182000

Distributor
a.

Run Section 1 if selected.

Stop at end of section if bit 1 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to a if bit 5 of Stop! Jump word is set (repeat section).

Run Section 2 if selected.

Stop at end of section if bit 1 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to d if bit 5 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Run Section 3 if selected.

Stop at end of section if bit 1 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to g if bit 5 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Run Section 4 if selected.

Stop at end of section if bit 1 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to j if bit 5 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Run Section 5 if selected.

Stop at end of section if bit 1 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to m if bit 5 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Run Section 6 if selected.

Add 1 to pass counter.

Stop at end of test if bit 2 of Stop! Jump word is set.

Go to b if bit 6 of Stop! Jump is set (repeat test).

Check if new parameters are to be entered (bit 10 of Stop! Jump word set).

Load bias and exit to SMM.

Go to a if SMM returns control (test frequency was greater than 1).

Section 1
a.

Purpose: Check the static conditions of a 17X6.

Checks for no rejects

on all legal functions which will not initiate data transfer.
b.

60182000 H·

Procedure:
1)

Check for Ready set on 17X6.

Check for no reject received on input of current address.

501-11

3)' Check for no reject received on Terminate Buffer.
4)

Check for reserve clear if 1716.

Check for no reject received on Select and Clear interrupt functions.

If 1706 return to distributor.

Clear all masks and flags.

Test for interrupts after setting each mask and then the corresponding
flag.

9)
4.

Return to distributor.

Section 2
a.

Purpose: To test the data transfer capabilities of the 1 7X6.
on End of Operation is also tested.

Procedure:

Interrupt

1)'

Set reserve bit if 1716.

Check for selected tape unit write- enabled and non-protected.

Rewind.

Select 200 BPI.

If this is an odd record of the current data pattern, select binary; if

even, select BCD.
6)

Select interrupt from 17X6 on End of Operation

Initiate buffer output.

Check for Busy set in 17X6 status.

Check for device Reject set.

10)

Check for a reject on output to 17X6 while 17X6 is Busy.

11)

Check for device Reply set in 17X6 status.

12)

Return control to SMM.

13)

Check for End of Operation bit set after Busy clears.

14)

Check if interrupt occurred on End of Operation.

15)

Check if Interrupt and End of Operation bits were set in 17X6 status
when interrupt occurred.

16)

501-12

Check tape status.

60182000 H

17)

If 20 records of current data pattern have not been written, go to 5).

18)

If all data patterns have not been used, change patterns and go to 5).

19)

Rewind.

20)

If odd record, select binary; if even, select BCD.

21), Select Interrupt on End of Operation from 1 7X6.
22)

Initiate buffer input.

23)

Check for Busy set on 17X6.

24),

Check for device Reject set in 17X6 status.

25)

Check for a reject on output to 17X6 while it is Busy.

26)

Check for device Reply set in 17X6 status.

27)

Return control to SMM.

28)

Check for End of Operation bit set when Busy clear.

29)

Check if Interrupt on End of Operation occurred.

30)

Check if Interrupt and End of Operation bits were set in 17X6 status
when interrupt occurred.

31)

Check tape status.

32)

Check data.

33)

If 20 records of current data pattern have not been read, go to 20).

34)

If all data patterns have not been read, change patterns and go to 20).

35)

Rewind.

36)

Clear reserve if 1716.

37)

Return to distributor.

Section 3
a.

Purpose: Check the ability of the 17X6 to increment the current address
correctly.

60182000 H

Procedure
1)

Set reserve if 1716.

Rewind and select 200 BPI.

Initiate buffer output with FWA

Input current address of 17X6 and check for 0008.

= 0007.

501-13

Input current address and check for equal or one greater than the
previous one input.

If End of Operation is not set go to 5).

Clear reserve if 1716.

Return to distributor.

Section 4
a.

Purpose: Check the direct 1/0 of data to a 601/608/609 via the 17X6.

Procedure:
1)

Set Reserve bit if 1716.

Rewind and select 200 BPI.

If odd record of current data pattern, select binary; if even, select

BCD.

Do direct output of 500 words.

Check for alarm up on tape unit.

If 20 records of current data pattern have not been written go to 3).

If all data patterns have not been used, change patterns and go to 3).

Rewind.

Initialize data pattern and record count.

10)

If odd record, select binary; if even, select BCD.

11)

Do direct input of 500 words.

12)

Check for alarm up on tape unit.

13)

Check the data.

14)

If 20 records of current pattern have not been read, go to 10).

15)

If all data patterns have not been used, change patterns and go to 10).

16)

Rewind.

17)

Return to distributor.

Section 5
a.

501-14

Purpose: Check the abilitiy of a 1716 to transfer a block of data from an
area of storage to a different area within the same computer.

60182000

Procedure
1)

Set reserve on 1716.

Set up output area.

3')

Select Interrupt on End of Operation.

Initiate buffered transfer and exit to SMM until complete.

Check if interrupt occurred.

Check data.

Go back to 3) if the current data pattern has not been buffered 100 times.

Change data patterns and go back to 2) if all patterns have not been
used.

9)
10)
8.

Clear reserve.
Return to distributor.

Section 6
a.

Purpose: Check the ability of a 1716 transfer data between two 17X4
Computers.

Procedure: In the following sequence of steps, Computer A is initially
defined as the computer in which bit 14 of Q equals 1 on the third parameter
stop.

The other computer is B.

computer (location 0052).

TMESS is an absolute location in "this"

OMESS is the same absolute location in the

"other" computer.
1)

If computer B, go to 22).

Set reserve on 1716.

Wait for B to set OMESS to its FWA of data area.

Initiate buffered transfer to B.

Set flags equal to the lower five bits of code which identify the data
pattern.

Transfer data code to OMESS.

Wait for OMESS to change values.

8.)

If negative, B found at least one data error.

Initiate buffered transfer from B to A.

10)

60182000

Check data.

501-15

11)

Go to 4) if current pattern has not been transferred 100 times.

12)

Go to 14) if all data patterns have been transferred.

13)

Change data patterns and go to 4).

14)

If this computer was initially B, go to 18).

15)

Clear reserve on 1716.

16)

Store 0 at TMESS, -0 at OMESS.

17)

Switch names of computers and go to 22).

18)

Stop at end of section.

19)

If section is to be repeated, go to 15).

20)

Store 0 at TMESS, 0 at OMESS.

21)

Clear reserve and return to distributor.

Computer B
22)

Clear reserve on 1716.

23)

Set TMESS equal to FWA of buffer area.

24)

Wait for TMESS to change values.

25)

If TMESS is -0, go to 31).

26)

If TMESS is 0, go to 32).

27)

Check for flags equal to same configuration as lower 5 bits of TMESS.

28)

Check data.

29)

If data errors, store the complement of the number of errors at

TMESS and go to 24).
30)

Go to 32).

31)

Store 0 at TMESS, change names, and go to 2).

32)

Stop at end of section.

33)

Return to distributor.

III. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS

SPACE REQUIRED - Approximately 2500

INPUT AND OUTPUT TAPE MOUNTINGS - If Section 2, 3, or 4 is selected to be

locations.

run a 601/608/609 Tape Unit mustbe write-labeled and non-protected.

501-16

60182000

TIMING - 3 min. 15 sec.

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION - computer with 8K memory.

Section 1 - 17X4, 1705, 17X6

Section 2 - 17X4, 1705, 17X6, 1731/1732, 601/608/609

Section 3 - 17X4, 1705, 17X6, 1731/1732, 601/608/609

Section 4 - 17X4, 1705, 17X6, 1731/1732, 601/608/609

Section 5 - 17X4, 1705, 1716

Section 6 - two 17X4's, two 1705's, one 1716

60182000

501-17

1738/853, 854 DISK PACK TEST

(DP1008 Test No.8)
(CP=2F)
I.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS

Cautions to User
a.

The range of cylinders upon which data will be written may be limited
during the parameter stop.

However, the lower limit is ignored in

Section 12 (data is written in cylinder 0 to be autoloaded).
b.

A large number of typeouts and/or stops may occur for error codes 14,
1B, and 1D unless bit 11 of the Stop/ Jump parameter is set.

There may be insufficient core for a long buffer operation if memory is
only 8k and more than one test is loaded before the disk pack test is loaded.
In this case neither section 6 nor 9 will be run unless the operator selects
one or both of them.

If the operator selects 6 or 9 in this case, short buf-

fer operations are performed and each of these two sections may take an
hour for an 853 disk drive unit.
d.

Section 7 (overlap seek) requires two disk packs.

If an attempt is made

to run this section with only one disk pack, the program will loop on an
external reject of an output from A, and the director status will become
Not Ready and Not on Cylinder.
e.

In Section 12 (autoload) the program may be destroyed if unnecessary data
is loaded into core by the Autoload function.

Memory wraparound will

occur if an attempt is made to run this section with only 4k of memory.
f.

When using a new pack it is necessary to ensure that the pack is filled with
correct data and checkwords. Data can be destroyed in shipment. Running section 6 first will ensure that the pack contains correct data ·required

for other sections.
g.
Bits 2 and 3 of 8MM parameter word
LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

mu~t

specify the correct. machine type. I

The test operates as a subprogram under control of the 1700 System Maintenance
Monitor (SMM17).

The calling sequence is that specified by SMM17.

The test can be restarted after loading from initial address.

60182000 L

550-1

PARAMETERS
1.

Normal operation requires no parameters.

The following sections will be

run under this condition:
a)

Section 1

Section 2

Section 3

Section 4

Section 5

Section 8

Section 9 (unless core size is insufficient)

Section 13

The test will be run on unit 0 1 the unit will be assumed to be an 853, and cylinders
o through 99 will be tested. The interrupt line will be line 2.
2.

To alter the parameters, follow the directions stated in SMM17. If the bit
is set, the corresponding section or condition will be selected. The parameter words to be displayed are as follows:
a.

First stop: A

Second stop:

= 0831

= Stop! Jump

parameter

Bit 0 of A = Section 1 - static status check
Bit 1 of A = Section 2 - random positioning
Bit 2 of A = Section 3 - write, read l compare
Bit 3 of A = Section 4 - same as section 3 except under control of Alarm
Bit 4

and End of Operation interrupts.
of A = Section 5 - force address errors, check write and read into
next cylinder.

Bit 5 of A = Section 6 - surface test Alarm and End of Operation
l

Bit 6

interrupts selected.
of A = Section 7 - check overlap seek (two disk packs needed)

Bit 7 of A = Section 8 - same as section 3 except under control of Alarm
and ReadYI Not Busy interrupts
Bit 8 of A = Section 9 - same as Section 6 except under control of Alarm
and ReadYI Not Busy interrupts
Bit 9 of A = Section 10 - write address tags

550-2

60182000 J

Bit 10 of A = Section 11 - positioning timing check
Bit 11 of A = Section 12 - autoload check (Caution: See Restriction).
Bit 12 of A = Section 13 - check for recoverable errors
Bit 13 of A = 0, Unit 0
Bit 13 of A = 1, UIiit 1
Bit 14 of A

Not used

Bit 15 of A = 0, 853
Bit 15 of A = 1, 854
Q=XXYY
XX=lowest numbered cylinder to be written on (Section 12 ignores this limit)
XX=OO- standard
YY=highest numbered cylinder to be written on.
YY=63 - standard for 853
16
YY=CA 16 - standard for 854
c.

Third stop:
A = interrupt line (e. g., bit 3 in A set for interrupt line 3)
Q = not significant.

SELECTIVE JUMP AND STOP SETTINGS
It is advisable to set bit 11 of the Stop/ Jump parameter to decrease the
number of error typeouts for error code 14 (sections 3, 4, 5, 8), error

3.
D.

A typeout of parameters will occur after last stop.

SELECTIVE JUMP AND STOP SETTINGS
It is advisable to set bit 11 of the Stop/ Jump parameter to decrease the number
of error typeouts for error code 14 (sections 3, 4, 5, 8). error code 1B
(sections 6. 9). and error code 1D {section 12).

MESSAGES
1.

Typeouts or Alarms
a.

Normal Program Typeouts

Disk pack identification during test initialization:

DP1A08 1738 DISK PACK TEST
CP2F,VER. 3. 1
IA = XXXX, Fe = xx
2.

End of Test
A

0824

Stop/Jump

Pass Number

Return

Parameter
60182000

Address

550-3

Error Alarms
All information shown is displayed after General Display Format.

General Display Format:
A

Information

Stop/Jump

Section

Return

Word (838 for
3 stops, 848

Parameter

Error Code

Address

for 4 stops)
c.

Error Codes
01 - Internal reject of input to A
A

= BADD

=contents

of Q upon input to A

= contents

of A upon last output from A

Q = contents of Q upon last output from A

02 - Internal reject on output from A
A

= director

status

= address

A = contents of A upon output from A
Q = contents of Q upon output from A

03 - Interrupt status bit not set when interrupt occurred
A

= selected

interrupts

1 - Ready, Not Busy
2 - End of Ope ration
4 - Alarm
Q = status upon interrupt

A = contents of A upon last output from A
Q = contents of Q upon last output from A

04 - Non- selected interrupt occurred (or interrupt occurred too
soon)
Display is the same as for error code 03

550-4

60182000 J

05 - Interrupt status bits not cleared by Clear Interrupt function
A = status upon interrupt
Q = status after attempting to clear interrupts
A

= contents of A upon last output from A (other than Clear

Interrupt function)
Q = contents of Q upon last output from A (other than Clear
Interrupt function)
06 - Ready status not present
A

= director

status

Q = address register status

A = contents of A upon last output from A (other than Clear
Interrupt function)
Q = contents of Q upon last output from A (other than Clear

Interrupt function)
07 - On Cylinder status not present
A = director status
Q = address register status

08 - Busy not present after an output from A.
for error code 06

Display same as

09 - Storage parity error
Display same as for error code 06
OA - Defective track
Display. same as for error code 06
OB - Address error
Display same as for error code 06
OC - Seek error
Display same as for error code 06
OD - Lost data
Display same as for error code 06
OE - Checkword error
Display same as for error code 06

60182000 H

550-5

OF - Protect fault
Display same as for error code 06
10 - Alarm condition present but Alarm Status bit not set Display
same as for error code 06
11 - Address register status does not equal loaded address after
loading address and waiting for Not Busy
A

= BADD

Q = director status

A = address register status
Q = loaded address
12 - Not used
13 - Not used
14 - Word written does not equal word read. (This may occur in
sections 3, 4, 5, and 8 of the test) Set bit 11 in the Stop!
Jump parameter to ignore checking for more errors in this
sector.
A = address register status
Q

= number

= word written
= word read

of word in error

15 - No compare status present
A

= director

status
Q = address register status after load address

16 - Alarm interrupt did not occur when attempting to force
address error by loading illegal address
A
Q

= loaded address
= director status

A = interrupt line
Q

= selected

interrupts (see error code 03)

17 - An address error was forced but the address error status
bit was not set
A = loaded address
Q

550-6

= director

status

60182000 H

18 - No alarm interrupt occurred when attempting to force address
error by initiating checkword check with illegal address
Display same as for error code 16
19 - Address error status not present when writing off the end
of disk pack
Display same as for error code 1 7
1A- Not used
1B - Unexpected data was read during surface test.

Set bit 11

in the Stop! Jump parameter to ignore rest of errors in this

sector or track.
A

= sector

in error
Q = number of work in error
data expected

Q = data read

1C - Maximum positioning time (145 ms) was exceeded
A = time required (ms, hexadecimal)
Q

= loaded

address

ID - Autoload failed to load correct data
Set bit 11 in the Stop! Jump parameter to ignore the rest of
the words in error
A

= BADD

= number

= word
= word

of word in error

written
in core after autoload

1E - End of Operation status not present
Display same as for error code 16
1F - Status other than Ready. On Cylinder is present (ignoring
protect status) during static status check
Display same as for error code 07.
20 - Alarm interrupt did not occur when writing off the end of
disk pack
Display same as for error code 16

60182000 H

550-7

21 - No interrupt occurred when End of Operation or ReadYI
Not Busy interrupt was selected
A = selected interrupts (see error code 03)
Q

= director

status

A = contents of A upon last output from A
Q

= contents

of Q upon last output from A

22 - Not used
23 - Not used
24 - Alarm status bit setl no alarm conditions
Display same as for error code 06
25 - No Compare status not set after attempting to force
No Compare status
A

director status

Q = address register status

26 - First unit went to incorrect address during overlap seek
A

= director

= loaded address
= address register

BADD
status

status

27 - Second unit went to incorrect address during overlap seek.
Display same as for error code 26
28 - Through 2F - Not used
30 - Address upon completion of a Read, Write, Compare l or
Checkword Check operation is not equal to the expected
address
A = contents of Q upon last output from A (other than Clear
Interrupt function)
Q = director status

A = address register status
Q

= expected

address

31 - Recoverable error occurred during Checkword Check
(section 13)
A = address of track causing error
Q

550-8

= director

status when last error occurred
60182000 H

32 - Non-recoverable error occurred during Checkword Check
(Section 13)
Display same as for error code 31
33 - through 3F - Not used
40 - Operator error.
error.

Interrupt line or equipment address in

Test must be reloaded.

A = Selected equipment address
Q

= Selected

interrupt line (if any)

41 - EXT reject on input to A
A

= BADD

= Ekluipment

address

A = Contents of A (last output)
Q

42 -

= Contents

of Q (last output)

EXT reject output from A
A
Q

= Status
= Equipment

address

A = Last function contents of A
Q

= Las t

function contents of Q

Error Stops
Stops will occur upon errors if Bit 3 in the Stop! Jump parameter
is set.

II.

DESCRIPTION
A.

METHOD
1.

Section 1 - Static Status Check
a.

Select unit

Input director status

c.
2.

60182000 L

Ready should be present.

On Cylinder should be present.

No other status (other than protected) should be present.

Loop to step a 499 times

Section 2 - Random Positioning Check
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert random number to legal addresses.

Select unit.
550-9

Load address.

Check for expected address.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Update address.

Loop to step c 95 times.

Section 3 - Write, Read, Compare
a.

Generate 96 random words and one random address.

Select unit.

Load address, check for expected address, alarm conditions, and End
of Operation status.

Write one sector.

Check Not Busy address.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Loop to step b if repeat conditions selected.

Select unit.

Load address.

Read one sector.

Check Not Busy address.

Check alarm conditions.

Loop to step n to repeat conditions.

Select unit.

Execute checkword check.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Check Ndt Busy address.

Loop to step n to repeat conditions.

Select unit.

Load address, check for expected address, check alarm conditions and
End of Operation status.

550-10

Execute Compare function.

Check for Not Compare status.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.
60182000 L

Check Not Busy address.

Loop to step s to repeat conditions.

If no alarm condition or unexpected address occurred, compare input

buffer with output buffer area.

aa.

Execute read and loop to step Z to repeat condition.

abo

Loop to step a 95 times.

Section 4 - Write, Read, Compare Under Interrupt Control Same as Section 3
except interrupts on Alarm and End of Operation are selected prior to performing a Load Address, Read, Write, Checkword Check, and Compare operation.
After the interrupt occurs, the status upon interrupt is checked for alarm conditions.

Section 5 - Force Address Errors and Check Writing Into Next Cylinder
a.

Generate illegal address (OOFO).

Select unit.

Select interrupt on alarm.

Load illegal address.

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step c to repeat conditions.

Select interrupt on alarm.

Initiate checkword check.

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step h to repeat conditions.

Generate an illegal address (FFOO).

Loop to step b once.

Form last sector address of unit (CA9F for 854, 639F for 853).

Jump to step v if range of cylinders to be written into is not high enough
to include this cylinder.

60182000 L

Load address, check alarm conditions.

Write 97 words (off end of disk pack>'

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step q to repeat conditions.
550-11

Generate legal address.

Load address, check alarm conditions.

Write 97 words.

Load address, check alarm conditions.

Add one to second word of buffer area.

aa.

Execute Compare function.

abo

Check No Compare status (it should be set).

ac.

Loop to step w to repeat conditions.

ad.

Generate address of last sector of a cylinder.

ae.

Load address, check alarm conditions.

af.

Write 97 words (into next cylinder).

ago

Check alarm conditions.

ah.

Loop to step ae to repeat conditions.

ai.

Load address, check alarm conditions.

aj.

Execute Compare function.

ak.

Check No Compare status and alarm conditions.

al.

Loop to step ai to repeat conditions.

am.

Load address, check alarm conditions.

an.

Read 97 words.

ao.

Check alarm conditions.

ape

Loop to step am to repeat conditions.

aq.

If no alarm conditions occurred between steps ae to aq, compare input

buffer area with output buffer area.
ar.
6.

Loop to step a

95 times.

Section 6 - Surface Check
a.

Set up Read and Write routines for a 1536-word buffer (one track) or a
96-word buffer (one sector) depending on available core.

Generate address of first cylinder to be written on.

Generate pattern, 6161 for first pass through section, CECE for second
pass.

550-12

60182000 H

Fill buffer area with pattern, alternate words complemented.

Select unit, select interrupts on Alarm and End of Operation.

Load address and write under interrupt control.

Check for correct interrupts and alarm conditions.

Check Not Busy address.

Loop to step e

Increment address.

Loop to step f unless address is greater than last cylinder to be written

to repeat conditions.

into.
1.

Re- initialize address.

Select unit, select interrupts on Alarm and End of Operation.

Load address and read under interrupt control.

Check for correct interrupts and alarm conditions.

Check Not Busy address.

If not alarm conditions occurred in step m , check whether expected

pattern was read.
r.

Loop to step m

to repeat conditions.

Increment address.

Loop to step n

unless address is greater than address of last cylinder

to be written into.
u.
7.

60182000 H

Loop to step b once.

Section 7 - Check Overlap Seek
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert to legal addresses.

Select first unit (unit specified in parameter word during initial parameter
stop).

Load address.

Wait for End of Operation status (may still be Busy).

Select other unit.

Load address.

550-13

Wait for End of Operation status (may still be Busy).

Select first unit.

Wait for Not Busy.

Check whether address register status equals loaded

Select other unit.

Wait for Not Busy.

Check whether address register status equals loaded address.

Loop to step c 95 times.

addr~ss.

Section 8 - Write, Read, Compare under Interrupt Control Same as Section 4
except interrupts on Alarm and Ready, Not Busy are selected

Section 9 - Surface Check
Same as Section 6 except interrupts on Alarm and Ready, Not Busy are selected

10.

Section 10 - Write Address Tags
a.

Generate address of first cylinder to be written onto.

Select unit.

Write addresses on track.

Wait Not. Busy.

Increment track number.

Loop to step c

unless address is greater than address of last cylinder

to be written in.
11.

Section 11 - Positioning Time Check
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert random numbers to legal addresses.

c. . Make several of the addresses equal to the lowest and highest possible
addresses, alternately.

550-14

Initiate load address, initialize ms count.

Wait 1 ms.

Increment ms count.

Check status for Busy.

Loop to step e if Busy.

60182000 H

i.
j.

12.

13.

Error if ms count greater than 145 10 .
Loop to step d 95 times.

Section 12 - Autoload (Caution: See Restrictions)
a.

Move first 1536 (600

Select unit.

Load address, cylinder zero, track zero, sector zero.

Wait Not Busy.

Write 1536 words.

Change one location in low core.

Stop.

Operator should push AUTOLOAD button.

Compare buffer area with low core.

) words of core to buffer area.

Section 13 - Check Recoverable Errors
a.

Initial address equals zero.

Select unit.

Initialize attempt counter.

Initiate checkword check.

Wait Not Busy.

Check status for Checkword, Lost Data, Seek Storage Parity, defective
track errors.

60182000 H

Jump to step m if none set.

Sa ve Error status.

Increment attempt counter.

Loop to step d unless attempt counter equals 10.

Error is not recoverable.

Jump to step n.

No errors if attempt counter equals initial value, recoverable error if not.

Increment track address.

Loop to step c unless address is greater than last possible address.

550-15

III. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
About 2550 10 memory locations are required.
additional locations will be used.

If sufficient core is available, 1440

TIMING (Test Running Alone, No Errors)
1.

Section 1 = about 1/4 second

Section 2

Section 3

Section 4

= 18 to

Section 5

= 36

Section 6

= about

an 854.

= 8 to

9 seconds

18 to 22 seconds
22 seconds

to 37 seconds
3 minutes 35 seconds for an 853, probably twice as long for

Sufficient core will enable writing a track at a time.

Without sufficient

core for a long buffer, the section is not run unless the operator selects it.
this case, one sector is written at a time.
16 times as long, or 1 hour.

Section 7 = 8 to 9 seconds

Section 8

= 18 to

22 seconds

Section 9

= same

as section 6

The test will then probably take

10.

Section 10 = 30 seconds for an 853, 1 minute for an 8.54

11.

Section 11

12.

Section 12 = Variable, operator intervention required

13.

Section 13 = 35 seconds for an 853, 70 seconds for an 854. Total for sections
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 11, and 13 (standard run) is about 6 minutes.

to 9 seconds

ACCURACY
Section 11, the positioning timing check, bases the 145 milliseconds on instruction
execution time.

If the instruction execution time is a few percent less than 1. 1

microseconds, error typeouts may occur which are not true.
room, error code 1C with calculated time

550-16

= 92 16

Thus, in a cool

may be ignored.

60182000

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

17X4 Computer with 8K memory

1 7X5 Interrupt Data Channel

1738 Disk Storage System

One 853 or 854 Disk Storage Drive (two 853's or 854's are required for
section 7).

60182000 J

550-17

1739 CARTRIDGE DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER
(CDD078 Test No. 78)
(CP = 2F)
I.

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this test is to verify the operation of the Cartridge Disk Controller
and Drive.
tenance test.

The test is meant to be an engineering. manufacturing. and field mainThe test will be run in an ascending order. each test becoming pro-

gressively more complex.

II.

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
The test is intended to verify the 1739 Cartridge Disk Controller.

is connected to the DSA and to the AQ Channel of the 1704/1705. SC1774/1773/
1775. or 1784.
h

1700
(SC1774)

1-1.
I-.
~

I-.

Direct Store

r"-

A/Q
~

Interrupt

Drive
and Controller

....

SOFTWARE
The test will reside under SMM 1 7 and all rules of SMM 1 7 apply.
NOTE
All references made in this document are to the
1700 System Mainenance Monitor (SMM17) Reference Manual.

ACCESSORIES
None

III. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

60182000 L

The controller

Cautions to User

551-1

The range of cylinders upon which data will be written on disk 0 (cartridge) may be limited during the parameter stop.

The low limit must

be zero for Section 12 (data is written on cylinder 0 to be autoloaded).
Range limits do not apply to fixed disk.
b.

A large number of typeouts and/or stops may occur for error codes 14,
1B, and 1D unless bit 11 of the Stop/ Jump parameter is set.

In Section 12 (Autoload) the diagnostic may be destroyed if the Autoload
function is not working properly.

Section 12 should not be run on a

Maintenance Pack.
d.

When using a new pack, it is necessary to ensure that the pack has
address tags, correct data, and checkwords.
in shipment.

Data may be destroyed

Section 10 and then Section 7 should be run to ensure that

the pack contains the correct data required for other sections.

e.
B.

Bits 2 and 3 of the SMM parameter word must specify the correct machine type.

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

The test operates as a sub-program under control of the 1700 System Maintenance Monitor (SMM 1 7).

The test mnemonic is CDD, number 78.

The calling sequence is that specified by SMM17.

PARAMETERS
1.

If no parameter stop is made, the following sections will be run.

Section 1

Section 2

Section 3

Section 4

Section 5

Section 6

Section 8

Section 9

Section 13

Section 15

The test will run on disk 0 (cartridge) and will ignore fixed disk.
5 through CA 16 will be tested.

551-2

Cylinder

The interrupt line will be line 3.

60182000 L

To alter the parameters. follow directions stated in the SMM17 Reference
Manual.

If bit is set. the corresponding section or condition will be selected.

The parameter words to be displayed are as follows:
a.

First Stop:

Second Stop:

A = 7821.

Q = Stop! Jump Parameter.

Bit 0 of A

Section 1

preliminary check.

Bit 1 of A

Section 2

Bit 2 of A

Section 3

- positioner check.

Bit 3 of A

Section 4

- read. write. and compare.

Bit 4 of A = Section 5

same as Section 4 except under control of
Alarm and End of Operation interrupts.

Bit 5 of A

Section 6

read. write. compare through cylinders.

Bit 6 of A

Section 7

surface test.

Bit 7 of A

Section 8

worst pattern and checkword generator test.

Bit 8 of A

Section 9

same as Section 4 except under Control of
Alarm and Ready. Not Busy interrupts.

Bit 9 of A = Section 10 - write address tags.
Bit 10 of A
Section 11
positioning time test.
Bit 11 of A
Section 12
autoload check.
Bit 12 of A

Section 13

checkword check.

Bit 13 of A

Section 14

protect test.

"" Bit 14 of A

Section i5 - crosstrack test.

Bit 15 of A

1 means fixed disk also present.

means cartridge only present.

Q = XXYY
XX = lowest numbered cylinder to be written on (Section 12 ignores

this limit)

05 - standard

highest numbered cylinder to be written on

CA 16 - standard

Third Stop:
A

interrupt line (for example. bit 3 in A set for interrupt line 3)

interrupt line (for example. bit 3 in Q set for interrupt line 3)

Fourth Stop:
A

0 - BAD track address

N!A

Enter known bad track addresses in A and run.
Clear A and run to proceed with test.
60182000 J

551-.3

SELEe TIVE SKIP and STOP Settings:
1)

STOP - must be set for running of SMM17.

SKIP - when set, the Stop! Jump word is displayed in Q.

IV. OPERATOR COMMUNICATIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Normal Program Typeouts

Test identification during test initialization:

CDD078, Cartridge Disk Controller Test
CP2F, Ver. 3. 1
IA = XXXX, FC = XX

During test Section 14 one of the following typeouts will occur:
Set PROTEC T switches
Clear PROTEC T switches

End of Test
A

7824
2.

Q
Return
Address

Pass
Number

Stop! Jump
Parameter

Error Alarms
All information shown is displayed after General Display Format.
General Display Format:

Stop! Jump
Parameter

Program
Tag Name

Return
Address

etc.
Additional
Data

Message and Description

INP

External Reject

OUTPUT

551-4

Section!
Error Code

ERROR CODE DICTIONARY

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
00

Information Word
(7838 for 3 stops)
(7848 for 4 stops)

Contents of Q at Reject

= N/A

60182000 L

Message Code
(Hex·adecimal)
01

Program
Tag Name
INP
CLRCON
IECHK
lED

Message .and Description
Internal reject on input to A
BADD

Q
A
Q

OUTPUT
lEA

Contents of Q when input to A
Contents of A during last output
Contents of Q during last output

Internal reject on output
A = Director status
Cylinder register status
Contents of A when output attempted
Contents
of Q when output attempted
Q =

Q
A

IEC

Interrupt received but interrupt status bit not set
Selected interrupts
A
Q
A
Q

IEB

Director status at interrupt
Contents of A during last output
Contents of Q during last output

Interrupt other than was selected occurred
(or interrupt occurred too soon)
Display same as error code 03

lEE

Interrupt status bits not cleared by clear interrupt
function
A

Director status at interrupt

Q
A

Director status after clear interrupt function

Q
06

CONALARM

Contents of A during last output
Contents of Q during last output

Ready status bit not present
A

Director status

Q
Cylinder register status
A
Director status at instant of alarm. (True
cylinder status when seek error (code B) is detected.)

Contents of A on last output if no alarm detected
Q

60182000 J

= Contents

of Q on last output

551-5

Message Code
(Hexadec imal)
07

Program
Tag Name
SECIA

BUSYPRES

Message and Description
On cylinder status bit not present
A

Director status

Cylinder register status

Contents of A at last output

Contents of Q at last output

Busy not present as expected
A
Q

CONALARM

Director status

= N/A

Storage partly error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Drive fault (non-recoverable)
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Seek error (controller).

This error should recover.

Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Address error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Lost data
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Checkword error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Protect fault
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Alarm condition present but alarm status bit not set
Display same as error code 06

ADDRESS

Cylinder register status does not equal expected
value

551-6

BADD

Q
A

Director status
Cylinder register status

Expected cylinder register

60182000 J

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
12

Program
Tag Name
WAIT

Message and Description
Controller hung or busy
Q

Director status
Address of originating routine (BIASED)

Director status at instant any alarm occurred

Contents of Q during last output

CONALARM

Seek error (drive)
Display same as error code 06

COMPARE

Data compare error.

Write buffer and read buffer

are compared in computer
A

Cylinder register status

Number of word in sector that is wrong

A
Q

= Word

written

Word read

(By setting bit 11 in Stop/Jump parameter, multiple
errors in the same buffer can be eliminated)
15

COMBUF CB2

SEC6B

No compare status bit set
A

Director status

Cylinder register status

No alarm interrupt occurred when forcing an address error by sending illegal difference

SEC6D

SECIN

Illegal difference sent

N/A

An address error was forced but status bit not set
A

Illegal address

Interrupt status

Cylinder, CWA, Checkword, or True cylinder not
clear after clear controller was sent

SEC6I

Contents of incorrect register

Function code for incorrect register

Address error status not set when writing off end
of file
Display same as for error code 17

60182000 J

551-7

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)

Program
Tag Name

1A
1B

Message and Description
Not used

SEC7 ERROR

Surface check detected error
A

Address of sector in error

Number of words into sector

Data written

Data read

(By setting bit 11 in Stop/Jump parameter, multiple
errors in the same buffer can be eliminated)
1C

SEC11B

Maximum positioning time exceeded (96 milliseconds)
A

Actual length to position

Address positioned to

Address positioned from

N / A (To make this error valid, bit 2 in SMM

parameter must be set for SC1774)
1D

S12D

A uto load failed to load correct data
A

CONALARM

BADD

Word in error

Word written

Word in core after autoload

End of operation status not present
Display same as error code 06

SEC 1J -SEC 1B

Status other than Ready and On Cylinder after an
outpu t function
A

Director status

Q = Expected status
20

SEC6X

Alarm interrupt did not occur when writing off end
of file
A

Q
21

551- 8

Last address of file
=

N/A

ADPRINTP

No interrupt occurred when EOP, Ready, Not Busy

WRT1

interrupts were selected

RD 1

Selected interrupt

CW 1

Director status

CB 1

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

60182000 J

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
22

Program
Tag Name
SEC1K

Message

~l1d

Description

Expected external reject on forced busy did not
occur
A

0 - illegal reply; 100-internal reject

Q = N/A
23

CWACOMP

Current Word Address register incorrect
A

Actual CW A contents

Expected CWA contents
Q
A = Contents of A during last output
Q
24

CONALARM

Contents of Q during last output

Alarm bit set, no alarm conditions set.
Display same as error code 06

SEC6M

No compare status bit not present
A

= Director

status

Q = Cylinder register status

CDFA

Cylinder register status does not equal true
cylinder status (upper 8 bits only)
A

Cylinder register status

Q
A

True cylinder status

Q
27

CNFE

Contents of A during last output
. Contents of Q during last output

Cylinder register status incorrect after an operation
A

Cylinder register status

Expected register contents

A = Contents of A during last output
Q
28

SEC1M

Contents of Q during last output

Did not get external reject on illegal input director
06 and 07

60182000 J

SEC14G

10 - illegal reply; 0 - internal reject

Contents of Q during input

Expected protect fault did not occur
A

Director status

Q
A

N/A
Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

551-9

Message Code
(HexadEtcimal)

Program
Tag Name

Message .and Description
CWA did not indicate word address of protect fault

SEC14B

Contents of CW A at protect fault

Address that protect fault should have occurred

Illegal reply or internal reject on unprotected output
command

SEC14C

Input instruction was not accepted on protected
controller

2D
2E

Not used
SEC1Q

Output buffer length with immediate input of CWA
gave incorrect results
A
Q

2F
30

Contents of CW A register

= Value

sent as buffer length

Not used
CHKTRK

Cylinder register not equal to expected value after
an operation was executed
A
Q

SECTION 13

Last output function

= Director

status

Cylinder register status

Expected cylinder status

Recoverable error occurred during checkword check
A

Address of track causing error

Director status when last error occurred

Non-recoverable error occurred during checkword
check.
Display same as error code 31

SEC2J

Suspected DSA address error (Read /Write must have
been verified). In a manufacturing test environment
test 2 is necessarily run before test 4 because of
degree of difficulty.

However, when error 33

occurs, then test 4 must be run before test 2 can
be completely verified
A

551-10

DSA address at failure (THIS IS FWA)

N/A

Data written as determined by software

Data read from disk
60182000 J

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
34

Program
Tag Name

Message -and Description

SEC15

Crosstrack error
A

= Address

First of the three tracks that were used

STBT

Table of Bad Track has been exceeded (limit is

SEC7

10)

SEC8E, G, H,

An incorrect checkword was detected

etc.

Checkword status

Expected checkword status

SllT3

of the error detected

Cylinder to cylinder position time exceeded

RE1A

A ctual time

Specified limit

Unrecovered seek error
A

Director status after recovery attempt

Cylinder status after recovery attempt

(Exit from this· error will be an automatic abort
and restart of test)
39-3F

Not used

Operator error.
in error.

Interrupt line or equipment address

Restart of test

Selected equipment address

Selected interrupt line if any'

DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Cartridge Disk Drive Controller (CDD-78) test is divided into 15 individually
selectable test sections.
mally selected tests.

Sections 1 through 6, 8, 9, 13, and 15 are nor-

Sections 7, 10, 11, 12, and 14 are optional.

CDD-78 test sections are divided into

subsections and are labeled with pro-

gram tags such as SEC 8A, B, C, etc.

Sec 8 is Section 8 and the letter

indicates the subsection.

60182000 J

551-11

The standard test error messages contain the section currently executing.
Each error code defined in the error list contains a program reference
tag and each test description contains the applicable error codes.

The

Return address in error messages (mayor may not be biased) gives the
listing address the error it came from.

It is important to note that the

Return address may just give a subroutine area which generated the error.
To trace back the error. it may be necessary to go to the beginning of
the routine and look in the Return Jump address to get the area in the
test you came from.

This may have to be done more than once to actu-

ally get back to the section that the error indicates caused the error.
b.
c.

Sections are structured to run sequentially.
If an error is encountered. it may be helpful to run other sections for

trouble analysis and to get a more favorable sequence of operation.
d.

Normally. the test should run with the entire surface available; however.
it may be desirable to restrict the test to certain areas (see parameters) •.
NOTE
The test may be restricted to as
little as one cylinder.

Operations performed with a repeat condition are shown in the test
description.

Section 7 is used to determine defective tracks.

However. this section

cannot be run until there is a high degree of confidence that the Read.
Write. and Compare operations are relatively error free.
g.

With a new cartridge or fixed disk. Sections 10 and 7. in that order.
must be selected individually to assure address tags and data on entire
disk.

Failure to do this will cause unrecoverable errors.

Approximate section execution times:
Section

Minutes

15
15
15

02
03
05

15
15

551-12

Seconds

22
8

60182000 J

Section

Minutes

Seconds

15
25
10

10
11
12
13

N/A
20

14
15

N/A
28

Total normal parameter running time is 2 minutes and 20 seconds.
(Time does not include increased length when second disk is tested.)
B.

SECTIONS DESCRIPTION
SECTION 1
Error Code
0101
0106

PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Program Tag Name
SEC1C

Description of Program

Clear controller function
Input cylinder register status
Input director status

0107
011F

SECIA

0127

SEC1E

Verify on cylinder present
Verify only on cylinder and ready present
Verify cylinder register after CL
CONT
RC

0101
0102
0102

SEC1F

Clear controlle r function
Output clear interrupt function
Position forward one cylinder

SEC1F

Check alarms

0127

Verify cylinder register
RC

011F

Verify EO P drops on output function

SEC1J

RC
0122

SEC1K

Clear controller function
Verify busy status give external reject
RC
WAIT NOT Busy

60182000 J

551-13

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SECIL

Clear controller function
Position to cylinder 1

0117

SECILA

Verify excess negative difference address error
Verify address error and alarm
RC

0128

SEC1M

Verify external reject on input director
06 and 07
Execute illegal input function
RC

0118

Verify all registers zero after clear

SEC1N

controller
Check CWA status
Check checkword status
Check true cylinder status
RC
012E

SECIQ

Verify all bits operational in CW A
register
RC
Next iteration - jump to SEC1C
Repeat section

SECTION 2
Error Code
0227

Description of Program
Clear controller
Position cylinder to 5515

Verify cylinder register
RC
0227

SEC2A

Clear controller
Position to cylinder AA8A 16
Verify cylinder register
RC

551-14

60182000 J

Error Code
0227

Program Tag Name
SEC2A1

Description of Program

Clear controll er
Position to cylinder CAOO 16
Verify cylinder register
RC

0227
0226
0223·

SEC2D

Verify sector count and advance position
to low range
Execute Write operation
RC
Increase sector count
Return to position until sector 29

0227
0226
0223

SEC2F

Verify buffer lengths
Position to low range
Execute Write operation
RC
Change buffer lengths to check all bit
pos itions and return to positioning unless
done

0227
0226
0223

SEC2J

Verify DSA addressing
Execute Write operation
Attempt to determine if all DSA addresses
are operational
(Necessarily this test is dependent on correct DSA address of input buffer when
attempting to verify data. )
RC
Next iteration jump to SEC2G
Repeat section

SECTION 3
Error Code

POSITIONING TEST
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC3

Generate 192 random addresses
Clear controller

0327
0326
0323

SEC3A

Position to random address
Write 60 word buffer
RC
Update for new address.

Return to

pos ition until done
Repeat section
60182000 J

551-15

SECTION 4
Error Code

READ, WRITE, COMPARE TEST
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC4

Set pass count
Clear controller

SEC4A

Generate random data and random first
address

SEC4B

Write 60 word buffer
RC

SEC4C

':c

Read 60 word buffer
RC

SEC4D

0415
0430

SEC4E

*
*

Checkword check of track
RC
Compare 60 word buffer
Check cylinder register advance
RC

0414

Compare data read against data written

SEC4F

RSC
RC
N ext iteration jump to SEC4A
Repeat section
SECTION 5
Error Code

READ, WRITE, COMPARE UNDER INTERRUPT CONTROL
Program Tag Name

Description of Program
Set section passcount

SEC5

Clear controller

0521
0530

SEC5Z

Request interrupt

SEC5D

Generate random data and random address

SEC5A

Write under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

0521
0530

SEC5B

Read under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

551-16

60182000 J

Error Code
0521

0521
0515
0530

Program Tag Name
SEC5C

SEC5E

Description of Program

*
*

Checkword check under interrupt control
RC
Compare under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

0514

SEC5F

Compare read and write buffers
RSC
RC
Next iteration jump to SEC5D
Repeat section

SECTION 6
Error Code

READ. WRITE. COMPARE TIffiOUGH CYLINDERS
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC6

Set section pass count

SEC6A

Request interrupt
Clear controller

SEC6F
0616

SEC6B

Select interrupt
Verify illegal address alarm interrupt
Send

0617

ille~al

address (OOFF)

SEC6D

Verify address error status set

SEC6C

RC
Change to a second illegal address (FFOO)
If second disk not available. skip to

SEC6M
SEC6L

Clear controller
Set address to last sector in file
Select interrupt

0620
0619

SEC6X

Write 97 word buffer off end of file
Check address error status
RC

0625

SEC6M

Verify no compare circuits
Write 97 word buffer
Change 1 or 97 word on alternate passes
Compare 97 word- buffer

SEC6N
60182000 J

RC
551-17

Error Code

Program Tag Name
SEC6NA

Description of Program

Move position to last sector in track
Write 97 word buffer
RC

0615

SEC6NB

Compare 97 word buffer
RC

SEC6NC

Read 97 word buffer
RC

0614

SEC6NN

Compare read and write buffers
RC
N ext iteration jump to SEC6F
Repeat section

SECTION 7
Error Code

SURFACE TEST
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC7

Set passcount
Select appropriate buffer length per core
availability
Clear bad track table and set flag 2 to
avoid selecting an alternate track

SEC7H, A, C

Set up patterns to be used

SEC7F

Request interrupt from SMM
Clear controller

0730

SEC7X

Write a sector or track
Verify cylinder register
RC

SEC7Rl

Update one sector or track
Jump back to SEC7X until file is complete
When done, clear controller, prepare for
read

0730

071B

SEC7Y

SEC7F

Read a sector or track
Verify cylinder register
Compare data bit for bit
RC

551-18

60182000 J

Error Code

Program Tag Name
SEC8G

Description of Program

Write buffer of all zeros with last word
a 0001 16 and verify a checkword of 80F 16
RC

SEC8H

Same as above except last word of FFF 16
and checkword 3A 16
RC

SEC8K

Last word FF'FF 16 checkword of 3C6

RC
SEC8L

First word 0001

SEC8LA

97th word 0001

checkword 2nd sector
16
after zero padding 55D
16
RC

SEC8M

All words of buffer floating one

Checkword of 486

checkword of 55D

RC
SECTION 9
Error Code

READ. WRITE, COMPARE, USING READY NOT BUSY
INTERRUPT
Program Tag Name

Description of Program
Same as Section 5 except interrupt on
"Ready and Not BusylJ is used

SECTION 10
Error Code

WRITE ADDRESS TAGS
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SECIO

Initialize section
Clear controller

SEC10A
SEC10B

Load address

Write address tags
Check alarm
RC
Advance track count
Jump back to SEC lOA until first disk
complete

60182000 J

551-19

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program
Check for fixed disk - if present, jump
to SEC10A
RC
Repeat section

SECTION 11
Error Code

MAXIMUM TIME TO POSITION TEST
Program Tag Name
SEC11

Description of Program
Set up random positions
Convert to legal addresses
Preset some addresses to high and low
extreme
Set time for correct computer (SC or
1704)
Clear controller

SEC11T1

Initialize millisecond count and move one
cylinder

SEC11TO

Measure time till end of position
Verify less than 8 milliseconds
Check for end of file

OB37

SllT3

Report excessive time

SllT4

Repeat condition to S11T1

SEC11A

Move up new address
Momentarily jump to monitor

OB1C

SC11D

Position to new address
Measure time to busy drop
RC
Next iteration to SC11A
Repeat section

SECTION 12
Error Code

A UTOLOAD CHECK
Program Tag Name
SEC 12

Description of Program
Set section passcount to one
Set disk to address 0

551-20

60182000 J

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

S12A

Move copy of program to buffer area

S12B

Write 2784 10 location onto first track
Wait for not busy
Change one location in low core
STOP - operator must press autoload

OCID

S12D

Compare autoload data
Repeat section
(In case of multiple errors. set Stop!
Jump parameter bit 11)

SECTION 13
Error Code

CHECKWORD CHECK OF ENTIRE SURFACE
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC13

Set section passcount to one
Initialize first and last address
Clear controller

S13F
OD31
OD32

S13A

Set attempt counter
Load address
Execute checkword check
Make 10 attempts if alarms set-Jump
S13A
RC
Increment until end of disk jump to S13F
Check if fixed disk present; if yes. jump
to S13F
RC
Repeat section

SECTION 14
Error Code

PROTECT CIRCUITS TEST
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC14
OE29

SEC14G

Set passcount to one

Set address to low range limit
Protect one word in input buffer area
Execute a read buffer
Verify a protect fault

60182000 J

551-21

Error Code
OE2A

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC14A

Verify CWA is approximately· at protect
fault address
Clear protect on one word previously
protected
RC

OE2B

SEC14B

Verify reject on output command
RC

OE2C

SEC14C

Verify acceptance of input command even
though not protected
RC

Clear PROTECT switches
Protect entire program except half of
input buffer
Set device protect
SEC14D

Execute a read, write, compare, and
check for no faults
RC
Clear PROTEC T switches
Unprotect entire program
RC

Next iteration jump to SEC14G
Repeat section
SECTION 15
Error Code

CROSSTRACK TEST
Program Tag Name
SEC15

Description of Program
Clear subroutine flag for write or compare
Generate random addresses
Convert to legal addresses
Clear controller
Set section pass count to 5
Set b.uffer output to all ones

551-22

60182000 J

Error Code

Program Tag Name
SEC15B

Description of Program

Clear count
Get 3 consecutive tracks alternately at
high and then at low range limits
Set number of random positions count
Write first track with all one's
Write 3rd track with all one's

OF34

SEC15A

Write random data on 2nd track
Random position
Return to SEC 15A for 20 times
Compare outer tracks for correct data
RC
Next iteration jump SEC15B
Repeat section

SUB-PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
Some major programs

(subroutines) are contained in this section and ordered

alphanumerically by call name (that is, the entry address tag to the subroutine
is the call name of the subp.rogram.
Error Code
XX21

Program Tag Name
ADPRINTP

Description of. Program
Routine to position under interrupt control
Select interrupt
Position
Wait for interrupt
Check for errors during interrupt processing
Check cylinder register status
Exit

ADSR

Routine to compute difference to get to a
new address

XX12

BUSYPRES

Routine to wait for busy to drop and to
return control to monitor as required

XX26

CBINTP

Routine to compare under interrupt control

CDFA

Routine to compare true cylinder and
cylinder register status

60182000

551-23

Error Code

Program Tag Name
CLRCON

Description of Program
Clear controller routine
Execute clear controller function
Input director status
Wait for on cylinder to

drop~

then wait

for on cylinder to come back up
Exit
XX27

CNFE

Routine to compare cylinder register status with a predicted value after an operation

XX14

COMPARE

Compare write buffer with read buffer
internally by computer

CONALARM

Routine to check for EOP and for absence.
of all alarms

CONV

Routine to convert random numbers to
legal addresses

CSCY

Compute expected cylinder status using
buffer length for anticipated operation

XX23

CWACOMP

Add buffer length to FWA and check CW A
after operation

CWINTP

Execute checkword check under interrupt
. control

IECHECK

Check for any errors during an interrupt

INC

Routine will cause an increment of values
to check bit positions in a 16 bit register

INCREMEN

Routine to sequentially increment addresses
by sector or by tracks (used in Section 7)

INTPROC

Interrupt processor
Stores Q
Input status
Output clear interrupt
Input status
Verify both statuses and set appropriate
flags
Store return address
Load Q
Exit

551-24

60182000

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

NEXTSECT

Routine to select sections of test

READ

Position and read one sector under interru pt control

ROUT 1

Routine to position.
Q

= to

Enter routine with

buffer length and A

= to

new

address
Store Q and A
Check if address is in bad track table
(except Section 7 which assigns new bad
tracks)
Checks for fixed disk and limit addresses
as a result of presence or absence
Executes ADSR routine
Outputs buffer length
Executes position
Predict address after contemplated operation (CSCY)
Exit
ROUT 2

Routine to read. write, and compare
Enter routine with A

= FWA

and Q

to function
Store A in CWACOMP routine
Execute operation
Wait not busy
Check alarms
XX27

Execute CNFE routine

XX26

Execute CDF A routine

XX23

Execute CWACOMP routine
Exit
WRITE

Position and write one sector under interrupt control

60182000

551-25

VI. APPLICATIONS
A.

Suggestions for manufacturing test in the use of this diagnostic test:
An acquaintance with the SMM Reference Manual will enable an operator in better
use of SMM tests to aid in resolution of errors and easy maintenance of device
being tested.
If possible, a partial debug of controller should be made using the maintenance

test panel that is available for this device.

However, it is possible to run if

clear controller and director status input functions have been debugged.

A short,

hand -punched program such as the following can be used.
LDQ

EOOO
OXOO

OX01

OBOO

NOP

02FE

INPUT

0000

STOP

Load SMM test number 78 Cartridge Disk Drive test (CDD).
meter to 49

Select each test individually.

Set Stop! Jump para-

Set range limits if applicable.

Assure correct interrupt line is selected.
Attempt sections in following order:
Section 1
Section 10
Section 2

If error 33 occurs, abort test and continue until Section 4 is

verified.
Section 3
Section 7

Run until first surface error, then abandon and go to Section
4.

(This effectively puts data on entire surface of disk so as

to avoid unrecoverable checkword check errors).
Section 4

If an error occurs, you may limit range to as little as one
cylinder.

By setting repeat condition at proper time and with

range limit set to one cylinder, you can debug read, write,
compare, or checkword check on only one cylinder.

If repeat

subsection is selected, you can do all four previously mentioned operations all on one cylinder.
NOTE
The advantage of doing an operation
on one cylinder avoids unnecessary
positioning time.

551-26

60182000

Sections 5 and 9

These two tests are similar to test 4 but using interrupt
control.

The remaining sections can be run in any order.
B.

Explanation of an error and an example of how to repeat an error.
Example of error typeout:
Q

7848
(IDENT)

0049
(STOP/JUMP)

041E
(SEC/ERR)

017F
0009
C801
(RET.ADD) VARIABLE

The first word of the error typeout is the identifier.
Stop/ Jump parameter.
code.

0000
0205
DA T A (either 2 or 4 words)
The second word is the

The third word contains the section .number and the error

For example. 041E means Section 4 had an end of operation failure.

is. EOP status bit did not set as expected.
error explanation. is the director status.
that the error occurred at.
alarm.

That

The fifth word. according to the
The sixth word is the cylinder address

The seventh word is the status at the instant of an

(Since no alarm is present. this status is not applicable.)

The eighth

word contains the function code of the last output that was attempted before the
error.
At this point. several options are available to the operator:
1.

Check is the error is repetitive.
error again.

Set repeat condition and check for same

If error is the same and operator determines that debug will

be attempted at this point. a disable typeout can also be set in Stop/ Jump
parameter and selective stop removed and test will cycle on error.
If operator is not sure of the operation being performed at the time of the

error. he may want to look at the test description and determine what was
being attempted.

The operator should proceed as follows:

Go to Section 4 description and look for error code; if error code is not listed.
it indicates that it was not the major test performed in this section.

Then the

operator should use the error information that tells the last function attempted
and look for this function in the Section 4 description.

The test description shows

that a compare function is executed in Section 4E (0205 indicates compare function).

By scanning the entire section description. the operator can determine the

sequence of events being attempted and determine how many of these will be repeated when he selects repeat condition.

A closer detailed observation of the

section can be obtained by looking at the listing for this test.
In some types of errors. the fourth word of the typeout or return jump address
can point directly to the section where the error occurred.
60182000

551-27

Suggestions for running test for maintenance of a unit known to have been operating
previously.
Load SMM test number 78 Cartridge Disk Drive test (CDD).

Set Stop! Jump para-

meter to 49 16 • If sectors containing bad surfaces are known, enter an A on
fourth parameter stop. If bad areas are known, test would be initiated as follows:
At first stop, set Q

= to

Stop! Jump of 49

" Hit run and at second stop leave A
16
set to normally selected sections and check Q for correct range limits.
Hit run
and at third stop set A and Q to correct interrupt line.
stop set A = to track number of bad sector.

Hit run and at fourth

Hit run and at stop enter next bad

track address or clear to zero and run and test will execute.

If address of bad

sectors are unknown, test will have to be initiated as suggested for a manufacturing operation.

VII. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

STORAGE REQUIREMENTS - approximately 8K

TIMING - N! A

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION:

551-28

17X4 Computer with 8K memory

1705 Interrupt Data Channel

1 Cartridge Disk Drive (1739!FV227)

Device for loading SMM tests into computer

60182000

APPENDIX A
DICTIONARY OF TAG NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS

Name

(Asterisk)

Cylinder Register Status

Definition
See definition of Re.
This phrase refers to the contents of the register only and
does not always indicate the head position (see true cylinder
status).

True Cylinder Status

This status gives the actual cylinder address as read from the
disk when a read, write, or compare operation is attempted
(only upper eight bits are used).

CWA

Current word address.

Function Code

Refers to equipment code and director bits.

Difference

A 16 bit value consisting of eight lower bits which are absolute and eight upper bits indicating the number of cylinders
forward or backward (as determined by hit 5) required to
move in order to get to a new address.

Repeat condition, if selected go back to statement marked

EOP

End of operation.

DSA

Direct storage access.

FWA

First word address.

Position

Execute a load address difference function to get to a new
address.

Range

Selectable parameter entry which limits the area to be written
on cartridge portion of drive only.

Compare

Defined by the type of error received.

An error with a 14

code indicates an internal compare of read and write data by
a computer. A 15 code indicates an error detected when a
compare function was executed.
Bad Track

Entire track of 29 sectors labeled as bad by software when
any sector or portion of the track will not verify all data
checks.

See RSC.

RSC

Repeat subsection,
#.

60182000

if selected go back to statement marked
551-29

APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODES

Dir Bits
Q Register

Output From A

Input to A

Load buffer length

Clear controller

Director function

Director status

Cylinder register status

Load address difference

Write

CWA status

Read

Checkword status

Compare

True cylinder status

Checkword check

Write address tag

DIRECTOR STATUS
XXXI - Ready

X 1XX - Checkword error

XXX2 - Busy

X2XX - Lost data

XXX4 - Interrupt

X4XX - Address error

XXX8 - On cylinder

X8XX - Seek error (cont)

XXIX - EOP

1XXX - Not used

XX2X - Alarm

2XXX - Storage parity

XX4X - No compare

4XXX - Protect fault

XX8X - Protected

8XXX - Seek error (drive)
DIRECTOR FUNCTIONS
XXX2 - Clear Interrupt
XXX4 - Next Ready and Not Busy Interrupt Request
XXX8 - EOP Interrupt Request
XXIX - Alarm Interrupt Requ.est

551-30

60182000

BG504A/H DRUM CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTIC
(DRMP80 Test No. 80)
I.

IDENTIFICA TION
Test - BG504A/H Drum Controller Test
Number - 80
Mnemonic - DRM

II.

RESTRIC TIONS
Bit 8 of SMM control word must be set at load time to select MBS.

III. DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A.

SCOPE

This specification describes the BG504A/H Drum Controller diagnostic.
It will operate under the control of SMM17 V3.0 or above and has been

ass igned Test No. 80 in the SMM17 library list.

The purpose of this

specification is to describe the comprehensive set of test sections for
both factory checkout and field maintenance.
B.

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
1.

Software

1500/VW SMM17 Software Subset of SMM17 V3.0

b.
c.

SMM17 Manual Pub. No. 60182000
MBS subset of SMM17 V3. 0 ERS

Hardware
a.

1700 Reference Manual Pub. No. 60153100

SC-1700 Reference Manual Pub. No. 60270600

BG504 Drum Subsystem Pub. No. 39731700

DESCRIPTION
1.

Communication
Communication with the diagnostic will be through either console or teletype.
Refer to latest SMM 1 7 manual for loading information.

60182000

552-1

General Test Description
a.

The following areas will be tested:
1)
2)

Functions
Status

3)
4)

Interrupts
Data

Alarms

The method of testing is to make each succeeding test section more
complex, forming a bootstrapping- sequential technique aimed at reducing troubleshooting time.
1)

For example:

Sector, initial core, and final core address registers will be
verified prior to drum transfers.

All controller data registers will be verified prior to checking
drum transfers.

The type of response (reply or reject) to all 110 instructions, except
when reading status, will be verified against predicted values.

This

will include timer information to the nearest millisecond.
For example,
the controller may be busy, external reject, up to 17 milliseconds
after initiating a Write operation.

The actual checking is performed

in the monitor; the test supplies the data.
d.

All four status words are copied after each function, read or write.
The only exception is Section 2 where only director and sector address
status is copied.

Although four status words are copied, only those

applicable to the 110 operation will be verified.
e.

To verify all eight alarm conditions, it will be necessary to "bug" specific
logic areas.
required.

To achieve this, a card extender and clip lead are

Although this procedure is primarily used by QA, it can be

helpful both in checkout and in the field.
f.

552-2

Preset Input Parameters
A

Stop 1

8051

020D

Stop 2

04DE

0200

stop 3

4500

0000

Stop 4

0000

Stop 5

5A5A

8060

60182000

Refer to the latest edition of the SMM17 Reference Manual for an
explanation of Stop 1.

Stop 2
(A)

Sections

Bit
0

Bit clock adjust procedure/buffer addresses

Sector address counter

Initial sector address register/sector address compare

Initial and final core address/ core address compare

Sector overrange / data registers

Guarded address

Serialize test

Worst case patterns

CE section (manipulative)

Auto load/protect

Checkword check

Clear timing error

Not used

ON = 50 Hz, OFF = 60 Hz

Indicates the maintenance bell troubleshooting aid.
If set, the teletype bell will be rung prior to each error

message. It is to be used in conjunction with the omit
typeouts and repeat conditions featured as an aid to
isolating intermittent errors.
(Q)

Number of tracks (drum size).

Bit 06=64 tracks, bit 07=128

tracks, etc.

60182000 K

552-3

Stop 3
(A)

Interrupt data in the form BLBL.
B = Bit position in director status
L = Line number
~End

of operation status bit position

Line number

4500
I. . . .I'------Not used
(Q)

Stop 4
(A)

(Q)
5)

Bits 0-14. = first available track/ sector address
Highest guarded track address

Stop 5
(A)

Section 4, 8 data pattern

(Q)

Section 8 control
~:~Transfer

Length

IL-----Not Used
L------Data Check
L---------Write
~------------Read

~:~Transfer

length:

Max.

307"2 (1 track)

Min.

1 word

I/O CYCLE
a.

The I/O cycle is a collection of monitor calls, common to all test
sections.
All I/O requests to the monitor including status, function output, read,
write, status, and interrupt timing are grouped in a specific order and
located near the beginning of the test.

It is called as a subroutine

with the name tag "IOCYL".
All function requests result in an "early I/O cycle exit". Requests
for data transfers complete the I/O cycle (see flow chart).

552-4

60182000 K

The following monitor calls are used in the I/O cycle.
Monitor
Subroutine
Check
Status

Description

I/O Cycle
Pointer No.

Monitor Error
No. (s)

0003

0001,0002

X6/X7

0001,0002

0003

0003,0004

0000,0003

0003

NONE

Copy and check requested number
of status words against predicted values.

Function

Output values to load ICA, FCA.
and ISA registers. Begin copying status 60 micros econds after
output. Reply to output instruction is verified against the
predicted reply. External reject
(if any) timing is checked.
Maximum time to wait is 32. 767
milliseconds.

Read/Write Initiate Read or Write operation.
Response and timing same as
function. Begin copying status
approx. 100 microseconds after
output.
Recheck

Verify last status(es) copied
against predicted values.

Recognize
Interrupt

Copy and check all requested
status while waiting for an
interrupt. Control is passed
to the monitor while waiting.

Monitor
Status

Copy and check· all requested
status while waiting for a specific
status bit to change state within
a specified time. The last status(es)
copied which saw the bit change is
not verified.

60182000 K

Recheck

Same as above.

Select

Makes the occurrence of an

Interrupt

interrupt legal to the monitor.

Deselect
Interrupt

Makes the occurrence of an
interrupt illegal.

552-5

Interrupt Processor
The interrupt processor, like the test sections, uses the I/O cycle to
acknowledge interrupts.
The I/O cycle pointer no. for Check Status,
function and (1st) Recheck Status is changed to X8, X9. and XA respectively. Error messages are shorter for acknowledge interrupt because
only the first two status words are copied.
Alarm interrupt results in the following:

Clear controller.

Enable or disable end of operation and/ or alarm interrupt as
requested by the test section.

Deselect the line to the monitor thereby making the occurrence
of an interrupt illegal.
The line is res elected prior to the
next request for a data transfer.

End of operation interrupt results in 2 and 3 of the above.
4.

Initialize
a.

A task of the section search routine, located at the beginning of the
test, is to initialize each section prior to passing control to that section.
Initialize performs the following sequence of operations:
1)

Adjust timing values if connected to 50 Hz power.

Clear all status calls (except last recheck status) in the 1/ a cycle.

I/O cycle switches:
a)

Set early exit

Set function

Clear interrupt

Set error code to zero (SSEE).

Direct monitor to copy status 1 and 2 only.

See F for status

description.
6)

Set first recheck status, status 1 value to expect ready and data.

Execute clear controller.

Direct monitor to copy all four status words.

Set check status, status 1 value to expect ready and data.

10)

552-6

Return to section search routine.

60182000 K

Error detection reporting
a.

The test uses six monitor subroutines to perform the following operations.
1)

2)
3)

4)
5)
-6)

Execute 1/0
a) Read
b) Write
c) Function
Process interrupts
Copy status
Check status
Monitor status
Detect errors

The test calls these subroutines from a common area near the front of
the test.
The sequence of calls is referred to as the "110 Cycle" (see
the 110 cycle flow chart). The monitor supplies the error type number
for all monitor detected errors.
NOTE
Data errors are reported by the test.
The 110 cycle position pointer and test section pointer are supplied in
each message.
b.

Generalized Error
At

XXY8

S/J

Format~

A2
SSE E
1 2

RTN AD DR

xx -

Test no.
Y - No. of AI Q pairs

8 - Error message
sl J - Stopl Jump parameter

60182000 K

552-7

Stops
Bit 0
Bit 1

Stop 1

Stop to enter test parameters

Stop 2

St?P at end of test section

Bit 2

Stop 4

stop at end of test

Bit 3

Stop 8

Stop on error

Jumps
Bit 4
Bit 5

Repea t conditions
Repeat test section

Bit 6
Bit 7

Repeat test
Build test list

Bit 8
Bit 9

Omit type outs
Display memory address in stops·

Bit 10
Bits 11-15

Re- enter test parameters
Not used
Section no..
Section position pointer

Ilo
c.

cycle pos ition pointer

R TN ADDR - Memory, location of error routine
DA TA ERRORS - A dummy

Ilo

cycle pointer (XXXF) is used for

data errors.
For all data errors the information following the generalized error
format will be as follows:
A3

Actual

Expected

Section No.

A4
Read buffer
address

Error
address

Transfer length
attempted

This track
address

Data Error Example:

8058

0241

Jii

OF29

Section pointer

Ilo

F339

F3B9

182B

193B

OCOO

0022

Actual Expected.Read Addr Length Trackl
Data
Data
Buffer of
Sector
Error

cycle pointer - data error

Test error routine return address - - - -..........
The error indicates bit 07 was dropped in track 1 sector 2.

The

transfer length attempted was 3072 words or one complete track.

552-8

60182000

Monitor Detected Errors
For monitor detected errors, the I/O cycle pointer will be XO -- XA;
numbers X8 -- XA are used for the interrupt processor.
The message
following the generalized error format will be in two parts.
Part 1
A3
Monitor error
Number
1)

LORR

Last Operation
(A)

Last Operation
(Q)

Monitor -Error No.
0000

*Busy status bit did not change state within specified time
(status time out), two revolutions.

0001

-;'''1/0 time out. External reject to output instruction for a
period longer than specified.

0002

I/O response error. - Reply to output instruction was
other than predicted.

0003

Status error.

0004

Actual did not equal expected.

*Interrupt time out.
time.

Interrupt did not occur within specified

LO = Last Operation Performed
10 = Write
20 -= Read
30 = Function
a.

= Response

to Last Operation Output Instruction

10 = Reply
20 = External reject
30 = Internal reject

~:{Time

Last Operation (A) = Contents of the A register for last operation.

Last Operation (Q)

= Contents

of the Q register for last operation.

is measured to the nearest millisecond.

60182000 K

552-9

Part 2
Monitor
Error No.
00

Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Time (msec)

Actual
Actual Actual
Actual
Actual
Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Time (msec)

Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4

Actual
Expected Actual
Expected Actual
Status 1 Status 1 Status 2 Status 2 Status 3

Q7
~:~Status

control

Word
0000 (not used)

Expected
Status 3

Actual
Expected
Status 4 Status 4
04

Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Time (msec)

Mask
Register

Expected 0000 (not used)
into line one hex character per line.
Status 1
Status 2

= Director status (ST 1)
= Sector address (ST 2)

Status 3
Status 4

= Memory address (ST 3)
= Last data word (ST 4)

See· F for complete status description.
~:~Status

control word = OCBS

o = Not used
C = Condition;

= Wait for
o = Wait for
1

status hit to go "off"

status hit to go "on"
B = Bit position in status word
S

552-10

= Status

word (0-3)

60182000 K

M;onitor Error Example

8068

0241

0402

OAB3

0003

3010

0001

0101

0001

0009

0001

I \

SS Section

(A)·

(Q)

El Section error pointer \
.Actual status

E2 I/O cycle pointer
Monitor error no. _ _ _-I

(STl)

(status error)

Expected status 1 -

Last operation (function)-

Actual Status 2 __________oJ

Response

(reply)------------~

(ST2)
Expected Status 2 - - - - - - - - - '

This error indicates that the data status (bit 03) is missing from ST1
after a clear controller to equipment no. 2.

The section error pointer

(E ) indicates the function was issued from the initialize routine.
The
1
I/O cycle pointer (E ) indicates the error was detected in the first re2
check status subroutine which verifies the status copied after issuing
the· clear controller function (see Drum I/O Cycle Flow Chart attached).
Note the actual and expected values for ST2 (A6, Q6) are equal.
Although the status error is in ST1, the error message will contain
actual and expected values for all status words copied as a diagnostic
aid.
f.

Refer to test section for section error codes.
NOTE
If the error was -the result of an alarm condition, the
test will issue a clear controller function before continuing.. A two-drum revolution delay will result for
timing track errors to ensure controller will be not
busy.

TEST SECTIONS
1.

Section 0
a.

Controller Clock Adjustment/ Buffer Addresses
This section does not require the computer for IIO.

Its purpose is to

instruct personnel in adjusting the controller clock to be in sync with
the bit clock on the drum.

The bit clock is approximately 342 nano-

seconds for a 60 Hz drum and 400 nanoseconds for a 50 Hz drum.
60182000

552-11

The following message will be output:
CONTROLLER CLOCK ADJ *=TEST POINT
1.

SYNC (+) CARD

ADJUST ZERO GOING CLOCK

ALL MEASUREMENTS REF. AT +1. 5V.

A26):~1

A26~:~

4+/-5 NSEC.

READ BUFFER = YYYY
WRITE BUFFER = ZZZZ
c.

The clock should be adjusted every 6 months or whenever the drum is
replaced.

Section 1
a.

Sector Address Counter

The purpose of this section is to verify the sector address counter.
The diagnostic will test for the following conditions:
1)

A bit "stuck" on

A bit "stuck" off

An intermittent bit

Either of the above conditions would cause addressing errors, resulting
. in potential catastrophic failures.
c.

To accomplish this, the sector address register status is read at
approximately 40 Hz rate for 17 milliseconds, or one revolution, and
the status stored in a continuous 850 word buffer.
The data is then
examined for proper incrementing.
8 in the SMM Stop/ Jump word.

To scope this section, set bits 5,

Bit 05 sets repeat section; bit 08

omits the typeout.
d.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Read sector address status
for one revolution.

o llX

Check for data = all zeros.

Verify the incremented sector

o 12X
o 13X

addresses.

552-12

60182000 K

Section 2
a.
b.

Initial Sector Address Register/Sector Address Compare
This section will verify the Initial Sector Address (ISA) register and
Sector Address Compare logic using all 32 sectors.

The ISA will be

preloaded at zero.
The sector address compare bit and sector address
status will be monitored to see that a complete revolution does not
occur without sensing sector compare. After detecting sector address
compare, the sector address status will be verified.
This will check
for improper loading of the ISA register.
c.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Load ISA register (first time = zer{».

021X

Wait for sector address compare,

022X

verify sector address status.
3.

Increment sector address and
repeat steps 1 and 2. Exit after
last sector.

Section 3
a.

Initial Core/Final Core Address/ Core Address Compare

This section will verify the loading of the initial/ final core address
registers and the address compare logic. This test does not require
DSA transfers, therefore the incrementing logic will be checked in
another section.

The method is as follows:

Load initial and final address registers to zero, verify compare
and core address status.

The final address register hit 00 is set and no compare verified.

The initial address register .hit 00 is set and compare status
verified.

The procedure is repeated with hits 00 and 01. After each pass
the next significant bit is added until all the bits are verified.

A sliding ones / zeros and random pattern will then be used to determine
if there is interaction on the A-write lines.

60182000

552-13

Improper loading of the initial core address register will be verified
by the final core address status.
Since the same register is used
for both operations, this will be a quick check.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation
1.

Set first pattern

Load ICA register, do not expect

Pointer

031X

core address compare.
3.

Load FCA register with pattern

032X

from step 2, expect core address
compare status.
4.

Shift pattern one place and repeat
from step 2. After 16 shifts get
next word type and repeat from
step 2.

There are four word types.

Section 4
a.

Sector Overrange/Drum Data Register

The purpose of this section is to verify the sector overrange l.ogic
and the three data registers between DSA and the drum.
The section
will perform a drum write using the data pattern from the fifth parameter stop (see

To verify sector overrange (SOR) an attempt is made to write into
the first non-existent sector as determined from the second parameter
stop (see f).

552-14

Refer to Table 1 for SOR jumper assignment.

The following sequence is performed.

60182000 K

Operation
1.

Load ICA with write buffer address.

Load FCA with write buffer

Section Error
Pointer
041X

address (lCA).

042X

Load ISA with illegal address.

043X

Enable alarm interrupt if
requested.

044X

Attempt a one-word write on first
non-existent sector.

045X

Clear controller if interrupts
not selected.

046X

Enable end of operation interrupt.

047X

Load last good ISA value.

048X

Initiate a one-word write on
last sector.

049X

The data registers located on cards A06-A07 are checked.

DSA

control for drum write is checked on card All.
Drum write cOQtrol
on A12 is checked except for checkword generation and transfer of
write data to the drum.

601.82000 K

TABLE 1.
No. of
Tracks

3-4

CARD POSITION A16
SOR Jumper Position
7-8
5-6

9-10

128

192

256

320

384

448

512

576

640

704

768

832

896

960

1024

Section 5
a.

Guarded Address

The purpose of this section is to verify the guarded address logic and
the Enable Guarded Address switch. A message will be output to set
the switch.

The highest guarded address parameter (see f) determines which track
will be used (sector 0) to verify the illegal write.

Refer to Table 2

for track address jumper assignment.

552-16

6018200.0 K

After reading from the guarded sector, the section attempts a write
to the same address.
The error is verified and a one-sector write
on the last track, sector 0 is performed.

The Guarded Address switch

is reset and the previously guarded sector is written us ing the same
data.
e.

Interrupts are not required for this section.

The following sequence is performed.

Operation

Section Error
Pointer

Output message to set Guarded
Address switch.

Load ICA register with address

051X

of read buffer.
3.

Load FCA register with address

052X

of read buffer +95.
4.

Load ISA registers with highest

053X

guarded track, sector zero.
5.
6.

Initiate Read operation

054X

Load rCA register with address

055X

of read buffer.
7.

Initiate Write operation on

056X

guarded track, sector zero.
Expect error.
8.

Clear controller

057X

Load ISA register with last

058X

track address, sector zero.
10.

Initiate Write operation on last

059X

track, sector zero.
11.

Load ISA register with highest

05AX

guarded address, sector zero.
12.

Load lCA register with address

05BX

of read buffer.

60182000 K

552-17

Section Error
Operation
13.

Pointer

Output message to clear Guarded
Address switch.

14.

Initiate Write operation on a

05CX

guarded sector using the same
data (see step 7) to preserve
the guarded sector.

TABLE 2.
Jumper Address

CARD SLOT A-16
Highest Guarded Track

128

NOTE: No jumper
7.

= track

Section 6
a.

Surface Address Test

The purpose of this section is to verify the address logic from the
controller to the drum surface.

The serialize method is used to

write each sector with its own address.

For 512 tracks, the data

would appear on the drum as follows:

552-18

60,182000 K

Sector

Word
0

Word
1

Word
95

0000

0001

00000001-

6000
0001

1
1

0
10

0020
002A

0020 002A-

0020

511

3FEO

511

3FFF

3FEO3FFF-·

Track

002A
3FEO
3FFF

The entire drum surface# or that area specified by the input parameters
(see f) is also data checked. After serializing is complete # the sector
address is reset to the first track# then read and compared to predicted
values for that track~
This procedure is repeated until all tracks have
been verified.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation
1.

Enable end of operation

Pointer
061X

interrupt if requested.
2.

Load final core address
register.

062X

Load initial core address

063X

Load initial sector address
register.

Set up write buffer (1 track).

Write 1 track.

Repeat from step 3 until all

064X

065X

tracks written.
8.

60182000 K

Load final core address
register.

066X

59 2 - 19

Error Section
Operation

Pointer
067X

Load initial core address

068X

Generate first (next) track in
write buffer.

12.

Read 1 track.

069X

13.

Compare read and write

06AF

buffers.
14.

Repeat from step 9 until last
track read and checked.

Section 7
a.

Worst Case Patterns

The purpose of this section is first, to test the drum surface for bad
spots and second, to test the head assembly and drum electronics for
rate sensitivity problems.
Each track is written with the same data
which contains 37 sets of data.
Except for one, each set is 83 words
in length.

See Table 3.

TABLE 3
Data

Length

Description

Random

Sliding zeros
Sliding ones

83 x 16
83 x 16

Each of 16 patterns is 83 words
Each of 16 patterns is 83 words

101010101010

Maximum rate change

110011001100

50.0% max.

000111000111
000011110000

84
83

33.3% max.
25. 0% max.

3072 Total

552-20

60182000 K

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Enable end of operation

Pointer
071X

interrupt if requested.
2.

Load final core address

072X

Load initial core address
register.

073X

Load initial sector address

074X

Write 1 track.

075X

Load final core address
register.

076X

Load initial core address

077X

r.egister.

Load initial sector address

078X

Read 1 tra ck •
dat~

10.

Verify the

11.

If last track verified. exit.
If not. increment the track

079X
07AF

address and go to step 2.
9.

Section 8
a..

Maintenance

The purpose of this section is to allow the operator to des ign a mini
diagnostic which operates under 110 cycle control. The following modes
are available as defined in 5).

60182000 K

552-21

Operating Mode
1.

Write only

2.
3.
4.
5.

Read only
Write, read
Write, read. and data check
Read only, data check

Data transfers may be made with or without interrupts as determined
by Stop 3. See 3}.

The initial track! sector address is entered via Stop 4.
For example, track 4 sector 12 = b08C.

The transfer length is entered concurrent with the operating mode.

The data pattern to be written is entered via Stop 5.

This section is designed to loop indefinitely.

See 4}.

See 2}.

The method used to

stop execution and redefine the operating conditions is as follows:
I}

Set the skip key.
A

= SMM

ID word

Q = S!J

Set bit 10 in the Stop! Jump word.
stop to re- enter parameters.

This is a request to

Hit run; the second SMM stop is displayed.

Hit run again; the test will stop for parameter entry. Remove
bit 10 from the Stop! Jump word and make parameter changes.

The skip key is checke~ a maximum of six times in the I! 0 cycle and
once in the monitor.
Therefore, it's possible to repeat step 1 seven
times (worst case) before reaching the re-enter parameter stop.
h.

This section should be used as a diagnostic aid in troubleshooting
specific problem areas. A high degree of sync control for scoping
is available through the length of transfer and initial sector address
value parameters.

552-22

The following sequence is performed.

60182000 K

Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Enable end of operation
interrupt if requested.

081X

Load final core address based
on length parameter.

082X

Load initial core address

083X

Load initial sector address

084X

based on parameter -data.
5.

Write~

lengtb based on

{)85X

parameter data.
6.

Repeat steps _1 - 6 for write
only. Continue to step 7 for
read.

Load final core address based

086X

on length parameter....
8.

Load initial core address

087X

088X

10.

Read~ length based on parameter data.

089X

11.

Verify data if requested" if
not go to step 1.

08AF

Step 1 also checks the skip key to determine if a stop to re- enter
parameter
10.

60182000 K

has been requested.

Section 9
a.

Autoload and Program Protect

This section is in two parts. Part 1 verifies the autoload logic and
part 2 checks the protect logic.

552-23

Part 1 is checked by saving the autoload image (1536 words) in
the write buffer, writing the autoload area, clearing core from
o - 5FF, initiating an autoload and comparing the data to the
write buffer. If an error is detected, the write buffer image is
returned to low core and the data error reported. Note the actual
error is destroyed.

Part 2 verifies both the controller and computer protect fault logic.
The conditions stated in Table 4 are checked for the proper response. Interrupts are disabled during the protect section.

TABLE 4.

Controller
Response

Controller
PP Switch

I/O
PP Bit

1
0

0
1

Ext. Reject
Reply

To verify controller protect fault, a read drum is initiated under the
following conditions.

= 1536

Read buffer, length

words, is protected.

Drum PROTEC T switch is off.

CPU PROTECT switch is on.

Output instruction is not protected.

After processing the protect fault, the read buffer is checked to ensure
no DSA transfers had taken place. If a data error is detected, the
following message is added to the normal data error:
CPU SHOULD NOT HAVE ACCEPTED DSA
DATA DURING FORCED PROTECT FAULT.

552-24

60182000 K

It is possible for the controller to write, under protected conditions,
to the CPU and not detect a protect fault.
1)

Read buffer protected.

Output instruction protected.

CPU PROTECT switch on.

An example is as follows.

A faulty DSA transmitter for bit 17 (protect) would indicate to the
CPU that the output instruction was not protected and would not write
into memory.

The CPU sends the DSA protect fault signal but it is

not sensed in the controller.

The problem could be a bad cable,

receiver, or another DSA device holding down bit 17.
e.

The missed protect fault is checked as follows:
1)

Generate random data in read buffer.

Generate same data in write buffer.

Read autoload area under protected conditions (d).

Compare read/write buffers, expect no compare.

Print the following message after compare:
DSA PROTECT FAULT NOT
DETECTED BY CONTROLLER
P = XXXX

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Enable end of operation

091X

interrupt if requested.
2.

Load FCA register

092X

WRBUF+1535.
3.
4.

Load ICA register

= WRBUF.

093X

Load ISA register

= track

094X

sector O.
5.

60182000 K

Write autoload area.

Q95X

552-25

Section Error
Operation
6.

Pointer

Print autoload message.
clear core from 0-5FF,
wait 10 seconds.

Verify the data.

096F

Print message to set drum
and console PROTEC T
switches.

Load FCA register =

097X

RDBUF+1535 (autoload area).

= RDBUF.

10.

Load ICA register

11.

Fill read and write buffers
with same data.

12.

Initiate read, expect external

098X

099X

reject.
13.

Print message to clear drum
PROTEC T switch. Protect
read buffer.

14.

Initiate read, expect protect
fault. Verify memory
address status = RDBUF+1.

09AX

15.

Clear controller.

09BX

16.

Check read buffer data to

09AF

verify no DSA transfers.
A special message is added
to the normal data error.
17.

Load ICA register = RDBUF.

09CX

18.

Read 16 sectors beginning

09DX

track 0, sector O. Output
instruction is protected.

552-26

60182000

Section Error
Operation
19.

Pointer

Check data determine if
protect fault occurred.
If yes. print special message.

11.

20.

Clear read buffer protect bits.

21.

Print clear CPU PROTECT
switch message.

Section 10
a.

Checkword check
1)

This section should be run to check the drum surface when. the
customer will not allow writing on the drum.

That portion of the drum surface as defined to the test during
parameter input time, is read a track at a time.
The data is
stored in the read buffer but not checked.
before, during. and after each operation.

Status is checked

For 60 Hz power timing is approximately 30 tracks per second.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Enable end of operation
interrupt if requested.

OAIX

Load FCA register.

OA2X

Load ICA register.

OA3X

Load ISA register.

OA4X

Initiate Read operation.

OA5X

Check for last track. If not
last, increment track address
and repeat from step 3.

last, exit.

60182000 K

552-27

12.

Section 11
a.

Clear timing error
l)

This section verifies that a clear controller function issued after
sensing a timing error interrupt will result in a timing error
cleared interrupt.

The interrupt line must be connected in order to execute this section.

The following sequence is performed.
Section Error
Operation

Pointer

Print the generate timing
error message:
MOMENTARILY GND

Al4~:'2.

Enable alarm interrupt.

OB1X

Output a dummy function to

OB2X

enable I/O cycle to select
interrupts then wait for clear
timing error interrupt.
4)

A 1 second delay after sensing the timing error prevents multiple
interrupts.

SPECIAL TESTS

Checkword Check
a.

The checkword will be held in ST4 (status word 4) when test point
All ~'26 is grounded. Four unique checkwords will be verified using
Section 8 to control the number of words written on the drum.

Set the stop on error bit (03) in the Stop/ Jump word.

Set up Section

8, see 5), to perform a write and read only using the values in
Table 5.
error.

Ground test point All ':'26.

Start test and observe the

The actual value for ST4 should contain the checkword as

described in Table 5.
Repeat for all four conditions.

552-28

60182000· K

TABLE 5.

Data

Checkword (ST4>!<)

No.

No. of Words

0000

0001

5555

FFEA

FFEB

AAAA

002A

002B

FFFF

FFCO

FFC1

STATUS DESCRIPTION
Director Status

Status 1 (ST 1)
AD

Ready

):~):~

Busy

A2
A3

Interrupt
Data (Ready not busy)

End of operation

A5
A6

Alarm
Lost data

Protected

Checkword error

Protect fault

A10
A 11

Guarded address enable
Timing track error ):o:~

A12

Power failure

A13

Sector address compare

A14
A15

Guarded address error
Sector overrange ):~*

):o:~

):0:':

):G:~

):~):~

Status 2 (ST 2)
AO-A4

Sector

A5-A14
A15

Track
Core address compare

):~Status

in either column is good.
sector.
):~):'Generates alarm.

60182000

Sector Address Status

The LSB is actually the MSB of the first word of the next

552-29

Status 3 (ST 3)
AO-A15

Core Address Status

Core address
Status 4 (ST4)

AO-15

552-30

Last Data Status

Last drum data word

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
Q3

Function
Write
AO
Al

Clear Controller
Disable I Clear Interrupt

Enable EOP Interrupt

Enable Alarm Interrupt

Read

Load initial sector address

Load initial core address

Load final core addres s

60182000 K

CHECK STATUS
ERROR XO
ERROR X8*

RECOGNIZE
INTERRUPT
ERROR X3

EXIT I/O
CYCLE

*INTERRUPT PROCESSOR ERROR CODE

DRUM I/O CYCLE

60182000 K

552-31

1738 DISK QUICK LOOK TEST
(DP5P84 Test No. 84)
I.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

This is a one section test; therefore, there is no sections parameter.

Do not select Read and Write buffers and transfer length that could destroy
either the monitor or test(s).

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

Called as external test under SMM17 V3. 0 or above.

This test uses the MBS control package in V3. 0; therefore, bit 08 must be set
in the SMM control word after Quick Look executes.

PARAMETERS
If bit 00 of the SMM Stop/ Jump parameter is set at the start of the test, a parameter

s top occurs.
Stops

8451

P 035B

P 095C

0600

0000

4400

0000

Stop~

= Stop/ Jump

A = First available location after test
Q

= FWA-1 Write buffer

= FWA-1 Read buffer

Q = Maximum transfer length

A = First available disk address

' - - - - - - - Maintenance bell
~-----------

o = Disk address is in sectors (1 700 MSOS)
1 = Disk address is Cyl-Head-Sector

o = 854
'--------------------1 = 853
60182000 K

553-1

Stop
5

A = Interrupt data - BLBL (status bit-line no •• status bit-line no. )
See 'supplement E. II-D-3 for detailed explanation.

A=O to run with-

out interrupts.
Q = 0

MESSAGES
No message will occur if bit 08 of the Stop/ Jump word is set.
1.

Test title and initial address typeout:
1738 QUICK LOOK TEST 84
IA = XXXX
XXXX is the initial address of the test.

Parameter list type out after last stop:
A1

8451

S/ J

XXXX

YYYY

ZZZZ

0600

0000

4000

4400

0000

(See Stops)
3.

End of 1738 Test:
A1

8434

S/ J

Pass No.

Return Address

Error Count

0000

Error Messages
All error messages are in the format specified by SMM1 7.
A1

84X8

S/ J

OOYY

Q2
Return Address

x = Number of pairs of words to be typed
YY = Error code
Additional information is given depending on the error type.
E.

ERROR STOPS
1.

The test reports two types of errors.
a.

MBS Detected Errors
All MBS detected errors must be decoded based on the A3 error stop which
will contain a number 0000 - 0004.

The most often reported error is 0003

(status error).

553-2

60182000 K

MBS No.

LastIIO-Response

A-Register

A3 = MBS detected error number 0000-0004
Q3 = Last 1/0:
Response:
10 - Write
20 - Read
30 - Function

10
20
30

= Reply
= External Reject
= Internal Reject

A4 = A register contents for last 1/0
Q4 = Q register contents for last 1/0
For status errors (A5, Q5, and A6) 06 will contain actual and expected
values for director and cylinder address status, respectively.
See supplement E, II-B-5 for a detailed explanation.
b.

Data Errors

Error code 13 is the only data error, all others are MBS detected errors.
DESCRIPTION OF INDIVIDUAL ERROR CODES

Sectionl
Error Code

Application

= ready-on cylinder.

0000

Verify director status

0001

Select unit with or without interrupts.

0002

Verify director status

0003

Seek to random address.

0004

If selected, wait 1 millisecond for interrupt.

= ready and on cylinder.

Verify ready and

busy while waiting.
0005

Wait 200 milliseconds for busy to drop.

Verify ready, busy,

and EOP while waiting.
0006

No interrupts; verify ready, on cylinder. and EOP after busy
drops.

Interrupts; verify ready and on cylinder.

Verify

cylinder address status.
0007

Write random length, random data record.

0008

Wait for interrupt (if selected) 100 milliseconds.

Verify ready

and busy while waiting.
0009

Wait 100 milliseconds for busy to drop.

Verify ready and busy

while waiting.

60182000 K

553-3

Section!
Error 'Code
OOOA

Application
Verify ready, on cylinder, and EOP for no interrupts; ready
and on cylinder after interrupt processing.

Verify cylinder

address status.
OOOE

Load same address used for write.

OOOC

If selected, wait 1 millisecond for interrupt.

Verify ready and

busy while waiting.
OOOD

Wait 100 milliseconds for busy to drop.

Verify ready and busy

while waiting.
OOOE

Interrupts; verify ready and on cylinder.
verify ready, on cylinder, and EOP.

No interrupts;

Verify cylinder address

status.
OOOF

Read random length, random data record.

0010

If selected, wait 200 milliseconds for the interrupt.

Verify

ready and busy while waiting.
0011

Wait 200 milliseconds for busy to drop.

Verify ready and busy

while waiting.
0012

Interrupts; verify ready and on cylinder.
verify ready, on cylinder, and EOP.

No interrupts;

Verify cylinder address

status.
0013

Data error.

Actual

Expected

0014

A4
Compare
Address

Error
Address

Transfer
Length

Last Address
Output

Verify status after interrupt.
interrupt, and EOP.

After load address

verify ready,

Ignore cylinder address status.

After data transfer verify ready, interrupt, on cylinder, and
EOP.

Verify cylinder address status.

0015

Reselect unit, enable interrupts.

0016

After load address verify ready status only.
address status.

Ignore cylinder

After data transfer verify ready and on cylinder.

Verify

cylinder address status.
553-4

60182000 K

II.

DESCRIPTION
A.

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
This test is designed to be a quick check of the controller and drive through the use
of random data, transfer length, and drive positioning.

Test parameters allow the

user to place the Head and Write buffers anywhere in unused memory.
preset to follow the test.

They are

The number of words transferred will be between 1 and

the maximum length as described in the test parameters.

The data will be random.

To simulate 1 700 MSOS protected operation, reset the SLS key and set the PROTECT
key.
B.

The protect option may be turned on and off while the test is running.

BASIC PROGRAM FLOW
1.

Load random address.

Write random data, random length.

Reload the same address.

Read disk.

Compare data.

Repeat test 1024 times.

MAINTENANCE AIDS
1.

For systems with a teletype, the test will ring the teletype bell (parameter)
after detecting an error.

It is intended to be used with the omit typeout feature

as an aid in locating intermittent failures.
ing could be done in this mode.

For example, card and cable check-

The failure would be indicated without waiting

for the printout before resuming the test.
2.

For unattended runs, the omit typeout feature could be used.
clear the omit typeout bit.
lated errors.

After the run,

The end test message will contain the total accumu-

Restarting the test clears the error counter.

RUNNING TIME
Approximately 3 minutes on a 1 704.

DETAILED FLOW CHARTS

60182000 K

553-5

TEST DP5 1738 Q/L

ENTER

CHECK LAST
ST ATUS (R ECKST)

553-6

60182000 K

REPEAT
TEST

REPORT
THE ERROR

60182000 K

553-7

1738, 1733-1/853, 854, and QSE 4730 DISK PACK TEST
(DP3027, Test No. 27)
(CP = 2F)
1.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Cautions to User
a.

The range of cylinders upon which data will be written may be limited
during the parameter stop.

The lower limit is ignored in Section 12 (data

is written in cylinder 0 to be autoloaded).
b.

A large number of typeouts and/ or stops may occur for error codes 14,
1 B, and 1 D unless bit 11 of the Stop/ Jump parameter is set.

In Section 12 (Autoload) the diagnostic may be destroyed if Autoload function
is not working properly.

Section 12 should not be run on a Maintenance

Pack.
d.

When using a new pack, it is necessary to ensure that the pack has address
tags and data on the entire surface before checkword functions are performed.

Running Section 10 and then Section 6 will ensure that the pack

contains correct data required for other sections.
e.

Caution should be exercised when running Section 15 if DT193 is installed
because it involves core to core transfer from originating computer to
computer on other access.

The transfer is one for one, so at the end of

the section, computer 2 will have the same thing in core as computer 1,
except location 0 which must be hand loaded if SMM is to be started from
location O.
f.

Bits 2 and 3 of the SMM parameter word must specify the correct
machine type.

LOADING PROCEDURE
1~

The test operates as a sub-program under control of the 1 700 System Maintenance Monitor (SMM17).

The test mnemonic is DP3, number 27.

The call sequence is that specified by SMM1 7.

PARAMETERS
1.

If no parameter stop is made, the test will use prestored parameters as

follows:

60182000 L

Sections 1 through 5, 8, 11, and 13.

Range limits: cylinder C 16 -low limit, cylinder 63 -upper limit.
16
554-1

Interrupt line: preset to interrupt line 3

Unit number: preset to unit 0

To alter parameters, follow directions stated in SMM1 7.

(See SMM! Operator

Interface Section V. )
a.

First Stop: A = 2721, Q = Stop! Jump parameter.

Second Stop:
Bit 0 of A

= Section 1 - static status check

Bit 1 of A = Section 2 - random positioning
Bit 2 of A = Section 3 - write, read, compare
Bit 3 of A = Section 4 - write, read, compare using interrupts
Bit 4 of A = Section 5 - force address errors, check write and read into
next cylinder
Bit 5 of A = Section 6 - surface test, Alarm, and EOP interrupt selected
Bit 6 of A

= Section 7 - check overlapping seek

Bit 7 of A = Section 8 - variable sector length check
Bit 8 of A = Section 9 - protect test
Bit 9 of A = Section 10 - write address tags
Bit 10 of A = Section 11 - positioning timing check
Bit 11 of A = Section 12 - autoload check (CAUTION: see restrictions)
Bit 12 of A

= Section 13 - check word check of surface

Bit 13 of A

= Section 14 - 1733-1 extra options check

Bit 14 of A = Section 15 - core to core transfer and check
Bit 15 of A = 0, 853 type disk drive
Bit 15 of A = 1, 854 type disk drive
Range limits Q = XXYY

= lowest numbered cylinder to be written on (Section 12 ignores this

limit)

= OC

- preset value

YY = highest number cylinder to be written on
YY

= 63 16 - preset value is for 853

YY = CA 16 - value to be entered for 854
554-2

60182000 K

Third Stop:
A

= interrupt line (e. g., pit 3 in A set for interrupt line 3)

= set bit X to run unit X. The lowest unit selected will be run in all
sections except Section 7, (overlap seek) where all units selected will
be run

(bit 0 = unit 0, bit 1 = unit 1, etc.)

SELECTIVE SKIP and STOP Settings:
1.

STOP - should be set for SMM17 running.

SKIP - should only be set to display Stop/ Jump parameters for purposes
of changing same.

II.

OPERA TOR COMMUNICATIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Normal Program Typeouts
a.

Test identification during test initialization:
I

DP 3027, 1700 Disk Subsystem
Ver. 3. 1
LA - XXXX, FC = XX

I CP2F,
I

End of Test
A

2724

Stop/ Jump Parameter

Pass Number

Return Address

Error Messages
General format of error display is shown under SMM/ Operator Interface
Descriptions in Section V of SMM Manual.
General Display Format:
A

Information
Stop/ Jump
Word (2738
Parameter
for three
stops and 2748
for four stops)

60182000 L

Section/
Error
Code

Q
Return
Address

A
Q
Additional
Data

554-3

ERROR CODE DICTIONARY
Message Code
(H exade cimal)
00

Program
Tag Name

Message and Description

INP

External reject

OUTPUT

A = Director status at reject
Q = Contents of Q at reject

INP

Internal reject of input to A

IECHK

A = BADD

lED

Q = Contents of Q upon input to A

A = Contents of A at last output from A
Q
02

= Contents of Q at last output from A

OUTPUT

Internal reject on output from A

lEA

A = Director status
Q

= Address register status

A = Contents of A at last output from A
Q =

IEC

Contents of Q at last output from A

Interrupt status bit not set when interrupt
occurred
A

= Selected interrupts
1 - Ready, not busy
2 - End of operation
4 - Alarm

= Status at interrupt

A = Contents of Q at last output
04

IEB

Non-selected interrupt occurred (or interrupt
occurred too soon)
Display same as error code 03

lEE

Interrupt status bits not cleared by clear
interrupt function
A = Status at interrupt
Q = Status after clearing interrupt

A = Contents of A at last output from A
Q =

Contents of Q at last output from A
(other than Clear Interrupt function)

554-4

60182000 K

Message Code
(H exadecimal)
06

Program
Tag Name
CONALARM
SECIC

Message and Description
Ready status not present
A

Director status

Q, = Address register status
A = Address register previous to this operation
Q = Contents of Q at last output from A

SECIA

On Cylinder status not present
A = Director status
Q = Address register status

BUSYPRES

Busy not present after an output from A
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Storage parity error
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Defective track

Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Addr.ess error
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Seek error
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Lost data
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Checkword error
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Protect fault
Display same as for error code 06

CONALARM

Alarm condition present but alarm status bit
not set
Display same as for error code 06

60182000 K

554-5

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
11

Program
Tag Name
ADDRESS

Message and Description
Address register status does not equal loaded
address after load address and waiting for
Not Busy
A
Q

= BADD
= Director

status

A = Address register status
Q = Loaded address

SX15

Controller reserved during attempt to check
core to core transfer (MC other computer.)
Execute clear reserve

S8X15

No compare status bit set during an uneven
sector compare
A
Q

= Director
= Cylinder

status
status

A = Buffer length
Q = Expected cylinder address

COMPARE

Data compare error.

Write and read buffer

are compared in computer
A

Cylinder register status

= Number

of word in error

A = Word written
Q

= Word

read

(By setting bit 11 in Stop/ Jump parameter,
multiple errors in same buffer can be eliminated)
15

COMBUF

No compare status bit set
A = Director status
Q

SEC5B

= Cylinder

No alarm interrupt occurred when forcing an
address error by loading an illegal address
A = Loaded address
Q

= Director status
= Interrupt line

Q = Selected interrupts (see error code 03)

554-6

60182000 K

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
17

Program
Tag Name
SEC5D
SEC5V

Message and Description
An address error was forced but status bit
not set
A = Loaded address
Q = Director status

SEC5U

No alarm interrupt occurred when attempting
to force address error by initiating checkword
check with illegal address
Display same as error code 16

SEC51

Address error not present when writing off
end of pack
Display same as error code 1 7

BUSYPRES

Controller hung busy (automatic abort if run
after error)
A = Director status
Q = Return address of routine calling busy

Contents of A during last output

Q = Contents of Q during last output

SEC6
ERROR

Surface check detected data error
A

Address of sector in error

Q = Number of word into sector

A = Data expected
Q = Data read

(Set bit 11 in Stop/ Jump parameter to ignore
rest of errors in this sector or track. )
1C

SC11B

Maximum positioning time (165 milliseconds)
was exceeded
A = Time required (milliseconds, hexadecimal)
Q

S12D

= Loaded address

A utoload failed to load correct data.
Set bit 11 in the Stop/ Jump parameter to ignore
the rest of the words in error
A = BADD

= Number of word in error
A = Word written
Q = Word in core after autoload
Q

60182000 K

554-7

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
1E

Program
Tag Name
CONALARM

Message and Description
End of operation status not present
Display same as for error code 16

SEC1B

Status other than Ready, On Cylinder is present
(ignoring protect status) during static check
Display same as for error code 07

SEC5X

Alarm interrupt did not occur when writing
off the end of disk pack
Display same as for error code 16

ADRINTP
WRT1
RD1
CW1
CB1

No interrupt occurred when End of Operation
or Ready, Not Busy interrupt was selected
A

= Selected interrupts

(see error code 03)

Q = Director status

A = Contents of A upon last output from A
Q = Contents of Q upon last output from A

ADW2
SEC8

During a wait for operation to complete busy
dropped before expected address was attained
A = Director status
Q = Cylinder status
A = Buffer length
Q = Expected address

ADW5
SEC8

During a wait for operation to complete
expected address was attained;
however, busy did not drop
Display same as error code 22

CONALARM

Alarm status bit set, no alarm condition
Display same as error code 06

SEC5M

No compare status not set after attempting to
force no compare status
A = Director status
Q

554-8

= Cylinder register status

60182000 K

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
26

Program
Tag Name
CKAC

Message and Description
Unit went to incorrect address during overlaps
seek
A

Unit number

Q = Director status

A = Loaded address

Q = Cylinder register status
27

S5X3

Reject during Off Cylinder when attempting a
dir ec tor func tion
A

if internal reject; 1 if external reject

Q = N/A

S5XE

Second address accepted when sent during
Off Cylinder
A = 200 if a reply 0 if internal reject
Q = N/A

S14X1

Unit Not Ready, On Cylinder after a Clear
Controller function
A

= Director

status

Q = Expected status

S14X3

CERR

Checkword error
A

Actual checkword

= Predicted checkword

Controller went not reserved, however no
interrupt received
A = Director status
Q = N/A

ADW2

Cylinder address went beyond that expected
A = Director status

Q = Cylinder status
A = Buffer length

Q = Expected address

60182000 K

554-9

Message Code
(H exadecimal)
2D

Program
Tag Name
CC1

Message and Description
Return cylinder function address not the same
as cylinder status
A = Return cylinder address (after reconstruction)
Q = Cylinder status

S14X71

Buffered load address does not compare with
address expected
A = Actual address
Q = Address sent via buffered load address

VFYCWA

Current word address register incorrect
A = Expected CWA
Q = Actual CWA

Address upon completion of a Ready, Write,

Compare, or Checkword Check operation is
not equal to the expected address
A = Contents of Q upon last output from A
(other than Clear Interrupt function)
Q = Director status

A
Q

= Address register status
= Expected address

Recoverable error occurred during checkword
check (Section 13)
A = Address of track causing error
Q = Director status when last error occurred

Non-recoverable error occurred during
checkword check (Section 13)
Display same as for error code 31

S9X13

No protect fault status when forced
A

= Director status

Q = N/A

S9X2

Non-protected output instruction replied on a
protected controller
A

= N/A

Q = N/A

554-10

60182000 K

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
35

Program
Tag Name
S9X3

Message and Description
Non-protected input instruction rejected on
protected controller
A = N/A
Q = N/A

S9X32

Protected unit select failed
A = N/A

Q = N/A
37

Protect status not present
A = Director status
Q = N/A

Non-protected write sequence on protected unit
did not reject
A = N/A
Q = N/A

39
through
3F

Not used

Operator error.

Interrupt line or equipment

address in error.

Test must be reloaded.

A = Selected equipment address
Q

= Selected interrupt line

(if any)

III. DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.

The 1738 (or 1733-1) 85X Disk Sub-System Diagnostic (DP3-27) Test is divided
into 15 individually selectable test sections.
13 are prestored as normally selected tests.
must be selected by the operator.
selected.

Sections 1 through 5, 8, 11, and
Sections 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, and 15

Section 7 should have at least two units

Sections 14 and 15 should not be run on a 1738 or a 1733-1 without

DT193 installed in the 1733-1.

60182000 K

554-11

SECTIONS DESCRIPTION
1.

Section 1 - Static Status Check
a.

Select unit.

Input director status.

c.
2.

Ready should be present.

On Cylinder should be present.

No other status (other than protected) should be present.

Loop to step a 499 times.

Sec tion 2 - Random Positioning Check
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert random number to legal addresses.

Select unit.

Load address.

Check for expected address.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Update address.

Loop to step c 95 times.

Section 3 -

Write~

Read~

and Compare

Generate 96 random words and one random address.

Select unit.

Load

address~

check for expected address, alarm conditions, and End of

Operation status.

554-12

Write one sector.

Check Not Busy address.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Loop to step b if repeat conditions selected.

Select unit.

Load address.

Read one sector.

Check Not Busy address.

Check alarm conditions.

Loop to step n to repeat conditions.
60182000 K

Select unit.

Execute checkword check.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Check Not Busy address.

Loop to step n to repeat conditions.

Select unit.

Load address, check for expected address, alarm conditions, and End of
Operation status.

Execute Compare function.

Check for Not Compare status.

Check alarm conditions and End of Operation status.

Check Not Busy address.

Loop to step s to repeat conditions.

If no alarm condition or unexpected address occurred, compare input

buffer with output buffer area.
aa. Loop to step z to repeat condition.
abo Loop to step a 95 times.
4.

Section 4 - Write, Read, and Compare Under Interrupt Control
Same as Section 3 except interrupts on Alarm, End of Operation, and Next
Ready Not Busy are selected prior to performing a Load Address, Read,
Write, Checkword Check, and Compare operation.

After the interrupt occurs,

the status at interrupt is checked for alarm conditions.
5.

60182000 K

Section 5 - Force Address Errors and Check Writing Into Next Cylinder
a.

Generate illegal address (OOFO).

Select unit.

Select interrupt on alarm.

Load illegal address.

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step c to repeat conditions.

554-13

Select interrupt on alarm.

Initiate checkword check.

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step h to repeat conditions.

Generate an illegal address (FFOO)

Loop to step b once.

Form last sector address of unit (CA9F for 854, 639F for 853).

Jump to step v if range of cylinders to be written into is not high enough
to include this cylinder.

Load address and check alarm conditions.

Write 97 words (off end of disk pack).

Check whether correct interrupt occurred.

Check address Error status.

Loop to step q to repeat conditions.

Generate legal address.

Load address and check alarm conditions.

Write 97 words.

Load address and check alarm conditions.

Add one to second word of buffer area.

aa. Execute Compare function.
abo Check No Compare status (should be set).
ac. Loop to step w to repeat conditions.
ad. Generate address of last sector of a cylinder.
ae. Load address and check alarm conditions.
af.

Write 97 words (into next cylinder).

ago Check alarm conditions.
ah. Loop to step ae to repeat conditions.
ai.

554-14

Load address and check alarm conditions.

60182000 K

aj.

Execute Compare function.

ak. Check No Compare status and alarm conditions.
al.

Loop to step ai and repeat conditions.

am. Load address and check alarm conditions.
an. Head 97 words.
ao. Check alarm conditions.
ape Loop to step am to repea t conditions.
aq. If no alarm conditions occurred between steps ae to aq, compare input
buffer area with output buffer area.
are Loop to step a 95 times.
6.

Section 6 - Surface Check
a.

Set up Read and Write routines for a 1536 -word buffer (one track) .or a
96-word buffer (one sector), depending on available core.

Generate address of first cylinder to be written on.

Generate pattern, 6161 for first pass through section, CECE for second
pass.

Fill buffer area with pattern, alternate words complemented.

Select unit and select interrupts on Alarm and End of Operation.

Load address and write under interrupt control.

Check for correct interrupts and alarm conditions.

Check Not Busy address.

Loop to step c to repeat conditions

Increment address.

Loop to step f unless address is greater than last cylinder to be written
into.

60182000 K

He-initialize address.

Select unit and select interrupts on Alarm and End of Operation.

Load address and read under interrupt control.

Check for correct interrupts and alarm conditions.

Check Not Busy address.

554-15

If no alarm conditions occurred in step m, check whether expected pattern

was read.
r.

Loop to step m to repeat conditions.

Increment address.

Loop to step n unless address is greater than address of last cylinder to be
written into.

u.
7.

Loop to step b once.

Section 7 - Check Overlap Seek
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert to legal addresses.

Select first unit (unit specified in parameter word during initial parameter
stop).

554-16

Load address.

Wait for End of Operation status (may still be busy).

Select another unit.

Load address.

Wait for End of Operation status (may still be busy).

Repeat for all units selected.

Select first unit.

Wait for Not Busy.

Check whether address register status equals loaded address.

Select another unit.

Wait for Not Busy.

Check whether address register status equals loaded address.

Repeat for all units selected.

Loop to step c 95 times.

Section 8 - Various Sector Length Checks
a.

Initialize, passcount; input buffer, less sector value.

Generate a random data buffer.

Set output buffer to less than one sector.

60182000 K

Select unit and reserve.

Load address.

Write partial sector.

Check Cylinder status.

Check alarms.

Repeat conditions to step d.

Load address.

Read one sector.

Check alarms.

Repeat conditions to step j.

Clear part of buffer not written for zero fill check.

Compare Write and Head buffer.

Repeat condition to step d for continuous write.

Load address.

Execute a less than full sector compare.

Check Cylinder status.

Check alarms.

Repeat conditions to step q.

Repeat sub-section to step c.

Change value of less than sector.

Generate a random buffer of length specified by passcount and Buffer table.

Set FWA-1 in output buffer.

Set address to low address limit.

aa. Load address.
abo Predict Cylinder address after executing transfer.
ac. Execute a Write.
ad. Wait for operation to complete by checking for expected Cylinder address.
ae. Repeat condition to step aa.
af.

60182000 K

Load address.

554-17

ago Execute a Compare.
ah. Wait for operation to complete by checking for expected Cylinder address.
ai.

Check No Compare status.

aj.

Repeat condition to step af.

ak. Loop to step g until passcount is zero.
9.

554-18

Section 9 - Protect Test
a.

Initialize passount and output buffer

Set address to low limit.

Select and reserve.

Position.

Clear all protect bits in core.

Set one location in buffer protected.

Set protect on computer and clear device protect.

Execute a Read operation.

Check for Protect Fault status.

Repeat condition to step c.

Set device protect.

Clear PROTECT switch on computer.

Position to low limit.

Set protect bits for output of unit select.

Set PROTEC T switch

Execute a unit select with protected instruction.

Input director status to check protect status bit.

Check that a Clear Interrupt function is rejected.

Repeat condition to step w.

Check Input Cylinder status is accepted.

Repeat condition to step w.

Execute a Write sequence with unit protect set.

Clear PROTECT switch.

Expect a reject.

60182000 K

Repeat condition to step m.

Clear unit protect.

aa. Repeat condition to step m.
abo Repeat sections.
NOTE: In order to present errors through SMM with PROTECT switch set, A stop
is first executed to allow protect to be taken off.
10.

(A) = FOOO indicates this.

Section 10 - Write Address Tags
a.

Generate address of first cylinder to be written onto.

Select unit.

Write addresses on track.

Wait not busy.

Increment track number.

Loop to step c unless address is greater than address of last cylinder to be
written in.

11.

Section 11 - Positioning Time Check
a.

Generate 96 random numbers.

Convert random numbers to legal addresses.

Make several of the addresses equal to the lowest and highest possible
address es, alternately.

12.

60182000 K

Initiate load address and initialize millisecond count.

Wait 1 millisecond.

Increment millisecond count.

Check status for busy.

Loop to step e if busy.

Error if millisecond count greater than 165

Loop to step d 95 times.

Section 12 - Autoload (CAUTION: See Restrictions, page 205-1)
a.

Move first 1536 (600

Select unit.

) words of core to buffer area.

554-19

13.

Load address, cylinder zero, track zero, sector zero.

Wait not busy.

Write 1536 words.

Change one location in low core.

Stop.

Operator should push AUTOLOAD button.

Compare buffer area with low core.

Section 13 - Check Recoverable Errors
a.

Initial address equals zero.

Select unit.

Initialize attempt counter.

Initiate checkword check.

Wait not busy.

Check status for Checkword, Lost Data, Seek Storage Parity, Defective
Track errors.

14.

554-20

Jump to step m if not set.

Save Error status.

Increment attempt counter.

Loop to step d unless attempt counter equals 10.

Error is not recoverable.

Jump to step n.

No errors if attempt counter equals initial value; recoverable error if not.

Increment track address.

Loop to step c unless address is greater than last possible address.

Section 14 - 1733 Optional Test (DT193 must be installed)
a.

Set passcount to 96.

Check reserve.

Send a Clear Controller.

Wait for On Cylinder.

60182000 K

Repeat condition to step b.

Release reserve.

Check Ready, On Cylinder status.

Build an output buffer for checkword check.

Select Alarm and Seek interrupt.

Check reserve.

Load address and check for Seek interrupt.

Select EOP and Alarm interrupt.

Write buffer.

Repeat condition to step i.

Check (CWA) Current Word Address register.

Repeat sub-condition to step i (bit 11).

Check reserve.

Load address.

Select Read Checkword function.

Set input buffer to one extra word.

Execute a Read sequence.

Repeat condition to step q.

Check CWA register.

Release reserve.

Compare input and output buffer internally.

Repeat sub-section to step i (bit 12).

aa. Compare actual and expected checkword.
abo

Repeat condition back to step q (bit 11).

ac. Check reserve.
ad. Select Return Address function.
ae. Execute a three-word read.
af.

Repeat condition to step ac.

ago Compare Buffered Cylinder register and Cylinder status.

60182000 K

554-21

ah. Repeat sub-condition to step ac (bit 11).
ai.

Prepare buffer for masked compare.

aj.

Load address.

ak. Select Masked Compare function.
al.

Execute a Compare operation.

am. Repeat condition to step aj.
an. Execute special Checkword Check operation.
ao. Check status and alarms.
ape Repeat condition to step an.
aq. Execute a buffered load address using address 5595 or 2A6A (Hex).
are Compare cylinder status with address buffered out.
as. Repeat condition to step aq.
at.

Check Interrupt on next not reserved.

au. Next iteration to step b.
avo Repeat section to step a.
15.

Section 15 - Core to Core Transfer Test;

Program Transfer to Other

Computers (CAUTION: see restrictions at I. A.)

554-22

Check if controller is reserved.

Report if controller is reserved, and loop back to a.

Set input buffer the same as output buffer.

Select unit and reserve controller.

Transfer 96 word buffer to other computer.

Check alarms and status.

Clear output buffer.

Transfer 96 word buffer from other computer.

Check alarms and status.

Compare output buffer to input buffer as stored in step c.

If repeat condition, reset outputbuffer and loop to step d.

Save location O.

60182000 K

Store Last Word address of program in location O.

Execute core to core transfer of entire program to other computer (all
except location zero).

Check alarms and status.

Reset location zero.

Release controller reserve.

Repeat condition to step 1.

s..

Repeat section to step a.

NOTE: If program is started from IA (initial address) of test, no problem will
be encountered.
IV. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
About 1C00

core is required.

TIMING (Test running alone, no errors)
1.

Section

=
=
=
=
=

approximately

7. 5 seconds

second

approximately

seconds

approximately

seconds

approximately

seconds

Section

approxima tely

Section

approximately

seconds

Section

approximately

seconds

Section

seconds

=
=

8 minutes

N / A (operator intervention)

10.

Section 10

11.

Section 11

12.

Section 12

13.

Section 13

14.

Section 14

=
=
=

15.

Section 15

= less than 1 second

approximately

1 minute

approximately
N / A (operator intervention)
1 minute
approximately

(All times measured using 854. )
C.

ACCURACY
Section 11 (the positioning timing check) bases the 165 milliseconds on instruction
execution time.

If instruction execution time is a few percent less than 1. 1 or 1. 5

microseconds, error typeouts may occur.
60182000 K

554-23

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURA TION

Computer with 8K memory 1704/14/1705 or 1774/1773/1775, 1784
Disk Controller 1738 or 1733-1
Disk Drive 853 or 854s.

554-24

60182000

APPENDIX A FUNCTION CODES
Dir Bits
Q Register,

Output From A

Input to A

~:''c

Status Forcing

Bit 5

Same-Sec 4-EOP and AIm Int.

Bit 4

Read, Write, Compare Test

Bit
Bit

Positioner Test

Bit

Preliminary Test

Bit 0

= Section

8*
&:<

= Section 5*
3 = Section 4~(
2 = Section 3*
1 = Section 2*

Write A ddress Tags

= Section

1~:C

= Unit Select Bit 0 = Unit 0 Bit 1 = Unit 1 etc.

Third Stop:
A = OLLL low cylinder address to write on (0000)
LLL = lowest numbered cylinder to be written on (Section 12 ignores
this limit)
LLL = 00 - standard

60182000 L

555-3

Q = OHHH high cylinder address to write on (0195) or (OOCA)

= highest numbered cylinder to be written on
HHH = 195
- standard
16
HHH
d.

Fourth Stop:
A = IRPT line
= 0 = single dens drive (202 cylinders)

o
e.

= double dens (405 cylinders)

Range limits (parameter A3/Q3) affect all selected drives equally;
therefore, if there is a mi.xture of drives, the limits must. be set for
maximum 100TPI drive.
Internal Test Stop = bad cylinder address file, enter cylinder addresses
in A and run terminate list via A = O.

This affects

all selected drives equally.
f.

Selective SKIP and STOP Settings:
1) STOP -:- may be set for running of SMM17
2) SKIP

- when set, forces an SMM STOP A = ID

Q = MSTJP

IV. OPERATOR COMMUNICATIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS

Normal Program Typeouts
a.

Test identification during test initialization:
MDCO:ZA. Cartridge Disk Controller Test
IA = XXXX, FC = XX VR=3. 1 CP=2C

During test Section 14 one of the following typeouts will occur:
Set PROTEC T switches
Clear PROTECT switches

End of Test
A

7424
2.

Q
Stop/ Jump
Parameter

Pass
Number

Return
Address

Error Alarms
All information shown is displayed after General Display Format.
General Display Format:

A
. Information Word
(7A48 for 3 stops)
(7A48 for 4 stops)
555-4

Stop/Jump
Parameter

A
Unit Number/Section/
Error Code

etc.

Return
Address

Additional
Data

60182000 L

ERROR CODE DICTIONARY

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
00

Program
Tag Name

Message and Description

INP

External Reject

OUTPUT

Q
A

Contents of Q at Reject

= N/A

INP

Internal reject on input to A

CLRCON

BADD

lECHK

Contents of Q when input to A

lED

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

OUTPUT

Internal reject on output

lEA

Director status

Q
A

Cylinder register status

Contents of Q when output attempted

lEC

lEB

Contents of A when output attempted

Interrupt received but interrupt status bit not set
A

Selected interrupts

Q
A

Director status at interrupt

Contents of Q during last output

Contents of A during last output

Interrupt other than was selected occurred
(or interrupt occurred too soon)
Display same as error code 03

lEE

Interrupt status bits not cleared by clear interrupt
function

CONALARM

Director status at interrupt

Q
A

Director status after clear interrupt function

Contents of Q during last output

Contents of A during last output

Ready status bit not present
A

Director status

Cylinder register status

Director status at instant of alarm.

(True

cylinder status when seek error (code B) is detected.)
Contents of A on last output if no alarm detected
Q
60182000 L

= Contents of Q on last output
555-5

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)
07

Program
Tag Name
SECIA

BUSYPRES

Message and Description
On cylinder status bit not present
A

Director status

Cylinder register status

Contents of A at last output

Contents of Q at last output

Busy not present as expected
A

Director status

Q = N/A
09

CONALARM

Storage parity error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Drive fault (non-recoverable)
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Address error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Seek error (controller).

This error should recover

Display same as error code 06
OD

CONALARM

Lost data
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Checkword error
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Protect fault
Display same as error code 06

CONALARM

Alarm condition present but alarm status bit not set
Display same as error code 06

ADDRESS

File address status does not equal computed
value
A

BADD

Director status

Cylinder register status

Expected cylinder register

60182000 L

:\Iessage Code
(Hexad'ecilllal)
12

Program
Tag Name
\VAIT

CONALARM

Message and Description
Controller hung or busy
A

Director status

Address of originating routine (BIASED)

Director status at instant any alarm occurred

Contents of Q during last output

Seek error (drive)
Display same as error code 06

COMPARE

Data compare error.

Write buffer and read buffer

are compared in computer
A

C:ylinder register status

Number of word in sector that is wrong

Word written

Word read

(By setting bit 11 in Stop/Jump parameter, multiple
errors in the same buffer can be eliminated)

COMBUF CB2

SEC6B

No compare status bit set
A

Director status

Cylinder register status

No alarm interrupt occurred when forcing an address error by sending illegal difference

SEC6D

SECIN

Illegal difference sent

N/A

An address error was forced but status bit not set
A

Illegal address

Interrupt status

Cylinder, CWA

Checkword

or True cylinder not

clear after clear controller was sent

SEC6I

Contents of incorrect register

Function code for incorrect register

Address error status not set when writing off end
of file
Display same as for error code 17

60182000 L

555 ... 7

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)

Program
Tag Name

Message and Description
Seek complete did not come up at end of seek
A = Drive cylinder status (status 5)
Q

SEC7 ERROR

= Unit number expecting seek complete

Surface check detected error
A

Address of sector in error

Number of words into sector

Data written

Data read

(By setting bit 11 in Stop/Jump parameter, multiple
errors in the same buffer can be eliminated)
1C

SEC11B

Maximum positioning time exceeded (96 milliseconds)
A

Actual length to position

Address positioned to

Address positioned from

= N/ A (To make this error valid, bits 2 and 3 in SMM

parameter must be set for SC1784) 600 or 900 ns
1D

S12D

CONALARM

A uto load failed to load correct data
A

BADD

Q
A

Word in error
Word written

Word in core after autoload

End of operation status not present
Display same as error code 06

SEC1J-SEC1B

Status other than Ready and On Cylinder after an
outpu t function
A

Q
20

SEC6X

Director status
=

Expected status

Alarm interrupt did not occur when writing off end
of file
A
Q

555-8

ADPRINTP

Last address of file

= N/A

No interrupt occurred when EOP, Ready, Not Busy
interrupts were selected

WRT1
"RD 1

Selected interrupt

CW 1

Director status

CB 1

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output
60182000 L

lVlessage Code
(Hexadecimal)
22

Program
Tag Name
SEClK

Message

~nd

Description

Expected external reject on forced busy did not
occur

CWACOMP

0 - illegal reply; 100-internal reject

N/A

Current Word Address register incorrect
A

Actual CWA contents

Expected CWA contents

A = Contents of A during last output
Q

CONALARM

Contents of Q during last output

Alarm bit set. no alarm conditions set.
Display same as error code 06

SEC6M

No compare status bit not present
A = Director status
Q = Cylinder register status

CDFA

Cylinder register status does not equal
computed cylinder status

CNFE

SECIM

Cylinder register status

True cylinder status

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

Cylinder register status incorrect after an operation
A

Cylinder register status

Expected register contents

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

Did not get external reject on illegal input director
06 and 07

60182000 L

SEC14G

10 - illegal reply; 0 - internal reject

Contents of Q during input

Expected protect fault did not occur
A

Director status

N/A

Contents of A during last output

Contents of Q during last output

555-9

Message Code
(Hex.adEtcimal)

Program
Tag Name

Message .and Description

Not available

On cylinder status did not drop after
doing a seek from zero to maximum limit
A
Q

SEC1Q

Actual status

0001

Output buffer length with immediate input of CWA
gave incorrect results
A

Contents of CWA register

Q = Value sent as buffer length
2F
30

Not used
CHKTRK

Cylinder register not equal to expected value after
an operation was executed

SECTION 13

Last output function

Director status

Cylinder register status

Expected cylinder status

Recoverable error occurred during checkword check
A

Address of track causing error

Director status when last error occurred

Non-recoverable error occurred during checkword
check.
Display same as error code 31

SEC2J

Suspected DSA address error (Read/Write must have
been verified). In a manufacturing test environment
test 2 is' necessarily run before test 4 because of
degree of difficulty.

However, when error 33

occurs, then test 4 must be run before test 2 can
be completely verified

555-10

DSA address at failure (T HIS IS FWA)

N/A

Data written as determined by software

Data read from disk
60182000 L

l\Iessage Code
(Hexadecimal)
34

Program
Tag Name

Message

SEC15

and Description

Crosstrack error
A

Address of the error detected

First of the three tracks that were used

STBT

Table of Bad Track has been exceeded (limit is

SEC7

10)

SEC8E, G, H,

An incorrect checkword was detected

etc.

Checkword status

Expected checkword status

S11T3

Cylinder to cylinder position time exceeded
A

Actual time

= Specified

limit

Not used

During overlapping operations unit is found
not prepared for address
A

= Director

status

Q = N/A

Data error during overlapping operations
A

= N/A

Q = Number of word in buffer

A = Expected data
Q

= Actual data

Lost seek complete with address counters
A

= Unit

0 address count (number of addresses

sent this unit)
Q = Unit 1 address count (number of addresses

sent this unit)
A

= Unit

2 address count (number of addresses

sent this unit)
Q = Unit 3 address count (number of addresses

sent this unit)
3C

Lost seek complete with address
A

= Present

address unit 0

Q = Present address unit 1

A
Q

= Present
= Present

address unit 2
address unit 3

Operator error.
address in error.
A

60182000 L

Interrupt line or equipment
Restart test

Selected equipment address

Q = Selected interrupt line if any

555-11

Message Code
(Hexadecimal)

Program
Tag Nam.e

Message and Description
Operator error.

No unit selected.

Test will restart
A

= Unit

selection

= N/A
Illegal reply to unprotected output

instruct ion and a protected controller

= Data

output
Q = Equipment address

External reject of unprotected output

instruction and an unprotected controller
A

= Last

status

Q = Contents of Q on last status

= Data

output

Q = Contents of Q on last output

Internal reject - same as error 60

61
NON ERROR MESSAGES
A
Q

= (ID) 7A1F
= Message code

= Clear 1784 PROTECT switch
IF = Set 1784 PROTECT switch

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.

Cartridge Disk Drive Controller (MDC-7A) test is divided into 15
individually selectable test sections.
13 and 15 are normally selected tests.
14 are optional.

Sections I, 2, 4 through 8, II,
Sections 3, 9, 10, 12 and

MDC-7 A test sections are divided into subsections

and are labeled with program tags such as SEC 8A, B, C, etc.

Sec 8

is Section 8 and the letter indicates the subsection.
a.

The

Return address in error messages (mayor may not be biased) gives the
listing address the error it came from.

It is important to note that the

Return address may just give a subroutine area which generated the error.
To trace back the error, it may be necessary to go to the beginning of
the routine and look in the Return Jump address to get the area in the
test you came from.

This may have to be done more than once to actu-

ally get back to the section that the error indicates caused the error.
555-12

60182000 L

Sections are structured to run sequentially.

If an error is encountered, it may be helpful to run other sections for

trouble analysis and to get a more favorable sequence of operation.
d.

Normally, the test should run with the entire surface available; however,
it may be desirable to restrict the test to certain areas (see parameters).
NOTE
The test may be restricted to as
little as one cylinder.

Operations performed with a repeat condition are shown in the test
description.

Section 7 is used to determine defective tracks.

However, this section

cannot be run until there is a high degree of confidence that the Read,
Write, and Compare operations are relatively error free.
g.

With a new cartridge or fixed disk, Sections 3

and 7, in that order,

must be selected individually to assure address tags and data on entire
disk.
B.

Failure to do this will cause unrecoverable e.crors.

SECTIONS DESCRIPTION
SECTION 1
Error Code
U101
U106

PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC1C

Clear controller function
Input cylinder register status
Input director status

Ul07
U11F

SEC1A

U127

SEC1E

Verify on cylinder present
Verify only on cylinder and ready present
Verify cylinder register after CL
CONT
RC

UI01
U102
U102

SEC1F

':<

Clear controlle r function
Output clear interrupt function
Position forward one cylinder

SEC1F

Check alarms

U127

Verify cylinder register
RC

U11F

SEC1J

-.--'-

Verify EOP drops on output function
RC

60182000 L

555-13

Error Code
U122

Program Tag Name

Description of Program
Clear controller function

SECIK

Verify busy status give external reject
RC
WAIT NOT Busy
SECIL

Clear controller function
Position to cylinder 1

U 117

SEC1LA

','
'"

Verify excess negative difference address error
Verify address error and alarm
RC

U 128

SEC1M

Verify external reject on input director
06 and 07

Execute illegal input function
RC
U 118

SEC1N

Verify all registers zero after clear
controller
Check CWA status
Check checkword status
Check true cylinder status
RC

U12E

SECIQ

Verify all bits operational in CW A
register
RC
Next iteration - jump to SEC lC
Repeat section

555-14

60182000 L

SECTION 2
Error Code

POSITIONING TEST
Program Tag Name
Description of Program
Position to each legal address on the

SEC2

disk
U327

SEC2X3

Position to random address

U326

Write 60 word buffer

U323

RC
Update for new address.

Return to

position until done
Repeat section
SECTION 3
Error Code

WRITE ADDRESS TAGS
Description of Program
Program Tag Name
SEC3

Tnitialize section
Clear controller

SEC3A

Load address

SEC3B

Write address tags
Check alarm
RC
Advance track count
Jump back to SEC3A until first disk
complete
Check for fixed disk - if present, jump
to SEC3A
RC
Repeat section

60182000 L

555-15

SECTION 4
Error Code

WRITE, READ.

COMPARE TEST

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC4

Set pass count
Clear controller

SEC4A

Generate random data and random first
address

SEC4B

Write 60 word buffer
RC

SEC4C

Read 60 word buffer
RC

SEC4D

Checkword check of track
RC

U415
U430

SEC4E

Compare 60 word buffer
Check cylinder register advance
RC

U414

SEC4F

Compare data read against data written
RSC
RC
Next iteration jump to SEC4A
Repeat section

SECTION 5
Error Code

READ~

WRITE~

COMPARE UNDER INTERRUPT CONTROL

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC5

Set section pass count
Clear controller

U521
U530

SEC5Z

Request interrupt

SEC5D

Generate random data and random address

SEC5A

~'c#

Write under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

U521
U530

SEC5B

Read under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

555-16

60182000 L

Error Code
U 521

Program Tag Name
SEC5C

Description of Program
Checkword check under interrupt control
RC

U521
U515
U530

SEC5E

Compare under interrupt control
Check cylinder register advance
RC

U514

SEC5F

Compare read and write buffers
RSC
RC
Next iteration jump to SEC5D
Repeat section

SECTION 6
Error Code

STA TUS FORCING AND
READ, WRITE, COMPARE THROUGH CYLINDERS
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC6

Set section pass count

SEC6A

Request interrupt
Clear controller

U616

SEC6F

Select interrupt

SEC6E

Verify illegal address alarm interrupt
Send illegal address (OOFF)

U617

SEC6D

Verify address error status set

SEC6C

RC
Change to a second illegal address (FFOO)
If second disk not available, skip to

SEC6M
SEC6L

Clear controller
Set address to last sector in file
Select interrupt

U620
0619

SEC6X

Write 97 word buffer off end of file
Check address error status
RC

U625

SEC6M

Verify no compare circuits
Write 97 word buffer
Change 1 or 97 word on aHernate passes
Compare 97 word buffer

SEC6N
60182000 L

RC
555-17

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC6NA

Move position to last sector in track
Write 97 word buffer
RC

U615

SEC6NB

Compare 97 word buffer
RC

SEC6NC

Read 97 word buffer
RC

U614

SEC6NN

Compare read and write buffers
RC
N ext iteration jump to SEC6F
Repeat section

SECTION 7
Error Code

SURFACE TEST
Program Tag Name

Description of Program

SEC7

Set passcount
Select appropriate buffer length per core
availability
Clear bad track table and set flag 2 to
avoid selecting an alternate track

SEC7H, A, C

Set up patterns to be used

SEC7F

Request interrupt from SMM
Clear controller

U730

SEC7X

Write a sector or track
Verify cylinder register
RC

SEC7R1

Update one sector or track
Jump back to SEC7X until file is complete
When done, clear controller, prepare for
read

U730

SEC7Y

Read a sector or track
Verify cylinder register

U71B

SEC7F

Compare data bit for bit
RC

555-18

60182000

SECTION 8
Error Code

WORST PATTERN, CHECKWORD GENERATION
Program Tag Name
SEC8G

Description of Program
)!<

Write buffer of all zeros with last word
a 0001 16 and verify a checkword of 80F 16
RC

SEC8H

Same as above except last word of FFF 16
and checkword 3A 16
RC

SEC8K

SEC8L

First word 0001 16 checkword of 55D 16
RC

SEC8LA

97th word 0001 16 checkword 2nd sector
after zero padding 55D
16
RC

SEC8M

Last word FFFF 16 checkword of 3C6 16
RC

All words of buffer floating one
Checkword of 486

RC
HEAD AND SECTOR ADDRESS TEST

SECTION 9
Error Code

Description of Program

Program Tag Name
SEC9

Set passcount to 2

S9Xl

Select low limit

S9X2

Build one track buffer ($AEO
words) in increments of $60 with
data pattern equal to disk address.
Position disk.

Do 1 track write

S9X6

RC
Repeat for next head if selected

S9X4

Repeat for fixed disk if selected

S9XI0

Select low limit

S9X112

Generate 1 sectors data ($60 words)
of sector address.

Position disk

Do 1 sector read
Verify data

RC
Repeat for each sector until end of
surface.

Repeat if fixed disk is

also selected

60182000 L

555-19

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program

S9X20

Set low limit
Execute 1 word write from location 0

RC
Increment buffer length X$10 (left
sliding 1).

Repeat to S9X20 until

all bits of buffer length have been
used (IG)
S9X22

Set low limit
Set buffer length to $ 60
Set buffer FWA to 1
Initiate write
Reposition disk to low limit
$10 word read

U933

S9X26

Verify data against data written
Repeat incrementing buffer FWA X$10
until all 15 or 16 bits have been tested

S9X28

*
::'
::'

SECTION 11
Error Code

RC
RS
Next Disk

MAXIMUM TIME TO POSITION TEST
Program Tag Name
SECII

Description of Program
Set up random positions
Convert to legal addresses
Preset some addresses to high and low
extreme
Set time for correct computer 1784- 900
or 1784-600
Clear controller

SECI1Tl

Initialize millisecond count and move one
cylinder

SECI1TO

Measure time till end of position.
Verify less than 8 milliseconds
Check for end of file

UB37

S11T3

Report excessive time

S11T4

Repeat condition to S 11 T 1

SEC11A

Move up new address
Momentarily jump to monitor

555-20

60182000 L

Error Code
UB1C

Program Tag Name
SC11D

Description of Program
Position to new address
Measure time to busy drop
RC
Next iteration to SC llA
Repeat section

SECTION 12
Error Code

A UTOLOAD CHECK
Description of Program

Program Tag Name
SEC 12

Set section passcount to one
Set disk to address 0

S12A

Move copy of program to buffer area
Write 2784

S12B

location onto first track

Wait for not busy
Change one location in low core
STO P - operator must press autoload

tC1D

S12D

Compare autoload data
Repeat section
(In case of multiple errors, set Stop/
Jump parameter bit 11)

SECTION 13
Error Code

CHECKWORD CHECK OF ENTIRE SURFACE
Program Tag Name
SEC13

Description of Program
Set section passcount to one
Initialize first and last address
Clear controller

DD31
UD32

S13F

Set attempt counter

S13A

Load address
Execute checkword check
Make 10 attempts if alarms set-Jump
S13A
RC
Increment until end of disk jump to S 13F
Check if fixed disk present; if yes, .iump
to S13F
RC
Repeat section

60182000 L

555-21

SECTION 14
Error Code

PROTECT CIRCUITS TEST
Description of Program

Program Tag Name
SEC14

8et pass count to 1
Message to clear PROGRAM PROTECT

0001

switch
81400

8et program protect bits in test

81400A

Clear program protect bits in protect
test output driver
Message to set PANEL PROTECT switch

OOOF

81401

8tatus selected drive
8ave protect status
Message to ope rator if drive is protected

81402

Generate two sector buffer at $5555
via protect driver

814BLN

Position drive to high range buffer
length
Initiate buffer write
Check statuses for no alarm
Verify, status 2, 5, and 3

81410

Clear read buffer 96 word protect bit
Reposition drive

81411

Initiate read
Drive protected; verify all statuses

81412

Verify all statuses

81415

RC
Message; CLEAR PROTECT SWITCH
R8
Go to next drive

UD50

PROPLY

Reply received if drive protected
Report error

UD60

PROREJ

Reject received report error if drive
is not protected - re-execute sequence
via protected I/O

UD61

PROIRJ

Internal reject.

Report error re-

execute sequence via protected I/O
SECTION 15
Error Code

CROSSTRACK TEST
Program Tag Name
SEC15

Description of Program
Clear subroutine flag for write or compare
Generate random addresses

555-22

60182000 L

Error Code

Program Tag Name

Description of Program
Convert to legal addresses
Clear controller
Set section pass count to 5

SEC15B

Set buffer output to all ones
Clear count
Get 3 consecutive. tracks alternately at
high and then at low range limits
Set number of random positions count
Write first track with all one's
Write 3rd track with all one's

OF34

SEC15A

Write random data on 2nd track
Random position
Return to SEC15A for 20 times
Compare outer tracks for correct data
RC
Next iteration jump SEC15B
Repeat section

SUB-PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
Some major programs

(subroutines) are contained in this section and ordered

alphanumerically by call name (that is. the entry address tag to the subroutine
is the call name of the subprogram.
Error Code
XX21

Description of Program

Program Tag Name
ADPRINTP

Routine to position under interrupt control
Select interrupt
Position
Wait for interrupt
Check for errors during interrupt processing
Check cylinder register status
Exit

ADSR

Routine to compute difference to get to a
new address

XX12

BUSYPRES

Routine to wait for busy to drop and to
return control to monitor as required

XX26

60182000 L

CBINTP

Routine to compare under interrupt control

CDFA

Routine to compare true cylinder and
cylinder register status

555-23

Error Code

Program Tag Name
CLRCON

Description of Program
Clear controller routine
Execute clear controller function
Input director status
Wait for on cylinder to drop, then wait
for on cylinder to come back up
Exit

XX27

CNFE

Routine to compare cylinder register status with a predicted value after an operation

XX14

COMPARE

Compare write buffer with read buffer
internally by computer

CONALARM

Routine to check for EOP and for absence
of all alarms

CONV

Routine to convert random numbers to
legal addresses

CSCY

Compute expected cylinder status using
buffer length for anticipated operation

XX23

CWACOMP

Add buffer length to FWA and check CWA
after operation

CWINTP

Execute checkword check under interrupt
control

IECHECK

Check for any errors during an interrupt

INC

Routine will cause an increment of values
to check bit positions in a 16 bit register

INCREMEN

Routine to sequentially increment addresses
by sector or by tracks (used in Section 7)

INTPROC

Interrupt processor
Stores Q
Input status
Output clear interrupt
Input status
Verify both statuses and set appropriate
flags
Store return address
Load Q
Exit

555-24

60182000

Error Code

Program Tag Name
NEXTSECT
READ

Description of Program
Routine to select sections of test
Posliion and read one sector under interru pt control

ROUT 1

Routine to posliion.

Enter routine with

Q = to buffer length and A = to new

Routine to read, write, and compare
Enter routine with A = FW A and Q
to function
Store A in CWA COMP routine
Execute operation
Wait not busy
Check alarms

XX27

Execute CNFE routine

XX26

Execute CDF A routine

XX23

Execute CW A COMP routine
Exit
WRITE

Position and write one sector under interru pt control

60182000

VI. APPLICATIONS
A.

test panel that is available for this device.

However, it is possible to run if

clear controller and director status input functions have been debugged.

A short,

hand-punched program such as the following can be used.
LDQ

EOOO
OXOO

OX01

OBOO

NOP

02FE

INPUT

0000

STOP

Load SMM test number 7A Cartridge Disk Drive test (MDO.
meter to 49 , Select each test individually.
16
Assure correct interrupt line is selected.

Set Stop/ Jump para-

Set range limits if applicable.

Attempt sections in following order:
Section 1
Section 3
Section 2

If error 33 occurs, abort test and continue until Section 4 is

verified.
Section 4
Section 7

Run until first surface error, then abandon and go to Section
4.

(This effectively puts data on entire surface of disk so as

to avoid unrecoverable checkword check errors).
Section 4

If an error occurs, you may limit range to as little as one

cylinder.

By setting repeat condition at proper time and with

range limit set to one cylinder, you can debug read, write,
compare, or checkword check on only one cylinder.

If repeat

subsection is selected, you can do all four previously mentioned operations all on one cylinder.
NOTE
The advantage of doing an operation
on one cylinder avoids unnecessary
positioning time.
555-26

60182000

Sections 5 and 9

These two tests are similar to test 4 but using interrupt
control.

The remaining sections can be run in any order.
B.

Explanation of an error and an example of how to repeat an error.
Example of error typeout:
Q

7A48
(IDEKT)

0049
(STOP/JUMP)

U41E
(SEC/ERR)

017F
0009
CaDI
(RET.ADD) VARIABLE

The first word of the error typeout is the identifier.
Stop/ Jump parameter.
code.

0000
0205
DATA(either 2 or 4 words)
The second word is the

The third word contains the section number and the error

For example, 041E means Section 4 had an end of operation failure.

is, EOP status bit did not set as expected.
error explanation, is the director status.
that the error occurred at.
alarm.

That

The fifth word, according to the
The sixth word is the cylinder address

The seventh word is the status at the instant of an

(Since no alarm is present, this status is not applicable.)

The eighth

word contains the function code of the last output that was attempted before the
error.
At this point, several options are available to the operator:
1.

Check is the error is repetitive.
error again.

Set repeat condition and check for same

If error is the same and operator determines that debug will

be attempted at this point, a disable typeout can also be set in Stop/ Jump
parameter and selective stop removed and test will cycle on error.
2.

If operator is not sure of the operation being performed at the time of the

error, he may want to look at the test description and determine what was
being attempted.

The operator should proceed as follows:

Go to Section 4 description and look for error code; if error code is not listed,
it indicates that it was not the major test performed in this section.

Then the

operator should use the error information that tells the last function attempted
and look for this function in the Section 4 description.

The test description shows

that a compare function is executed in Section 4E (0205 indicates compare function).

By scanning the entire section description, the operator can determine the

sequence of events being attempted and determine how many of these will be repeated when he selects repeat condition.

A closer detailed observation of the

section can be obtained by looking at the listing for this test.
In some types of errors, the fourth word of the typeout or return jump address
can point directly to the section where the error occurred.
60182000

555-27

Suggestions for running test for maintenance of a unit known to have been operating
previously.
Load SMM test number 7A Cartridge Disk Drive test (MDC).
meter to 49

Set stop/ Jump para-

If sectors containing bad surfaces are known, enter an A on

16
fourth parameter stop.

If bad areas are known, test would be initiated as follow s:

" Hit run and at second stop leave A
16
set to normally selected sections and check Q for correct range limits.
Hit run

At first stop, set Q

to Stop/ Jump of 49

and at third stop set A and Q to correct interrupt line.
stop set A = to track number of bad sector.

Hit run and at fourth

Hit run and at stop enter next bad

track address or clear to zero and run and test will execute.

If address of bad

sectors are unknown. test will have to be initiated as suggested for a manufacturing operation.

VII. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

STORAGE REQUIREMENTS - approximately 8K

TIMING - N/A

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION:

555-28

1784-X Computer with 8K memory

Interrupt Data Channel

1 Cartridge Disk Drive 1733-2

Device for ioading SMM tests into computer

60182000

APPENDIX A
DICTIONARY OF TAG NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS

Kame
,;~

(Asterisk)

Cylinder Register Status

Definition
See definition of RC.
This phrase refers to the contents of the register only and
does not always indicate the head position (see true cylinder
status).

True Cylinder Status

This status gives the actual cylinder address as read from the
disk when a read, write, or compare operation is attempted
(only upper eight bits are used).

C\YA

Current word address.

Function Code

Refers to equipment code and director bits.

Difference

A 16 bit value consisting of eight lower bits which are absolute and eight upper bits indicating the number of cylinders
forward or backward (as determined by bit 5) required to
move in order to get to a new address.

Repeat condition, if selected go back to statement marked

EOP

End of operation.

DSA

Direct storage access.

FWA

First word address.

Position

Execute a load address difference function to get to a new

,:~.

address.
Range

Selectable parameter entry which limits the area to be written
on cartridge portion of drive only.

Compare

Defined by the type of error received.

An error with a 14

code indicates an internal compare of read and write data by
a computer.

A 15 code indicates an error detected when a

compare function was executed.
Bad Track

Entire track of 29 sectors labeled as bad by software when
any sector or portion of the track will not verify all data
checks.

See RSC.

RSC

Repeat subsection,
#.

60182000

if selected go back to statement marked

555-29

APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODES

Dir Bits
Q Register

Output From A

Input to A

Load buffer length

Clear controller

Director function

Director status

Cylinder register status

Load address difference

Write

CWA status

Read

Checkword status

Compare

True cylinder statusl seek oomplete

Checkword check

Write address tag

DIRECTOR STATUS
XXXl - Ready

XIXX - Checkword error

XXX2 - Busy

X2XX - Lost data

XXX4 - Interrupt

X4XX - Address error

XXX8 - On cylinder

X8XX - Seek error (cont)

XXlX - EOP

IXXX - Not used

XX2X - Alarm

2XXX - Storage parity

XX4X - No compare

4XXX - Protect fault

XX8X - Protected

8XXX - Seek error (drive)
DIRECTOR FUNCTIONS
XXX2 - Clear Interrupt
XXX4 - Next Ready and Not Busy Interrupt Request
XXX8 - EOP Interrupt Request
XXIX - Alarm Interrupt Request

555-30

60182000

1745-1746/211 DISPLAY STATION
(DDC040 Test No. ·40)
1.

INTRODUCTION
A.

IDENTIFICATION

Title

1745-1746/210 Display Station Test (Test number 40)

Type of Program

Diagnostic test under 1700 System Maintenance Monitor
(SMM17)

Computer

CONTROL DATA 1700

PURPOSE
The display station test operates under the control of the 1700 System Maintenance
Monitor to verify all of the operating features and data handling capabilities of
either the 1745 or 1746 controller.
NOTE
It does not check any features pertaining to the

typewriter.
C.

CAUTION TO USER
The timing is done by counting the number of returns to SMM17.
were calculated by the 1745-1746/210 Test running alone.

All wait times

Therefore, when operat-

ing in a system mode these times can be greatly increased.
II.

PARAMETER ENTRY
Each time the test is entered, either during the initialization or on restart, the test
will identify itself by typing.
1745-1746/210
Mter this typeout, the computer will halt four times.
A.

STOP 1. Displays inA the number and in Q the Stop/ Jump parameter.

STOP 2. Enters into the A register the equipment address necessary for a direct
input or output (i. e. W = 0, 2, 7, or C; E = equipment address; S = 0; and D = 0).
Enters into the Q register the interrupt line

(i. e .. bit 7 implies the 1745/1746 is on

interrupt line 7).

60182000 J

600-1

STOP 3. Enters into the A register the subtest to be executed (See Section 3).

i.~.

bit 3 implies execute test 3.
Enter into Q the stations to be tested, (i. e. bits 1 and 2 imply stations 1 and 2
are to be tested).
D.

STOP 4
Enter into the A register
If the screen size is 13 x 80 or

if the screen size is 20 x 50
Enter into the Q register
If the screen size is 13 x 80 or

0014
E.

if the screen size is 20 x 50

STOP/ JUMP WORD
Bit 00 must be set to enter parameters.
Bit 02 must be set to stop at end of test.
Bit 03 must be set to type out errors.

III. SUB'fES'f EXPLANATION
If the multistation controller (1745) and more than one station is being tested, the

testing is started with the highest station number (i. e. stations 1 and 2 defined for
testing, station 2 will be functioned then station 1).
The timing is done by counting the number of returns to SMM1 7.
calculated by the 1745-1746/210 Test running alone.

All wait times were

Therefore, when operating in a

systems mode these times can be greatly increased.
A.

TEST 0 REJECT
Purpose: This test verifies the various reject no-reject capabilities of the display
subsystem.
The "reject Code" (see paragraph 5 for error typeouts) defines the sequence of
operations in which an error was found.
Method:

600-2

60182000 H

Procedure

Reject Code

o
o

Expected Result

Copy Status

Error No 2E if protected.

Check Protect Status

Error No 2D if not protected.

Select All Possible Stations

Type Station Numbers that could

Station Numbers 1 through 15

be selected, (see error Code 2F).

Deselect all Stations
1

Issue Director Function of 3

Set A = 0

Internal Rej ect

Issue D. F. of 2

No Reject

Select Station

No Reject

Select Station
Set Active

No Reject

Select Station
Clear Active

No Reject

Deselect Station

No Reject

Deselect Station
Set Active

Deselect Station
Clear Active

No Reject

Deselect Station
Alert

No Reject

Select Station
Interrupt

No Reject

Select End of
Operation Interrupt

No Reject

Clear A
Issue D. F. 1

No Reject

External Reject

Select End of
Print Interrupt

No Reject

Clear Interrupt

No Reject

Enables
F

Deselect Station
Clear Screen
Wait for Not Busy

60182000 H

External Reject

600-3

Reject Code
10

Procedure
Deselect Station

Expected Result
External Reject

Reset
Wait for Not Busy
Select Station

No Reject

Set Active
Alert
12

Select Station
Set Active
Reset
Wait for Not Busy

No Reject

Select Station
Set Active
Clear Screen

TEST 1.

Wait for Not Busy

No, Reject

Clear Controller

No Reject

STATION SELECT

Purpose: This test assures that the station selected is the one that data will be
transmitted to.
Method:
1.

Clear Controller

Reset all stations selected for testing.

Select Station.

Set Active

Write screen (full screen each character position containing the station
number).

bDD-4

Wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all defined stations.

Reset all stations.

Select Station.

Read full screen.

Wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

10.

Verify data

11.

Repeat steps 5 through 10 for all defined stations

12.

Clear screen for all stations
60182000 H

TEST 2. END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT ON END OF MESSAGE
PURPOSE: THIS TEST VERIFIES THAT THE END OF MESSAGE CHARACTER IS READ
Method:
1.

Clear controller.

Reset all defined stations.

Select station.

Set Active.

Write the end of message character.

Deselect station.

Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all defined stations.

Reset all defined stations.

Select station.

10.

Set Active.

11.

Enable End of Operation interrupt.

12.

Read data.

13.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms for Interrupt.

14.

Verify Interrupt status.

15.

Deselect station.

16.

Verify data.

17.

Repeat steps 9 through 16 for all defined stations.

18.

Steps 2 through 17 are repeated until the end of message character has been
written in all screen positions starting with the last character and ending with
the first

(Total of 1000 outputs for the 20 x 50 option or 1040 outputs for the

13 x 80 option).
D.

TEST 3.

PATTERN TEST

Purpose: This test verifies that the delay line will accept various bit patterns
without losing or retaining bits.
Method:
1.

Clear controller.

Re s et all defined stations.

60182000 H

600-5

Select station.

Set active.

Write full screen; wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

Clear acitve.

Deselect station.

Repeat steps 2 through 7 for all defined stations.

Reset all defined stations.

10.

Select station.

11.

Set active.

12.

'Read full screen; wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

13.

Deselect station.

14.

Clear active.

15.

Verify data.

16.

Repeat steps 10 through 15 for all defined stations.

17.

Clear screen for all defined stations.

18.

Repeat steps 2 through 17 until all patterns are written, read, and ve'rified.
PATTERNS USED IN TESTING

Pattern
Number

600-6

ASCII
Characters

Octal
Codes

Expected
DisElaled Data

2041

0001

3F3E

7776

2020

0000

3F3F

7777

4747

0707

3838

7070

5555

2525

2A2A

5252

..1'.........

...' ......1...

60182000 H

TEST 4.

ALL CHARACTERS IN ALL POSITIONS

Purpose: This test verifies that all characters can be written in each screen
position (the carriage return, OD, is not used).

The test further verifies that all

illegal characters are transformed into delete codes (7F).

All 256 ASCII characters

are outputed for all screen positions, as defined by Figure 1.
Method:
1.

Clear Controller.

Reset all defined stations.

Select station.

Set active.

Write full screen.

Clear active.

Deselect station.

Repeat steps 3 through 7 for all defined stations.

Reset all defined stations.

10.

Select station.

11.

Set active.

12.

Read full screen.

13.

Clear active.

14.

Deselect station.

15.

Verify data.

16.

Repeat steps 10 through 15 for all defined stations.

17.

Repeat steps 2 through 16 until all characters have been written, read, and
verified for all screen positions.

Steps 2 through 16 are repeated a total

of 256 times thereby using the complete ASCII symbol set.

60182000 H

bDD-7

CHARACTER POSITION
LINE

ASCII Symbols Outputted - First Output
CHARACTER POSITION
LINE

Figure 1.

TEST 5.

ASCII Symbols Outputted - Second Output

CARRIAGE RETURN

Purpose: This test verifies that carriage returns can be written, properly
interpreted, read, and written over.
The pattern used is:
LINE 1

LINE 2

LINE 4

LINE 7

LINE

Ilb~:~

Method:

Note:

600-8

Clear controller.

Reset all defined stations.

Select station.

Set active.

~:'implies

carriage.

b implies blank.
60182000 H

Write full screen of periods; wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

Clear active.

Deselect station.

Repeat steps 3 through 7 for all defined stations.

Reset all defined stations.

10.

Select station.

II.

Set active.

12.

Write pattern (21 words); wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

13.

Clear active.

14.

Deselect station.

15.

Repeat steps 10 through 14 for all defined stations.

16.

Reset all defined stations.

17.

Select station.

18.

Set active.

19.

Read data (21 words); wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

20.

Clear active.

21.

Deselect station.

22.

Verify data.

23.

Repeat steps 1 7 through 22 for all defined stations.

24.

Reset all defined stations.

25.

Select station.

26.

Set active.

27.

Write full screen of apostrophies; wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

28.

Clear active.

29.

Deselect station.

30.

Repeat steps 25 through 29 for all defined stations.

31.

Reset all defined stations.

32.

Select station.

33.

Set active.

60182000 H

600-9

34.

Read full screen; wait a minimum of 2 seconds.

35.

Clear active.

36.

Deselect station.

37.

Verify data.

38.

Repeat steps 32 through 37 for all defined stations.

TEST 6.

READY AND NOT BUSY INTERRUPT

Purpose: This test verifies that the Ready and Not Busy interrupt will be returned
for a reset, clear screen, read, and write.
Method:

600-10

Clear controller.

Select station.

Sect active,

Issue reset.

Select Ready and Not Busy interrupt.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms.

Verify interrupt status.

Write one word (AB).

Select Ready and Not Busy interrupt.

10.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms.

11.

Verify status.

12.

Repeat steps 8 through 11 until the full screen has been outputted.

13.

Issue reset - clear loop count.

14.

Select Ready and Not Busy interrupt.

15.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms.

16.

Verify status.

17.

Read full screen minus loop count.

18.

Select Ready and Not Busy interrupt.

19.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms.

60182000 H

20.

Verify status.

21.

Verify data.

22.

Increment loop count.

23.

Repeat steps 17 through 21 until loop count equals number of words necessary
to fill the screen.

24.

Repeat steps 2 through 23 for all defined stations.

25.

Select station.

26.

Set active.

27.

Select clear screen.

28.

Select Ready and Not Busy interrupt.

29.

Wait a minimum of 50 ms.

30.

Verify status.

31.

Clear active.

32.

Deselect station.

33.

Repeat steps 25 through 32 for all defined stations.

TEST 7.

STATION INTERRUPT

Purpose: This test verifies that the station interrupt will occur for each defined station.
Method:
1.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set active.

Enable End of Operation interrupt.

Select clear screen.

Wait for interrupt.

Read full screen.

Verify.

Clear active.

10.

Deselect station.

11.

Repeat steps 2 through 10 for all defined stations.

60182000 H

600-11

12.

Select station,

13.

Set a'ctive,

14.

Write the message.
CLEAR
ENTER MESSAGE
SEND

I
I

600-12

15.

Clear active i

16.

Deselect station,

17.

Repeat steps 12 through 16 for all defined stations,

18.

Enable station interrupt.,

19.

Wait for station to interrupt (minimum wait time 5 minutes),

20.

When the interrupt is received - verify interrupt status,

21.

Select station,

22.

Set active,

23.

Read screen,

24.

Clear active,

25.

Deselect station,

26.

Search input buffer for, BOM,

27.

Place station number directly behind EOM,

28.

Select station,

29.

Set active,

30.

Write message - number of words to first

31.

Clear active,

32.

Deselect station8 ,

33.

Repeat steps 18 to 32 until all defined stations have been accounted for.

EOM~

60182000 L

CAUTION
If the multi-station controller (1745) and more than
one station is being tested, the error "send request
status not cleared after a read" (Error 2 7) may be
generated if two or more stations interrupted (send
request) at about the same time.
I.

END OF TEST
Purpose: This is not a test and cannot be selected or deselected by the operator.
Its purpose is to write the message,
END OF TEST
on the screen of each station.

Any errors encountered in this test will be indicated

as belonging to test 8.
Method:
1.

Clear controller.

Clear screen (no verify).

Select station.

Set active.

Write the message.

Deselect station.

Repeat steps.

Go to SMM to check for End of Test stop.

10.

Go back and repeat all selected subtests.

IV. ROUTINES USED BY TEST
The following is a list of routines common to all subtests. They are presented so that
the user may follow the sequence of operation of each subtest.
A.

CLEAR ACTIVE ROUTINES
Purpose: This routine attempts to clear the station active condition.
Method:
1.

Issue the clear active function.

Check status for no active bit.

60182000 H

600-13

NON REAL-TIME INTERRUPT PROCESSOR

CHECK FOR ANY
REJECTS FROM REALTIME ROUTINE (STATUS
OR FUNCTION)

yes
ENABLE SMl\
IMR WORD

)

return

600-14

60182000 'R

yes

READ
FULL
SCREEN

60182000 H

600-15

CLEAR SCREEN ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine issues a clear screen function specifying the end of
operation interrupt.
Method:

Select station.

Set active

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Wait for interrupt (minimum of 50 ms).

Verify interrupt status.

Read and verify full screen, if not end of test (see paragraph 3.9).

Repeat steps 1 through 6 for all stations defined.

DESELECT STATION
Purpose: This routine attempts to deselect a previously selected station.
Method:

Issue a deselect station function.

Check status for no active bit.

FUNCTION ROUTINES
Purpose: These routines issue either a director code 1 or director code 2.

Any

rejects that are detected are immediately typed, control is then returned without
reissuing the command.
E.

NON REAL- TIME INTERRUPT PROCESSOR
Purpose: This routine processes all non-real-time interrupts.

It verifies the

status received against the status expected.
Method: (See Flowchart>
F.

NON REAL-TIME STATUS ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine inputs and stores both director status 1 and director
status 2.
If any rejects occur, either internal or external, an error message will be typed

along with the contents of A and Q when the reject occurred.

Mter the error has

been typed the routine will attempt to input the status again and will continue to do
so until the reject condition disappears.

bDD-1~

60182000 H

yes

ERROR

TYPE GOOD
BAD DATA LINE
AND CHARACTER

yes

WAIT
ABOUT
SECONDS

30
TYPE
'----------I

FFFF

CLEAR
CONTROLLER

return

60182000 H

600-17

Method:

Input director Status 1

Input director Status 2

If no rejects, return

If r"ejects type error and repeat steps 1 through 3

READ ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine is used to input data from the selected station.

The read

routine will maintain maximum input rate provided it is not interrupted. Any
internal rejects that occur will be typed immediately. Any external rejects will
be allowed to continue for approximately 25 ms. When an external reject has
been continuous for 25 ms, the status is sensed to see whether active has dropped.
If active has dropped an error message will be typed, active will be enabled.

active has not dropped an external reject error message will be typed.
In the event a reject error message, internal, active dropped, or external, inputting will continue with the pair of characters in which the reject occurred.
H.

READ-TIME INTERRUPT PROCESSOR
Purpose: This routine attempts to clear all interrupts while in an interrupt state
condition.
Method:

Input and save status 1 and 2.

Issue a Clear Interrupt function.

Input and save status 1 and 2.

If the interrupt did not clear, disable the mask bit from both the interrupt

save area and from SMM enable interrupt mask word.
5.
1.

Return to SMM interrupt processor.

REAL-TIME STATUS ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine inputs status 1 and status 2 while in an interrupt state
condition.
Any rejects that occur are flagged so that they may be processed non real-time.
If a reject occurs, status 1 is set up to show an interrupt is present and status 2
is set zero.

600-18

60182000 H

RESET ENTRY MARKER
Purpose: This routine issues a reset function, specifying the End of Operation
interrupt.
Method:

Select station.

Set active.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Issue reset.

Wait for interrupt (minimum of 50 ms).

Verify interrupt status.

Repeat steps 1 through 6 for all defined stations.

SET ACTIVE ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine attempts to activate a selected station.
Method:

Issue" the set active function.

Check status for active bit.

VERIFY ROUTINE
Purpose: To verify the data inputted against that expected.
Method: (See Flowchart>

M. WRITE ROUTINE
Purpose: This routine is used to output data from the selected station.

The write

routine will maintain maximum output rate, provided it is not interrupted.
internal rejects that occur will be typed immediately.

Any

Any external rejects will

be allowed to continue for approximately 25 ms. When an external reject has been
continuous for 25 ms, the status is sensed to see whether active has dropped. If
active has dropped, an error message will be typed, the station selected and active
re- enabled.

If active has not dropped, an external reject error message will be

typed.
In the event a reject error message, internal active dropped, or external, the
outputting will continue with the pair of characters in which the reject occurred.

60182000 H

600-19

DIRECTOR STATUS 1
Bit

Purpose

00
01

Ready
Busy

Interrupt

Ready and not busy

04
05

End of operation interrupt

06
07
08
09

Not used

Station Printing

11
12

End of Message
Active

Send Request

Printer Printing

Print complete interrupt

Not used
Protected
Not used
Station Print Print Request

DIRECTOR STATUS 2
Bits 6 through 9 indicate the station that issued the send request interrupt; all other
bits are not used.

ERROR CODES
Error Typeouts are of the following type:

1745-1746/210
TEST t STN ss ERROR ee
ST1
- - - - ST2 - - - AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD~:'
Where:
t
ss
ee

is the subtest number
is the station number in which the error occurred
is the error code

ST1

is director status 1

ST2

is director status 2

Note:*

This contains additional information about the error.

Refer to

~he

error code

table for the information contained.

600-20

60182000 H

Error Number
00

Explanation
No end of operation interrupt
on a clear screen function.
Minimum wait time 50 milliseconds.

External reject on director
status 1.

Additional Information
None

AAAA contents of the A register.
BBBB contents of the Q register.

ecce see reject code, if error
occurred in test 0, for sequence
leading to the error.

Internal rej ect on director
status 1.

See error code 01.

External reject on director

See error code 01.

status 2.
04

Internal reject on director
status 2.

See error code 01.

External reject on director
function 1.

See error code 01.

Internal reject on director
function 1.

See error code 01.

External reject on director

See error code 01.

function 2.
08

Internal rej ect on director

See error code 01.

function 2.
09

External reject on output of
data, the reject has been
continuous for more than

AAAA = contents of A reject.
BBBB = contents of Q reject.

25 milliseconds.

Internal reject on input
of data.

See error code 09.

External reject on input
of data, the reject has been
continuous for more than 25

See error code 09.

milliseconds.

60182000 J

Internal reject on input
of data.

See error code 09.

600-21

Error Number

Explanation

Additional Information

An internal reject was
expected but none occurred.

See error code 01.

An external reject was expect-

See error code 01.

ed but none occurred.

An unexpected external reject

See error code 01.

was defected (test 0 only).
10

An unexpected internal reject

See error code 01.

was defected (test 0 only).
11

The active status bit is not
set following a set active
command.

None

( The station has

previously been selected. )
12

Data verify error. The alarm
will be turned on for the station
that is in error and will remain
on for a period of not less than

AAAA = Expected data (lower
8 bits).
BBBB = Data received (lower
8 bits).

30 seconds following the verification of the data read from the

ecce

last station. If no error
occurred, the information
will be displayed for a period
of not less than 2 seconds.

= The line in which the
error occurred (starting with
line 1).
DDDD = The character which

is in error (starting with
character 1).
Up to 7 such errors will be
typed until it is assumed that
the data block is bad. At this
point, the verify will be aborted.
This is signified by typing:
AAAA = FFFF

BBBB = FFFF
ecce = blank
DDDD

The interrupt status bit is
still set following a clear

= blank

None

interrupt command.

600- 22

60182000 J

Error Number

Explanation
The station active bit is set

Additional Information
None

following a clear active
command.

The end of operation status
bit is not set following an

None

end of operation interrupt.
16

The controller has been busy
for more than 50 milliseconds.

None

No end of operation interrupt
has occurred for a reset
command, minimum wait
time 50 .milliseconds.

None

No end of operation interrupt
has occurred for a data input

None

containing an end of message
character. Minimum wait
time 50 milliseconds.

Active status dropped while

None

outputting data (continuous
external rejects for 25
milliseconds before status
is checked) ..

60182000 J

600-23

Error Number

Explanation

Unexpected end of message
status has been detected.

None

Active status dropped while
inputting data (continuous

None

Additional Information

external rejects for 25 milliseconds before status is
checked).

Unexpected end of operation

None

status has been defected.
1D

No end of message status is

None

detected following the end
operation interrupt for an
end of message character
minimum wait time 50 milliseconds.
1E

An unexpected send request
interrupt has· been detected.
Bits 6 through 9 of director

AAAA = The station address
that gave the unexpected
interrupt.

status 2 contain a station

BBBB

= O.

address that was not defined
in parameter entry.
1F

A send request interrupt
has been detected from a
station that has already

See error code 1 E.

given a send request interrupt.
20

No end of message character

None

can be found in the input
buffer following a read on
send request interrupt.
21

600- 24

No send interrupt(s) have been

AAAA = the bits repres ents the

detected in the past 5 minutes
(minimum time).

stations that have not replied
with a send interrupt.

60182000 J

Error Number
22

Explanation

Additional Information

= Interrupt

An unidentified interrupt

AAAA

has occurred.

expected.
00 = End of operation on

that was

clear screen.
17 = End of operation on reset.
18 = End of operation on end
of message.
21 = Send Interrupt.

Director status 2, bits 6

None

through 9 are zero, following
a send request interrupt.
24

Not Used

Send request status is present
when no send interrupt is
expected.

None

The send request status is

None

not present for an expected
send interrupt.
27

Send request status not cleared
after a read. Also see caution
for test 7.

None

No ready and not busy interrupt
after a write. Minimum wait

None

time 50 milliseconds.
29

Ready and not busy status is

None

not present on a ready and not
busy interrupt.
2A

The ready and not busy inter-

None

rupt did not occur after a read.
Minimum wait time 50 milliseconds.
2B

The ready and not busy interrupt did not occur after a
reset minimum wait time 50

None

milliseconds.

60182000 J

600-25

Error Number
2C

Explanation
The ready and not busy inter-

Additional "Information
None

rupt did not occur after a
clear screen. Minimum wait
time 50 milliseconds.
2D

This is not an error condition.
It defines the position of the

AAAA

PROTEC T switch through the

CCCC

BBBB

Not Used
Not Used
Zero

status. The PROTECT switch
is not on. Also see test O.

This is not an error condition.

See 2D

It defines the position of the

PROTEC T switch. The
PROTEC T switch is on. Also
see test o.
2F

This is not an error condition.

AAAA

Not Used

It defines the stations that

BBBB

Not Used

could be selected.

CCCC
Zero
DDDD
Contains the stations
that could be selected (i. e. ,
bit 2 set implies station 2
could be selected). Also see
test 0 (paragraph 3. 1).

600-26

60182000 J

1745-2/211-3 DISPLAY STATION TEST
(DDTOID Test No. ID)

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
The following equipment will be required to properly execute this test:

17X4Basic Computer

1 7X 5 Inte rru pt Data Channel

1745- 2 Display Station Controller

A maximum of (12) 211-3 Display/Entry Stations

Basic" Edit" or no keyboard associated with 211-3

SOFTWARE
This test is designed to run under the following software system:
1700 Systems Maintenance Monitor.

II.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Hardware
The 1745-2 display station does not check any features pertaining to a typewriter
station.

Software
Interface between the 1745-2 display station test and the 1700 system maintenance monitor is established whenever a time out is required.

Therefore"

when operating in a system mode" the run time of a successful pass is increased
in proportion to the number of tests referenced.
B.

LOADING PROCEDURES
1.

The test is loaded in accordance with 1700 SMM directives.

The test may be re- started at initial address.

60182000 J

601-1

PARAMETERS
Parameters are entered at the beginning of the test or if bits 0 and 10 are set,
re-entered after completion of a test pass.
Parameter entry requires four stops.
Stop 1 - (A) = ID Word (Overflow is lit)
(Q)

Stop 2 - (A)

= Stop- Jump

Parameter

= Equipment address for direct input of Status 1 (W = 0, 2, 7, or
C--E = Equipment address--S = O--D = 1)

(Q) = Interrupt Line Number

(Bit 4 = Line 4, Bit 7 = Line 7, etc.)
Stop 3 - (A) = Section! s to Run
(Bit 1 = Section 1, Bit 2 = Section 2, etc. up to Bit 13) (Bit 0 - Not used)
(Q) = Station Address I es to Test

(Bit 1 = Station 1, Bit 2 - Station 2, etc., up to Bit 12) (Bit 0 - Not used)
Stop 4 - (A) = 50 (If the number of character per line is 80

)
10
32 (If the number of character per line is 50 )
10
(Q) = D (If the number of lines is 13
)
10
= 14 (If the number of lines is 20 10 )

MESSAGES
Each time the test is entered, the test will identify itself by typing:
DDT01D, 1745-2 Display Test
IA = XXXX, Fe = xx

III. TEST DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL
Sections are executed in numerical order, beginning with the lowest numbered
section selected. All selected sections are executed to one station prior to
execution to other selected stations.
Stations are tested with the lowest numbered selected station, progressing to the
highest numbered selected station._

601-2

60182000 J

SECTION EXPLANATION
\

Section 1 - Reject- Reply

Run Time - L. T. 1 Sec.

This section verifies the various reject. . . No reject capabilities of the
display sub- system. A function is sent to a selected/ de- selected station after
which a reply or a reject to the function is expected. When a reply is expected,
a status check is done to ensure the function was performed except for End of
Operation, Station, and Data interrupts.
The various test sequences and expected result are listed as follows:

60182000 H

Operation

Expected Result

Clear controller

Director Function 2 - No Function

External Reject

Select station

Clear Memory - Re- set

External Reject

Re- set marker

External Reject

Clear controller

Select station

Set station active

De- select station

Set station active

External Reject

Clear controller

Director Function 1 - No Function

Enable End- of- Operation interrupt

Enable Station interrupt

Write Terminate

Enable Data interrupt

Clear Interrupt Enables

Alert

External Reject

Clear Memory - Re- set entry marker

External Reject

Re- set entry marker

External Reject

Select station

601-3

Expected Result

Operation

Set station active

Re- set entry marker

Clear memory - Re-set

Clear Active

Clear controller

Section 2 - Station Addressing

Run Time = L. T. 1 Sec.

This section verifies that the station selected is the one that data will be
transmitted to and from.

The station is selected, a full screen is written

with the selected station number, and the screen is then read and verified.
The following sequence is used in this test section:
a.

Set up full screen data buffer with station address + space/EOM.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first, character position.

Output complete buffer using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re-set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct 110 transfer.

De- select station.

m.' Compare data received with data transmitted.

Delay for visual verification.

End section.

Section 3 - Interrupts

Run Time

= L. T.

2 Minutes

This section is used to check the interrupt system under normal data transfer
conditions.

bOl-4

60182000 H

To verify the End-of-Operation interrupt End-of-Message characters are
written in every screen position, the EOP interrupt is enabled and the EOM
is read in every character position.
The following sequence is used to test this section:
EO~

Set up data buffer consisting of blank codes until

required.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Reset the entry marker to the first character position.

Output Data Buffer.

De- select station.

Enable End-of-Operation interrupt.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker.

Read data until EOM character position.

Process interrupt.

Enable End-of-Operation interrupt.

Send Write Terminate.

Process interrupt.

Repeat entire sequence until EOM written and read in every character
position.

r.
4.

End section.

Section 4 - Delay Line Pattern

Run Time

= L. T.

1 Second

This section verifies that the delay line will accept various bit patterns without
dropping or picking up bits.

60182000 H

The delay line patterns used are as follows.

601-5

ASCII Code (HEX)

Alpha-numeric Display

2041

Space

3F3E
2020

Question Mark
Space

Greater Than
Space

3F3F

Question Mark

4747

3838

5555

2A2A

",
",

==:'

The following sequence is used in this test section:

bDl-b

Set up full screen data buffer with delay line pattern.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output complete data buffer using direct 1/ a transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct I/O transfer.

Repeat K 10 times per pattern.

De- select station.

Compare data received with data transmitted.

Delay for visual inspection.

Repeat the entire sequence until all patterns have been written, read and
verified.

End section.

60182000 H

Section 5 - All Characters in all Positions

Run Time

Minutes

This section verifies that almost all characters may be written in all screen
positions. Special characters such as the new line code, special edit characters,
and other similar characters are not written on the screen.
NOTE
Each character is written as a full data buffer.
The following sequence is used for each character:

Set up a full screen data buffer with current character + space / EOM.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output complete data buffer using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Compare data received with data transmitted.

Delay for visual inspection.

Repeat the entire sequence until all characters have been used.

End section.

Section 6 - New Line

Run Time

L. T. 1 Second

This section verifies that new line codes can be written, properly interpreted,
read, and written over again. The pattern used is:

~:,

Implies a new line code

b Implies a space code

60182000 H

601-7

The following sequence is used in this test section:

Set up full screen data buffer consisting of periods.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output complete data buffer using direct 110 transfer.

De.:. select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re-set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct

De- select station.

Compare data received with data transmitted.

Delay for visual verification.

Set up data buffer with new line pattern.

Repeat steps b through n.

Set up data buffer consisting of exclamation points.

Repeat steps b through n.

End section.

Section 7 - Echo Test

Run Time

= Up to

II 0

transfer.

5 Minutes

This section verifies the capability of each station to generate a station interrupt,
interpret an end-of-message code on a send request, and correct receipt of
operator initiated messages. The operator clears the screen on command,
enters any message from the keyboard, and depresses the send key.
The computer responds to the send interrupt by reading the screen, clearing
the screen, and writing back the message entered by the operator.
The following sequence is used in this test section:

601-8

Set up data buffer containing operator message.

Clear controller.

60182000 H

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output Data Message.

De- select station.

Enable station interrupt.

Wait for interrupt to occur.

Process Station interrupt.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data.

Check for EOM code.

Clear memory and re- set entry marker.

Delay for verification.

Write message received.

Delay for verification.

End section.

Section 8 - Re- set/ Skip With Escape

Run Time = L. T. 1 Second

This section writes a buffer of escape codes followed by re-set and skip codes
in an order which will put escape, re- set, and skip codes in each of the four
character positions in the interface buffer.
The buffer of data written is as follows:
ERES

ESES

1ERE

SES2

ERER

ES3E

R4ER

E - Implies Escape Code
S - Implies Skip Code
R - Implies Re- set Code

This data is displayed on the screen as: 4321, with the entry marker at the
re- set position.

60182000 H

601-9

Set up data pattern consisting of re- set/ skip/ escape codes.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry market to first character position.

Output complete data buffer consisting of direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re-set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Compare data to 4321 pattern.

Delay for visual inspection.

End section.

Section 9 - Line Skip Function With Escape

Run Time

= L. T.

1 Second

This section will check the Line Skip edit function feature, by sending successive
line skip codes preceded by escape codes until the entry marker is at the re- set
position.

Two characters (1 W) precede the edit characters.

When a Read is

performed after the Write, the Read buffer should read the first two characters
sent.
The following sequence is in this test section:

601-10

Set up data buffer with two characters and line skips/escapes.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker to first character position.

Output complete data buffer using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

60182000 H

Set station active.

Read two characters of data using direct I/O transfer.

De-select station.

Compare data to 1W (Output Word) .

Delay for visual inspection.

End section.

Section 10 - Carriage Return Without Escape

10.

Run Time

= L. T.

1 Second

This section verifies that carriage return codes, not preceded by an escape
may be written on the screen in all character positions.
A full screen of carriage return codes, except for a CR in the first two positions
is sent ..
The following sequence is used in this test section:
a.

Set up data buffer with two characters (CR) and carriage return codes.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re-set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output complete data buffer using direct II 0 transfer.

De- select station.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re-set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data using direct I/O transfer.

De- select station.

Compare data received with data transmitted.

Delay for visual verification.

End section.

60182000 H

601-11

11.

Section 11 - Status Switches

Run Time

= Not

more than 5 Minutes

This section verifies that the four status switches may be set and properly
interpreted by the computer. This section will require operator action for
proper execution.
Each pass through this section instructs the operator to set a status switch and
depress the send key when completed.
The operator message used is:
CLEAR SCREEN
SET STATUS SWITCH OX (X = SWITCH NUMBER)
SEND
The following sequence is used in this test section:

601-12

Set up data buffer containing operator message.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output data message.

De-select station.

Enable Station interrupt.

Wait for interrupt to occur.

Process Station interrupt.

Select station.

Set station active.

Re- set entry marker.

Read a full screen of data us ing direct 110 transfer.

Ensure data buffer contains all blank codes.

Check status 2 for proper switch set.

Update status switch number.

Repeat entire sequence for each status switch.

End section.

60182000 H

12.

Section 12 - Tab Access/Tab Protect

Run Time

= L. T.

1 Second

This section verifies that the Tab Access and Tab Protect function codes are
properly interpreted on Read and Write operations.

A portion of the screen is

protected and then given an access code for attempted Write screen operations.
The data is then read for comparison.
The following sequence is used in this test section:
a.

Set up data buffer containing asterisk codes.

Clear controller.

Select station.

Set station Active.

Re- set the entry marker to the first character position.

Output full screen buffer.

De- select station.

Set up start tab buffer as follows:
Escape/Line Skip
Escape/Line Skip
A/Start Tab
C/C
C/C
End Tab/D

Output start tab buffer.

j•

Repeat steps b through e.

Set up tab access buffer as follows:
Asterisk/ Es cape
Line Skip/ Escape
Line Skip/ Tab Access

Output tab access buffer.

Repeat steps b through e.

Read buffer indicated in step h.

Compare data.

60182000 H

601-13

Set up tab protect buffer as follows:
Asterisk/Escape
Line Skip/ Escape
Line Skip/ Tab Protect

Output tab protect buffer.

Repeat steps b through e.

Read data.

Compare buffer to following:
A/Tab Protect
End TabiD
Clear Screen

u.
13.

End section.

Section 13 - Troubleshoot Section

Run Time = N/ A

This section provides small loops for function, status and data transmission for
use with a monitoring device such as an oscilloscope. The operator, after
selecting the section, enters parameters as follows:
NOTE
Only one stop may contain data.
Stop 1 - Write A = Data Character I s
Screen Q = Station Address (Bit 2

= Station 2, etc.)

Ensure A and Q registers clear if data loop not desired.

Enter into the A registers any data desired for transmission.

Enter into the Q register the station address associated with the
binary bit.

The segment will continually output the data in the A register.

Exit from the section is accomplished by clearing the A and Q register
and enabling Run mode.

Stop 2

Function
A = Any Function Code
Q = The equipment address plus director bits
for outputting the function.

601-14

60182000 H

Ensure A & Q registers clear if function loop not

Enter into the A register any valid function code (function 1 or 2).

Enter into the Q register the equipment address necessary for outputting the function from the A register.

The segment will coninuously output the function code in A.

desire~.

Status

is not performed.
5.

A count of the number of rejects encountered is available at location
specified by mnemonic REJ130UT for external rejects and mnemonic
REJ131N for internal rejects.

Exit from this section is accomplished as stated in Stop

Stop 3

Step 5.

Status
A

= Enter

any value greater than zero
Q = Equipment address for input of status
plus director bits

Ensure A & Q registers cleared if status loop not desired.

Set A register non-zero

Enter into the Q register the equipment code necessary to input to A
the status 1 or 2 code.

The section will continually input the controller status into A.

The status word is stored at location specified by mnemonic Act 13.

Exit from this section is accomplished as stated in Stop I, Step 5.

Stop 4

Read Screen

Ensure A and Q registers cleared if read loop not desired.

Center into the A register the character / s to read.

Center Q register binary station address

The section will continually input the character/ s written on the screen.

Exit from this section is accomplished as stated in stop I, . Step 5.

IV. ERROR
A.

Messages
Error messages are standard SMM17 format.

60182000 H

601-15

1DX8

STOP/JUMP

X
yy
ZZ
Data

A
YYZZ

A Q

RTN Address

Data

= Number of Stops
= Section Number
= Error Number
= Addition Information

The section number and return address give the approximate location in the test
where the error occurred.
B.

Error Codes
Error Code

Meaning

Not Used

External Reject on Director
function

Additional Information

Error occurred

on
Q

601-16

= Function

= Equipment

Address

Internal Reject on Director
function

Same as Error 03

Reply on Director function
(Expected external reject)

Same as Error 03

Internal Reject on Director
function

Same as Error 03

Busy does not drop after a
reset function

None

Status (1) error NOTE:
(Status is checked after
most functions are performed
-if a hit remains set/ or
does not set, a status error
results, --this is the only
error condition associated
with function! status outside
of rejects and interrupts.

A
Q

External Reject on
Director Status 1

A = Expected Status

Internal Reject on
Director Status 1

Same as Error 09

External Reject on
output

A = Output character / s

= Expected

Status
= Received Status

Q = Zero

= Zero

60182000 H

Error Code

Meaning

Additional Information

Internal Reject on output

Same as Error OB

External Reject on input

A
Q

= Input
= Zero

Character / s

Internal Reject on input

Same as Error OD

An expected interrupt did
not occur

A
x

= OOX
= Number

= No
= No
= No
= No

2
3
4

corresponding
to non-received interrupt
Data interrupt
EOP interrupt
EOP on EOM interrupt
Station interrupt

The interrupt was set but
no interrupt occurred

Same as Error OF

Status 2 error (see Note
Error 8)

Same as Error 08

External Reject on Director
Status 2

Same as Error 09

Internal Reject on Director
Status 2

Same as Error 09

Data received did not agree
with data expected

A
Q

= Expected Character / s
= Received Character! s
= Address of Expected
Character

60182000 H

= Address

of Received
Character

An end-of-message code
was not read on input data
after a Send request

None

An interrupt occurred but
the interrupt bit (Bit 02)
was not set

The interrupt bit remained
set after a clear interrupt
function

Same as Error 16

An interrupt occurred that
was not selected or expected

Same as Error 16

= Expected
= Received

Interrupt Status
Status Interrupt

601-17

Error Code

Meaning

Data was not read from a
protected area after a tab
access performed

Data read from a protected
area, a tab access was not
performed, prior to the
read operation

601-18

Additional

Inforn~ation

60182000 H

1700/8000 DATA TRANSFER BUFFER,
8049 DISPLAY CONTROLLER, 211 DISPLAY STATION
(DTBA10 Test No. 10)

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

The test must be run alone.

It does not return control to SMM.

The interrupt lines selected at the parameter stop must match the physical
connections of the interrupt cables.

The SEND key on the display station keyboard must be pressed in sections 3
and 5 of the test.

The CLEAR and SEND keys should not be pressed during sections 1, 2,.4, and

6.
5.

The SEND key must be pressed five times in section 3, but section 5 may be
terminated by entering two periods as the first two characters of the input
message.

Otherwise, the SEND key must be pressed twenty times in section 5.

The patterns output in sections 4 and 6 should appear stationary except for
the motion of the entry marker.

If the patterns move or one of these sections

hangs, data is being lost upon output probably due to a bad Not Reject card
in the DTB.

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

C all as external test number 10 under SMM 1 7.

Test can be restarted from initial address after loading.

PARAMETERS
If bit 0 of the SMM stop/jump word is set at the start of the test, three stops occur.

First stop, A = 1031, Q = stop/jump word.

Second stop, A = 007E, Q

= 0038.

The bits in A specify the sections to be

executed (pre- stored parameter specifies sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6).

Q is

the symbol code of the symbol to be output in section 6 (pre-stored parameter
specifies H).

60182000 J

602-1

Third stop~ A = 4000~ Q = 8000. The bit in A specifies the 1700/8000 DTB
End of Operation interrupt line, i. e., connection of J20 cable (pre-stored
parameter specifies interrupt line 14). The bit in Q specifies the Interrupt
40 line, i. e., connection of J40 cable (pre-stored parameter specifies interrupt
line 15).

IVIESSAGES
No typeouts occur if bit 8 of the stop/jump word is set.

Test title and initial address typeout
DTBA10_ 1700/8000, 8049-A, 211 DISPLAY TEST
IA

= XXXX,

= XX

XXXX is the initial address of the test

Start of section 3 (this message is output on the display screen, not the typewriter).
PRESS SEND KEY

Start of section 5 (output on display, not typewriter)
ECHO TEST

End of test (typed out)
A

1024
E.

Stop! Jump Word

Pass Number

Return Address

ERROR MESSAGES
All error messages are in the SMM17 format.

The return address tells where

the error occurred.
Meaning

Error Code
01

Insufficient memory for test.

Equipment address error (operator error).
called again.

Parameter error (operator error).

Test must be

Parameters must be

selected again.

b[]2-2

Unexpected internal reject.

Unexpected external reject.

60182000 J

Error Code
06

Meaning
Unexpected DTB status.
Additional information:
A

Actual DTB status,

Expected DTB status

Unexpected reply (when internal or external reject was expected).

Unexpected EOP interrupt.
Additional information:

DTB status,

0000

No EOP interrupt when expected.
Additional information:
A

DTB status,

Q
0000

Unexpected 8049-A status
Additional information:

Actual 8049-A status,

Expected 8049-A status

No interrupt 40 when expected.

Unexpected interrupt 40.

Disconnect occurred.

Unexpected 1706 or 1716 status.

EOM code was not detected.

Additional information:

60182000 H

Actual BDC status,

Expected BDC status.

602-3

II.

DESCRIPTION
A.

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Initial

~ INITIALIZATION.

TYPE TITLE.
PARAMETER STOP.
SEC 1
SECTION 1
DTB STATUS CHECK
SEC 2
SECTION 2
DTB AND 8049-A
STATUS CHECK

SEC 3

SECTION 3
INTERRUPT 40
CHECK
SEC 4
SECTION 4
OUTPUT SHIFTED
PATTERN
SEC 5
SECTION 5
ECHO TEST
SEC 6
SECTION 6
ONE SYMBOL
END TEST
END OF TEST

602-4

SECl

C>
60182000 H

DETAILED TEST DESCRIPTION

Initialization
a.

(INITIAL).

Inhibit interrupts.

Determine initial address.

Determine whether equipment address is legal.

(INITA). Determine whether memory is large enough for test.
code 1 if not.

Parameter stop.

Type title and initial address.
Error code 2 if not.
Error

Error code 3 if parameter error.

Section 1 - DTB STATUS CHECK
a.

Section 1, Loop 1
1)

(SEC1).

Input status.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 (internal reject) or 5
(external reject) if not.

(SllA).

Expect zero status, Error code 6 (unexpected DTB status)

if not.
4)

(SllB).

Loop to 1) 100 times.

Continue looping if Stop! Jump bit 4

is set.
b.

60182000 H

Section 1, Loop 2
1)

(LOOP12).

Clear controller.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S12A).

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

(S12B).

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 3
1)

(LOOP13).

Clear interrupt.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S13A).

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

(S13B).

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

602-5

602-6

Section 1, Loop 4
1.)

(LOOP14).

Print.

Expect reply (hang on reject)1 Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S14A).

Expect zero status

(S14B).

Expect external reject l Error code 4 or 7 (unexpected reply) if not.

Get DTB status.

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

(S14C).

Get DTB status.
l

Error code 6 if not.

Print.

Delay 75 microseconds.

10)

Print.

11)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

12)

(S14D).

13)

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/Jump bit 4 is clear.

Delay 75 microseconds.

Section 1, Loop 5
1)

(LOOP15).

Print, hang on reject.

Clear controller.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S15A).

Expect external reject

Get DTB status.

Expect zero status l Error code 6 if not.

(S15B).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/Jump bit 4 is clear.

Print.
l

Error code 4 or 7 if not.

Delay 75 microseconds.

Section 1, Loop 6
1)

(LOOP16).

Set all bits in A except 0, 11 and 7.

Output from A (undefined functions in A).

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

Get DTB status.

Set Director bit in Q.

60182000 H

. 5)
6)
g.

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.
(S16A).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 7
1)

(LOOP17).

Set Director bit in Q and bit 1 in Q.

Input to A.

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

Get DTB status.

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

(S17A).

Repeat steps 1) through 6) with each of bits 2 through 6 set in Q

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

(instead of bit 1 in Q).
h.

Section 1, Loop 8
1)

(LOOP18).

Set all bits in A.

Output (all functions).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S18A).

(S18AA).

Input to A (DTB status input).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S18AB).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Repeat steps 1) through 3).
Set Director bit and Continue bit in Q.

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

Section 1, Loop 8A
1)

(LUP18A).

Set Q01, clear QOO.

. EOP interrupt.

60182000 H

Set director bit in Q.

Clear A.

Set interrupt mask for

Enable interrupts.

Output (to connect to peripheral device number 00).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S18A1).

Expect Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

Delay 39 microseconds.

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

Get DTB status.

602-7

(S18A2).

Clear controller.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

10)

(S18A3).

Get DTB status.

11)

Expect Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

12)

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 9
1)

(LOOPI9).

Initialize EOP interrupt (set interrupt mask, enable

interrupts ).
2)

Output from A with QOO and QOl set (to set equipment select flip-flop).

Expect external reject (hang on reply or internal reject), Error code
4 or 7 if not.

602-8

Set Q15 and QOl.

Output.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(SI9A).

Expect busy, Error code 6 if not.

(SI9B).

Get DTB status.

Delay 30 microseconds.

10)

Expect no EOP interrupt" Error code 8 if interrupt.

11)

(SI9C).

12)

Expect busy" Error code 6 if not.

13)

(SI9D).

14)

Expect reply (hang on reject)" Error code 4 or 5 if not.

15)

(SI9E).

16)

Expect Busy_ Error code 6 if not.

17)

(SI9EA).

18)

Output.

19)

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

20)

(SI9EB).

21)

Output.

22)

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

Get DTB status.

Clear interrupt.

Get DTB status.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Set Q15 and QOl.

60182000 H

2.3)

(S19F).

Clear controller.

24)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

25)

(S19G).

26)

Expect

27)

(S19H).

Get DTB status.
Busy~

Error code 6 if not.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 9A
1)

(LUP19A).

Set QOl.

Load A with 700 hex (=3400 octal).

Output (connect 8049 and select input mode).

Expect reply (hang on

(S19A1).

Set Q15 and Q02.

Output (request input of status from 8049).

Expect reply (hang on

(S19A2).

Delay 30 microseconds.

(S19A3).

Clear QOO.

reject)~

Error code 4 or 5 if not.

Delay 30 microseconds.

reject)~

Error code 4 or 5 if not.

10)

Input (8049 status).

11)

Expect reply (hang on

12)

(S19A4).

13)

Output (request input to cause disconnect).

14)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

15)

(S19A5).

reject)~

Error code 4 or 5 if not.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Delay 30 microseconds (to give Disconnect FF in 8049

time to set).
16)

Clear controller (to clear Input FF in

DTB~

thus dropping input request

signal and clearing Disconnect FF in 8049).

60182000 H

17)

Clear controller (to clear Interrupt FF and Disconnect FF in DTB).

18)

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 10
1)

(LOOP1A).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Set QOO and QOl

Input (to set Equipment Select FF).

602-9

Expect external reject (hang on reply or internal reject), Error code
4 or 7 if not.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Output (request input).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(SlAA).

Expect busy, Error code 6 if not.

Get DTB status.

10)

(SlAB).

Delay 30 microseconds.

11)

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

12)

(SlAC).

13)

Expect busy, Error code 6 if not.

14)

(S1ACA).

15)

Output.

16)

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

17)

(S1ACB).

18)

Output.

19)

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

20)

(SlAD).

21)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

22)

(SlAE).

23)

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not.

24)

(SlAF).

Get DTB status.

Set Q15 and QOt.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Clear controller.

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop 11
1)

(LOOP1B).

Set Equipment Select FF.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Output (input request).

4) . Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

602-10

(SlBA).

Get DTB status.

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not..

(SlBB).

Clear QOO.

60182000 II

Input (8049 status).

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

10)

Clear controller.

11)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

12)

(SlBC).

13)

Expect busy, Error code 6 if not.

14)

(SlBD).

Get DTB ·status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 1, Loop .12
1)

(LOOP1C).

Set QOl.

Load A with 700 hex (-3400 octal).

Output (connect to 8049).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(SlCA).

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not.

(SlCB).

Delay 30 microseconds.

(SlCC).

Get DTB status.

Expect Interrupt status and Not Busy, Error code 6 if not.

(SlCD).

Get DTB status.

Clear controller.

10)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

11)

(SlCE).

12)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

13)

(SlCF).

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/Jump bit.4 is clear.

End of Section 1
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop/ Jump Bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 1 if Stop/ Jump bit 5 is set.

Section 2 - DTB AND 8049-A STATUS
a.

60182000 H

Section 2, Loop 1 (and Loop 2).
1)

(SEC2).

Initialize section 2, Loop 1 to select Output mode on 8049.

(LOOP21).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

602-11

Connect to 8049 and select Output mode (or Input mode in Loop 2).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S21B).

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not..

Delay 30 microseconds.

Expect EOP interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

(S21D).

Get DTB status.

10)

Expect interrupt and Not Busy, Error code 6 if not.

11)

(S21E).

12)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

13)

(821F).

14)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

15)

(S21G).

16)

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

17)

(S21H).

18)

Output (request input of 8049 status).

19)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

20)

(S21!).

21)

Expect EOP interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

22)

(S21J).

23)

Expect data, interrupt, Busy Status, Error code 6 if not.

24)

(S21K).

25)

Input 8049 status.

26)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

27)

Expect 8049 status to be 701 hex (3401 octal) if Output mode was

Clear interrupt.

Get DTB status.

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Get DTB status.

Clear QOO.

selected (Loop 1).

Expect 8049 status to be 700 hex (3400 octal) if

Input mode was selected (Loop 2).

602-12

28)

(821M).

29)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

30)

(S21MA).

Error code A if not.

Get DTB status.

Attempt 2nd input from 8049.

60182000 H

31)

Expect external reject, Error code 4 or 7 if not.

32)

(S21N).

33)

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

34)

(S210).

35)

Output (request input of data).

36)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

37)

(S21P).

38)

If Loop 1 (Output mode), go to 62) (S21AA).

39)

Expect EOP interrupt (upon disconnect).

40)

(S21Q).

41)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

42)

(S21R).

43)

Expect interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

44)

(S21S).

45)

Expect Disconnect, Interrupt, Busy, Error code 6 if not.

46)

(S21 U).

47)

Expect internal reject, Error code 5 or 7 if not, unless DTB is on
1706 or 1716 (W non-zero).

48)

If DTB is on 1706 or 1716 expect external reject and expect 1706

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Set Q15 and Q02.

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Clear interrupt.

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Get DTB status.

Attempt input from 8049 after disconnect.

status of Busy, not device reply, not device reject. Error code E if
unexpected BDC status. If W is non-zero, perform terminate buffer
on 1706 and go to 51) (S21 W).

60182000 H

49)

(S21 V).

Connect to 8049.

50)

Expect internal reject, Error code 5 or 7 if not.

51)

(S21 W).

52)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

53)

(S21X).

54)

Expect Disconnect, Interrupt, Not Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

55)

Get DTB status.

56)

Expect interrupt and not Disconnect status, Error code 6 if not.

Clear controller.

Get DTB status.

602-13

5.7)

(S21 Y).

Clear interrupt.

5.8)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5. if not.

5.9)

(S21Z).

60)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

61)

Got066) (S21AB).

62)

(S21AA).

63)

Get DTB status.

Expect no EOP interrupt.

64) . Expect Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

65.)

Clear controller.

66)

(S21AB).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 2, Loop 2
1)

(LOOP22).

Set up Section 2, Loop 1 to select Input mode instead of

Output mode.
2)
c.

Go to 2. a.1) (LOOP21) unless Input mode has been used.

Section 2, Loop 3
1)

(LOOP23).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Connect to 8049 station 2.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5. if not.

(S23A).

5.)

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not.

Delay 30 microseconds.

Expect EOP interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

(S23B).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5. if not.

Get DTB status.

Request input from 8049.

10)

(S23C).

Get DTB status.

11)

Expect Data, Interrupt, Busy Status, Error code 6, if not.

12)

(S23D).

13)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5. if not.

14)

(S23E).

Input 8049 status.

Expect 8049 status to be 712 hex (Busy bit set), Error code

A if not.

602-14

60182000 H

15)

Get DTB status.

16)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

17)

(S23F).

Section 2, Loop 4
1)

(LOOP24).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S24A).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S24B).

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

(S24C).

Expect Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

10)
e.

60182000 H

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

(S24D).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Clear controller.

Delay 30 microseconds.

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 2, Loop 5
1)

(LOOP25).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, hang on reject.

(S25A).

Wait for EOP interrupt.

(S25B).

Clear controller, hang on reject.

Get DTB status.

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

(S25C).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 2, Loop 6
1)

(LOOP26).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Connect to 8049, Select mode, hang on reject.

(S26A).

Wait for EOP interrupt.

(S26B).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

(S26 C).

Wait for EOP interrupt.

602-15

602-16

(S26D).

Clear controller, hang on reject.

Get DTB status.

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

10)

(S26E).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

11)

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

12)

(S26F).

Wait for EOP interrupt (due to disconnect).

13)

(S26G).

Clear interrupt.

14)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

15)

(S26GA).

16)

Expect Disconnect, Interrupt, Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

17)

Clear controller, hang on reject.

18)

Clear interrupt, hang on reject.

19)

Get DTB status.

20)

Expect Disconnect, Interrupt, and Not Busy status~ Error code 6 if not.

21)

Get DTB status again.

22)

Expect Interrupt and not Disconnect status, Error code 6 if not.

23)

Clear interrupt, hang on reject.

24)

Get DTB status.

25)

Expect zero status, Error code 6 if not.

26)

(S26H).

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 2, Loop 7
1)

(LOOP27).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, hang on reject.

(S27 A).

Wait for EOP interrupt.

(S27B).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

(S27C).

Wait for EOP interrupt.

(S27D).

Input 8049 status, hang on reject.

(S27DA).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

60182000 H

Output data (blanks) to 8049.

10)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

11)

(S27E).

12)

Expect no EOP interrupt, Error code 8 if interrupt.

13)

(S27F).

14)

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not..

15)

(S27G).

Clear controller (hang on reject).

Get DTB status.

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Section 2, Loop 8
1)

(LOOP28).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, reset entry marker.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S28A).

Expect Busy, Error code 6 if not..

(S28B).

Wait Not Busy.

(S28C).

Expect Interrupt status when busy drops, Error code 6 if not.

(S28D).

Request input from 8049.

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S28E).

Get DTB status.

10)

Expect Data, Interrupt, and Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

11)

(S28F).

12)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

13)

Input 8049 status.

(S28G).

Expect 8049 status to be 701 hex (3401 octal), Error code

A if not.

60182000 H

14)

(S28H).

Initialize EOP interrupt.

15)

(S28HA).

16)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

17)

(S28I).

18)

Expect Busy, Error cod.e 6 if not.

19)

(S28J).

20)

Get DTB status.

21)

Expect Interrupt status, Error code 6 if not.

Output data to 8049.

Get DTB status.

Delay 40 milliseconds.

602-17

b[]2-18

22)

Expect EOP interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

23)

Loop to 14) (S28H) to output word 25 which contains EOM code.

24)

Loop to 1) if Stop! Jump bit 4 is set.

Section 2, Loop 9
1)

(LOOP29). Connect to 8049, select Output mode, reset entry marker,
hang on reject.

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

(S27A).

Expect Data, Interrupt, Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

(S29AA).

Input (8049 status).

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

(S29B).

Loop to 1) 100 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

Wait for Interrupt status.

Set Q15, clear QOO, set Q01 through Q06.

Expect 8049 status to be 701 (3401 octal), Error code A if not.

Section 2, Loop 10
1)

(LOOP2A).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode hang on reject.

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

Input status from 8049, hang on reject.

(S2AA).

Output data (blanks) again, hang on reject.

Wait Not Busy.

Expect Interrupt status when Not Busy, Error code 6 if not.

Output data (blanks), hang on reject.

Output data (blanks) again, hang on reject.

Output data (blanks), hang on reject.

10)

Wait for Interrupt status.

11)

Expect Not Busy status with Interrupt status, Error code 6 if not.

12)

Loop to 4) (S2AA) for total of 500 words.

13)

(S2AB).

Loop to 1) if Stop!Jump bit 4 is set.

60182000 H

End of Section 2
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop/ Jump bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 2 if Stop/ Jump bit 5 is set.

Section 3 - INTERRUPT 40 CHECK
a.

Section 3, Loop 1
1)

(SEC3).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, reset entry marker,

hang on reject.
2)

(S31A).

Wait Not Busy.

(S31B).

Request input, hang on reject.

Input 8049 status, hang on reject

(S31C).

Output 500 blank words (to clear screen).

(S31F).

Output message "PRESS SEND KEY" followed by EOM code.

(S31H).

Initialize interrupt 40.

(S31HA).

Request input, hang on reject.

Connect to 8049, select Input mode, hang on reject.

10)

Input 8049 status, hang on reject.

11)

Loop to 7) (S31H) until interrupt 40 occurs or until one or both of 8049
status bits 0 and 5 are set.

12)

(S311).

If one or both or 8049 status bits 0 and 5 are set, expect 8049

status to be 721 hex (3441 octal), Error code A if not.

60182000 H

13)

(S31IA).

Expect interrupt 40, Error code B if not.

14 )

Go to 19) (S3 1 L).

15)

(S31J).

16)

Expect 8049 status to be 721 hex (3441 octal), Error code A if not.

17)

(S31K).

18)

Expect no interrupt 40, Error code C if interrupt 40 occurs.

19)

(S31 L).

20)

Request input (of data).

21)

Delay 20 milliseco.nds.

If interrupt 40 occurs, connect to 8049 and get 8049 status.

Initialize interrupt 40.

Initialize EOP interrupt.

602-19

22)

(S31M).

Get DTB status.

23)

(S31 N).

Go to 36) (S31 T) if Disconnect status is set.

24)

Expect data, Interrupt, Busy status, Error code 6 if not.

25)

Expect EOP interrupt, Error code 9 if not.

26)

(S310).

27)

Expect reply (hang on reject), Error code 4 or 5 if not.

28)

(S31 P)'

29)

Expect zero, Error code 6 if not.

30)

Loop to 19) (S31L) if not EOM code.

31)

(S31 Q).

32)

Delay 30 microseconds for disconnect to set in 8049.

33)

(S31R).

34)

Expect Disconnect, Interrupt, Busy, Error code 6 if not.

35)

Go to 37) (S31 U).

36)

(S31 T).

Input data from 8049.

Get DTB status.

Request input, hang on reject.

Get DTB status.

Disconnect status occurred on DTB, EOM code was not

found, Error code D.

37)

(S31U).

Clear controller.

38)

Clear controller again.

39)

Loop to 1) five times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

End of Section 3
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop/ Jump bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 3 if Stop/ Jump bit 5 is set.

Section 4 - OUTPUT SHIFTED PATTERN
a.

Section 4, Loop 1 (Ripple Test)
1)

(SEC4).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, reset entry marker,

hang on reject.
2)

(LOOP41).

Set up buffer area for first line of pattern (store all codes

in buffer area in ascending order except EOM code and Carriage
Return code).

602-20

60182000 H

(S4E).

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, do not reset entry

marker, hang on reject.
4)

Request input of status from 8049, hang on reject.

Input status from 8049, hang on reject.

(S4F).

Get data in A.

(S4G).

Output data, hang on reject.

Increment word count, and loop to 6) (S4F) for 24 words.

(S4GB). Form last word with EOM code, and loop to 7) (S4G) to
output word 25.

10)

(S4H).

Loop to 3) (S4E) if Stop/ Jump bit 4 is set.

11)

Shift buffer area, increment line count, and loop to 3) (S4E) for 20
lines (fill the screen).

12)
b.

Loop to 2) (LOOP41) 20 times and until Stop/ Jump bit 4 is clear.

End of Section 4
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop! Jump bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 4 if Stop! Jump bit 5 is set.

Section 5 - ECHO TEST
a.

Section 5, Loop 1
1)

(SEC5).

Output message "ECHO TEST" in upper left of display screen

and fill rest of screen with blanks.
2)

(S5E).

Initialize interrupt 40.

(S5F).

Wait for interrupt 40.

(S5G).

Connect to 8049, select Input mode, hang on reject.

Request input from 8049, hang on reject.

Input status from 8049, hang on reject.

Expect 8049 status to be 721 hex (3441 octal), Error code A if not.

(S5!).

Input data from 8049, hang on reject, and store data in buffer area.

10)

60182000 H

Request input, hang on reject.

Loop to 8) (S5!) until EOM code or word 500 is input.

bD 2-21

11)

(S5J).

Request input, hang on reject.

12)

Delay 15 milliseconds for disconnect to set in 8049.

13)

Clear controller to clear disconnect.

14)

Connect to 8049, select Output mode, do not reset entry marker,
hang on reject..

15)

Request input, hang on reject.

16)

Input 8049 status, hang on reject.

17)

Output carriage return on 8049.

18)

If first two characters of input message were periods, go to end of

section (S5M).

19)

(S5K).

Output data thru EOM code.

20)

(S5L).

Delay 2 seconds for operator to view display.

21)

Loop to 1) 20 times and until Stop! Jump bit 4 is clear.

End of Section 5 (S5M).
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop! Jump bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 5 if Stop! Jump bit 5 is set.

Section 6 - ONE SYMBOL
a.

Section 6, Loop 1
1)

(SEe6). Connect to 8049, select Output mode, reset entry marker,
hang on reject.

Request input, hang on reject.

Input, hang on reject.

(S6A).

OUTPUT 999 identical symbols (the symbol code was chosen

at the parameter stop).

602-22

(S6C).

OUTPUT EOM code.

(S6D).

Loop to 1) (SEC6) 20 times and until Stop!Jump bit 4 is clear.

End of Section 6
1)

Clear controller.

Stop if Stop! Jump bit 1 is set.

Repeat Section 6 if Stop! Jump bit 5 is set.

60182000 H

End of Test
a.

End of test typeout.

Stop if Stop/ Jump bit 2 is set.

Test will be repeated.

Re- enter parameters if bits 0 and 10 of stop/jump word are set.

III. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

SPACE REQUIRED - approximately 1700 locations.

TIMING

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
1.

1704 Computer

8049 Display Controller

211 Display Station

60182000 H

602-23

1744/274 DIGIGRAPHICS SYSTEM
(DIGA4F Test No. 4F)

The following information contains the procedure for performing each of the Digigraphics
test programs. Test program 2 relates to alignment of the 274 Console. This procedure
illustrates the method for stepping through each test phase of the console alignment; it does
not include the alignment procedure.

The user must still refer to the 274 Digigraphics

Console Reference/Customer Engineering Manual (Pub. No. 60279100) for specific information on how adjustments are to be performed.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

HARDW ARE REQUIREMENTS

1704 or 1774 Computer

1744 Digigraphic Controller

274 Display Console

1706 Channel (optional)

SOFTW ARE REQUIREMENTS
1.

Test operates under control of SMM 17.

Test is a stand-alone test.

Test is approximately 2A 70

Bit 5 of the SMM parameter must be set to run the test (NON- interrupt mode).

locations in length.

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

The test must be loaded under SMM 1 7 as test number 4F.

The test may be restarted from Initial Address.

PARAMETERS
Once the test has been loaded the following procedure is applicable.
1.

Teletype types:

Enter interrupt line; 1 to $F.

60182000 J

Interrupt Line 1 to F.

603-1

Depress carriage RETURN key.

Teletype types: DATA CHANNEL.

Type: 0 (if 1706 BDC not used)
or
1 (if 1706 BDC used)

Teletype types: EQUIP NO.

Enter equipment number; 1 to $F

Depress carriage RETURN key.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER.

10.

Check that all computer console lever switches are in center position.

11.

Type test number: X where X

= 1-9.

(For test 6 go to step 12 and skip step 11. )
12.

Go to test program procedure to be performed.

13.

Repeat steps 10 through 12 for each test.
NOTE
If at the completion of any test program, the 274/1744
Maintenance Test is to be exited, return to System
Maintenance Monitor Control:

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER.

Type: E

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.

TEST PROGRAMS
1.

Test 1: Core Test Program
a.

Phases 1 and 2.
1)

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to up position.

(Switch must

remain in this position for the normal execution of the Core Test
Program. )
2)

Teletype types: ENTER MEMORY SIZE 4 or 8.

Type: 4 (if 1744 core memory

= 4K)

or
8 (if 1744 core memory = 8K)

603-2

60182000 H

Depress carriage RETURN key.

Teletype types: 1744 CONTROLLER MEMORY
MODULE ADDRESS ACTUAL DESIRED
NOTE
Phase 1 and phase 2 of core test are now in progress
(test requires 1 to 2 minutes for execution). If both
phases are performed without error, teletype will
print message indicated in Phase 3, step 1). This'
signifies entry into phase 3 of core test. If test
fails, an error type-out will be printed conforming
to the format above.

Phase 3.
1)

Teletype has typed: ENTER TEST PATTERN IN A REG-RUN.

Depress REGISTER SELECT button.

Depress display register CLEAR button.

Using the display register buttons, enter the test pattern to be written
into 1744 core (this pattern will also be read and verified).

Momentarily set RUN/STEP lever switch to RUN position and release.

Teletype types: XXXX HEX TEST PATTERN SELECTED.
(XXXX

test pattern selected, in hexadecimal).

If you previously designated that the 1744 has an 8K memory, perform

steps a) through c); with a 4K memory, omit these steps.
a)

Teletype types: TYPE 0 OR 1 TO SELECT MODULE.

Type: 0 (if you desire Module 0 to be exercised)
or
1 (if you desire Module 1 to be exercised)

Depress and release carriage RETURN.

NOTE
Module 1 or 2 is currently being exercised. It takes
approximately 1 minute to complete the Read, Write
and Verify operation. If no errors occur, the operation
will continually be recycled. If an error is detected,
the teletype will print out the error information.
8)

To exit phase 3, press and release teletype MANUAL INTERRUPT
button.

60182000 H

603-3

Phase 4.
1)

Teletype has typed: R or W.

Type: W (if you want a continuous write operation performed)
or
R (if you want a single write operation followed by a continuous
read)

Teletype types: ENTER TEST PATTERN IN A REG-RUN

Press REGISTER SELECT button.

Press display register CLEAR button.

Set the display register buttons to reflect the pattern to be used for
the continuous read or write operation.

Momentarily set RUN/STEP lever switch to RUN position and release.

Teletype types: XXXX HEX TEST PATTERN SELECTED
(XXXX

test pattern selected, in hexadecimal).

If you previously designated that the 1744 has an 8K memory, perform

steps a) through c); with a 4K memory, omit these steps.
a)

Teletype types: TYPE 0 or 1 TO SELECT MODULE.

Type: 0 (if you wish the continuous read or write operation
performed with Module 0)
or
1 (if you wish the continuous read or write operation
performed with Module 1)

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.
NOTE

The continuous read or write operation is now in
progress. There is no verification during this phase.
The program will continually loop until user desires
to manually exit test.
10)

603-4

To exit from Core Test Program:
a)

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to center position.

Press REGISTER SELECT button.

Press and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Go to next test program.
60182000 H

Test 2: 274 Console Test Program
NOTE
The following procedure enables the user to step
through all the phases of the console test program.
It is intended to supplement the current console
alignment procedure in the Digigraphics console
customer engineering manual. The user must
still refer to the alignment procedure for complete
and accurate guidance.
a.

Teletype types: NUMBER

Choose one of the following:
If user desires only to step through the high voltage on checks (phases

15-18, see Table 1), perform the following:
1)

In reply to the teletype message, NUMBER, type:

Press carriage RETURN.

(Test phase is now in progress; 274 Console

displays square type pattern).
3)

Omit steps c through f. and go directly to step g.
OR

If user desires to step through each test phase, see Table 1, and proceed

to step c.
c.

Turn off the 274 Console high-voltage power supply.
CAUTION
Console test phases 1 through 14 should be performed
with the console high voltage turned off. Failure to
turn off high voltage may cause burn spots on the Console CRT screen.
NOTE
If user attempts to enter console test phases 1 through
14 with high voltage on, teletype types: TURN OFF

HIGH VOLTAGE.
is:

60182000 H

The proper response to this message

Turn off 274 Console high-voltage power supply.

Wait until type-out stops.

Depress and release teletype MANUAL INTERRUPT pushbutton.

Teletype types: NUMBER

Go to step h.

603-5

Remove the 274 Console preamplifier cards at locations J43 and J66.
(Turn console off while cards are being removed or inserted).
CAUTION
Console test phases 1 through 12 should be performed
with the console preamplifier cards at jack locations
J43 and J66 removed. Failure to remove cards will
cause the console deflection amplifiers to overheat.
Make certain that preamplifier cards are replaced
before turning high voltage back on.
d.

In reply to the teletype message, NUMBER, type: 1.

Press carriage RETURN.
NOTE
Phase 1 of console test is now in progress.

TABLE 1.

CONSOLE TESTS

CAUTIONS
High voltage off for phases 1-14.
Do not turn high voltage back on until phase 15 is executed.
Preamplifier cards out for phases 1-12, replace after
entering phase 13.
Never turn high voltage on while preamplifier cards out.
Turn console off when cards are being removed or inserted.
Refer to Digigraphics console customer engineering manual
for exact sequencing of items above.
Console Test

Phase

6[]3-6

Receiver check

Bit 2 D I A Alignment

Bit 3 Alignment

Bit 4 Alignment

Bit 5 Alignment

Bit 6 Alignment

7
8

Bit 7 Alignment
Bit 8 Alignment

Bit 9 Alignment

Bit 10 Alignment

Bit 11 Alignment
S&H Delay and Time Constant

Preamplifier and Deflection Ampl. Alignment

60182000 H

TABLE 1.

CONSOLE TESTS (Cont'd)

Phase

Console Test

XY Velocity and Vector Sum Adj.

15
16

Test Square Displayed

Three Test Squares Displayed
Test Square Displayed

Five Dot Pattern Displayed
To progress through remainder of console test, choose one of the following
procedures:
1)

Teletype Advance Procedure. (Procedure enables user to advance
through test sequentially or to jump to any desired test phase. )
a)

Depress teletype MANUAL INTERRUPT button.

Teletype types: NUMBER

Type in number in PHASE column (see Table 1) corresponding to
specific console test you wish to perform.

Press carriage RETURN key.

(Selected console test phase is

now in progress. )
e)
2)

Repeat steps a through d to advance test.

Light Pen Switch Advance.

(Procedure enables user to sequentially

advance through test phases 1-15).
a)

Press and release light pen switch.

Teletype types: N =
(XX

c)
3)

console test phase initiated; see Table 1. )

Repeat steps a and b to advance test.

Maintenance Switch Card Advance.

(Procedure enables user to

sequentially advance through test phases 1-18.

Test phase 18

advances to phase 1. )
a)

Press and release switch on maintenance card (location J16) in
the 274 Console logic rack.

60182000 H

Teletype types: N = XX
(XX = console test phase initiated; see Table 1. )

Repeat steps a and b to advance test.

603-7

Light Pen Strike Advance. (May be used to advance program
sequentially only when light is present on screen; i. e., phases 15-18.
Test phase 18 advances to phase 1. )
a)

Press Light Pen switch and pick light from the 274 Console display.

Teletype types: N
(XX

c)
h.

= console

= XX

test phase initiated; see Table 1. )

Repeat steps a and b to advance test.

To exit 274 Console Test Program:
a)

Press and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Go to next test program.

Test 3: X, Yand S Transfer and ID Read Test Program
a.

Internal! Computer Display Check
NOTE
If test 3 is in progress and any interrupt other than
Priority or Light Pen occurs, the teletype will print
out an error message (Ghost Interrupt):

GI
HHHH*
1)

Observe that:
a)

Teletype does not print error message.

The display on the 274 Console conforms to the following
illustration (Dots are

inter~ally

displayed; cross is computer-

displayed. )

~:~HHHH

603-8

= Status

of 1744 in hexadecimal

60182000 H

+
Figure 1.
b.

Dot- Cross Display

ID Error Check.
1)

Using the light pen, .choose one of the displayed dots.
a)

Observe that:

Next dot in sequence disappears while choice is being made.
(Dot sequence: left to right, starting at bottom row)

There is no teletype ID error (IDERR) message printout.
NOTE

An ID error printout (in hexadecimal) will resemble
the following format:

~:~

Vertical row number of dot chosen.

~:o:~Horizontal

row number of dot chosen.

Top row of numbers reflects actual X, Y and S register
status at time of light pen strike. Bottom row reflects
ID bytes associated with chosen dot. Two low-order
characters of each ID byte identify dot parameters.

60182000 H

603-9

Forced Printout Feature.
1)

Using the light pen, choose one of the displayed dots (next dot in
sequence disappears when choice is made).

Using the light pen, choose the cross.

Observe that the teletype prints a message conforming to the following
format (information relates to chosen dot, not cross):
CROSS
X 4 X 3X 2 X 1
00X X
4 3

Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1

00X2 X

00Y Y 3
4

00Y2 Y
1

00S4S3

00S2S1

OOVR

OOHR

Intensity Levels Check.
1)

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to up position.

Depress REGISTER SELECT button.

Depress the display register CLEAR button.

Enter OF77 16 (0000111101110111 2 ) into the display register.

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to center position.

Momentarily set the RUN/STEP lever switch to RUN position and
release.

Observe that:
a)

Each previously displayed dot has been replaced with a 45-degree
line, approximately 1 inch in length.

The lines at the left third of the display are of a dim intensity;
center third, medium intensity; and right third, bright intensity.

Increment Byte Entry Feature.
1)

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to up position.

Depress REGISTER SELECT-A button.

Depress display register CLEAR button.

Enter desired increment byte into display register.

Use the following

guide.

603-10

60182000 H

15 14
Display
10 9 8
11
13 1 2
Register
Increment Set to D's 1 - Hearn on Scale
Byte
o = Beam off Factor
010" OIl" 100"
101" 110 or
111 only

6 5 4
7
SIgn X
X
0=+ enter in
1 = - complement form
if sign neg.

210
3
Sign Y
Y
0=+ enter in
1 = - complement form
if sign neg.

Set SELECTIVE STOP lever switch to center position.

Momentarily set RUN/STEP lever switch to RUN position and release.

Observe that 274 Console displays the new increment byte.
NOTE
To enter another increment byte" repeat previous
seven steps.

To exit from X" Yand S Transfer and ill Read Test Program:
1)

Depress REGISTER SELECT.,.P button.

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Go to next test program.

Test 4: Command Test Program.
a.

Observe that 274 Console displays the following:
SSSSSSSSSSMMMMMMMMMMPPPPPPPPPPRRRRRRRRRRE
NOTE
SI s signify successful execution of an S Jump command;
MIS" Macro Call; PIS" P Jump: Rls" Return to Main;
EI s - decoding of an End of Display byte.

60182000 H

To Exit Command Test Program:

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Go to next test program.

603-11

Test 5: Memory Dump Program.
a.

Teletype types: FWA

If only one dump is desired and the dump program is to be exited at the

completion of that dump, set and leave the SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch
in the up position. To remain in dump program, check that switch is in
the center position.
c.

In reply to teletype message "FWA", type, in hexadecimal, the First
Word Address of memory dump (0 to FFF in 4K system; 0 to 1FFF in 8K

system).
d.

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.

Teletype types: NWDS

Type, in decimal, the number of words desired in dump. (Maximum: 100

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.

Observe that teletype prints out the memory dump requested (typeout is in

hexadecimal).

Choose one of the following:
1)

If SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch is in the center position:

At the completion of the dump, teletype types: FWA

Repeat steps 5b through 5h to obtain another dump.

If SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch is in the up position:

At the completion of the dump, the teletype types: TYPE TEST
NUMBER.

Set SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch to center position.

Go to next test program.

Test 6: Variable Function and Alphanumeric Keyboards Test Program.
a.

Check that all computer console lever switches are in the center position.

Perform the appropriate keyboard checkout procedures: 1) Variable
Function Keyboard Checkout and/or 2) Alphanumeric Keyboard Checkout.
1)

Variable Function Keyboard Checkout:
a)

Prior to initiating Test 6, depress and release Keyboard ON/OFF
pushbutton several times.
and extinguishes.

603-12

Observe that the pushbutton illuminates

Leave pushbutton in extinguished condition.

60182000 H

NOTE
Keyboard ON/OFF lamp extinguished indicates deactivated keyboard.
b)

Teletype has previously typed: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Type: 6

Depress carriage RETURN.

Observe that keyboard ON/OFF pushbutton illuminates.

Check that all pushbuttons, except ON/OFF, are extinguished or can
be extinguished by depressing pushbuttons.

With all keyboard pushbuttons, except ON/OFF, extinguished,
observe that the 274 Console display surface is blank.

Depress and hold keyboard Reject (red) button.

Observe that the

button is illuminated and "00" is displayed on the 274 Console.
i)

Release Reject button.

Depress and hold keyboard Accept (green) button.

Observe that

the button is illuminated and "01" is displayed on the 274 Console.
k)

Release Accept button.

Depress and latch each latching button (those other than Accept,
Reject, and ON/OFF). Observe that as each button is latched, the
bit position associated with the button is displayed.

Depress and release the On/ OFF button.

Note that all keyboard button lamps extinguish and the 274 Console
screen is blank.

To exit from Variable Function Keyboard portion of test program:
(1)

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

(2)

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER

(3)

Choose one of the following:
Go to Alphanumeric Keyboard Checkout
or
Go to any other 274/1744 Maintenance Test programs to be
performed
or
Exit 274/1744 Maintenance Test and return to SMM 17 control
by:

60182000 H

603-13

(a)

In reply to teletype message TYPE TEST NUMBER,

type: E
(b)
2)

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.

Alphanumeric Keyboard Checkout.
a)

Prior to initiating Test 6, depress and release keyboard ON/OFF
button several times.
extinguishes.

Observe that the button illuminates and

Leave button in illiminated condition.
NOTE

Keyboard ON/ OFF lamp illuminated indicates keyboard
activated.
b)

Teletype has previously typed: TYPE TEST NUMBER

Type: 6

Depress and release carriage RETURN.

Observe that keyboard ON/OFF pushbutton extinguishes.

Depress and release keyboard on/ off pushbutton and observe that
it illuminates.

Using Table 2 as a guide, depress and release keyboard key and
observe that the 274 Console displays the data indicated.
NOTE

Certain key characters are uppercase symbols and
require that the SHIFT or CTRL keys be depressed
(dep) while selection is being made'.
NOTE
The 274 Console will display any portion of "07 06
05 04 03 02 01 00" depending on which key is
depressed. A "07 03 00" would indicate that the
1744 Controller is sending a logical 1 in bit positions
07, 03, and 00 to the computer. The 06, 05, 04, 02,
and 01 bit positions would be logical 0' s.
h)

603-14

To exit from Alphanumeric Keyboard portion of test program:
(1)

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

(2)

Teletype types: TYPE TEST NUMBER.

60182000 H

(3)

Choose one of the following:
Go to any other 274/1744 Maintenance Test programs to be
performed
or
Exit 274/1744 Maintenance Test and return to SMM 17
control by:
(a)

In reply to teletype message TYPE TEST NUMBER,
type: E

(b)

Depress and release carriage RETURN key.

Test 7: SPARE (Not used)

Test 8: Scissoring Test
a.

Observe that the 274 Console displays the form described under Test 8
in the TEST PROGRAMS DESCRIPTION section.

To exit the scissoring test program:
1)

Depress and release SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch.

Teletype types TYPE TEST NUMBER.

Go to next test program.

Test 9: Velocity Compensation Test
Same as above, except for the display.

See the discussion under TEST

PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS.

60182000 H

603-15

TEST PROGRAMS DESCRIPTION

TEST 1: CORE TEST PROGRAM
PURPOSE
The core test program checks the ability of the 1744 Controller to have data written into and
read out of its buffer memory, and it ensures that the transfer is unaffected by cross talk.
The worst test patterns are used to thoroughly exercise the logic circuitry.

PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
General
Test 1 is subdivided into four test phases.

Phases 1 and 2 are executed sequentially without

operator intervention. Pre- selected test patterns using varied combinations of FFFF 16'
0000 , 5555
and AAAA
bytes are used. Phase 3 enables the user to exercise buffer
16
16
16
memory with any 16-bit word combination so desired. In phases 1, 2 and 3, the selected
bytes are written into core, read out and verified.
print out a message defining the failure.

If the test phase fails, the teletype will

The fourth phase is a continuous read/write feature,

whereby the user specifies a 16- bit word pattern and calls for a read or write operation.
Phases 1 and 2
Upon entering test 1 the teletype prints out ENTER MEMORY SIZE 4 or B.

This is a

request for the user to enter, via the teletype, the current size of the 1744 buffer memory,
4 or B, as applicable for a 4K or BK system.

When the core size information is entered, the

teletype prints:
1744 CONTROLLER MEMORY
MODULE ADDRESS ACTUAL DESIRED
This typeout signifies that phase 1 of the core test has been initiated.

Phase 2 will auto-

matically be entered at the successful c~mpletion of phase 1. Should either test phase fail,
the teletype will print out an error message in hexadecimal conforming to the format heading
above.

The typeout in the MODULE column will be either 1 or 0, indicating the memory

module in which the failure occurred.
count at which the error occurred.

603-16

The ADDRESS column will contain the 1744 S-Register

The ACTUAL column specifies the byte that was read

60182000 H

back to the computer (i. e., the byte that is in error).
byte being exercised by the test program.

DESIRED column indicates the true

The successful completion of phases 1 and 2 is

signaled by: no error message typeout; and teletype message, ENTER TEST PATTERN IN
A REG-RUN.
Phase 3
The last typeout signified entry into phase 3 of the core test; it is also a request for the user
to enter a test pattern in the A register of the computer, via the computer console display
register pushbuttons.

The program will stop at this point only if the SELECTIVE STOP

lever switch had previously been set to the up position. Mter the pattern is entered" the
teletype will print XXXX HEX TEST PATTERN SELECTED; XXXX is the test pattern entered
in the A register.
If operator previously designated that the 1744 had an 8K memory" the teletype will request

that the number of the module to be exercised is entered with the message" TYPE 0 OR 1
TO SELECT MODULE.

Type 0 or 1 to make this selection.

This typeout will not occur if

a 4K memory had previously been indicated.
Phase 3 test will continually be repeated until: an error occurs and the teletype prints out
that error message; or the test is to be manually exited.
Phase 4
Depressing the teletype MANUAL INTERRUPT pushbutton while phase 3 is in progress will
cause the test program to advance to phase 4.
Entry into phase 4 is indicated by the teletype message R OR W.

Type R if a continuous

read operation is to be performed or W if a continuous write operation is to be performed.
The teletype will print ENTER TEST PATTERN IN A REG RUN.

This is a request for the

user to enter the test pattern to be used for the operation into the A register operation of
the computer.

Mter the pattern is entered, the teletype will print XXXX TEST PATTERN

SELECTED; XXXX is the test pattern selected in hexadecimal.
If an 8K memory had previously been indicated" the teletype will print TYPE 0 OR 1 TO

SELECT MODULE.
exercised.

The user replies by typing 0 or 1" depending on the module to be

The request for module selection will not be printed out if a 4K buffer memory

had previously been indicated.

60182000 H

603-17

Phase 4 execution will begin with the input of the data above. It will continually be repeated
until the user desires to exit the core test program by depressing the SELECTIVE SKIP
lever switch.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
General
Figure 3 illustrates, on a basic block level, the data transfer path used during the core write
operation~

Each interconnecting line represents a l6-bit transfer path.
1744 CONTROLLER

r------ --- --------...,

I
I

I
I
COMPUTER

H+
I
I

DATA
IF
RCVR

--+

Z
REG

f--+

CORE

IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Figure 3.

Core Write-Data Transfer for Path

Figure 4 is an example of the data transfer logic used during a core write operation.

The

logic unique to the transfer of bit 03 is illustrated.
DATA
IF
RCVR

Z REGISTER

r---' r--------------------,

BIT 03 -~rr-----"J I I
FROM
~~~-I-{
COMPUTER
I

I
I

I IL
IF TO Z
STROBE

Figure 4..

II-'~~I~

Z030

L ___ --1

CORE

r-----l
I

Z031

_ ______
CLEAR
Z

MODULE
SELECT

I
L _____
JI

ADDRESS a
MEMORY CYCLE
TIMING

Core Write - Bit 03 Logic Circuit

Additional inhibited gates and loads are not shown in the figure; they are not used for data
transfer during core write. Though they are not used~ they may be a probable trouble area
for this operation.

603-18

60182000 H

The basic block cliagram of the core read data transfer path is illustrated in Figure 5.
1744 CONTROLLER

r----------------,
I
I
DATA
Z
I
r-L COMPUTER
CORE IF
REG
I
I
XMTR
IL _______________ I
~

Figure 5.

Core Read - Data Transfer Path

Figure 6 illustrates the data path associated with transferring a bit during the core read
operation on a logic circuit level.

Bit 03 is used as an example.
DATA
INTERFACE
TRANSMITTERS

Z REGISTER

CORE

r----.,

r-------, r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - j
I I

I
I
I

MODULE ~~--~I

Z030

I
I

MODULE
I

I
I I
I I

I
I
I

: I

I
I
I

Z031

I
L

BIT 03
TO
COMPUTER

L ___ -.l

ADDRESS a
MEMORY CYCLE
TIMING

CORE CLEAR
TO Z
Z
STROBE

Figure 6.

Z TO IF
STROBE

Core Read - Bit 03 Logic Circuit

Although the Z- register flip-flops shown in Figures 4 and .6 illustrate only two of the Z- register
set inputs, the 13 low-order flip-flops have additional set inputs from the status selector
circuits.

These inputs are inhibited during a buffer memory read or write operation, but

would present problems if the input gate was enabled due to a malfunction.

This also applies

to an additional OR input to transmitter X030 in Figure 6.

60182000 H

603-19

Phase 1: During phase 1, the 1744 core read/write logic is exercised with 16-bit FFFF 16
and 0000
bytes. The exact sequencing is described below:
16
1) FFFF 16 bytes written into every location in Module 0; read and verified.
2)

Alternate 0000 and FFFF 16 bytes written into every location in Module 0; read and
verified.

If 1744 has an 8K memory, steps 3 and 4 are performed:
3)

FFFF 16 bytes written into every location in Module 1; read and verified.

Alternate 0000 and FFFF 16 bytes written into every core location in Module 1;
read and verified.

Steps 1 through 4 (1 and 2· in 4K system) repeated ten times.

The test patterns may be expressed in hexadecimal, octal or binary form:
Hexadecimal
Octal
Binary

0000 16

FFFF

16
1777778
1111 1111 1111 11112

000000

8
0000 0000 0000 0000

Phase 1, therefore, exercises buffer memory with 16-bit words containing either all logical
l' s or all logical 0' s.

This test checks the ability of the core read/write logic to process

both 'ls and o's and to switch between the two at 600 kc rate.
the strobing terms used during the buffer memory operations.

It is also a good check of all

(See Figures 4 and 6. )

Phase 2: Phase 2 is entered without operator intervention at the completion of phase 1.
test phase exercises the buffer memory Read/Write circuits with 16-bit AAAA
bytes.

A 64-word block of alternate 5555

A 64-word block of alternate AAAA 16 and 5555 16 bytes written into Module O.

Steps 1 and 2 repeated until Module 0 filled.

Contents of Module 0 read and verified.

A 64-word block of alternate AAAA 16 and 5555 16 bytes written into Module O.

A 64-word block of alternate 5555

Steps 5 and 6 repeated until Module 0 filled.

Contents of Module 0 read and verified.

Steps 1 through 8 re- cycled ten times.

603-20

The test sequence is described below:

10)

The

and 5555

and AAAA

bytes written into Module O.

Steps 1 through 9 repeated for Module 1 if 1744 has an 8K memory.

60182000 H

The test patterns may be expressed in hexadecimal, octal or binary form:
Hexadecimal
Octal
Binary

AAAA

5555

16
052525
8
0101 0101 0101 0101

16
125252
8
1010 1010 1010 1010

Phase 2 exercises the core Read/Write circuits with 16-bit words consisting of alternate
logical1's and D's, with the l's and D's being shifted in successive words. In terms of
crosstalk problems, this presents a worst-case test pattern for the memory module and
transmission lines.

If a crosstalk problem is likely to occur,' this test phase will provide

every opportunity.
Phase 3: Entry into phase 3 of the core test program (i. e., successful com'pletion of phase
1 and 2) is signaled by the teletype message, ENTER TEST PATTERN IN A REG RUN.

This

is a request for the user to enter, via the teletype, the test pattern to be exercised.
The selected test pattern is written into every location in buffer memory, read and verified.
A failure is indicated by a teletype message defining the error.
Phase 4: Phase 4 is normally entered by depressing the teletype MANUAL INTERRUPT
pushbutton while phase 3 is in progress.
The test aids in troubleshooting because it enables the user to select a 16-bit test pattern
and have this pattern either continually written into buffer memory or continually read out
after a single write operation.

60182000 H

603-21

TEST 2: 274 CONSOLE TEST PROGRAM

PURPOSE
Test program 2 generates all the different byte streams necessary to enable the customer
engineer to align the 274 Console.
PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
The program consists of 18 test phases.

The test phases may be advanced using either the

teletype or the light pen or a maintenance card located in the 274 Console logic rack.

Each

technique has its advantages and limitations .
. Using the teletype, the operator depresses the MANUAL INTERRUPT pushbutton whenever
one test phase is to be changed to another. The teletype types NUMBER, to which the user
responds by typing in the new test phase number. With this procedure the user may jump
to any test phase so desired; the disadvantage is that the user must leave the console and
approach the teletype whenever a test phase is to be changed.

The teletype mayor may not

be in close proximity to the console.
The test phases may be advanced sequentially with the light pen by either of two methods.
Depressing the Light Pen switch will advance tests 1 through 14 (tests with high voltage off).
Depressing the light pen switch and picking light from the 274 console screen will advance
tests 15 through 18 (tests with high voltage on).

These are quick and convenient methods for

advancing the console tests; the only minor limitation is that tests can only be advanced
sequentially.
Each console test phas'e may be advanced from the rear of the console through use of ~he
maintenance card at location J16. Depressing the momentary switch on the card will
sequentially advance the test.

The teletype will print out the new phase test number.

The user must determine which of the possible ways of advancing the 274 Console test
program is most advantageous to use under a given set of circumstances.
To exit test 2, the SELECTIVE SKIP lever switch is depressed.
The procedure for performing all adjustments associated with each test phase is described
in the 274 Digigraphic Console Reference/Customer Engineering Manual, Pub. No. 60279100.

603-22

60182000 H

TEST 3: X, Y and S TRANSFERS and ID READ

PURPOSE
The X, Yand S Transfers and ID Read test checks the ability of the 274/1744 to perform
computer and internal display, and to time- share between both in one display frame.

The

test checks the ability of the hardware to respond to and process Read S, Read X, Read Y
and Search for ID Byte function code commands.

It also checks the ability of the hardware

to detect and process the following command bytes: End of Display, Reset, Increment, and
ID.

PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
Test 3 consists of five major checks. Upon entering the test program, the user performs
the Internal/ Computer Display check. A dot- cross pattern display on the 274 Console is
examined to determine whether it is correct.
The second check is the ID Error check. Several of the displayed dots are chosen with the
light pen and the user observes that the teletype does not print an ID error message.
The Forced Printout check is next.

A displayed dot is chosen with the light pen.

It is

immediately followed by a cross choice. A teletype message is printed out defining location
parameters associated with the chosen dot. This printout is examined.
To perform the Intensity Levels check, the user enters a preselected Increment byte into
the A register of the computer.
with several intensity levels.

He then observes the 274 Console for a given display pattern

The last check is the Increment Byte Entry feature.

The operator enters an Increment Byte

of his own choosing into the A register of the computer and observes that the 274 Console
displays the byte.
Return to the control program may be accomplished by depressing the SELECTIVE SKIP
lever switch on the computer console.

60182000 H

603-23

TECHNICAL

DES~RIPTION

Internal! Computer Display Check
Upon entering test 3 the console will display the dot-cross pattern illustrated in Figure 7
below.

Figure 7.

Dot- Cross Pattern Display

All dots are displayed from buffer memory, and the cross is computer displayed.
display is initiated by a Function Code 0 (i. e., Command Field
bit 12 (Start Internal Display Bit) set to 1.

Internal

0), Write command with

Dots are sequentially displayed, left to right,

starting at the bottom row.
It is necessary that the user know what command bytes are used to generate the display to

. better understand what aspects of the hardware are checked during this test.
describes the byte stream used to generate two consecutive dots.

The following

Specific dots are identified

by the S register count associated with the Increment byte producing the dot (see Figure 8).
As an example, the dot at the bottom left of the display would be identified as Dot DOE.
illustrated below is the byte stream used to produce Dot OlD and Dot 02C.

603-24

60182000 H

TABLE 1

BYTE STREAM-DOT OlD AND DOT 02C

Byte
Hexadecimal
Character
841

Purpose

Type
RESET

Key 1744 logic that next two bytes
are new X and Y coordinates; enable
light pen sense; and set dim intensity.

C54

X COORD INA TE

Horizontal position for do.t OlD.

AFF

Y COORDINATE

Vertical position for dot OlD.

ill}

Contain X position data for dot

ill}

Contain Y position data for dot ODE.

1B
FA
FF

~OE.

byte producing dot ODE.

Contains vertical row count for dot ODE.

Contains horizontal row count of dot ODE.

COO

NOP - BEAM ON

Displays dot OlD.

200

NOP

No operation byte, turns beam off.

200

NOP

No operation byte (beam off).

200

NOP

No operation byte (beam off).

841

RESET

Key 1 744 logic that next two bytes are

0
DE

Contain S register count of increment

new X and Y coordinates; enable light
pen sense; and set dim intensity.
D94

X COORDINATE

Horizontal position for dot 02C.

AFF

Y COORDINATE

Vertical position for dot 02C.

ill}
ID

Contain X position data for dot OlD.

ill}

Contain Y position data for dot OlD.

5B
FA
FF
0
ID

60182000 H

ill}
ID

Contain S register count of increment
byte producing dot OlD.

603-25

TABLE 1

BYTE STREAM-DOT OlD AND DOT 02C
Purpose

Byte
Hexadecimal
Character

Type

ID}

Contains vertical row count of dot OlD.

Contains horizontal row count of dot 01 D.

COO

NOP - BEAMON

Display dot 02C

200

NOP

No operation byte, turns beam off

200

NOP

No operation byte, (beam off)

200

NOP

No operation byte, (beam off)

The last byte in the internal display byte stream is an End of Display byte.

When decoded,

it will set the Priority Interrupt FF, causing the Interrupt line to come up.

Sensing an

interrupt, the computer will initiate a Function Code 0 Read command to read 1744 status.
Having determined that the Priority Interrupt was enabled, the computer will initiate a
Function Code 4 Write (computer display) command.

The byte stream for the cross is now

sent over from the computer and the cross is displayed.

This sequence of events is repeated

every 25 ms, providing for a 40 frame per second display rate.
ID Error Check
One of the capabilities of test 3 enables the user to check the light pen light detection and
interrupt circuitry, X, Y, and S register transfer circuitry, and ID byte detection.
the user choses a dot with the light pen, the following sequence of events occur:

When

User chooses dot with light pen.

Light pen amplifier / power supply detect the light, changing it to a logic level.

Light Pen strike logic level transmitted from console to controller where it sets
Light Pen (LP) Interrupt FF.

d.
e.

LP Interrupt FF causes 1744 interrupt line to come up.

X, Y, S registers frozen.

Computer detects interrupt, comes back with a Function Code 0 Read to determine
which interrupt FF was set.

Computer detects light pen has caused interrupt.

Computer initiates a Function Code 4 Read cOI?mand (Read X).

The X register

contents represent the X coordinate of the light pen strike.

603-26

60182000 H

Computer initiates a Function Code 5 Read command (Read Y).

The Y register

contents represent the Y coordinates of the light pen strike.
i.

Computer initiates a Function Code 2 Read command (Read S).

The S register

contents represent core address at time of the light pen strike.
j.

Computer initiates a FunGtion Code 6 Read (Search for ID bytes).

The controller

starts sequentially addressing and reading core locations, starting from the freeze
location.

The data bytes read from each core location are placed on the controller

data interface transmitter lines. A non-ID byte is accompanied by a Reject signal;
ID byte, Reply signal. The ID byte carries the identification parameters associated
with the dot that was struck.

These parameters include: true X and Y dot location

coordinates; true S register count of Increment byte producing dot; and true
horizontal and vertical row count.
k.

Computer goes through a verify routine. _It compares the X, Y and S register
contents associated with the light pen strike to the X, Yand S dot location parameters
in the ID byte.

If the values differ by a given amount, the teletype will print out an

ID error message.

The typeout is in hexadecimal.

IDER/
X4 X 3 X 2 X 1

Y4 Y 3 Y2 Y1

Indicates typeout is result of ID error.

Contents of X register at time of freeze.

Contents of Y register at time of freeze.

Contents of S register at time of freeze.

Two ID bytes; two low-order characters of each, when combined, identify true

X coordinate of dot chosen; should be equal to

® .

Two ID bytes; two low-order characters of each, when combined, identify true
Y coordinate of dot chosen; should be equal to

® .

Two ID bytes; two low-order characters of each, when combined, define true
S register count (Core address) of increment byte generating chosen dot; should
be within three counts of

60182000 H

®.

603-27

®
®

ID byte, two low-order characters identify vertical row count of chosen dot.
ID byte, two low-order characters identify horizontal row count of chosen dot.
NOTE
X4 and/ or Y4 in the ID bytes will be "F" characters
(-0) if chosen dot is in negative quadrant.

When an ID error printout occurs, it may have been caused by an error relating to the X,
Y or S transfers or by an error unique to ID byte processing or both. To aid in isolating a
trouble to a given area, refer to Figure 8.

It illustrates all the dots displayed on the CRT

and their X and Y coordinates, and S register count.

By relating the ID error printout to

the figure, the user can more easily categorize a trouble.

Forced Printout Check
The forced printout check enables the user to have the identification parameters associated
with any selected dot printed out on the teletype.

To exercise the test, the user picks one·

of the displayed dots. It is important to note that the next dot in sequence goes out. This
verifies that the choice has been made. The user then chooses the cross. Upon choosing
the cross, the teletype will print out the following message:
C R

ass

OOVR

OOHR

The term "CROSS" signifies this printout was a result of a dot-cross choice. The remainder
of the printout format is described in the ID Error Check. The Figure 9 typeout was obtained
by choosing each dot in the bottom row.

603-28

60182000 H

y
COORDINATE
2CO

2CF

2DE

2ED

2FC

30B

31A

•

22A

239

275

284

293

2A2

•

248

257

266

•

1A3

1B2

1C1

1DO

1DF

lEE

1FD

20C

21B

•

11C

12B

13A

149

167

176

185

194

•

OB3

OC2

OD1

OEO

OEF

OFE

100

•

•
086

•
095

OA4

158

•

OOE

OlD

02C

03B

04A

059

068

077

•

500

300

100

EFF

CFF

AFF

+
C5B
BIB

EDB
D9B

3DC

15C
OIC

29C

5lC

X COORDINATE

All numbers in hexagon.

Numbers above dots represent S register counts of byte producing dot.

Figure 8.

60182000 H

Dot Location

Diag~am

603-29

CROSS
OB1B OAFF
OOFB 001B

OOOE
OOFA

OOFF

0000

OOOE

0000

OAFF
005B

001D
OOFA

OOFF

0000

001D

0001

0000

OAFF
009B

002C
OOFA

OOFF

0000

002C

0002

0000

CROSS
OEDB OAFF
OOFE OODE

003B
OOFA

OOFF

0000

003B

0003

0000

OAFF
001C

0049
OOFA

OOFF

0000

004A

0004

0000

OAFF
005C

0059
OOFA

OOFF

0000

0059

0005

0000

OAFF
009C

0068
OOFA

OOFF

0000

0068

0006

0000

OAFF
OODC

0076
OOFA

OOFF

0000

0077

0007

0000

OAFF
001C

0086
OOFA

OOFF

0000

0086

0008

0000

CROSS
OC5B
OOFC
CROSS
OD9B
OOFD

CROSS
001C
0000
CROSS
015C
0001
CROSS
029C
0002
CROSS
030C
0003
CROSS
051C
0005

Figure 9.

603-30

Dot-Cross Typeout - Bottom Dot Row

60182000 H

Note that whenever a dot lies in a negative quadrant, the ID bytes defining that coordinate
parameter are prefixed with an F character, rather than a O.
Intensity Levels Check
The intensity levels check enables the user to check the ability of the 1744 and 274 to detect,
decode, and process dim, medium and bright intensity commands.

The byte stream produc-

ing the dots in test 3 contained the three intensity levels, but with only dots displayed, it is
difficult to distinguish different intensity levels. With the intensity levels check, the user
enters an increment byte in the computer A register with a scale factor of 7, and delta X and
delta Y equal to +7.

This produces a series of 45 degree lines on the console display,

replacing the dots.

The lines at the left one-third of the display are of a dim intensity,

center one-third, medium intensity, and right one-third, bright intensity.
Increment Byte Entry Feature
Test 3 has an option which enables the user to enter any desired increment byte into the A
register of the computer.

The increment will then be displayed at each previous dot location.

This feature is a useful tool to the customer engineer because all the logic circuitry
associated with processing of varied increment bytes can be checked.

The 274/1744 logic

associated with processing the following byte characteristics can be checked:
a.

Beam on/off.

Scale factors 2 through 7.

All combination of positive and negative delta X and delta Y values.

60182000 H

603-3:11

TEST 4: COMMAND TEST PROGRAM

PURPOSE
The command test program checks the ability of the hardware to execute all 1744 jump
commands (i. e., S Jump, Macro Call, P Jump and Return to Main).

It checks that the

hardware can detect and process the following bytes: End of Display, Reset, and Increment.

PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
There is only one test phase in the command test program. When the test is entered, the
user observes the 274 Console for a given display. A correct display indicates successful
execution of test 4.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
Upon entering the test program, the appropriate commands are sent from the computer to
the controller to enable the sorting of all bytes used in this test into buffer memory. An
execute internal display command is initiated and the console presentation is controlled by
the jump commands.

The display conforms to the following pattern:

SSSSSSSSSSMMMMMMMMMMPPPPPPPPPPRRRRRRRRRRE
The letters in proper number and sequence convey the following information:
10

SIS

successful execution of S Jump

10 MIs

successful execution of Macro Call

successful execution of P Jump

pIS

10 Rls
1 E

succes sful execution of Return to Main
detection of End of Display byte (10 EI s indicate failure to detect byte)

To better understand how the display is generated, refer to Chronological Description,
Command Test.

The chart at the left represents buffer memory locations of Module 0

(location 0 through 4096

or 0 through 1000 ), Data in the chart identifies the bytes or
10
16
byte streams used; hexadecimal characters defining the byte structure are also shown.

603-32

60182000 H

CHRONOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION, COMMAND TEST
MODULE 0 CONTENTS

CD
®

Reset beam to coordinate DA 7 in X and
258 in Y; set medium intensity level.
S JUMP CMD detected; S register
incremented by 1.
S JUMP ADDRESS read out of core;
strobed to Z register, to S buffer, to
S register and addresses core.

®
CD

S JUMP location; contains the byte
stream for displaying the letter S; S
byte stream repeated ten times.

RETURN TO MAIN CMD detected;
location stored in P, i. e. 9 incremented by 1 and strobed into the S
register addressing core at this
location.

pIS (10 times)

0200

RETURN TO MAIN CMD
(lFA)
END OF DISPLAY (lF8's)
(man,Y)
SIS (10 times)

0300

MACRO CALL CMD (lE8)
MACRO ADDRESS (100)
P JUMP ADDRESS (200)
R's (10 times)

P JUMP ADDRESS read out of core;
strobed to Z register, to S buffer,
to S register, and addresses core at
this location, core location of P JUMP
ADDRESS stored in P register.
P JUMP location; contains the byte
stream for displaying the letter P; P
byte stream repeated ten times.

0100

END OF DISPLAY (lF8's)
(many

P JUMP CMD detected; location stored
in P register, i. e., 6 incremented
by 1 and strobed into the S register
addressing core' at this location.

END OF DISPLAY (lF8's)
(many)
P JUMP CMD (lD8)

MACRO Location; contains the byte
stream for displaying the letter M;
M byte stream repeated ten times.

S JUMP ADDRESS (300)

M's (10 times)

MACRO CALL CMD detected; S
register incremented by 1.
MACRO ADDRESS read out of core;
strobed to Z register, to S buffer,
to S register and addresses core;
core location of MACRO ADDRESS
stored in P register.

RESET (802)
X COORDINATE (DA7)
Y COORDINATE (258)
S JUMP CMD (lC8)

Location (:Sex)

037B

S JUMP CMD (lC8)
S JUMP ADDRESS (DOO)
END OF DISPLAY (lF8's)
(many)

@
@

E -

ODOO

END OF DISPLAY (lF8)
E's (9 times)
END OF DISPLAY
(many) (lF8's)

1000

Location contains byte stream for displaying the letter R; R byte stream
repeated ten times.
S JUMP CMD detected; S register
incremented by 1.

S JUMP ADDRESS read out of core;
strobed to Z register, to S buffer,
to S register and addresses core.

~!'Each

Locations contain the byte stream
. for displaying the letter E, once.
END OF DISPLAY byte detected, display is terminated, will be repeated
once every 25 ms.

represents many locations. End of Display bytes fill all of these locations. If one
of them is addressed due to a malfunction, display will be terminated for the remainder of
the display frame.

,;o!'Locations contain the byte stream for displaying the letter E; E byte stream repeated nine
times. If the END OF DISPLAY byte at 16 is not decoded these will be displayed.

60182000 H

603-33

The byte stream used for generating a single letter M is illustrated below.

It is typical of

the byte streams used to display the other letters because it consists only of beam on and off
Increment bytes of varying magnitudes.

BYTE STREAM FOR LETTER M
Type

Hexadecimal Character
D04

Increment byte with beam on

D02

Increment byte with beam on

D39
4C4

Increment byte with beam on
Increment byte with beam off

D34

Increment byte with beam on

4CB

Increment byte with beam off

DOB
DOD

Increment byte with beam on
Increment byte with beam on

522

Increment byte with beam off

4DO

Increment byte with beam off

To determine how test 4 would respond to different troubles, the Set and Clear outputs of
each command flip-flop were alternately grounded (simulating a logical 0 at the ground point)
and the display recorded.

These are the results:

TROUBLE

CONSOLE DISPLAY

Set Output Grounded:

•

S Jump - B710/711
Macro Call - B750/751

SSSSSSSSSSRRRRRRRRRRE

P Jump - B730/731

SSSSSSSSSSMMMMMMMMM-M

Return to Main - B770/771

SSSSSSSSSSMMMMMMMMMM

Term Internal Display - B772/773

PPPPPPPPPP
SSSSSSSSSSMMMMMMMMMM
PPPPPPPPPPRRRRRRRRRR
EEEEEEEEEE

Clear Output Grounded:
Any above flip-flop

603-:-34

Console screen blank

60182000 H

An analysis of the contents of buffer memory during test 4 will illustrate why specific results
were obtained.

The only result that is not readily obvious by examing core contents is the

blank display obtained when anyone of the Clear outputs of the flip-flops was grounded.
Under these conditions, the Set output is forced to a logical 1.

The Set outputs of all jump

command flip-flops are applied to inverter B405.
The B405 term is needed to enable the Set input AND gate at E200/201 in the Byte Processing
Timing Circuits.

Under these conditions, the gate is inhibited by B405 and consequently,

the console screen is blank.

60182000 H

603-35

TEST 5: MEMORY DUMP PROGRAM

PURPOSE
The memory dump program enables the user to have the contents of the 1744 Controller
memory printed out on the teletype. He has the option of selecting the first word address
and the number of words in the dump.

Hardware must be capable of processing S register

Write and Read Core commands before test 5 can be executed.

PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
There is only one test phase in the memory dump program: the dump itself. When the
program is entered, the teletype prints FWA. This is a request for the operator to enter,
via the teletype, the first word address of the transfer.

He replies by entering this infor-

mation in hexadecimal. The teletype will then request the number of words desired in the
transfer, with the message, NWDS. This information should be entered in decimal. With
the last input, the program takes over and executes the dump, printing out the information,
in hexadecimal, on the teletype.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
With the input of the necessary information to perform a dump, the hardware executes an
S register Write command (Function Code 2, Write).

This command enables 13 bits to be

transferred from the computer A register to the 1744 data interface receivers through the
S buffer to the S register. The address entered into the S register is the one the user
specified by his reply to the teletype message, FWA. The computer next performs a Read
Core operation (Function Code 1, Read). Bytes are sequentially read out of 1744 core,
routed through the Z register, to the data interface transmitters to the computer.
core location is read and outputted every 1. 67 IJsec.

A new

A reply accompanies each byte transfer.

The computer outputs the received data to the teletype where it is recorded.

603-36

60182000 H

TEST 6: KEYBOARDS TEST PROGRAM

PURPOSE
The Variable Function and/or Alphanumeric keyboards are checked out during test 6. The
ability of the keyboards to be activated or deactivated under program and manual control is
checked along with the ability of the computer to recognize which of the keyboard keys have
been depressed.

PROCEDURAL DESCRIPTION
Test 6 contains a separate checkout procedure for the Variable Function and Alphanumeric
keyboards.

Assuming both are to be checked, begin with the Variable Function keyboard.

Prior to entering the test, activate and deactivate the keyboard manually.

Leaving the

keyboard deactivated, enter test 6 and observe that the test program could activate it.
Depress the keyboard keys and observe that the keys illuminate and that the 274 Console
displays the bit number associated with the key.

Mter completing the above checks, manually

deactivate the keyboard and exit test 6.
To check out the Alphanumeric keyboard, manually activate and deactivate the keyboard prior
to re-entering test 6.

Leaving the keyboard in the activated state, enter test 6 and observe

that the program deactivates the keyboard.

At present, the program has the ability of

activating only the Variable Function keyboard.

Manually activating the Alphanumeric

keyboard, systematically depress each key and observe that the 274 Console displayed the
proper bit numbers associated with the keyboard 8-bit ASCII code.
Depressing the SELECTIVE SKIP"lever switch exits test 6.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
When either keyboard is manually activated, a logical 0 is generated by the ON / OFF.

The

activate command is routed through the 274 Console to the 1744 Controller, where it is
processed.

In the controller, there is logic circuitry that is unique to the ON/ OFF status of"

each keyboard.

This circuitry will be affected by the momentary signal generated by the

switch, and it will change the signal to an activate hold signal for the activated keyboard and
a deactivate signal for the other.

6018200D H

The outputs are transmitted to the 274 Console to light driver

603-37

cards in the keyboard logic.

The light driver cards associated with the activated keyboard

will generate a ground to that keyboard.

This ground will activate the keyboard, illuminating

the ON / OFF lamp~ During manual activation, this is the only way that the lamp can be illuminated. The ON / OFF lamp on the non- selected keyboard will either become extinguished or remain
extinguished depending on its previous state.
With the current program, only the Variable Function keyboard can be activated by the test
program. This is accomplished by a Function Code 7, Write Command.
After a keyboard has been activated, any key that is depressed will generate a delta keyboard
signal. This signal will be directed through the 274 Console to the controller. Upon receipt
of this input, the controller will generate an interrupt. The computer, in turn, will read
controller status (Function Code 0, Read).

Having determined that a keyboard interrupt

has occurred, the computer will read keyboard status (Function Code 7, Read).

The status

of the activated keyboard will be placed on the A register lines. The computer will examine
the bit positions associated with the keyboard status input. If it detects a logical 1 in a
specific bit position, it will send a byte stream over to the digigraphics to display the bit
position character(s).

The display will be all or part of: 07

00.

On the Variable Function keyboard, the Accept and Reject (green and red) keys are momentary
switches and must be held in the down position to display their respective bit position.

The

remaining keys, associated with bits 02 through 15, are latching switches, and need only be
latched in the down position.
The Alphanumeric keyboard utilizes an 8-bit ASCII code to identify a depressed key.
high-order bit is an Even Parity bit.

All the keys activate momentary switches.

The

Unlike the

Variable Function, the key does not have to be held in the depressed position to obtain a
display, because the outputs are strobed into eight flip-flops in the console keyboard logic.
The ASCII code of the last depressed key is stored at these flip-flops.

The contents are changed

whenever a new key is depressed.
It is significant that the keyboard and 274 Console outputs reflect the negated version of the

bit or bits associated with the depressed key.

b[]3-38

bD182DDD H

TEST 7 : SPARE (NOT USED)
TEST 8: SCISSORING TEST PROGRAM
Improper scissoring will result in the deformation of the display, which takes the following
form:

TEST 9: VELOCITY COMPENSATION TEST PROGRAM

PURPOSE
The velocity test pattern permits adjustments of the 274 console for improved velocity
compensation when W09, Rev D and W07, Rev G are inserted in the console.

This test is for

use on the 1744/274, both old and new resets, and on the 3344/274.

DESCRIPTION
Three groups of diagonal lines are displayed, each group representing one of the three
available intensity levels.

All three groups have the same byte structure, except for the

intensity bit in the increment bytes.
Each diagonal line is made up of repeated vectors of a single scale factor and increment
size, representing one of the 42 possible combinations available (6 scale factors X 7 increment factors).

60182000 H

603-39

A brief review of the structure of the increment byte is useful here.
b f

f f

It has the format.

(~y)

(~X)

where:
b
fff

= intensity
= scale factor = 2,

3, 4, 5, 6, or 7

(~X)

= X- increment (4 bits, with sign)

(~y)

= Y- increment (4 bits, with sign)

Whenever an increment byte is encountered, the contents of the X and Y interface registers
are incremented as follows:
Xl = X + (~X). 2fff - 2
y1 = Y + (~Y). 2fff - 2
The multipliers are 2°, 21,22,23,24, and 2 5 ; i.e., 1,2,4,8,16, and 32.
and

Since~X

are four signed bits, then the total number of distinct (positive) increments is

6 X 7 = 42. The maximum change in either interface register is therefore 0111 2 X 32
7 X 32 = 224.
Each set of 42 lines is generated by 42 separate reset bytes, followed by calls to the same
basic set of macros.

(Recall that beam intensity is established by the reset sequence.) Each

line macro consists of a single type of increment byte (with positive and equal .6X and .6 Y),
repeated enou"gh times to give a line approximately 2 inches long, on the diagonal.
The length of lines can be computed from the increment bytes, using the beam-lag factor
which is built into the 274 Console; i. e., whenever one of the interface registers is incremented, the corresponding beam coordinate is inhibited from changing by more than half
of the difference between the new register value and the old beam coordinate, during the
remainder of the current clock cycle (1. 67 microseconds).
For example, consider the case of maximum D. X and
(multiplier 32) and increments of 32 in both X and Y.
1 1 1 1
b f f f

603-40

011 1
~X

Y, obtained by using scale factor 7

The increment byte for this would be:

° 1 1 1
~Y

60182000 H

This increment byte causes the X and Y interface register to be increased by 224, each time
the byte is processed. If several such bytes are processed in succession, starting with
Xo = YO = 0 in the registers, the register values and follow-up beam coordinates can be
represented as follows:

Cycle

Beam Coordinates
at End of C~cle

Re gister Value s

Change in
Beam Coor.
(.6H & .6 V)

224

112

448

(448-112)/2 + 112
= 280

168

672

(672-280)/2 + 280
= 476

196

896

686

210

1120

903

217

It can be seen that .6 Hand .6 V will approach the maximum of 224 display grid units, which

is the maximum change in the interface registers.

Therefore, the upper limit on beam

movement for a single increment byte is approximately (224/200) X 1. 4 inches
on the diagonal. . For this case (fff
giving a line (280/200) X 1. 4

60182000 H

and .6 X

= 1. 96 ~ 2

= .6 Y = 32),

= 1."57

inches

two increment bytes are used,

inches.

603-41

The display pattern is illustrated in the figure below.

A line of medium intens ity surrounds

the three patterns, as shown:

SF=7

NOTE: The frame
consists of four line
segments 7, increment
7, and medium intensity.
All lines contain snap
back at the ends.

SF=6

SF=5

SF=4

SF=3

SF=2)

603-42

I
7

lJ;Y. = AY =

60182000 H

IT'

1;;

I:'"

KEY

Upper Case Keys
CTRL
SHIFT

274 CONSOLE
DISPLAY

KEY

274 CONSOLE
DISPLAY

Upper Case Keys
SHIFT
CTRL

[]:I

ru
CJ
CJ
CJ

:z:

07
;07

00
!

02
03
03

a.&:

02
01
01

;

nCB
• OliT

03
03"

01
01

dep

dep
07

05
05
02

dep

)

dep

00
00

t,~

dep

TAPE

dep

TAPE

dep

TAB

dep

00-

dep

00
00

:x>

~
tr!
::0

01
00

00
01

X OFF

dep

EOT

dep

02
02

dep

BELL

dep

FORM

dep

...

dep

03
03
05

07
07

03
04

tl1

~::0
o

(')

00
02

::r:

02
03

z
c::

:x:-

()

03
07

03
04

tl1

;il

dep

WRU

00
00

01
01

00
--

02
02
02

dep

01
01

03
03
03

01
03

dep

01
01

dep
dep

02
02

00
04

J
CJ
W
1

HE-

04
03

02
03

LINE
l<'EED

02
02

TURN

I
03

V.:

00
01

:x>

::0
...,

1744/274 DIGIGRAPHICS DISPLAY SYSTEM
(DG406F Test No. 6F)

INTRODUCTION
A.

IDENTIFICATION

Type of Program - Diagnostic test under 1700 System Maintenance Monitor
(SMM17)

Computer - CONTROL DATA 1700/SC17

PURPOSE
The digigraphics display system test operates under the control of the 1700
System Maintenance Monitor to verify all of the operating features and graphics
display capabilities of the 1744 Digigraphics Controller and the 274 Digigraphics
Display Console.
It also provides graphic patterns for alignment.
The test
consists of 8 sections (0-7) selected by corresponding bits set in test parameter.
Sections are executed sequentially beginning with the lowest number selected.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Minimum core requirements - 12 K.

The test is designed for compatibility with either the 1700 or SC17
processor.

Bit 2 of SMM parameter must be set if running on an SC17

processor.
3.

Operator intervention is required in the following sections:
a.

Section 05 - Pattern Alignment Test (PALTST)
(if alignment is necessary)

Section 06 - Scale Factor Test (SCLTST)
(when scale factors are maladjusted)

Section 07 - Keyboard Test (KYBTST)
(to check correct functioning of AN / KB and lor VFKB, keys must
be depress ed by opera tor)

60182000 J

604-1

SPECIAL .FEA TURES
The following special features are implemented by selectable parameters in
test parameter word 1:
1.

Test may run either buffered (1706 BDC) or unbuffered.

Flexible running time - long or short test implies cycling through 5
times (45 sec) for short or 15 times (1 min. 45 sec) for long (Memory
test).

The current section being run may be terminated and the next selected
section started by light pen picking of the displayed word "NEXT" located
at lower center of CRT (coordinates X = $F69, Y = $900).

Display of error message on 274 console.

This feature provides for

display of the first 9 words of the error message on the console, in
addition to the normal error reporting, via A/Q or Teletypewriter.
·5.

Optional short error message feature terminates error message after
5 stops.
Long error message provides 10 stops to include applicable
register contents.

II.

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
1.

Minimum Configuration
17X4 Mainframe
17XX Storage Increment
17X5 Interrupt Data Channel
1744 Digigraphic Controller (4K)
274 Digigraphic Display Console

Target Configuration
The minimum configuration expanded to include:
1706 Buffered Data Channel
274 Digigraphic Display Console with optional: ,
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Variable Function Keyboard
1711/12/13 Teletypewriter

604-2

60182000

Maximum Configuration
The target configuration expanded to include:
An additional 4K memory module for the 1744 Digigraphic Controller

III. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The test must be loaded under the standard SMM17 loading procedures as
test number 6F.

PARAMETERS

Stop 1
Q

A
6F31
A
Q

Stop/Jump

= Test Number,
= Stop /Jump
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4

Stop to Enter Parameters

= Stop
= Stop
= Stop

on Error
Repeat Condition

Repeat Section

Bit 6

Repeat Test

Bit 7

Not Used

= Omit· Typeouts

Bit 9

Bias Return Address Display

Bit 10

Reenter Parameters

Bit 11-15

60182000

at End of Test Section
at End of Test

Bit 5

Bit 8

Number of Stops, Type of Stop

= Not

Used

Stop 2
A

Testing
Modes

Interrupt
Line No.

604-3

A =

Tes~ing

modes in following format:

Bit 0 = Long Test
Bit 1
Buffered Data Control
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

2 = 274 Console Section Selection
3
274 Console Error Message Display
4 = Variable Function Keyboard (VFKB)
5 = Alphanumeric Keyboard (AN!KB)

Bit 6
Bit 7

Short Error Message
= Run in Memory Stack 1

Bit 8-15

= Not

Used

Q = Interrupt Line

The interrupt line is selected by setting the bit corresponding to
interrupt line number desired, e. g.: Bit 7 set, interrupt line 7 is
selected.
This parameter should not be changed after the initial
parameter stop.
3.

Stop 3
A

Test Sections
A

OPR. SEL.
Test Pattern

Test Sections
The desired test sections to be executed will be selected by setting
bits corresponding to the section numbers, e. g.: Bit 0 = Section O.
An optional method may be used to select the next section using light
pen picking from the word "NEXT" displayed on the console.

= Operator

Selected Test Pattern

The operator may select a bit configuration of his choice as the final
memory test pattern. If no selection is made, the final memory test
pattern will be $0IF8.
C.

MESSAGES
Message typeout will not occur if hit 8 of Stop! Jump word is set.

604-4

60182000

Test title and initial address typeout:
DG406F 1744/274 Digigraphic Test.
IA = XXX, FC = XX
XXX is the initial address of the test.
XX

is the frequency count.

Section running typeout:

IRunning

Section X

X is section number.
3.

End of Section.
Q

Stop/Jump
Word

6F22
4.

Section!
Number

Return
Address

End of Test.
A

6F24

Stop/ Jump

Pass
Count

Return
Address

ERROR MESSAGES
All errors are in SMM17 format. The return address indicates the origin of the
error reported. The error code is divided into two hexadecimal digits, the lower
order digit indicates the error condition while the next significant digit indicates
the error type.
(XXYZ).
Where

XX
Y
Z

The uppermost two hexadecimal digits will be the section number,

Section Number
Type of Error
Error Condition Code

For specific error code and maintenance aids, see Appendix A.
1.

Definition of error types:
Type

60182000

Definition

Buffered data channel input
Buffered data channel output

Direct A / Q channel input

604-5

Type

4
5

Direct A/Q channel output
Controller status data (0-7)
Controller s ta t us da ta (8 - 15 )

Not used

7
8
9

Input and output command/function
Data compare
Register content

A
B

Not used
Interrupt

Definition

Error conditions defined by types:
Type 0 - Buffered Data Channel Input
Code

o
1
2
3

4
5
6-9
A
B
C

Condition
Not used
External reject on status input (1706)
Internal reject on status input (1706)
Not used
External reject on buffered data input
Internal reject on buffered data input
Not used
Un-terminated buffer transfer
External reject on 1706 function
Internal reject on 1706 function
Buffered data channel input failure

Type 1 - Buffered Data Channel Output
Code

o
1

Not used
Buffered data channel output failure

Probable memory failure (RUN MEMTSX)

Not used
External reject on buffered data output
Internal reject on buffered data output

604-6

Condition

60182000

Type 2 - Direct A/Q Channel Input
Code

o
1

Condition
External reject on controller status input
Internal reject on controller status input

External reject on direct data input
Internal reject on direct data input

External reject on S- reg input

Internal reject on S- reg input
External reject on P-reg input
Internal reject on P-~eg input

6
7
8

9
A
B

D
E

External reject on X-reg input
Internal reject on X-reg input
External reject on Y- reg input
Internal reject on Y-reg input
External reject on ID byte search input
Internal reject on ID byte search input
External reject on KYBD status input
Internal reject on KYBD status input

Type 3 - Direct A/Q Channel Output
Code

External reject on controller function output

Internal reject on controller function output

External reject on direct data output

Internal reject on direct data output
External reject on S-reg address output

Internal reject on S- reg address output
External reject on terminate computer display
Internal reject on terminate computer display
External reject on computer display

Internal reject on computer display

External reject on KYBD function output
Internal reject on KYBD function output

5
6

60182000

Condition

604-7

Type 4 - Controller Status Data 0-7
Code

Condition

Unexpected status

Console power off (disabled)

KYBD interrupt did not enable

Type 5 - Controller Status Data (Keyboard)
Code

Condition

Variable function keyboard did not activate
Variable function keyboard did not deactivate
Alphanumeric keyboard did not activate

Alphanumeric keyboard did not deactivate

Type 6 - Not Used
Type 7 - Input/Output Command/Function
Code

o
1
2

3
4
5
6
7

8
9
A

Condition
Status data input not functioning
Input data command not functioning
S- Reg input not functioning
P- Reg input not functioning
x- Reg input not functioning
Y-Reg input not functioning
Search ID byte not functioning
Keyboard status data input not functioning
Rej ect on clear controller function
Output data command not functioning
Starting I/O address output not functioning

Type 8 - Data Compare
Code

o
2

Memory address error - content incorrect
Incorrect storage word content
Not used

Parity plane test storage error

604-8

Condition

60182000

Type .9 - Register Content
Code

Condition

S-register content error

P-register content er.ror

X-register content error

Y-register content error

Type A - Not used
Type B - Interrupt Errors

Code

Condition

Not used

Internal reject status input

External reject status input

Internal reject KB status input

External reject. KB status input

Internal reject CLR INTRPT output

6
7

External reject CLR· INTRPT output
Internal reject CLR KB INTRPT output

External reject CLR KB INTRPT output

Interrupt failed to CLR
Internal reject - status input after CLR

External reject - status input after CLR

Unexpected interrupt

X
E

Reject code stored here for register input
PRI failed to occur

PRI FF failed to enable

Error Message Formats
Parameter entry permits the operator to select long or short error
message formats.
All console displayed errors will be short format.
Error display will not appear on console for sections 2, 3, and 4.
Short message format:

60182000

604-9

Stops 1

A
SS/XY

A
6F58

S/J

A
ACT

RTA

A
EXP

FUNCT

A
KBSTA

DASTA

MEMADR

Long Message format:
Stops 1
Q

A
6FA8

A
SS/XY

S/J

A
ACT

RTA

FUNCT

S-EXP

S-ACT

P-ACT

X-EXP

MEMADR

PEXP

EXP

A
KBSTA

DASTA

Stops 6

X-ACT

A
Y-EXP

Y-ACT

A
ID-EXP

ID-ACT

For reject codes stop 3 is the contents of A and Q register.
Glossary:
S/J
SS/XY

RTA
ACT

= Actual word received

FUNCT

= Function code to be performed

EXP
DASTA
KBSTA

= Expected word

MEMADR

or incorrect status bits for status errors
= Expected S-register contents, if applicable

S-EXP

= Data status word

= KYBD status word
= Memory address (1744)

S-ACT
P-EXP

= Actual S-register contents, if applicable

P-ACT

applicable
= Expected X-register contents, if applicable

X-EXP

= Expected P-register contents,
= Actual P-register contents, if

if applicable

X-ACT
Y-EXP

= Actual X-register contents, if applicable

Y-ACT

= Actual Y-register contents, if applicable

ID-EXP

= Expected ID byte
= Actual ID byte

ID-ACT

604-10

= Stop/Jump word
=
SS = Section
X = Error type
Y = Error condition
= Return addres s

Expected Y-register contents, if applicable

60182000

SECTION DESCRIPTION INDEX
The following is an index of section descriptions:
Tag Name

Section Name

Section No.

CMDTST

Command Test

BDCTST

Buffered Data

Running Time

Channel Test
MEMTSO

Memory Test
(Stack 0)

Long-l min. 45 sec.
Short- 45 sec.

MEMTSI

Memory Test
(Stack 1)

Long-l min. 45 sec.
Short -45 sec.

JMPTST

Jump Test

PALTST

Pattern Alignment Test

SCLTST

Scale Factor Test

KYBTST

Keyboard Test

IV. DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL

The diagnostic test consists of 8 individually selectable test sections,
designed to test the controller and its associated display console for
proper operating condition.

Hardware failures and malfunctions will be

reported as errors using the previously described error message formats.
Error message display on the console is an optional parameter selection,
except for Sections

3, and 4.

The selection of 1744 controller memory stack is determined by memory
test section selected (Sections 2 and 3) as follows:
Memory Test
MEMTSO (Sec 02)
MEMTSI (Sec 03)

Testing Stack
Stack 0
Stack 1

The memory stacks will be tested by writing predetermined patterns in
the selected stacks, reading each location and comparing its contents for
correct pattern.

60182000

604-11

Graphic patterns will be displayed on the console for visual checking of
definition and error triangles. Graphic patterns will also be used for
alignments.

Common subroutines are provided to satisfy SMM requirements and for
use by test sections as required.

Special features are included that provide console display of the number
of the test section running, except for memory tests which are displayed
on the typewriter. The word "NEXT" is displayed at the lower center of
the display screen which allows the operator to select the next sequential
test section previously selected to be executed.

SEC TION DESCRIPTION
Each section except 2 and 3 will store alphanumeric macros in upper memory
locations of running stack unless previously stored.
bit 7, testing mode parameter.
1.

The stack is selected by

Test Section 00 - Command Test (CMDTST).
Commands and functions of the 1744 Controller except internal jumps, are
executed in this section. Responses, storage or register contents are
checked to determine if properly executed. Ineorrect responses, register
contents or malfunctions will result in an error being reported.
The test
pass frequency is determined by parameter selection for long or short
(long - 10 passes; short - 5 passes). A group of clear/disable functions
are performed to· clear the controller, clear and disable all Interrupt
flip-flops (FF), and deactivate all keyboards. Store each memory location
with its own address.
The capability of setting a- starting address in the
S register is checked by setting the S register to each value 000 to FFF
and reading its contents subsequent to each setting for accurate comparison
to its own value. Data transfer commands are exercised by transferring
data pattern $AAAA to the controller and reading same from controller
memory, and comparing for accuracy. Numerous status inputs are done
and bits checked throughout the section. Reset functions are performed
to provide known X and Y values which permit X and Y registers input
and comparison. Keyboard activation, interrupt FF, enabling" and··start
display functions are also accomplished by this section.

604-12

60182000

Any malfunction, incorrect data, or status during the performance of the
above commands/functions will cause an appropriate error code to be
reported.
2.

Test Section 01 - Buffered Data Channel Test (BDCTST)
This section verifies the proper functioning of the I/O channels. If the
Buffered Data Channel (BDC) is used, data is transferred via BDC to the
1744 Controller, and read back via BDC and compared. If an error
occurs, the same data is read back via A/Q channel and compared. If
this comparison is error free, a BDC input error is reported.

In the

event it is not error free, the data is again transferred to the 1744 via
A/ Q channel and read back via A/ Q channel and compared. If this
comparison is error free, a BDC out error is reported. However, if
an error still exists" a memory malfunction error will be reported.
Therefore, the memory test should be selected and executed.
When test Section 01 is selected and it is determined that the BDC is
not in the system, control passes to the end of section.
3.

Test Section 02 - Memory Stack 0 Test (MEMTSO)
This section exercises the 1744 Memory Stack 0, utilizing the following
patterns:
Pattern 0 - Zeros
Pattern 1 - Ones
Pattern 2 - Address Test
Pattern 3 - A-5, Pattern Test
Pattern 4 - Worst Pattern Test
Pattern 5 - Parity Plane Test
Pattern 6 - Operator Selectable Pattern
(Contents of Q register at last test parameter Stop 4)
The patterns will be sequentially selected and stored in the memory stack
under test, the stack will be read and the contents of each cell compared
for accuracy. Any unexpected variation of the patterns will be reported
as an error to include the address of the failing cell in Q of Error Stop 5.
The long/ short test parameter selection will cause the section to be
repeated 5 times for short or 15 times for long test.

60182000

604-13

Pattern 0 - This pattern ensures that the stack will successfully
hold zeros ($0000) in each location. Each location is read and
compared for accuracy.

b·.

Pattern 1 - This pattern ensures that the stack will successfully
hold ones ($FFFF) in each location.
and comparing each location.

This is verified by reading

Pattern 2 - This pattern determines if the stack under test will
hold its own address and additionally ensures that the 1744 S
register can be successfully incremented.
1)

Beginning with the first location of the stack each location is
filled with its own address, e. g. (stack 0 = $0000 - $OFFF)
(stack 1 = $1000 - $1FFF).

Verification is assured by reading and comparing each
location's contents with its address.

Pattern 3 - The A-5 pattern test ensures that the stack is capable
of holding a pattern of $AAAA and $5555 in adjacent memory
locations. This is accomplished by filling the stack with alternate
$AAAA and $5555 1 reading and comparing each location's contents
for accuracy.

Pattern 4 - This pattern determines if the memory stack will
hold the worst pattern which is defined as: $AAAAI $0000
$5555 $FFFF in 64 adjacent locations and $FFFFI $5555
$0000 $AAAA in the next 64 adjacent locations and continuing
this sequence through the last location of the stack.
1

The pattern is developed by filling 4 locations with $AAAAI
$0000 $5555 $FFFF and repeating this pattern sequence
1

until 64 locations are filled.
2)

Fill the next 4 locations with $FFFFI $5555 $0000 $AAAA
and repeat this pattern sequence until 64 locations are filled.

Repeat 1) and 2) above until the entire memory stack is filled.

After reading and comparing each location l

repeat 1) through

3) above except use the complement of indicated patterns.

604-14

60182000

Pattern 5 - Parity Plane test ensures that the parity plane of the
stack will hold zero and one while the rest of the plane holds the
worst pattern.
1)

Fill the stack with the complement of the worst pattern, except
for plane zero which is masked to zeros.

This causes worst

pattern to be generated in the parity plane.
2)

Each location is read and compared for accuracy.

Fill the stack with the worst pattern, except for plane zero which
is masked to zeros.

This causes the complement worst pattern

to be generated in the parity plane.
4)
g.

Repeat step 2) above.

Pattern 6 - This pattern is pre-stored as $01F8 and may be changed
by the operator during parameter entry.

To change the pattern the

operator will enter the desired pattern in Q - register at parameter
stop 4.
4.

Test Section 03 - Memory Test Stack 1 (MEMTS1)
This section is identical to test Section 02, except the 1744 Memory
Stack 1 will be tested.

Test Section 04 - Jump Test (JMPTST)
This section ensures the proper performance of the S - Jump, P - Jump,
Macro Call, and Return to Main functions.
The S - Jump is checked by storing the S - Jump byte ($1C8) followed
by the Jump address, with all other locations filled with $1F8 end of
display byte.
Upon executing the jump, an end of display will be detected
causing the generation of a priority interrupt.
compare to determine if S

Input S

Execute for 11 addresses, $0800, $0400, $0200, $0100, $0080, $0040,
$0020, $0010, $0008, $0004, $0002.
The P - Jump, Macro Call, and Return to Main is checked by restoring
macros in 1744 memory and executing, macro calls to display "s - Jump,
P - Jump, and M - Jump.
The value of the P
register will be checked
for errors.

Visual check should be made on display console.

The number of repetitions may be varied by the long/ short parameter
selection (long - 10 times; short - 5 times).

60182000

604-15

Test Section 5 - Pattern Alignment Test (PALTST)
This section generates and displays graphic patterns for visual scrutiny by
the operator to determine display quality and correct alignment.
a.

The following three graphic pattern, byte stream groups are sequentially
generated in the 1700 processor and transferred to the 1744 controller
memory for display on the 274 console:

5 Dot Pattern

D/ A Bit Switching Pattern

Composite Graphics Pattern (boxes, circles, crosses, diagonals,
alphanumerics, intensity variations, blinking, and non-blinking
functions)

The patterns are displayed sequentially as listed above. However,
the operator may terminate a pattern and cause the next sequential
pattern to be displayed by depressing the light pen switch.
To extend
the period of pattern display, the repeat section (bit 5) of the Stop!
Jump parameter should be set.

Pattern Description
1)·

The 5 - Dot Pattern (Figure 1) consists of 5 small dots displayed.
A hardware adjustment has been made on most 1744 digigraphics
systems to cause the outer dots to be just visible.

This adjust-

ment causes graphic dimensions on the console to be slightly less
than the binary equivalence. For example, binary representation
of a 14 inch line is graphically displayed as approximately 13
inches. This adjustment was made to satisfy the standard software package des ign.
CAUTION
If only the center dot is visible, determine whether
the hardware has been adjusted to display inch for
inch; if so, visibility of the center dot only is
correct.
2)

D/ A Switching Pattern (Figure 2) is a diagonal line from lower
left to upper right with X and Y bit switching markers beside the
line. The line adjacent to the markers should be straight. A
marked variation appearing on the line opposite the markers indicates maladjustment of the associated n! A amplifier.
To correct
this condition, adjust D! A amplifiers until the line adjacent to the
markers is straight.

604-16

60182000

•

•
Figure 1.

60182000

5 Dot Pattern

604-17

Figure 2.

604-18

D/ A Switching Pattern

60182000

The Composite Graphics Pattern (Figure 3 ) consists of three square
boxes (14 x 14, 12 x 12 and 7 x 7 inches), four circles 1/2 inch
diameter, four circles 2-1/2 inches diameter, two diagonal lines
intersecting at the center and with the corners of the two inner
boxes and terminating at the four corners of the 14 inch box, two
perpendicular lines terminating at the edges of the 14 inch box and
forming four right angles at the center, intensity, .blinking and
nonblinking functions indicated in upper half of pattern, and with
alphanumeric characters on both sides.
Some. incorrect patterns
are shown in Figure 4 which indicates malalignment.

Test Section 6 - Scale Factor Test (SCLTST)

This test section ensures that each scale factor (2 - 7) will provide the
proper unit variation (Figure 5). A horizontal line will be drawn for
each scale factor using the same number of incremental byte of equal
value.

A visual examination should determine if correct variation is

attained.
Test Section 7 - Keyboard Test (KYBTST)

This test section consists of two

subsection

described below, each of

which requires operator intervention to be effectively completed.

The

subsections desired must be selected in the test parameter by setting
bit 4 for VFKB or bit 5 for AN/KB, or both for dual keyboard configuration.
The section, however, will exit after a time out period in the event no
further action is taken by the operator.
a.

Alphanumeric Keyboard Subsection
The subsection displays as follows:
"HIT RANDOM KEY"
At this time the operator activates a key at random, causing the
corresponding character to be displayed.
This character should be
visually checked against the selected key for match.

Continue in

this manner until all 64 ASCII subset characters are checked.

Upon

completion of this subsection, it advances to the variable function
keyboard subsection after time out period.
If variable function keyboard is not in the system, it advances to the end of section.

60182000

604-19

BRT.
MED.
DIM.

BLINKS
NO-BLINKS

0123

ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX

4567
89==
($)

V~I?/O#

-+/*

Figure 3.

604-20

Composite Graphics Pattern

60182000

Figure 4.

60182000

Malaligned Composite Pattern
A.
B.

Error Triangle
Diagonal not through Corner

Diagonal not through Center of Circles

604-21

3
2

Figure 5.

604-22

Scale Factor Pattern

60182000

Variable Function Keyboard Subsection
The keyboard activation is accomplished by the section.

Mter key-

board is activated, the keyboard interrupt is enabled which allows the
operator to randomly select one or more keys.
Upon key selection, depress the Accept key

(keybo'lrd interrupt is

generated) which will cause the keyboard pattern (Figure 6) to be
displayed with a blinking "X" appearing in the corresponding key
position, including the Activate key. All keys other than the Accept
and Reject keys are latching type and will remain activated until
released.

The release of latching keys followed by depressing the

Accept/ Reject key will cause the removal of the blinking "X" in the
next pattern display for all released keys.
Non-selection by operator
wil~ cause exit to next section after time out.

DDDDDB

DODD [;]
000008
Figure 6.

Variable Function Keyboard Display Pattern

(blinking "X" indicates keys activated)

60182000

604-23

APPENDIX A

MAINTENANCE ROUTINES
A.

1744 DIGIGRAPHIC CONTROLLER MEMORY DUMP
This routine reads the contents of the 1744 Memory Stack (2048) and stores
it in the buffer area.

It also passes control to the line printer or teletype-

writer dump routine for printout.

Call

- Set P register to IA + $10,
Set A register bit 15 = 1, for teletypewriter, or bit 15 = 0 for
line printer output. Set bit 12 = 0 for stack 0 or bit 12 = 1
for stack 1.
Set Q register to $0 for memory location 0-2047, or set Q
register to $800 for memory locations 2048-4096.

Execute - RUN/STEP Switch to Run

To dump the complete stack 0 two runs must be made, one for each Q
register setting.
To dump the complete stack 1 (same as above) with bit 12
of A register set.
B.

TELETYPEWRITER DUMP
This routine prints the contents of the computer memory on the teletypewriter
from the address specified in the A register to the address specified in the
Q register.

Call - Set P register to IA + 9.
Set A register to FWA.

Set Q register to RUN.
Execute - RUN/STEP Switch to Run.

2.
C.

LINE PRINTER DUMP
This maintenance routine prints the computer memory contents specified by
A and Q registers on the line printer.
Call - Set P register to IA + $E.

Set A register to FWA.
Set Q register to LWA.

60182000

Execute - RUN/STEP Switch to Run.-

604-25

II.

ERROR CODES

Error Code is prefixed with section number (XX) when displayed.
Code

Definition

XX01
XX02
XX04
XX05

Ext. Reject - Status Input (BDC)
Int. Reject - Status Input (BDC)
Ext. Reject - Data Input (BDC)
Int. Reject - Data Input (BDC)
Un- Terminated BFR Transfer

XXOA
XXOB
XXOC
XXOD

Ext. Reject - BDC Function
Int. Reject - BDC Function
Input Failure (BDC)

XX10
XX11
XX12

Input Data Error (BDC)
Output Failure (BDe)
Probable Memory Failure (Suggest running memory test)

XX14

Ext. Reject - Data Output (BDC)

XX15
XX20
XX21

Int. Reject - Data Output (BDC)

XX22

Ext. Reject - Direct Data Input

XX23

Int. Reject - Direct Data Input
Ext. Reject - S Register Input
Int. Reject - S Register Input

XX24
XX25
XX26
XX27
XX28
XX29
XX24

Ext. Reject - Controller Status Input (1744)
Int: Reject - Controller Status Input (1744)

Ext. Reject - P Register Input
Int. Reject - P Register Input
Ext. Reject - X Register Input
Int. Reject - X Register Input
Ext. Reject - Y Register Input

XX2B

Int. Reject - Y Register Input

XX2C

Ext. Rej ect - ID Byte Input
Int. Reject - ID Byte Input

XX2D
XX2E
XX2F
XX30
XX31
XX32
XX33

604-26

Ext.
Int.
Ext.
Int.

Reject Reject Rej ect Reject -

Keyboard Status Input
Keyboard Status Input
1744 Function Output
1744 Function Output

Ext. Reject - Direct Data Output
Int. Reject - Direct Data Output

60182000

Code

Definition

XX34
XX35

Ext. Reject - S Register Output (ADDR)

XX36
XX37
XX38
XX39
XX3A
XX3B

Int. Reject - S Register Output (ADDR)
Ext. Reject - Terminate Computer Display
Int. Reject - Terminate Computer Display
Ext. Reject - Computer Display
Int. Reject - Computer Display
Ext. Reject - Keyboard Function Output

XX40

Int. Reject - Keyboard Function Output
Unexpected Status

XX41

Console Power Off

XX42
XX50

KB Interrupt FF Did Not Enable
VFKB Did Not Activate

XX51

VFKB Failed to De-activate

XX52

AN/KB Did Not Activate

XX53
XX70

AN / KB Failed to De-activate
Controller Status Data Incorrect

XX71
XX72

Input Data Command Failed
S Register Input Failed

XX73
XX74

P
X

XX75
XX76

Y Register Input Failed
Search ID Byte Failed

XX77
XX78

Keyboard Status Input Failed
Reject on Clear Controller Function

XX79
XX7A

Output Data Command Failed
S - Register Output Failed

XX80
XX81

Memory Location - Wrong Address /Bad Compare
Memory Error - Incorrect Compare

XX83

Parity Plane Test - Storage Error
S Register Content Error

XX90
XX91

XX92

P
X

XX93

XXBl

Int. Reject - Status Input (Interrupt processor)

XXB2
XXB3

Ext. Reject - Status Input (Interrupt processor)

XXB4

60182000 J

Int. Reject - Keyboard Status Input (Interrupt processor)
Ext. Reject - Keyboard Status Input (Interrupt processor)

604-27

Code

Definition

XXB5
XXB6

Int. Reject - Clear Interrupt
Ext. Reject - Clear Interrupt

XXB7
XXB9
XXBA

Int. Reject - Clear KB Interrupt
Ext. Reject - Clear KB Interrupt
Interrupt Failed to Clear
Int. Reject - Status Input (after clear interrupt)

XXB8

XXBB

Ext. Reject - Status Input (after clear interrupt)

XXBC

Unexpected Interrupt

XXBE
XXBF

PRI Int. Failed to Occur
PRI Int. FF Failed to Enable

604-28

60182000 J

VALIDATA KEY ENTRY STATION TEST
(KEY 060 Test No. 60)
I

INTRODUCTION
This diagnostic will test the validata unique components.

II REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE TESTED
970-8

Key Entry Station Controller

970-8

Key Entry Distribution Unit

970-32

Key Entry Station (CRMT)

970-380

Key Entry Station (CRVT)

SOFTWARE
This diagnostic is designed to operate under control of the SMM17 Monitor.

III OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The diagnostic is loaded using the standard SMM17 monitor test loading procedure.
NOTE
The equipment code used must be the address of the controller supplying the interrupt.

PARAMETERS
The diagnostic is set to run with a prestored eet of parameters.

No parameter

changes are required if the prestored list of parameters are valid for the stations
to be tested.

To alter the prestored parameters, follow the directions stated

in SMM17 Reference Manual.
The parameter stops are as follows:
Firet stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 6031 - test ID stop

(Q) = Stop/Jump parameter

Second stop
(A)

= Sections

to run (prestored as 0027)

(Q) = Interrupt line - interrupt line 7 = bit 7, etc. (prestored as 0100)

Third stop
(A) • Number of controllers to be tested (prestored as 0001) (maximum of 8)

(Q)

60182000 L

= Not

used
605-1

The number of remaining stops is dependent on the number of controllers to be
tested.

The format of the remaining stops is as follows:

(A)

Bits 8 through 15 = stations to be tested, where:

(A)

Bit 8 = Station 0, etc.
Bits 0 through 7 = stations containing 480 character terminals.

Example: If station 5 is a 480 character terminal, set bit 5 in the A register.
(Q)

= Equipment

code of the controller to be tested.

The previous stop will continue until all controllers have been entered.
C.

SECTION DESCRIPTION INDEX
Section 0
Section 1

Controller Test
Output Worst Pattern

Section 2

Output All Characters

Section 3

Input from Keyboard and Display

Section 4

Input from One Station Output to Another

Section 5

Plasma Matrix Check

IV OPERATION COMMUNICATION

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Error Messages
All error message displays use the standard SMM17 error message format:
A

60X8
B.

Stop/Jump
Parameter

AQ ...... AQ

(See Individual
Error Message)

Return
Address

Section/
Error

MESSAGE DICTIONARY
Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Message

PARENT

Parameter entry error, retry

Entry Error
01

A3
Q3
A4
Q4

=Sections
=Interrupt

line
=Stations to test

=Stations

containing 480

character displays

605-2

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Message

INTPRO

Internal reject on input

Reject Error
02

Q3
A4
Q4

=A register contents
=Q register contents
=Address of calling program
=Not used

Reject Error
03

INTPRO

External reject on input

Q3 = Q register contents
A4
Q4

=Address of calling program
=Retry count

Reject Error
04

INTPRO

Internal reject on output

Same as 02

INTPRO

External reject on output

Same as 03

SECO

Status error

Reject Error
05
Status Error
06

A3
Q3

=Actual status
=Expected status

Status Error
07

SECO

Clock status did not clear when clear
controller was executed

Data Error
08

INPCHK

Input word not equal to expected word
A3
Q3
A4
Q4

=Actual data
=Expected data
=Not used
=Equipment number

Parity Error
09

Parity error
A3
Q.3
A4
Q4

60182000 L

=Input word
=Equipment Address
=Line address
=Character address

605-3

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Character Lost
OA
10

Message

Character lost
A3 =Input word
A4

=Equipment address
= Line address

=Character address

Break
OB

Break condition detected

=Input

A3
Q3

word
= Equipment address

A4
Q4

= Line

address

=Character address

Status Error
OC

INTPRO

Interrupt received, clock status not set

Status Error
OD

INTPRO
False Interrupt

Clock status did not clear with clear interrupt

INTPRO

Clock interrupt occurred when disabled

SECO

Controller time out.

No character request status

SEC2

A3 = Input word

Time Out
OF

No clock status

Status Error
10

Q3 = Equipment address
V DESCRIPTIONS
A.

GENERAL
The diagnostic performs various tests on the Validata Key Entry Controller and
Stations.

The test sections to be run are selected via the parameter entry routine.

Common subroutines include: parameter entry, section select, end of test,
repeat test, repeat section, repeat conditions, error reporting, interrupt processing,
and the input! output driver.
B.

SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
1.

Section 0 - Controller Test
This section checks the operation, status, and functions of the controller.

605-4

60182000 L

Controller status is read and the protect status is checked.

A message

is printed on console teletype and all selected stations if protected.
The clock status is then checked.
seconds for clock status to set.

If it is not set, program waits 20 milliIf clock does set in the prescribed time,

"F" is generated. When clock status is detected, a clear controller
is attempted (no rejects expected). ERROR "7" is ge!lerated if clock status

ERROR

does not clear when clear controller is attempted.

ERROR "6" is generated

if any status other than protected or clock is received.

Section 1 - Output Worst Pattern
This section outputs the

U~:'U~:'

pattern as a worst condition test.

The operator

must observe the pattern displayed to determine proper operation.
is sent to all selected stations using character positioning.
buffer is built at INIT.

One page

A 480-character

The clear command is issued to all selected stations

and the I/O driver is scheduled.
Re-entry is performed after completion of buffer and repeat section is tested.
3.

Section 2 - Output All Characters
This section will transmit the alphanumeric repertoire.
written using character positioning.
mode of operation.

The first page is

The second page uses the self sequencing

On 480 character type displays the second page is in the

inverse video mode and uses the erase line feature to clear the screen upon
completion.

It will be necessary for the operator to monitor the display to

determine proper operation.

Repeat conditjons are checked between pages.

A 480 character buffer is built at INIT.

The clear command is issued to all

selected stations and the I/O driver is scheduled.

Upon completion, start

inverse video command is issued to all selected 480 type stations.

The

character buffer is then transrnitted using the self sequencing mode.

End

inverse video commands are issued to all 480 type stations, and erase line
functions are performed bottom to top.
4.

Section 3 - Input from Keyboard and Display
This section requires the operator to exercise the keyboard.
received will be returned and displayed.
operation.

The operator must determine proper

Operating the "INT" key will terminate the section.

The "Input" message buffer is scheduled for the I/O driver.
the input word table is monitored for data received.
checked to determine code type.
single character buffer.

60182000 L

Characters

Upon completjon,

When data is received it is

The alphanumeric repertoire is saved in a

Special key codes will generate the appropriate message

605-5

buffer.

The "INT" key will terminate the section.

All buffers, when generated,

will schedule the I/O driver.
5.

Section 4 - Input from One Station Output to Another
This section receives data from any station and will display the data on any
other station.

The first two characters received will determine the station

to which the data will be sent.

Operating the "INT" key will terminate this

section.
The message "THIS IS XX OUTPUT TO" is scheduled for the I/O driver. Upon
completion, the input word table is monitored for data received. The first two
characters received will be saved in the routing table which will be used as the
destination station for data received from this station.

When data is received

it is checked to determine code type (same as Section 3).
terminate the section.
6.

The "INT" key will

All buffers, when generated, will schedule the I/O driver.

Section 5 - Plasma Matrix Check
This section will print characters which will use all matrix positions of the
plasma display.
be printed.

One page each of the characters H, I, and number sign will

Each page is terminated by the "INT" key.

A 480-character buffer is built at INIT.
selected station.

The clear command is issued to every

The I/O driver is scheduled with the first page.

When the

"INT" character is received the next page is scheduled until the three pages are
complete.
C.

Repeat condition is checked after each page.

SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTION
The subprograms used by this diagnostic, with the exception of the I/O driver, are
used prjmarily for interface to SMM17.
1.

PARENT
The parameter entry routine allows the operator to select the tests which are
applicable to his system and situation. Failure to select at least one section,
an interrupt line, and at least one controller will result in error code 1 being
reported.

After the error is reported, the routine will initialize and return

for a retry.
2.

SECSEL
The section select ,routine will transfer control to the selected sections, one
at a time, until all sections have been completed.

After completion of all

sections, control is given to the end test routine.

605-6

60182000 L

ENDTES
The end of test routine will check the stop at end of test parameter.

If bit 2 of

the Stop/Jump word is set, a stop will occur in accordance with SMM17 requirements.
4.

After the stop, bit 6 will be tested to determine if repeat test is desired.

REPTES
The repeat test routine will reinitialize the section select routine and check
the Stop/Jump word for re-enter parameters (bit 10) and stop to enter
parameters (bit 0).

If both set a parameter stop will occur.

REPSEC
The repeat section routine will stop at the end of a section if bit 1 of the Stop/
Jump word is set.

If not set, control is given to the next section via the section

select routine.
6.

REPCON
The repeat conditions routine will check bit 4 of Stop/Jump word.

If set, the

previous conditions will be repeated.
7.

ERRRPT
The error reporting routine reports all errors detected by the diagnostic.
are reported in accordance with SMM17 procedures.

ErrorE

This routine also contains

the error data table (ERRDAT).
8.

INTPRO
The interrupt processor will read and save controller status.

The clock enable

flag is checked, and ERROR E is reported if clock was not enabled when the
interrupt occurred.

The I/O driver is entered via the return address (IA+5).

The exit from this routine will be to the exit interrupt handler located in SUMMIT.
9.

The input/ output driver is completely interrupt driven and performs all data
transfers in the character positioning mode.

This routine is scheduled by the

various sections via the enable interrupt routine and is entered when the
interrupt is received by the interrupt processor (INTPRO).
The driver reads station status from all selected stations.

The status word is

saved in the status word table, and character ready status is checked.

If char-

acter ready is set, parity error, character lost, and break status is examined.
These errors are then reported, if present, as ERROR 9, ERROR A, and
ERROR B respectively.

60182000 L

The output word table is checked for activity.

If the

605-7

output buffer is acUve, the driver will send the line address from LAD, the
character address from CAD, and one word from the data buffer.
address, character, and buffer addresses are updated.
word addresses are compared.
(not active).

The line

First word and last

If addresses are equal, OUTWD is cleared

Exit is accomplished by enabling interrupts and returning to the

monitor.
VI APPLICATIONS
A.

HUNG CONDITIONS
This diagnostic is entirely interrupt driven, therefore, interrupt failure will cause
a hung condition waiting for I/O to complete.
Failure of the character ready status to clear will cause a hung condition at program
tag DUMIN.

A dummy input is performed to clear character ready status.

If this

status does not clear, the diagnostic continues to try.

605-8

60182000 L

IA+5
INIT IAL CONTROL
AFT ER LOADING

INITIAL
CONTROL
FROM SMM

I NIT

INITIALIZE
DIAGNOSTIC

ENTRY FOR
RESTART

GET AND
VALIDATE
TEST
PARAMETER

ENTRY FROM
SECTIONS

...

GO TO NEXT
SELECTED
SECTION

60182000 L

605-9

INITIALIZE ROUTINE (lNIT)

INIT

GET IA AND FC
AND CONVERT
TO ASCII

INIT1
YES

TYPE
NAME lA,
AND FC

INIT2

SET UP
RTN FOR
PARENT

605-10

60182000 L

PARAMETER ENTRY ROUTINE

(PARENT)

START

PARENT

PAR1

PAR2
YES

BUILD
EQUIPMENT
ADDRESS
TABLE

PAR6

REQUEST
INTERRUPT
LINE

EXIT TO
SECSEL

60182000 L

605-11

SECTION SELECT ROUTINE

(SECSEL)

START

GET
SECTIONS
TO TEST

YES

GET
SECTIONS
TO TEST

CLEAR
SECTION

BIT

EXIT TO
SECTION

605-12

60182000 L

END OF TEST ROUTINE (ENDTES)
START

CLEAR
SECTION
NUMBER

COUNT
PASSES
THRU TEST

NO
YES

EXIT TO
REPEAT TEST

60182000 L

605-13

REPEAT TEST ROUTINE (REPTES)

START

INITIALIZE
SECTIONS

EXIT TO
PARENT
NO

EXIT TO
SECSEL

REPEAT CONDITIONS ROUTINE (REPCON)

START

EXIT TO NEXT
CONDITION

605-14

60182000 L

REPEAT SECTIONS ROUTINE (REPSEC)

START

YES

EXIT TO LAST
SECTION
NO

EXIT TO NEXT
SECTION

60182000 L

605-15

ERROR REPORTING ROUTINE (ERRRPT)

START

SAVE ERROR
CODE AND
SECTION
NUMBER

EXIT TO
CALLER

605-16

60182000 L

INTERRUPT PROCESSOR (JNTPRO)

SAVE EXIT
VALUE AND
A REG.

READ
STATUS
AND SAVE

SCHEDULE

EXIT TO
MONITOR

60182000 L

605-17

INPUT /OUTPUT

DRIVER (10)

START

CLEAR
STATION
NUMBER

INCREMENT

READ
STATION
EQ. NUMBER

STATION
NUMBER

NO
YES

EXIT TO
CALLER

INPUT
DATA
WORD

SAVE
DATA

SEND
LINE
ADDRESS

605-18

60182000 L

CLEAR TABLE ROUTINE (TABCLR)
START

GET
DISPLAY
TYPE

YES

CLEAR
LINE
ADDRESS

CLEAR
CHARACTER
ADDRESS

60182000 L

605-19

SECTION 0 (SECO)

START

READ
CONTROLLER
STATUS

ERROR 7
CLOCK STATUS
DID NOT CLEAR

YES

PRINT
PROTECTED
MESSAGE

YES

EXIT TO
SECSEL

605-20

60182000 L

SECTION I (SECU

START

BUILD
DATA

BUFFER

CLEAR
10

STATIONS

REPEAT

EXIT

60182000 L

605-21

SECTION 2 (SEC2)

START

BUILD
DATA
BUFFER

CLEAR
STATIONS

SENDC!)
PAGE OF
DATA

EXIT

605-22

60182000 L

SECTION 3 (SEC3)

START

INPUT
WORD

SEC3

60182000 L

605-23

SECTION 4 (SEC 4)

START

SEC4

CONVERT
STATION TO
DECIMAL

SCAN INPUT
TABLE
INWD

INITIALIZE
SECTION 4

CONVERT
STATION TO
ASCII
SEC402
SET UP
BUFFER
ADDRESSES
FOR MESSAGE

SEC407
SEND
STATION
NUMBER TO
STATION
SEC425

SEC414

CONVERT TO
HEX AND SAVE
AT ROUT

SET UP BUFFER
ADDRESSES
FOR MESSAGE

SEC403
SCAN EQUAD
TABLE FOR VALID
EQUIPMENT
CODES

605-24

RETURN WHEN
OUTPUT DONE

CONVERT TO HEX,
ADD TO ROUT,
AND SAVE

60182000 L

SECTION 4 (SEC4)

SEC 438
SET UP BUFFER
ADDRESSES FOR
INT MESSAGE
YES

SEC434
SET UP BUFFER
ADDRESSES FOR
CHARACTER.

WAIT BUFFER
NOT BUSY

EXIT TO
MONITOR

SEC435
SET UP BUFFER
ADDRESSES FOR
SELECTED
MESSAGE

60182000 L

605-25

SECTION 5 (SEC 5)

START

BUILD A
480 CHARACTE
BUFFER

SEND
PAGE
OF H

BUILD A
480 CHARACTER
BUFFER

BUILD A

480 CHARACTER
BUFFER

605-26

60182000 L

GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHICS TERMINAL (GPGT)

INSTRUCTION MACROS
The macros described in this section are used to generate the GPGT Display Code
Interpreter (DCI) instructions in tests GTO, GT1, GT2, GT3, and GT6.
the macros appear in a different form from one test to the next.

Some of

The macro

definition in the front of each test designates which form of a macro is used by
that test.

All changes made to the tests mentioned above must use these macro

instructions to generate DCI instructions.
to the left should not be used.

Macros designated with an asterisk

(~:,)

Their macro definitions are to be deleted from the

tests in a future revision.
A.

GPGT DISPLAY FILE
1.

Null Instruction
NULL

Relative Jump
JMPR

A (where A is the indirect address tag)

Execute Instruction
EXCI

A (where A is the relative address tag)

Indirect Subroutine Exit
SRXI

A (where A is the indirect address tag)

Relative Subroutine Exit
SRXR

A (where A is the direct address tag)

Indirect Subroutine Entry
SREI

A (where A is the indirect address tag)

Direct Subroutine Entry
SRED

A (where A is the relative address tag)

Indirect Jump
JMPI

No parameters required

A (where A is the indirect address tag)

C ontrol Word
CW

A, B, S, W
where A is the
B is the
S is the
W is the

60182000 L

relative address tag
blink bit (0 or 1)
enable scis sor bit (0 or 1)
execute scissor bit (0 or 1)
610-1

10. Move Beam Delta X
MBX

X (where X is the number of raster units)

1I. Move Beam Delta Y
MBY

Y (where Y is the number of raster units)

12. Draw Vector Delta X
DVX·

X (where X is the number of raster units)

13. Draw Vector Delta Y
DVY

Y (where Y is the number of raster units)

14. Draw Vector Delta X, Delta Y
DVXY

X, Y
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
The type bit and the delta intensity are forced to zero.

DVXY

X, Y, 13
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
13 is the delta intensity value
The type bit is forced to zero.

DVXYT

X, Y, 13
I

where X is the number of raster units in X
Y is the number of raster units in Y
13 is the delta intensity value
The type bit is forced to one.
DVXYI

X, Y, 13
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
13 is the delta intensity value
The type bit is forced to zero.

DVXYIT

X, Y, 13, T
where X
Y
13
T

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X
number of raster units on Y
delta intensity value
type bit

15. Short Vector Mode
DVSM

S, 14, T
where S is the scale field
14 is the delta intensity value
T is the type field

X, Y, 11, 10
where X is
Y is
11 is
10 is

610-2

the number of raster units in X
the number of raster units in Y
the upper bit of the delta intensity
the lower bit of the delta intensity

60182000 L

SVM

S
where S is the scale field
The delta intensity value and the type field are forced to zero.

SVM1

S, 14
where S is the scale field
14 is the delta intensity value
The type field is forced

SVMIT

zero.

S, 14, T
where S is the scale field
14 is the delta intensity value
T is the type field (DASH2 for • 2 inch or
DASH4 for. 4 inch)

where X is the number of raster units in X
Y is the number of raster units in Y
The delta intensity value is forced to zero.
XY1

X, Y, I
where X is the number of raster units in X
Y is the number of raster units in Y
I is the d'elta intensity value

SVMEX

No parameters required
The delta X is forced to all ones.
The delta Y and the delta intensity value are forced to zero.

16. 16-Bit Relative Vector
DVR

X. Y. 14. T
where X
Y
14
T

DVR

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X
number of raster units on Y
delta intensity value
type field

X. Y
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
The delta intensity value and type field are forced to zero.

DVR1

X, Y, 14

where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
14 is the delta intensity value
The type field is forced to zero.
DVR1T

X, Y, 14. T
where X
Y
14
T

60182000 L

is the number of raster units on X
is the number of raster units on Y
is the delta intensity value
is the type field (DASH2 for. 2 inch or
DASH4 for. 4 inch)

610-3

17. 16-Bit Absolute Beam Movement
MBA

X. Y. 14, T
where X is
Y is
14 is
T is

MBA

the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X
number of raster units on Y
delta intensity value
type field

X, Y
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
The delta intensity value if forced to all ones.
The type field is forced to zero.

MBAl

X. Y. 14
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of ras ter units on Y
14 is the delta intensity value
The type field is forced to zero.

MBAIT

X. Y. 14, T
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
14 is the delta intensity value
T is the type field (DASH2 for. 2 inch or
DASH4 for. 4 inch)

18. 16-Bit Negative Relative Beam Movement
MBNR

X. Y. 14, T
where X is
Y is
14 is
T is

MBNRl

the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X
number of raster units on Y
delta intensity value
type field

X. Y. 14
where X is the number of raster units on X
Y is the number of raster units on Y
14 is the delta intensity value
The type field is forced to zero.

19. Symbol Mode- Fixed Spacing
~:(

CMFS

S. 14. V. K
where S
14
V
K

CMFS

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

size field
intensity value
90 degree orientation bi t
italics bit

S
where S is the size field
The intensity value. the 90 degree orientation bit, and the
italics bit are forced to zero.

610-4

60182000 L

CMFS1

S, 14
where S is the size field
14 is the intensity value
The 90 degree orientation bit and the italics bit are forced
to zero.

CMFS1T

S, 14, TC
where S is the size field
14 is the intensity value
TC is the type code (IT for italics, OR for 90 degree
orientation, or 1TOR for 90 degree orientation of
italics)

CMEX

No parameters required
A symbol mode exit character is forced into the upper ASCII
character. The lower character is zero.

20. Symbol Mode-Variable Spacing
~:~

CMVS

X, Y, S, 14, V, K
where X is
Y is
S is
14 is
V is
K is

CMVS

the
the
the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X spacing
number of raster units on Y spacing
size field
intensity value
90 degree orientation bit
italics bit

X, Y, S
where X is the number of raster units on X spacing
Y is the number of raster units on Y spacing
S is the siz e field
The intensity value, the 90 degree orientation bit, and the
italics bit are forced to zero.

CMVS1

X, Y, S, 14
where X
Y
S
14

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

number of raster units on X spacing
number of raster units on Y spacing
size field
intensity value

The 90 degree orientation bit and the italics bit are forced
to zero.
CMVS1T

X, Y, S, 14, TC
where X is the number of raster units on X spacing
Y is the number of raster units on Y spacing
S is the size field
14 is the intensity value
TC is the type code (IT for italics, OR for 90 degree
orientation or ITOR for 90 degree orientation of
italics)

CMEX

No parameters required
A symbol mode exit character is forced into the upper ASCII
character. The lower character is zero.

60182000 L

610-5

21. Plot Symbol Mode
'"

CMPL

S, 14, C, V, K
where S
14
C
V
K

CMPL

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

size field
intensity value
hex value for the ASCII character
90 degree orientation bit
italic sbit

S, C
where S is the size field
C is the hex value for the ASCII character
The intensity value, the 90 degree orientation bit, and the
italics bit are forced to zero.

CMPLI

S, C, 14
where S is the size field
C is the hex value for the ASCII character
14 is the intensity value
The 90 degree orientation bit and the italics bit are forced
to zero.

CMPLIT

S, C, 14, TC
where S
C
14
TC

CMPLEX

is the size field
is the hex value for the ASCII charac ter
is the intensity value
is the type code (IT for italics, or for 90 degree
orientation or ITOR for 90 degree orientation of
italics)

No parameters required
A plot symbol mode instruction is generated. A symbol mode
exit character is forced into the ASCII plot character field.
This size field, intensity value and type code are forced to
zero.

22. Conditional Control Instruction
All conditional control instruction macros follow the format:
Jtcf

Parameters (if any)
where J always appears to deSignate a jump
t is the type of jump
1 - jump over next word
2 - jump over next two words
S - jump to start of item
E - jump to end of item
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
o - jump if condition (true)
N - jump if not condition (false)
E} used only in jump on
G
zoom level
f is the function tested
HIT - jump on light pen hit
SW - jump on light pen switch
W11 - jump on 11-bi t window
W12 - jump on 12-bit window
CCR - jump on conditional control register
EQ - cyclic jump
ZL - jump on zoom level

610-6

60182000 L

23. Jump on Light Pen Hit
JtcHIT

No parameters required
where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(0 for jump on hit or N for jump on no hit)

24. Jump on Light Pen Switch
JtcSW

No parameters required
where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(0 for jump if switch closed or N for jump
if swi tch open)

25. Jump on 11-Bit Window
JtcW11

No parameters required
where t is the
c is the
(0 for
N for

type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
condition or inversion of the jump
jump if beam is on window or
jump if beam is off window)

26. Jump on 12-Bit Window
JtcW12

No parameters required
where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(0 for jump if beam is on window or
N for jump if beam is off window)

27. Jump on Conditional Control Register
JtcCCR

B
where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(0 for jump if the bit is a one or
N for jump if the bit is a zero)
B is the bit position to be tested

28. Cyclic Jump
JtcEQ

where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(0 for jump if value and count are equal or
N for jump if value and count are not equal)
V is the constant that is compared against the count
C is the count that gets incremented
29. Jump on Zoom Level
JtcZL

L
where t is the type of jump (1, 2, S, or E)
c is the condition or inversion of the jump
(G for jump if the current zoom level would draw a
picture larger than would be drawn at a zoom level
equal to the operand; or E for jump if the current
zoom level would draw a picture the same size or
smaller than would be drawn at a zoom level equal
to the operand)
L is the operand used in the decision described above

60182000 L

610-7

30. Parameter Word 1
PAR1

I, C1, L, C2, NZ
where I
C1
L
C2
NZ

,'.
','

PAR1

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

absolute intensity value
light pen enable bit (1 enables)
light pen on bit (1 turns on)
zoom enable bit (1 enables)
zoom on bit (1 turns on)

I, CL, L, CZ, Z
where I
CL
L
CZ
Z

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

absolute intensity value
light pen enable bit (1 enables)
light pen on bit (1 turns on)
zoom enable bit (1 enables)
zoom off bit (1 turns off)

31. Parameter Word 2
PRGINT

No parameters required
The function field is forced to zero, selecting a program
interrupt.

Wl1

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 2, selecting an ii-bit window.

W12

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 3, selecting a 12-bit window.

PENON

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 4, providing the second level
of light pen enable.

PENOFF

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 5, providing the second level
of light pen disable.

,'.
','

EOF

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 6, marking an end of frame.

SOF

No parameters required
The function field is forced to 6, marking an end of frame.

32. Load Register
All load register instruction macros follow the format:
Lr

A
where L always appears to designate a load
A is the relative address tag
r is the register name
The following register names are legal:
PADR
- P Address (00)
DATUM - DATUM (01)
SADR
- Execute Instruction Address (02)
LVADR - Last Vector Address (03)
CWADR - Control Word Address (04)
HIT
- Light Pen Hit Address (05)

610-8

60182000 L

HITX
HITY
WLOCX
WLOCY
HITC
CCR
SPAR1
SPAR2
ZL
WLIM
INTEN
INTIN

Light Pen Hit X Position (06)
Light Pen Hit Y Position (07)
Window Location X Position (08)
Window Location Y Position (09)
Symbol/Short Vector Count (OA)
Conditional Control Register (OB)
Spare Register (OC)
Spare Register (OD)
Zoom Level (18)
Window Limits (19)
Interrupt Enable (lA)
Interrupt Disable (lB)

33. Unload Registers
All unload register instruction macros follow the format:
Ur

A
where L always appears to designate an unload
A is the relative address tag
r is the register name
The following regis ter names are legal:
.
PADR
- P Address (00)
DATUM - DATUM (01)
SADR
- Execute Instruction Address (02)
LVADR - Last Vector Address (03)
CWADR - Control Word Address (04)
HIT
- Light Pen Hit Address (05)
HITX
- Light Pen Hit X Position (06)
HITY
- Light Pen Hit Y Position (07)
WLOCX - Window Location X Position (08)
WLOCY - Window Location Y Position (09)
HITC
- Symbol/Short Vector Count (OA)
CCR
- Conditional Control Register (OB)
SPAR1 - Spare Register (OC)
SPAR2 - Spare Register COD)
BPOSX - Beam Position X (10)
BPOSY - Beam Position Y (11)

60182000 L

610-9

GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHICS TERMINAL (GPGT) TROUBLESHOOTING PROGRAM
(GTO Test No. 70)
1.

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this program is to aid the customer engineer and checkout technician in
generation and execution of his own display file for the GPGT.

To accomplish this, the

operator must type the hexadecimal codes for the GPGT instructions at the GPGT keyboard.

II.

This program also includes a core dump to the display console.

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
1.

Minimum Configuration
1700
1705 Interrupt Data Channel
CC104A/B/C GPGT Console
CA 122A Keyboard
Input device for SMM17

System Controller (SC)
1 772 Magnetic Core Memory Module
1775 A/Q Interrupt Data Channel
1773 Direct Storage Access Channel
CC104A/B/C GPGT Console
CA122A Keyboard
Input Device for SMM17

Core Requirements
The minimum amount of core required is 4K.

Equipment Configuration

D·lrect S torage A ccess
A/Q
1700/SC
Interrupt
B.

CC104A/B/C
GPGT
Console

CA122A
Keyboard

SOFTWARE
The program operates under control of the SMM17 monitor.

ACCESSORIES
None.

60182000 L

611-1

III. OPERA TIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The program is loaded as test number 70 using standard SMM17 loading procedure.

PARAMETERS
1.

Parameter Stops
First Stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 7021 - test ID stop
(Q) = Stop/ Jump parameter
Second Stop
(A) = Interrupt line for display code interpreter
(Prestored as 0004-bit 2 designating interrupt line 2)
This parameter must not be changed after the initial parameter stop.
(Q) = Not Used

DCI Switch Setting
DCI instruction/ clock control switches must be UP.
The DCI PROTECT switch must be in UNPROTECTED.
The DCI SENSE REFRESH FAULT switch must be UP.

Stop/ Jump Parameter Word
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Stop to enter parameters
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not used
Omit typeou t
Bias return address display
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Not sensed by this program
Run this program alone
(This bit should be set when two or more tests in the test list use the
same display code interpreter equipment number. This allows the
tests to be run consecutively, since they cannot be multiplexed. )

SECTION DESCRIPTION INDEX
Not applicable

IV. 'OPERA TOR COMMUNICA TrONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Normal Teletype Message
Program identification during test initialization.
GTO (No. 70) GPGT TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
IA = XXXX

611-2

60182000 L

Normal Display Console Message
Displayed at the console after teletype message.
FUNCTLOC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ABC D E

Error Messages
No error messages are used.
are ignored.

Illegal keyboard codes and illegal operations

MESSAGE DICTIONARY
Not applicable

DESC RIPTION
A.

GENERAL
This program allows the selection of four functions: dump core to the display,
make changes to the core image on the display, store these changes back into core,
and run a display file.
keyboard.

These four functions are controlled from the display console

Key depression controls a cursor on the display or inserts a symbol at

the cursor position.

Initially the display is as follows:

FUNCTLOC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ABC D E

Lower case on the keyboard must be selected.
the keyboard are ignored.

Upper case codes from

Although lower case on the keyboard is used,

display of letters is in upper case to be compatible with normal hexadecimal
A-F notation.
To enable selection of a function, type an H, S, or T depending upon which function
is desired.. This brings the last core dump (if any) and places the cursor following
the FUNCT.

If an error is made while typing in the function selection, depress

BACKSPACE and correct your error.

Illegal keys are ignored.

are discarded and the cursor replaced following the FUNCT.

Illegal functions

No error messages

are given.
1.

Dump Core to Display (Read Core)
Type: RCnnnn (ETX)
where nnnn is the starting address
(leading zeros need not be typed)
Core is displayed in 16 lines with 16 locations to each line.
address of each line is an even multiple of 10 16 •

60182000 L

The starting

The starting address of each

611-3

line is displayed to the left under the heading LOC.

The cursor is placed at

the upper hexadecimal digit of the first location.
CORE IS READ ONLY ONCE FOR EACH RC COMMAND.
IT IS NOT READ CONTINUOUSLY.
2.

Change the Core Image
First follow the proc edure to dump core to display.
Then move the cursor to the location to be changed.
An asterisk

(~:<)

Type the desired change.

is displayed to the left of each location changed.
NOTE
Only the display is changed. No changes occur
in memory. To change memory follow the procedure to store into core.

Legal cursor moves are as follows:
- advances cursor one hexadecimal digi t bypassing spaces
between locations
BACKSPACE - backspaces cursor one hexadecimal digit bypassing spaces
between locations
LINE DOWN - advances cursor one line
LINE UP
- moves cursor back one line
- advances cursor to start of the next line
NEW LINE
- moves cursor to upper hexadecimal digit of the firs t
RESET
location

SKIP

Store into Core (Transfer into Core)
First follow the procedure to dump core to display and to change the core
image.
Then type: T C (ETX)
Each location with an asterisk

(~:<)

to its left is stored into memory.

The

asterisks are cleared.
4.

Run A Display File (Start Display)
If a display file must first be generated, follow the procedure to dump core to

display, to change the core image, and to store into core.
Then type: SDnnnn (ETX)
where nnnn is the starting address of the display file
(leading zeros need not be typed)

611-4

60182000 L

NOTE
To avoid burning the CRT, ensure that the display
file contains a refresh instruction and a jump back
to the beginning. Also set beam defocus.
5.

Termina te the Program
Type:

ern with no function given.

SEC TION DESCRIPTIONS
Not applicable.

SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Not applicable.

VI. APPLICA TIONS
Only a few types of DCI instructions are used in this program.

However, if one of them

is failing, generation and execution of a display file with this program may be impossible.
The DCI instructions used in this program are as follows:
Control Word
Parameter Word 1
Parameter Word 2 (12-Bit Window and End of Frame)
Absolute Beam Movement
Character Mode- Fixed Spacing
Move Beam X
Relative Jump
The control word instructions are used only to allow the cursor to blink and could be
eliminated.

60182000 L

611-5

GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHICS TERMINAL (GPGT) DISPLAY CODE
INTERPRETER COMMAND TEST
(GT1 Test No. 71)
1.

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this test is to verify the operation of the Display Code Interpreter (DCI).
This test checks the A/Q channel functions" interrupts, and clock/instruction stepping
of DCI instructions.

During clock stepping after each clock pulse, the entire TV monitor

is read and compared against a table of expected changes.

After the instruction has

been completed, the parameter registers are also read and compared against a table of
expected changes.

After an instruction step, both the TV monitor and the parameter

registers are read and compared against a table of expected changes.
II.

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
1. .

Minimum Configuration
1700

System Controller (SC)

1705 Interrupt Data Channel

1772 Magnetic Core Memory Module (12K)
1775 A/Q Interrupt Data Channel
1773 Direct Storage Access Channel

CC104A/B/C GPGT Console
Input Device for SMM17

CC104A/B/ C GPGT Console
Input Device for SMM17
2.

Core Requirements
The minimum amount of core required is 12K.

Equipment Configuration
Direct Storage Access
A/Q
1700/SC

CC104A/B/C
GPGT
Console

Interrupt
B.

SOFTWARE
The test operates under control of SMM17 monitor.

ACCESSORIES
None.

60182000 L

612-1

III. 'OPERA TIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The test is loaded as test number 71 using standard SMM17 loading procedure.

PARAMETERS
1.

Parameter Stops
First stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 7131 test ID stop
(Q) = Stop/ Jump parameter
Second stop
(A) = First group of section selection bits
(prestored as FFFE )
16
Bit 0 = Not used
Bit 1 = Section 1 - A/Q functions
Bit 2 = Section 2 - Load/unload instructions (clock step)
Bit 3 = Section 3 - Load/unload instructions (instruction step)
Bit 4 = Section 4 - Jump instructions (clock step)
Bit 5 = Section 5 - Jump instructions (instruction step)
Bi't 6 = Section 6 - Parameter word instructions (clock step)
Bit 7 = Section 7 - Parameter word instructions (instruction step)
Bit 8 = Section 8 - Move beam instructions (clock step)
Bit 9 = Section 9 - Move beam instructions (instruction step)
Bit 10 = Section A - Conditional control instructions (clock step)
Bit 11 = Section B - Conditional control instructions' (instruction step)
Bit 12 = Section C - Draw vector instructions (clock step)
Bit 13 = Section D - Draw vector instructions (instruction step)
Bit 14 = Section E - Control word instructions (clock step)
Bit 15 = Section F - Control word instructions (instruction step)
(Q) = Second group of section selection bits

(prestored as 002F 16)
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

0
1
2
3
4
5

= Section 10 - Character mode instructions (clock step)

= Section 11 - Character mode instructions (instruction step)

= Section 12 - Execute instruction (clock step)
= Section 13 - Execute instruction (instruction step)
= Not used
=

Section 15 - Start/ stop and interrupt

Third stop
(A) = Interrupt line for display code interpreter
(prestored as 0004 16 - bit 2 designating interrupt line 2)
This parameter must not be changed after the initial parameter stop.
(Q)

= Power line, frequency
(prestored as 0060 16 )
For 60-cycle input power, set to 0060 16 •
For 50-cycle input power, set to 005016.

612-2

60182000 L.

DCI and Display Console Switch Setting
The DCI instruction/ clock control switches must be up.
The DCI PROTECT switch must be in the UNPROTECTED position.
The DCI SENSE REFRESH FAULT switch must be DOWN.
NOTE
To avoid burning the CRT, ensure that the BEAM
DEFOCUS switch on the display console is set.

Stop/ Jump Parameter Word
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

0 - Stop to enter parameters
1 - Stop at end of section
2 - Stop at end of test
3 - Stop on error
4 - Repeat condition
5 - Repeat section
6 - Repeat test
7 - Not used
8 - Omi t typeouts
9 - Bias return address display
10 - Re-enter parameters
11 - Set audible alarm on error
12 - Not sensed by this test
13 - Not sensed by this test
14 - Not sensed by this test
15 - Run this test alone
(This bit should be set when two or more tests in the test
list use the same display code interpreter equipment
number. This allows the tests to be run consecutively,
since they cannot be multiplexed. )

SECTION DESCRIPTION INDEX
Number

o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

A
B
C
D
E
F

10
11
12
13
14
15

60182000 L

Name

Run Time (Seconds)

Not Used
2
A/Q Functions
41
Load/Unload Instructions (clock step)
4
Load/Unload Instructions (instruction step)
3
Jump Instructions (clock step)
1
Jump Instructions (instruction step)
3
Parameter Word Instructions (clock step)
1
Parameter Word Instructions (instruction step)
22
Move Beam Instructions (clock step)
2
Move Beam Instructions (instruction step)
21
Conditional Control Instructions (clock step)
4
Conditional Control Instructions (instruction step) .
40
Draw Vector Instruction (clock step)
2
Draw Vector Instruction (instruction step)
2
Control Word Instructions (clock step)
1
Control Word Instructions (instruction step)
100
Character Mode Instruction (clock step)
8
Character Mode Instruction (instruction step)
1
Execute Instruction (clock step)
1
Execute Instruction (instruction step)
Not Used
1
Start/ Stop and Interrupt
Total run time 260
612-3

IV. OPERA TOR COM MUNICA TIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS

Normal Teletype Message
Program identification during test initialization
GT1 (No. 71) GPGT DCI TEST

Stop at End of Section
First stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 7122 - test ID stop
(Q) = Stop/ Jump parameter
Second Stop
(A) = Section number
(Q) = Return address

Stop at End of Test
First Stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 7124 - test ID stop
(Q) = Stop/ Jump parameter
Second Stop
(A) = Pass number
(Q) = Return address

Stop on Error
All error message displays use basically the standard SMM17 error message
format.

The format of the first two stops is the same for all types of errors.

The format of the third, fourth, and fifth stops is determined by the type of
error.

The format for the first and second stops is as follows:

First Stop (overflow light on)
(A) = 71X8 - test ID stop
where X is the number of stops
(Q) = Stop/ Jump parameter
Second Stop
(A) = XXYZ where XX = Section number
Y = Condition (or subsection)
Z = Error type
(Q) = Address pointer to where within a condition the error occurred.
This pointer is not the same as the return address found in other SMM17 tests.
The address points to where execution stopped when the error occurred. but
not to where execution will continue after the error.

Where execution continues

after the error is determined by the repeat condition bit of the Stop/ Jump
parameter. If the repeat condition bit is set, execution will continue at a backward marker (a recovery point to repeat the condition designated in (A) of this
second stop).

If the repeat condition bit is not set, execution will continue at a

forward marker (a recovery point to skip around the remainder of the condition
designated in (A) of this second stop).
612-4

60182000 L

MESSAGE DICTIONARY
The upper hexadecimal digit of the two-digit error message code designates the
condition (or subsection) that failed.

The lower digit is the error type.

This

message dictionary describes the error types.
Subroutine
Name

Subroutine
Tag Name

Message and
Description

FNRP
STRP

FNI110
STIlOO

RESPONSE, expect reply,
receive internal reject
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q register function code

FNRP
STRP

FNI110
STIlOO

RESPONSE, expect reply,
receive external reject
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q register function code

FNER
STER

FNI230
STI220

RESPONSE, expect external
reject, receive internal reject
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q regis ter func tion code

FNER
STER

FNI200
STI200

RESPONSE, expect external
reject, receive reply
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q register function code

CMPALL

CM[030

TV monitor has unexpected display
A = First word of DCI
instruction being stepped
Q = XYYY
Where X is the current DCI word
number (0, 1, or 2) and YYY is
the clock pulse number. A pseudo
word number of 4 is used to designate when start draw has occurred.
The clock pulse number then refers
to LDU clocks. When the instruction
is completed Q is FFFF16.
A = Ac tual TV dis play
Q = Expected TV display
A = Failing TV word number
Q = Previous TV display

CMPALL

CMI030

REGISTER, parameter register has
unexpected contents
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = FFFF
A = Actual register contents
Q = Expected register contents
A = Failing register number
Q = Previous register contents

Code

60182000 L

612-5

612-6

Code

Subroutine
Name

Subroutine
Tag Name

CKCORE

CKI020

STORAGE, core location has unexpected
contents
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = FFFF16
A = Actual location contents
Q = Expected location contents
A = Failing location address
(Biasing is determined
by bit 9 of Stop/ Jump parameter)
Q = Not used

WAIT

WAI050
WAI060

TIME, interrupt did not occur within
expected time limits
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = FFFF
A = Lower1pimit (milliseconds)
Q = Upper limit (milliseconds)
A = Actual time (milliseconds)
Q = Expected interrupt (bit corresponding
to register 20 16 )

DCIPRO

DCI002

INTERRUPT, internal reject during
interrupt state
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q register function code

DCIPRO

DCI002

INTERRUPT, external reject during
interrupt state
A = I/O instruction
Q = Q register function code

RINT

RITOI0

INTERRUPT, missing
A = Firs t word of DCI
instruction being stepped
Q = FFFF 1 f)
A = Actual interrupts (bits corresponding
to register 20 16 )
Q = Expected interrupts (bits corresponding to register 2016)

DCIPRO

DCI020

INTERRUPT, no interrupt status bit
set when an interrupt occurred
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = XYYY
Where X is the current DCI word
number (0, 1, or 2) and YYY is the
clock pulse number.
When the instruction is completed
Q is FFFF •
A = 0000 (actua16status)
Q = Expected interrupts (bits corresponding to register 2016)

Message and
Description

60182000 L

Subroutine
Name

Subroutine
Tag Name

Message and
Description

DCIPRO

DCI030

INTERRUPT, unexpected
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = XYYY
Where X is the current DCI word
number (0, 1, or 2) and YYY is the
clock pulse number.
When the instruction is completed
Q is FFFF I6 •
A = Actual interrupts (bits corresponding
to register 20 16 )
Q = Expected interrupts (bits corresponding to register 20 16 )

DCIPRO

DCI060

INTERRUPT, unable to clear interrupt
status
.
A = First word of DCI instruction being
stepped
Q = XYYY
Where X is the current DCI word
number (0, 1, or 2) and YYY is the
clock pulse number.
When the instruction is completed
Q is FFFF t6 •
A = Actual interrupt status after attempted
clear (bits corresponding to regis ter
20 16)
Q = Expected interrupt status after
attempted clear (bits corresponding
to register 20 16 )
A = Function used 10 attempt clear
interrupt status
00 = Cleared when interrupt status
or keyboard register unloaded
lA = Load interrupt enable register
IB = Load interrupt disable register
30 = Reset
Q = Not used

Code

DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL
Sections which step DCI instructions are arranged in section pairs.

The even num-

bered section clock steps the instruction and the odd numbered section instruction
steps the instruction.

Both sections of a section pair use the same routine, but the

routine is entered with a different parameter in the Q register (0, even or 1, odd).
Each condition (or subsection) begins with a reset function and ends with a check of
the repeat condition bit of the Stop/ Jump parameter.
a pre-determined number of counts.

Most conditions are executed

When the repeat condition bit is set, this count

is not advanced.
Unexpected interrupts are enabled in Sections 4-15.
60182000 L

612-7

SEC TION DESCRIPTIONS
1.

Section 1 - A/Q Functions
Error
Code

0101
0102
0105

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCAQ

Condition 0 - scratchpad, all ones

PlI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0101
0102

Load all scratchpad registers with FFFF.
Expect reply.

0101
0102

Unload all scratchpad registers.

0106

Verify that scratchpad registers contain FFFF.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do 16 times.

0111
0112
0115

POIOOO

Condition 1 - scratchpad, all zeros

POI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0111
0112

Load all scratchpad registers with 0000.
Expect reply.

0111
0112

Unload all scratchpad registers.

0116

Verify that scratchpad registers contain 0000.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.

0121
0122
0125

S11000

Condition 2 - scratchpad, shifted one

S11010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0121
0122

Load all scratchpad registers with one bit (start with
0001 and shift one bit position left each pass).
Expect reply.

0121
0122

Unload all scratchpad registers.

0126

Verify that scratch registers contain the value loaded.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
position.
SOIOOO

612-8

Do 16 times.

Do for each bit

Condition 3 - scratchpad, shifted zero

60182000 L

Error
Code
0131
0132
0135

Program
Tag Name
SOIOOO

Program Description
Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0131
0132

Load all scratchpad registers with all bits except
one (start with FFFE and shift one bi t position left
each pass). Expect reply.

0131
0132

Unload all scratchpad registers.

0136

Verify that scratchpad registers contain the value
loaded.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
bit position.

Do for each

SRIOOO

Condition 4 - scratchpad, register number

0141
0142
0145

SRI010

Reset.

0141
0142

SRI020

Load all scratchpad registers with its register
number. Expect reply.

0141
0142

SRI016

Unload all scratchpad registers.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

0146

Expect 0000.

Expect reply.

Verify that scratchpad registers contain the value
loaded.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.

0151
0152
0155

UZIOOO

Condition 5 - zoom level

UZI010

Reset.

Do 16 times.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0151
0152

Load zoom level register (use levels 7, 0 •.• 6).
Expect reply.

0151
0152

Read TV zoom level.

0155

Verify that zoom level register contains the value
loaded.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for each zoom level.

0161
0162
0165

60182000 L

UWIOOO

Condition 6 - window limits

UWI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-9

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

0161
0162

Load window limits registers (use FFFF, 0000, AAAA,
5555). Expect reply.

0161
0162

Read TV window limits.

0165

Verify that window limits register contains the value
loaded.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for four values.

0171
0172
0175

UEIOOO

Condition 7 - interrupt enable

UE010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0171
0172

Load interrupt enable register (use EF9F, 0000,
AA8A, 4515). Expect reply.

0171
0172

Read TV interrupt enable.

0175

Verify that interrupt enable register contains the
value loaded.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for four values.
UDIOOO

Condition 8 - interrupt disable

0181
0182
0185

UDI010

Reset.

0181
0182

UDI020

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Load interrupt enable register with EF9F.
Expect reply.

0181
0182

Read TV interrupt enable.

0185

Verify that interrupt enable register contains EF9F.

0181
0182

Load interrupt disable register (use 0000, EF9F,
2515, CA8A). Expect reply.

0181
0182
0185

Read TV interrupt enable register.

0185

Verify that interrupt enable register contains expected
contents (EF9F, 0000, CA8A, 2515).

Expec t reply.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for four values.

612-10

60182000 L

Error
Code

0191
0192
0195

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

URIOOO

Condition 9 - write limits

URI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0191
0192

Load write limits register (use FFFF, 0000, AAAA,
5555). Expect reply.

0191
0192

Read TV write limits.

0195

Verify that write limits register contains the loaded
value.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for four values.

01A1
01A2
01A5

ILIOOO

Condi tion A - illegal func tions

ILI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

01A3
01A4

Attempt illegal output function (use all illegal functions
through 7F). Expect external reject.

01A3
01A4

A ttempt illegal input function (use all illegal functions
through 7F). Expect external reject.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for all illegal functions.

01B1
01B2
01B5

C8IOOO

Condition B - clock step

C8I010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect reply.

01B1
01B2
01B6

Load and unload P register.

01B1
01B2
01B5
01B6

Clock step a Null instruction.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
181000
01C1
01C2
01C5

60182000 L

Do 16 times.

Condition C - instruction step
Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-11

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

01C1
01C2
01C6

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

01C1
01C2
01C5
01C6

Instruction step a Null instruction.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do 16 times.
2.

Section 2 and 3 - Load and Unload Instructions
Error
Code

0201/0301
0202/0302
0205/0305

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCREG

Condition 0 - scratchpad, all ones

RlI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

0201/0301

Load and unload P register.

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

0202/0302
0206/0306
0201/0301
0202/0302
0205/0305
0206/0306

RlI020

Load write limits register so unload instruction
is within limits. Set all protect bits in the write
limits area except the location into which the
unload instruction will write.

0201/0301
0202/0302
0205/0305
0201/0301
0202/0302
0205/0305
0206/0306

Clock/instruction step a load register
instruction.

RlI030

0207/0307

Clock/instruction step an unload register
instruction.

Verify that FFFF was written into core by the
unload instruction.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
each scratchpad register except P.

0211/0311
0212/0312
0215/0315

612-12

ROIOOO

Condition 1 - scratchpad, all zeros

ROI010

Reset.

Do for

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Load and unload P register.

0211/0311
0212/0312
0216/0316
0211/0311
0212/0312
0215/0315
0216/0316

ROl020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load register instruction.

Load write limits register so unload instruction
is within limits. Set all protect bits in the write
limits area except the location into which the
unload ins truc tion will wri te.

0211/0311
0212/0312
0215/0315
0211/0311
0212/0312
0215/0315
0216/0316

Program Description

ROl030

0217/0317

Clock/instruction step an unload register
instruction.

Verify that 0000 was written into core by the
unload instruc tion.
Check for repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each scratchpad register except P.

0221/0321
0222/0322
0225/0325

TAlOOO

Condition 2 - scratchpad, AAAA

TAl010

Reset.

Read TV interrupt enable.

0221/0321
0222/0322
0226/0326
0221/0321
0222/0322
0225/0325
0226/0326

Load and unload P register.

TAl020

0227/0327

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load register
ins truc tion.

Load write limits register so unload instruction
is within limits. Set all protect bits in the write
limits area except the location into which the
unload instruction will write.

0221/0321
0222/0322
0225/0325
0221/0321
0222/0322
0225/0325
0226/0326

Expect reply.

TAl030

Clock/instruction step an unload register
ins truc tion.

Verify that AAAA was written into core by the
unload instruction.
Check for repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each scratchpad register except P.

60182000 L

612-13

Error
Code

0231/0331
0232/0332
0235/0335

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

T5IOOO

Condition 3 - scratchpad 5555

T5I010

Reset. Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable.
Load and unload P register.

0231/0331

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

0232/0332
0236/0336
0231/0331
0232/0332
0235/0335
0236/0336

T5I020

Load write limits register so unload instruction
is within limits. Set all protect bits in the write
limits area except the location into which the
unload instruction will write.

0231/0331
0232/0332
0235/0335
0231/0331
0232/0332
0235/0335
0236/0336

Clock-instruction step a load register instruction.

T5I030

Clock/instruction step an unload register
instruction.

Verify that 5555 was written into core by the
unload instruction.

0237/0337

Check for repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
each scratchpad register except P.

0241/0341
0242/0342
0245/0345

TRIOOO

Condition 4 - scratchpad, register number

TRIOlO

Reset.

0241/0341
0242/0342
0245/0345
0246/0346

Load and unload P register.

TRI020

612-14

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load register instruction.

Load write limits register so unload instruction
is within limits. Set all protect bits in the write
limits area except the location into which the
unload instruction will write.

0241/0341
0242/0342
0245/0345
0241/0341
0242/0342
0245/0345
0246/0346

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

0241/0341
0242/0341
0246/0346

Do for

TRI030

Clock/instruction step an unload register
instruction.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description
Verify that the register number was written into
core by the unload instruction.

0247/0347

Check for repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for each scratchpad register except P.

0251/0351
0252/0352
0255/0355

VZIOOO

Condition 5 - zoom level

VZI010

Reset.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Load and unload P register.

0251/0351
0252/0352
0256/0356
0251/0351
0252/0352
0255/0355
0256/0356

Expect reply.

VZI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load zoom level instruction (use 7. 0 •••• 6).

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for eight values.

0261/0361
0262/0362
0265/0365

VWIOOO

Condi tion 6 - window limi ts

VWI010

Reset.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Load and unload P register.

0261/0361
0262/0362
0266/0366
0261/0361
0262/0362
0265/0365
0266/0366

Expect reply

VWI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load window limits
instruction (use FFFF. 0000, AAAA. 5555).

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for four values.

0271/0371
0272/0372
0275/0375

VEIOOO

Condition 7 - interrupt enable

VEI010

Reset.

Read TV interrupt enable.
Load and unload P register.

0271/0371
0272/0372
0276/0376
0271/0371
0272/0372
0275/0375

Expect reply.

VEI020

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a load interrupt enable
instruction (use EF9F, 0000, AA8A, 4515).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for four values.

60182000 L

612-15

Error
Code

0281/0381
0282/0382
0285/0385

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

VIIOOO

Condition 8 - interrupt disable

VUOlO

Reset.

Read TV interrupt enable.
Load and unload P register.

0281/0381
0282/0382
0286/0386
0281/0381
0282/0382

Expect reply.

VU016

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

Load interrupt enable register with EF9F.
Expect reply.

0281/0381
0282/0382

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect reply.

0285/0385

Verify that interrupt enable register contains
EF9F.
'

0281/0381
0282/0382
0285/0385
0286/0386

Clock/instruction step a load interrupt disable
instruction (use 0000, EF9F, 4515, AA8A).

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for four values.
3.

Section 4 and 5 - Jump Instructions
Error
Code

Program
Tag Name
CYCBR

0401/0501
0402/0502
0405/0505

JRI010

Program Description
_Condition 0 - relative jump
Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0401/0501
0402/0502
0405/0505

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0401/0501
0402/0502
0406/0506

Load and unload P register.

0401/0501
0402/0502
0405/0505
0406/0506

JRI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a relative jump instruction
(use OAAA, 0555).

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for two jump addresses.

612-16

60182000 L

Error
Code

0411/0511
0412/0512
0415/0515

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

JlIOOO

Condi tion 1 - indirect jump (one word)

J1KOIO

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0411/0511
0412/0512
0415/0515

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0411/0511
0412/0512
0416/0516

Load and unload P regis ter.

0411/0511
0412/0512
0416/0516

Load and unload DATUM register (address of
slart of section). Expect reply.

0411/0511
0412/0512
0415/0515
0416/0516

JlI020

Expec t reply.

Clock/instruction step a one-word indirect jump
instruction (use indirect addresses AAAA, 5555).

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for two indirect addresses.

0421/0521
0422/0522
0425/0525

J11000

Condition 2 - indirect jump (two-word)

J21010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0421/0521
0422/0522
0425/0525

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0421/0521
0422/0522
0426/0526

Load and unload P register.

0421/0521
0422/0522
0426/0526

Load and unload DA TUM register (address of
start of section). Expect reply.

0421/0521
0422/0522
0425/0525
0426/0526

J21020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a two-word indirect jump
instruction (use indirect addresses AAAA, 5555).

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for two indirect addresses.

60182000 L

612-17

Error
Code

0431/0531
0432/0532
0435/0535

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

XRIOOO

Condition 3 - relative subroutine exit

XRI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0431/0531
0432/0532
0435/0535

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0431/0531
0432/0532
0436/0536

Load and unload P register.

0431/0531
0432/0532
0436/0536

Load and unload DATUM register (address of
start of section). Expect reply.

0431/0531
0432/0532
0435/0535
0436/0536

XRI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a relative subroutine exit
instruction (use link addresses 2AAA, 5555).

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for two direct addresses.

0441/0541
0442/0542
0445/0545

XlIOOO

Condition 4 - indirect subroutine exit
(one word)

XlI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0441/0541
0442/0542
0445/0545

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0441/0541
0442/0542
0446/0546

Load and unload P register.

0441/0541
0442/0542
0446/0546

Load and unload DATUM register
(address of start of section).
Expect reply.

0441/0541
0442/0542
0445/0545
0446/0546

Clock/instruction step a one-word indirect
subroutine exit instruction (use link addresses
2AAA, 5555).

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for two link addresses.

612-18

60182000 L

Error
Code

0451/0551
0452/0552
0455/0555

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

X2IOOO

Condition 5 - indirect subroutine exit (two word)

X2I010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0451/0551
0452/0552
0455/0555

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0451/0551
0452/0552
0456/0556

Load and unload P register.

0451/0551
0452/0552
0456/0556

Load and unload DA TUM regis ter
(address of start of section).
Expect reply.

0451/0551
0452/0552
0455/0555
0456/0556

X2I020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a two-word indirect
subroutine exit instruction (use link addresses
2AAA and 5555).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for two link addresses.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0465/0565

Condition 6 - direct subroutine (one-word)

DlI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0465/0565

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0466/0566

Load and unload P register.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0466/0566

Load and unload DA TUM regis ter
(address of start of section).
Expect reply.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0465/0565

Load Write Limits register so that the
location to be written by the direct subroutine
entry instruction is within limits. Set all protect
bits within the write limits except the location
to be written by the direct subroutine.

0461/0561
0462/0562
0465/0565
0466/0566

60182000 L

DlIOOO

D1I020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a one-word direct
subroutine entry instruction.

612-19

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

0467/0567

DlI021

Program Description
Verify that the core location written by the
subroutine entry instruction contains the correct
link address.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.

0471/0571
0472/0572
0475/0575

D21000

Condition 7 - direct subroutine entry (two-word)

D21010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0471/0571
0472/0572
0475/0575

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0471/0571
0472/0572
0476/0576

Load and unload P register.
Expec t reply.

0471/0571
0472/0572
0476/0576

Load and unload DA TUM regis ter
(address of start of section).
Expect reply.

0471/0571
0472/0572
0475/0575

0471/0571
0472/0572·
0475/0575
0476/0576

D21020

Clock/instruction step a two-word direct
subroutine entry instruction.

0477/0577

D2T021

Verify that the core location written by the
subroutine entry instruction contains the correct
link address.
Check repeat conditions stop/jump bit.

0481/0581
0482/0582
0485/0585

612-20

111000

Condition 8 - indirect subroutine entry
(one-word)

111010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0481/0581
0482/0582
0485/0585

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0481/0581
0482/0582
0486/0586

Load and unload P register.
Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

0481/0581
0482/0582
0486/0586

Load and unload DATUM register
(address of start of section). Expect reply.

0481/0581
0482/0582
0485/0585

Load Write Limits register so that the location
to be written by the indirect subroutine entry
instruction is within limits.
Set all protect bits within the write limits except
the location to be written by the indirect subroutine entry.

0481/0581
0482/0582
0485/0585
0486/0586

IlI020

Clock/instruction step a one-word indirect
subroutine entry instruction.

0487/0587

I1I021

Verify that the core location written by the
subroutine entry instruction contains the correct
link address.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0495/0595

I2IOOO

Condition 9 - indirect subroutine entry (two-word)

I2I010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect reply.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0495/0595

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply. Read TV interrupt enable.
Expect EE8 F.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0496/0596

Load and unload P register.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0496/0596

Load and unload DATUM register
(address of start of section).
Expect reply.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0495/0595

Load .Write Limits register so that the location
to be written by the indirect subroutine entry
instruction is within limits.
Set all protect bits within the write limits except
the location to be written by the indirect subroutine entry.

Expect reply.

0491/0591
0492/0592
0495/0595
0496/0596

I2I020

Clock/instruction step a two-word indirect
subroutine entry instruction.

0497/0597

I2I021

Verify that the core location written by the
subroutine entry instruction contains the correct
link address.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.

60182000 L

612-21

Section 6 and 7 - Parameter Word Instructions
Error
Code

0601/0701
0602/0702
0605/0705

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCPW

Condition 0 - parameter word 1 - set intensity

141010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0601/0701
0602/0702
0605/0705

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0601/0701
0602/0702
0606/0706

Load and unload P register.

0601/0701
0602/0702
0605/0705
0606/0706

141020

Reply.

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (use absolute intensity of F, 0 •••• E).

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each absolute intensity value.

0611/0711
0612/0712
0615/0715

PXIOOO

Condition 1 - parameter word 1 change zoom ability

PZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0611/0711
0612/0712
0615/0715

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0611/0711
0612/0712
0616/0716

Load and unload P register.

0611/0711
0612/0712
0615/0715

PX1020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (use zoomable and nonzoomable).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for zoomable and nonzoomable.

0621/0721
0622/0722
0625/0725

612-22

BWIOOO

Condition 2 - 11/ 12-bit window

BW1010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable. Expect 0000.

0621/0721
0622/0722
0625/0725

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0621/0721
0622/0722
0626/0726

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

0621/0721
0622/0722
0625/0725
0626/0726

BWI020

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 2
instruction (select 12-bit window).

0621/0721
0622/0722
0625/0725
0626/0726

BWI030

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 2
instruction (select 11-bit window).

Program Description

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

0631/0731
0632/0732
0635/0735

PIlOOO

Condition 3 - program interrupt

PIl010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0631/0731
0632/0732
0635/0735

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0631/0731
0632/0732
0636/0736

Load and unload P register.

0631/0731
0632/0732
0635/0735
0636/0736
0639/0739
063A/073A
063C/073C
063D/073D
063E/073E

PIl020

063B/073B

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 2
instruction (program interrupt).

Verify that program interrupt occurred.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do two times.

Section 8 and 9 - Move Beam Instructions
Error
Code

0801/0901
0802/0902
0805/0905

60182000 L

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCMB

Condition 0 - absolute beam movement
(nonzoomable)

BNI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-23

Error
Code

)

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

0801/0901
0802/0902
0805/0905

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0801/0901
0802/0902
0806/0906

Load and unload P register.

0801/0901
0802/0902
0806/0906

Load and unload window location X with 7FFF.
Expect reply.

0801/0901
0802/0902
0806/0906

Load and unload window location Y with 7FFF.
Expect reply.

0801/0901
0802/0902
0805/0905

Load zoom level register wi th 7.
Expect reply.
Read TV zoom level. Expec t reply.

Expect reply.

0801/0901
0802/0902
0805/0905
0806/0906

BNI016

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomabUity).

0801/0901
0802/0902
0805/0905
0806/0906

BNI020

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use positions AAAA,
5555, AAAA, 5555, and 1 random position
for both X and Y).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each of the five sets of operands.

0811/0911
0812/0912
0815/0915

612-24

BZIOOO

Condition 1 - absolute beam movement
(zoomable)

BZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expec t 0000.

0811/0911
0812/0912
0815/0915

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0811/0911
0812/0912
0816/0916

Load and unload P regis ter.

0811/0911
0812/0912
0816/0916

Load and unload window location X and Y
(use locations FFFF, 0000, 0000, FFFF,
AAAA, 5555, 5555, AAAA, and 1 random
location for both X and Y).

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description
Load zoom level register with a random zoom
level. Expect reply.
Read TV zoom level. Expect reply.

0811/0911
0812/0912
0815/0915
0811/0911
0812/0912
0815/0915
0816/0916

BZI016

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (enable zoomability).

0811/0911
0812/0912
0815/0915
0816/0916

BZI020

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use positions FFFF,
0000, FFFF, 0000, AAAA, 5555, AAAA, 5555,
and 1 random position for both X and Y).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each of the nine sets of operands.

0821/0921
0822/0922
0825/0925

RZIOOO

Condition 2 - negative relative beam movement

RZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0821/0921
0822/0922
0825/0925

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect reply.

0821/0921
0822/0922
0826/0926

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

0821/0921
0822/0922
0825/0925
0826/0926

RZI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

0821/0921
0822/0922
0825/0925
0826/0926

RZI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use position 0000
for both X and Y).

0821/0921
0822/0922
0825/0925
0826/0926

RZI020

Clock/instruction step a negative relative
beam movement instruction (use deltas
AAAA and 5555 for both X and Y).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each of the two operands.

0831/0931
0832/0932
0835/0935

60182000 L

XZIOOO

Condition 3 - move beam delta X

XZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-25

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

0831/0931
0832/0932
0835/0935

Load interrupt enable register with EE8 F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

0831/0931
0832/0932
0836/0936

Load and unload P register.

Expec t reply.

0831/0931
0832/0932
0835/0935
0836/0936

XZI016

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

0831/0931
0832/0932
0835/0935
0836/0936

XZI018

Clock/ instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use positions FFFF,
0000, FFFF, 0000, AAAA, 5555, AAAA, 5555,
and 1 random position for both X and Y).

0831/0931
0832/0932
0835/0935
0836/0936

XZI020

Clock/instruction step a move beam delta
X instruction (use deltas FFFF, 0000, 0000,
FFFF, FAAA, 0555, 0555, FAAA, and 1
random delta for X).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each of the nine sets of operands.

0841/0941
0842/0942
0845/0945

YZIOOO

Condition 4 - move beam delta Y

YZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0841/0941
0842/0942
0845/0945

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expec t EE8 F.

0841/0941
0842/0942
0846/0946 .

Load and unload P regis ter.

Expect reply.

0841/0941
0842/0942
0845/0945
0846/0946

YZI016

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

0841/0941
0842/0942
0845/0945
0846/0946

YZI018

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use positions FFFF,
0000, FFFF, 0000, AAAA, 5555, AAAA, 5555,
and 1 random position for X and Y).

0841/0941
0842/0942
0845/0945
0846/0946

YZI020

Clock/instruction step a move beam delta
Y instruction (use deltas FFFF, 0000, 0000,
FFFF, FAAA, 0555, 0555, FAAA, and 1
random delta for Y).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each of the nine sets of operands.

612-26

60182000 L

Section A and B - Conditional Control Instructions
Error
Code

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA05/0B05

Program,
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCCC

Condition 0 - jump on zoom level (true)

ZTI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA05/0B05

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA06/0B06

Load and unload P register.

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA05/0B05

Load zoom level regis ter with 7.
Expect reply.
Read TV zoom level. Expect reply.

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA05/0B05
OA06/0B06

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (enable zoomability).

OA01/0B01
OA02/0B02
OA05/0B05
OA06/0B06

ZTI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over 1 word if the zoom
level is equal to or greater than the operand use operands 7, 0 ••.• 6) expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each zoom level as operand.

OA11/0B11
OA12/0B12
OA15/0B15

60182000 L

ZFIOOO

Condition 1 - jump on zoom level (false)

ZFI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OAl1/0B11
OA12/0B12
OA15/0B15

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA11/0B11
OA12/0B12
OA16/0B16

Load and unload P register.

OAl1/0B11
OA12/0B12
OA15/0Bl5
OA16/0B16

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (enable zoomability).

Expect reply.

612-27

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

OA11/0B11
OA12/0B12
OA15/0B15
OA16/0B16

ZFl020

Program Description
Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump to start of item if the zoom
level is equal to or greater than the operand,
use operands 7-1). Expect no jump (zoom level
equal 0 from res et).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for zoom levels 7-6 as operands.

OA21/0B21
OA22/0B22
OA25/0B25

CTlOOO

Condition 2 - jump on CCR (true)

CTl010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA21/0B21
OA22/0B22
OA25/0B25

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA21/0B21
OA22/0B22
OA26/0B26

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

OA21/0B21
OA22/0B22
OA26/0B26

CTl016

Load and unload condition control register
with a single one bit (use 8000, 0001. •.. 4000).
Expect reply.

OA21/0B21
OA22/0B22
OA25/0B25
OA26/0B26

CTl020

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump to end of item if the designated
CCR bit is not set. Use operands F, 0 .•.. E).
Expect no jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each bit position in conditional control
register.

OA31/0B31
OA32/0B32
OA35/0B35

612-28

CFlOOO

Condition 3 - jump on CCR (false)

CFl010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA31/0B31
OA32/0B32
OA35/0B35

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA31/0B31
OA32/0B32
OA36/0B36

Load and unload P register.
Expect reply.

OA31/0B31
OA32/0B32
OA36/0B36

Load and unload conditional control register
with all bits set except one (use 7FFF, FFFE .••
BFFF). Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

OA31/0B31
OA32/0B32
OA35/0B35
OA36/0B36

CFI020

Program Description
Clock/instruction step a conditional
control instruction (jump over two words
if the designated CCR bit is not set.
Use operands F, O •••• E). Expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each bit position in conditional
control register:

OA41/0B41
OA42/0B42
OA45/0B45

HFIOOO

Condition 4 - jump on light pen hit (false)

HFI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA41/0B41
OA42/0B42
OA45/0B45

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA41/0B41
OA42/0B42
OA46/0B46

Load and unload P register.

OA41/0B41
OA42/0B42
OA45/0B45
OA46/0B46

HFI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over 2 words if a light pen
occurred). Expect no jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

OA51/0B51
OA52/0B52
OA55/0B55

SFI010

Condition 5 - jump on light pen switch (false)

SFI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA51/0B51
OA52/0B52
OA55/0B55

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA51/0B51
OA52/0B52
OA56/0B56

Load and unload P register.

OA51/0B51
OA52/0B52
OA55/0B55
OA56/0B56

SFI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over 1 word if the light pen
switch is not set).
Expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do two times.

60182000 L

612-29

Error
Code

OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA65/0B65

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

ETIOOO

Condition 6 - jump if outside 11-bit window (true)

ETI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA65/0B65

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA66/0B66

Load and unload P register.

OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA65/0B65
OA66/0B66

ETI017

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

Instruction step an absolute beam movement
instruction with a shifting single bit set in the
positions (use 0400 •••• 8000 first in X position
and then in Y position).

OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA65/0B65
OA66/0B66
OA61/0B61
OA62/0B62
OA65/0B65
OA66/0B66

Expect reply.

ETI020

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over two words if the beam
is not inside the 1t-bit window).
Expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each single bit position outside .the
11-bit window in X and then in Y position.

OA 71 /OB71
OA72/0B72
OA 75/0B75

612-30

EFIOOO

Condition 7 - jump if outside 11-bit window
(false)

EFI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA 71/0B71
OA 72/0B72
OA75/0B75

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA 71/0B71
OA72/0B72
OA76/0B76

Load and unload P register.

OA 71/0B71
OA72/0B72
OA75/0B75
OA76/0B76

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

OA 71/0B71
OA 72/0B72
OA 75/0B75
OA 76/0B76
OA 71/0B71
OA 72/0B72
OA75/0B75
OA 76/0B76

Program Description
Instruction step an absolute beam movement
instruction (X and Y positions 0000).

EFI020

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump to end of item if the beam is
not inside the 11-bit window). Expect no jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA85/0B85

TTIOOO

Condition 8 - jump if outside 12-bit window (true)

TTI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA85/0B85

Load interrupt enable with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA86/0B86

Load and unload P register.

OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA85/0B85
OA86/0B86

ETI017

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

Instruction step an absolute beam movement
instruction with a shifting single bit set in the
positions (use 0800 •••. 8000 first in X position
and then in Y position).

OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA85/0B85
OA86/0B86
OA81/0B81
OA82/0B82
OA85/0B85
OA86/0B86

Expect reply.

ETI020

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over two words if the beam
is not inside the 12-bit window). Expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for each single bit position ou tside the
12-bit window in X and then in Y position.

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA95/0B95
OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA95/0B95

60182000 L

TFIOOO

Condition 9 - jump if outside 12-bit window
(false)

TFI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

612-31

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA96/0B96

Load and unload P register.

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA96/0B96

Load and unload control word address register
with the address of a control word instruction.
Expec t reply.

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA95/0B95
OA96/0B96

Instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA95/0B95
OA96/0B96

Instruction step an absolute beam movement'
instruction (X and Y positions 0).

OA91/0B91
OA92/0B92
OA95/0B95
OA96/0B96

TFI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump to end of item if beam is
inside 12-bit window). Expect jump.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

OAA1/OBAl
OAA2/0BA2
OAA5/0BA5

YTIOOO

Condition A - cyclic jump (true)

YTI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OAA1/OBAl
OAA2/0BA2
OAA5/0BA5

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OAA1/OBAl
OAA2/0BA2
OAA6/0BA6

Load and unload P register.

OAA1/0BA1
OAA2/0BA2
OAA6/0BA6

Load and unload control word address register
with the address of a control word instruction.
Expect reply.

OAA1/OBAl
OAA2/0BA2
OAA5/0BA5

Load write limits register so that the
location to be written by the conditional
control instruction is within limits.

Expect reply.

Set all protect bits within the write limits
except the location to be wri tten by the
conditional control instruction.
OAA1/0BA1
OAA2/0BA2
OAA5/0BA5
OAA6/0BA6

612-32

YTI020

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump to start of item if the operand
is equal to count. Use operands 1-F with
counts O-"E). Expect jump.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

OAA7/0BA7

Program Description
Verify that the core location w.ritten by the
conditional control instruction contains 0000 •
. Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do for operands l-F with counts O-E.

OABl/OBBl
OAB2/0BB2
OAB5/0BB5

YFIOOO

Condition B - cyclic jump (false)

YFIOIO

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OABl/OBBl
OAB2/0BB2
OAB5/0BB5

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OABl/OBBl
OAB2/0BB2
OAB6/0BB6

Load and unload P register.

OABl/OBBl
OAB2/0BB2
OAB5/0BB5

Load write limits register so that the location
to be written by the conditional control instruction
is within limits.

Expect reply.

Set all protect bits within the write limits
except the location to be written by the
conditional control instruction.
OABl/OBBl
OAB2/0BB2
OAB5/0BB5
OAB6/0BB6

YFI020

OAB7/0BB7

Clock/instruction step a conditional control
instruction (jump over one word if the operand
is equal to the count). Use operands E, E, O-D
with counts F, 0, l:"E. Expect no jump.
Verify that the core location written by the
conditional control instruction contains the
starting count incremented by one.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for operands E, E, O':'D with counts F, 0,
I-E.

Section C and D - Draw Vector Instructions
Error
Code

OCOl/ODOl
OC02/0D02
OC05/0D05

60182000 L

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCDV

Condition 0 - draw vector X (from off window to
on window)

AXIOIO

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-33

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

OC01/0D01
OC02/0D02
OC05/0D05

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Exp"ect EE8F.

OC01/0D01
OC02/0D02
OC06/0D06

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

OC01/0D01
OC02/0D02
OC05/0D05
OC06/0D06

AXI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

OC01/0D01
OC02/0D02
OC05/0D05
OC06/0D06

AXI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam movement instruction (use position FAOO for X and
0000 for Y).

OC01/0D01
OC02/0D02
OC05/0D05
OC06/0D06

AXI020

Clock/instruction step a draw vector X
instruction (use delta X of 0240 16 ).
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Repeat five times.

OC11/0D11
OC12/0D12
OC15/0D15

AYIOOO

Condition 1 - draw vector Y (from on window
to off window)

AYI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OC11/0D11
OC12/0D12
OC15/0D15

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Exp ec t reply.

OC11/0Dl1
OC12/0D12
OC16/0D16

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

OC11/0D11
OC12/0D12
OC15/0D15
OC16/0D16

AYI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

OC11/0D11
OC12/0D12
OC15/0D15
OC16/0D16

AYI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam movement instruction (use position 0000 for X and
FC40 for Y).

OC11/0D11
OC12/0D12
OC15/0D15
OC16/0D16

AYI020

Clock/instruction step a draw vector Y
instruction (use delta Y of FDBF).
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Repeat five times.

612-34

60182000 L

Error
Code

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC25/0D25

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

ABIOOO

Condition 2 - draw vector XY (from off Y window
to off X window)

ABI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC25/0D25

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC26/0D26

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC25/0D25
OC26/0D26

ABI016

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC25/0D25
OC26/0D26

ABI018

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam movement instruction (use position 0000 for X and
07FE for Y).

OC21/0D21
OC22/0D22
OC25/0D25
OC26/0D26

ABI020

Clock/instruction step a draw vector XY
instruction (use delta X of 07FE and delta Y of
F801).
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Repeat five times.

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC35/0D35

Condition 3 - relative vector (from off X and
Y windows, across X and Y window
limits, to off X and Y windows)

ARI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC35/0D35

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC36/0D36

Load and unload P register.

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC35/0D35
OC36/0D36

60182000 L

ARIOOO

ARI014

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

612-35

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC35/0D35
OC36/0D36

ARI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam movement instruction (use position FBOI for X and
F003 for Y).

OC31/0D31
OC32/0D32
OC35/0D35
OC36/0D36

ARI020

Clock/instruction step a relative vector instruction (use a delta X of 17FA and a delta Y of
17FA).

Program Description

Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Repeat five times.

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC45/0D45

ASIOOO

Condition 4 - short vector mode (from off X
window, across entire X window,
to off X window)

ASIOI0

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC45/0D45

Load interrupt enable register with EEBF.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EEBF.

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC46/0D46

Load and unload P register.
Expect reply.

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC45/0D45
OC46/0D46

ASI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC45/0D45
OC46/0D46

ASI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use position FECO for X
and FCOO for Y).

OC41/0D41
OC42/0D42
OC45/0D45
OC46/0D46

ASI020

Clock/instruction step a short vector mode
instruction (use a scale factor of 7 with a delta X
of 0011
and a delta Y of 0000).
16
Check for repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Repeat five times.

Section E and F - Control Word Instructions
Error
Code

Program
Tag Name
CYCCW

612-36

Program Description
Condition 0 - no skip, no automatic scissoring
to window enabled

601B2000 L

II BIT
WINDOW

------------------- ........

------~

o
DVX

------------------

4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

-----------------

SVM

VECTORS DRAWN IN CONDITIONS
0-4 OF SECTIONS C/O

60182000 L

612-37·

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

OE01/0FOl
OE02/0F02
OE05/0F05

SAI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OE01/0FOl
OE02/0F02
OE05/0F05

Load interrupt enable register with EE870.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE87.

OEOl/OFOl
OE02/0F02
OE06/0F06

Load and unload P register.

OEOl/OFOl
OE02/0F02
OE05/0F05
OE06/0F06

SAI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a control word
instruction (S and W bits set).
Expect not draw item and not skip item.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do two times.

OEl1/0Fl1
OEl2/0Fl2
OEl5/0F15

SMIOOO

Condition 1 - no skip, no S/W bit

SBI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OEl1/0Fll
OEl2/0Fl2
OE15/0Fl5

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OEll/OFll
OE12/0Fl2
OEl6/0Fl6

Load and unload P register.

OEl1 /OFll
OE12/0Fl2
OE15/0F15
OE16/0F16

SBI020

Expect reply.

Clock/ instruction step a control word
instruction (use S bit not set/W bit set
and S bit set/W bit not set).
Expect not draw item and not skip item.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for S bit not set/W bit set and S bit set/W
bit not set.

OE21/0F21
OE22/0F22
OE25/0F25
OE21/0F21
OE22/0F22
OE25/0F25

612-38

SCIOOO

Condition 2 - skip

SCI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Load and unload P register.

OE21/0F21
OE22/0F22
OE26/0F26
OE21/0F21
OE22/0F22
OE26/0F26

Program Description

SCI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a control word instruction
(S and W bits set). Expect not draw item and
skip item.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Do two times.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE35/0F35

CNIOOO

Condi tion 3 - draw item, W clear / not correc t

CNI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE25/0F25

Load interrupt enable with EE8 F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE36/0F36

Load and unload P register.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE35/0F35
OE36/0F36

CNI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a control word instruction
(W bit not set and S bit set). Expect not draw
item and not skip item.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE36/0F36

Load and unload P register with the address of
the previously stepped control word instruction.
Expect reply.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE35/0F35

Load write limits register so that the location
to be written by the control word instruction is
within limits.
Set all protect bits within the write limits except
the location to be written by the control word
instruction.

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE35/0F35
OE36/0F36

CNI030

Clock/instruction step the same control word
instruction previously stepped (W bit not set and
S bit set). Expect draw item and W bit clear/not
correct (store bit 15 into control word).

OE31/0F31
OE32/0F32
OE35/0F35
OE36/0F36

CNI040

Clock/instruction step the rest of the control
word instruction.
P decremented during draw item (W bit now set
and S bit set). Expect not draw item and skip item.

OE37/0F37

Verify that the W bit is set in the control word
instruction.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

60182000 L

612-39

Section 10 and 11 - Character Mode Instructions
Error
Code

1001/1101
1002/1102
1005/1105

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCCM

Condition 0 - character mode fixed spacing

SHI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1001/1101
1002/1102
1005/1105

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1001/1101
1002/1102
1006/1106

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

1001/1101
1002/1102
1005/1105
1006/1106

SHI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
ins truc tion (dis able /z oomability).

1001/1101
1002/1102
1005/1105
1006/1106

SHI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use position F800 for X
and 07FF for Y).

1001/1101
1002/1102
1005/1105
1006/1106

SHI020

Clock/instruction step a character mode fixed
spacing instruction (an exit symbol and one other
character is used at sizes A and B alternately).
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.
Repeat, in reverse order, for all characters
between ASCII code 20
and 7E •
16
16

1011/1111
1012/1112
1015/1115

Condition 1 - character mode variable spacing

SZI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1011/1111
1012/1112
1015/1115

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1011/1111
1012/1112
1016/1116

Load and unload P register.
Expect reply.

1011/1111
1012/1112
1015/1115
1016/1116

612-40

SZIOOO

SZI014

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomability).

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

1011/1111
1012/1112
1015/1115
1016/1116

SZI016

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam movement instruction (use position F800 for X and
07FF for Y).

1011/1111
1012/1112
1015/1115
1016/1116

SZI020

Clock/instruction step a character mode variable
spacing instruction (an exit symbol and two other
characters are used at size A with spacing OF on
X and FO on Y).

Program Description

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Repeat, in reverse order, for all character
pairs between ASCII codes AOBO and AFBF.

1021/1121
1022/1122
1025/1125

LRI010

Condition 2 - enter plot character mode

LRI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1021/1121
1022/1122
1025/1125

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. ExpectEE8F.

1021/1121
1022/1122
1026/1126

Load and unload P register.

1021/1121
1022/1122
1025/1125
1026/1126

ERI014

1021/1121
1022/1122
1025/1125
1026/1126

LRI016

1021/1121
1022/1122
1025/1125
1026/1126

LRI020

Expect reply.

Clock/instruction step a parameter word 1
instruction (disable zoomabili ty).

Clock/instruction step an absolute beam
movement instruction (use position F800 for X

and 07FF for Y).
Clock/instruction step an enter plot character
mode instruction (a backspace symbol at size A
is used).
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.

10.

Section 12 and 13 - Execute Instruction
Error
Code

1201/1301
1202/1302
1205/1305

60182000 L

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

CYCEXC

Condi tion 0 - execute control word

CWI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

612-41

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

1201/1301
1202/1302
1205/1305

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1201/1301
1202/1302
1206/1306

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

1201/1301
1202/1302
1206/1306

CWI014

Load and unload DA TUM register (address of
start of section). Expect reply.

1201/1301
1202/1302
1205/1305
1206/1306

CWI020

Clock/instruction step an execute instruction
(indirect address points to a control word
ins truc tion).

1201/1301
1202/1302
1205/1305
1206/1306

CWI030

Clock/ instruction step a control word instruction
in execute mode. Expect immediate exit.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump hit.
11.

Section 15 - Start/Stop
Error
Code

1501
1502
1505

Program Description

CYCRUN

Condi tion 0 - s tart/ res et

ESI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1501
1502
1505

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1501
1502
1506

Load and unload P register (address of a load P
register instruction - loading its own address).
Expect reply.

1501
1502

Start DCI at address in P register.
Expect reply.

1503
1504

Attempt to load one scratchpad register
(use registers OF - 01). Expect external reject.

1503
1504

Attempt to unload one scratchpad register
(use registers OF-01). Expect external reject.

1501
1502

612-42

Program
Tag Name

ESI020

Reset.

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

1501
1502

ESI030

Program Description
Unload one scratchpad register (use registers
OF-01). Expect reply.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for scratch register OF-Ole

1511
1512
1515

INIOOO

Condition 1 - start/finish

INIOI0

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1511
1512
1515

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1511
1512
1516

Load and unload P register (address of a load P
instruction, loading its own address).
Expect reply.

1511
1512

Start DCI at address in P register.
Expect reply.

1513
1514

Attempt to load interrupt enable register.
Expect external reject.

1513
1514

Attempt to load interrupt disable register.
Expect external rej ect.

1511
1512

Finish current instruction and stop.
Expect reply.

1511
1512

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bi t.
Do two times.

1521
1522
1525

60182000 L

OFIOOO

Condition 2 - Start/ end of frame interrupt

OFIOI0

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1521
1522
1525

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1521
1522
1526

Load and unload P register (address of display
file containing an end of frame instruction and
a load P register instruction, loading its own
address). Expect reply.

612-43

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Start DCI at address in P register.
Expect reply.

1521
1522
1528
1529
152A
152C
152D
152E

Program Description

OFI020

Verify that the end of frame interrupt occurs
in 19-21 milliseconds. No interrupt time error
(type 8) will occur if the interrupt is timed to be
less than 19 milliseconds and this test is being
multiplexed.

152B

Report missing interrupt if end of frame interrupt
has not occurred after waiting 100 milliseconds.

1521
1522

Load zoom level register.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit. Do for
each method of clearing the interrupt (re- enable,
disable, and res et).

1531
1532
1535

RGIOOO

Condition 3 - s tart/ program interrupt

RGI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1531
1532
1535

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1531
1532
1536

Load and unload P register (address of a display
file containing a program interrupt instruction
and load P register instruction, loading its own
address). Expect reply.

1531
1532
1539
153A
153C
153D
153E

Start DCI at address in P register.
Expec t reply and program interrupt.

153B

Verify that the program interrupt occurred.

1531
1532

Load write limits register.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do for each method of clearing the interrupt
(re-enable, disable, and reset).

612-44

60182000 L

Error
Code

1541
1542
1545

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

LlIOOO

Condition 4 - start/program failure 1 interrupt
(write limits)

L1I010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1541
1542
1545

Load interrupt enable register EE8F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1541
1542
1546

Load and unload P register (address of a display
file containing an unload P register and a load P
register instruction). Expect reply.

1541
1542
1545

LlI030

Load write limits register (use limits above/below
the location to be written by the unload P register
instruction). Expect reply. Clear the protect
bit for the location to be written by the unload P
register instruction.

1541
1542
1549
154A
154C
154D
154E

Start DCI at address in P register. Expect reply
and program failure 1 interrupt (attempted write
outside write limits).

154B

Verify that program failure 1 interrupt occurred.

1547

Verify that the location of the attempted write
remained unchanged.

1541
1542
1545

Load write limits register.

Expect reply.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

1551
1552
1555

60182000 L

BlIOOO

Condition 5 - Start/program failure 1 interrupt
(protect bit)

BlI010

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

1551
1552
1555

Load interrupt enable register with EE8F.
Expec t reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect EE8F.

1551
1552
1556

Load and unload P register (address of a display
file containing an unload P register instruction
and a load P register instruction, loading its own
address). Expect reply.

612-45

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description
Load write limits register so that the location
to be written by the unload P register instruction
is within limits. Expect reply.

1551
1552
1555

Set the protect bit for the location to be written
by the unload P register instruction.
1551
1552
1559
155A
155C
155D
155E

Start DCI at address in P register. Expect reply
and program failure 1 interrupt (attempted write
into a protected location).

155B

Verify that the program failure 1 interrupt
occurred.

1557

Verify that the location of the attempted write
remained unchanged.

1551
1552

Unload all the unload only registers.
Expect reply.
Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.

1561
1562
1565

TCIOOO

Condition 6 - real time clock interrupt

TCI010

Reset.

Read interrupt enable.

TCI020

612-46

Verify that first real time clock interrupt occurs
in 0 -17 milliseconds if line frequency is 50 cycle.
No interrupt time error (type 8) will occur if the
interrupt is timed to be less than the lower limit
and this test'is being multiplexed.
Report missing interrupt if the real time clock
interrupt has not occurred after waiting 100 milliseconds.

156B

1568
1569
156A
156C
156D
156E

Expect 0000.

Load interrupt enable regis ter with FF8 F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect FF8F.

1561
1562
1565
1568
1569
156A
156C
156D
156E

Expect reply.

TCI030

Verify that second real time clock interrupt
occurs either in 16-17 milliseconds if line
frequency is 60 cycle or in 19-21 milliseconds if
line frequency is 50 cycle. No interrupt time
error (type 8) will occur if the interrupt is timed
to be less than the lower limit and this test is
being multiplexed. This second interrupt is
cleared with a reset.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

156B

Report missing interrupt if the real time clock
interrupt has not occurred after waiting 100 milliseconds.

1561
1562
1565

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

Check repeat condition stop/ jump bit.
Do two times.
C.

SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTION
CKCORE
This subroutine compares one core location against a masked expected value.
Enter with: Q = Expected value
A = Mask
call +1 = Unbiased core address
Exit to:

Marker if error type 7
Call +2 if no error

CMPALL
This subroutine compares actual DCI register contents against expected contents.
Enter with: A
Q

Exit to:

= First register number to compare
= Last register number +1

Call +1 (if error type 5 or 6 occurs, the subroutine calling CMPALL
will exit to marker)

Three table pairs are used by this subroutine.

The first table of each pair is for

the parameter registers; the second is for the TV monitor.

The pairs are as

follows: mask tables RMTOOO/TMTOOO, expected tables RXTOOO/TXTOOO, and
actual tables RGTOOO/TVTOOO or RGT100/TVT100.

Pointer RAPOOO alternately

designates RGTOOO/ TVTOOO or RGT100/ TVT100 as the current actual tables.
Pointer RPPOOO designates the previous actual tables.

When a compare error

occurs, this subroutine calls the error subroutine, but does not exit to marker.
Instead, this subroutine stores the address of marker in the calling subroutine's
return address and that subroutine will exit to marker.

This operation allows all

60182000 L

612-47

DCIPRO
This subroutine processes all DCI interrupts.
Enter and exit with: Q = Interrupt exit value
Exit to:
Call +1 (if error types 9# A, C, D, or E occurs the error is
flagged but cannot be reported until the monitor has
exited interrupt state)
This subroutine unloads the interrupt status register to determine which interrupt
occurred, flags the expected interrupts as being received for the RINT recognize
interrupt subroutine# flags the interrupt as no longer expected, and clears the
interrupt from the interrupt status register.
processor, the error is flagged.

If an error occurs in the interrupt

Then the address of the marker routine is stored

in the error routine return address and the address of the error routine +1 is stored
in the interrupt return address.

Thus, the next time this test gets control, the

error will be reported and control will go to the forward or backward marker.
FNER
This subroutine attempts to output a function, but expects an external reject.
Enter with: Q = Equipment address and command
Exit to:

Marker if error type 3 or 4
Call + 1 if no error

FNRP
This subroutine outputs a function expecting a reply.
Enter with: Q = Equipment address and command
A = Data for load register operations
Exit to:

Marker if error type 1 or 2 and not in interrupt state
Call +1 if no error
Call +2 if error type 1 or 2 during interrupt state

GETRCT
This subroutine fetches register change times and change table control words from
a change table.

A change table is used by STEPER stepping subroutine to predict

parameter register and TV monitor contents during clock and instruction stepping.
The change table format is as follows:
11WW

612-48

WSSS

SSSS

Word control word
S = Number of clock steps
W = DCI instruction word number
000 word 0
001 word 1
010 word 2
100 line drawing

60182000 L

1000

0111

1111

Table subroutine entry or exit

OAAA

AAAA

Unbiased address of the portion of table
out of sequence or 0 to exit back to main
table

1000

OCCC

CCCC

OOMM

MMMM

ORRR

RRRR

TV register expected to change
R = TV register .number (40-5F)
M = modifier code for TV register data

DDDD

Unmodified expected contents of
TV register

1111

0000

Instruction done 1 control word (signals
the start of parameter register changes;
STEPER starts here during instruction
stepping)

OOMM

MMMM

ORRR

RRRR

Parameter register expected to change
R = parameter register number
M = modifier code for parameter register
data

DDDD

Unmodified expected contents of parameter
register

1111

0000

Instruction done 2 control words (signals
the end of parameter register changes;
STEPER exits here in clock step)

OAAA

AAAA

Unbiased address of start of change table
for clock stepping (STEPER uses this
address to pick up TV changes after
ins truc tion step)

1111

Terminate instruction step

RINT
This subroutine checks for a missing interrupt.
Enter with: Q = Bit in interrupt enable regis ter corresponding to expected interrupt
Exit to:

60182000 L

Marker if error type B
Call +1 if no error

612-49

STEPER
This subroutine clock steps and instruction steps DCI instructions.
Enter with: Call +1

= unbiased address of change table (clock stepping and instruction stepping use different addresses)

Exit to:

Call +2

This subroutine uses a change table (described under GETRCT subroutine) to
predict parameter register and TV monitor contents during clock and instruction
stepping.

When clock stepping, the entire TV monitor is compared against the

predicted after each clock phase.

After the final clock phase, the parameter

registers are compared against the predicted.

When instruction stepping, the

parameter registers are compared against predicted after the obey one instruction.
Then a new table is built from the entries in the clock stepping portion of the change
table.

Since this new table contains only the final entry for each TV monitor word,

it is then used to predict the TV monitor contents after instruction stepping.
STER
This subroutine attempts to unload a register, but expects an external reject.
Enter with: Q = Equipment address and command
Exit to:

Marker if error type 3 or 4
Call +1 if no error

STRP
This subroutine unloads a register expecting a reply.
Enter with: Q = Equipment address and command
Call +1 = number of times to loop on an external reject
Exit with:

A = parameter register data or TV monitor word

Exit to:

Call +2 if no error
Call +3 if error type 1 or 2 during interrupt state

X1I096

This subroutine compares parameter registers and TV monitor words against
expected contents.

The input parameters to the Xl TCW subroutine determine which

registers are compared and which ones are not compared.

This subroutine is

actually just a part of the Xl TCW subroutine, but it was made into a subroutine to
allow checking all registers before going to the forward or backward marker on an
error.

612-50

60182000 L

X1TCW
This subroutine does the actual instruction stepping and clock stepping for the
STEPER subroutine.
Enter with: A = Minus to instruction step
o to use subroutine to compare only
1 to clock step 1 phase at a time
5 to clock step 5 phases at a time (line drawing)
Q = 1 to read and compare only parameter registers
2 to read and compare only TV monitor
Exit to:

Call +1

WAIT
This subroutine waits for an interrupt to occur within time limits.
Enter with: A = Lower time limit in milliseconds
Q = Upper time limit in millisecondEi
Call + 1 = Number of milliseconds after which interrupt is considered
missing
Exit to:

Marker if error type 8
Call +2 if no error

VI. A PPLICA TIONS
A.

GENERAL
If for some reason the operator wishes to stop after each clock pulse during clock

stepping. he may set the system controller breakpoint to. location XlI036 of the
Xl TCW subroutine.

Also, he may wish to eliminate any register or TV monitor

compare errors at this time.

This is accomplished by storing a no-op (OBOO) in

location XlI090 of the Xl TCW subroutine.
The backward marker of each condition (or subsection) normally points to the start
of that condition and the forward marker points to the start of the next condition.
The operator may change these markers by changing the two addresses following
the RT J to CINIT near the start of each condition.

The first of the two addresses is

the backward marker; the second is the forward marker.

The address that the

operator stores must be the listing address rather than the core address.
If the operator wishes to stop the system controller when an interrupt occurs, he

may set the system controller breakpoint to DelOOO of the interrupt processor
DCIPRO.

60182000 L

The A register contains the interrupt status at the breakpoint stop.

612-51

HUNG CONDITIONS
If the test hangs or seems to be lost, the system controller and the display code

interpreter should be stepped to halt all action. The computer registers, TV monitor
and certain program locations should be observed to help define the problem.
NOTE
Do not master clear the computer. If the computer is
master cleared, much of the TV monitor information
will also be cleared. Memory locations may be observed
without master clearing. This is done by clearing P with
the register clear button, setting P to the desired address,
placing ENTER/SWEEP switch to SWEEP, stepping the
RUN/STEP switch once, and observing the X register.
The test's section number, condition number, and return address are found in
locations BET120, A2B, and Q2 respectively.

These three locations point to where

within the test section something went wrong.
The last DCI P register address loaded from the A/Q channel is saved in location
LDT150.
The computer M register may point to an interrupt problem if the mask bit for the
DCI interrupt line is clear.

If an interrupt problem is suspected, the expected

interrupts and the received interrupts are saved in locations EXPINT and EXPREC
respectively.
register 20

612-52

The bits in these two locations correspond to bits in the Interrupt
in the DCI.

60182000 L

0')

o
t-"

CO
l\:)

o
o
o

CK CORE

tot
STORE RETURN
ADDRESS
I-----~
.. I INTO ERROR
MESSAGE

RTJ FROM
SECTION

RETURN TO
SECTION

ENTER WITH
Q = EXPECTED
CONTENTS,A=
MASK, CALL I =
UNBIASED
ADDRESS

ADD BIAS
TO THE
STORAGE
ADDRESS
NO

GO TO
MARKER

0')

t-"
l\:)

::.n
w

EXIT IS TO
CALL + 2

m
~

l\:l
I

CJ1
~

CMPALL

RTJ FROM

RETURN TO

SUBROUTINE

ENTER WITH
A = FIRST
REGISTER TO
COMPARE, Q =
LAST REGISTER
I TO COMPARE

YES

INCREMENT
REGISTER
POINTER

ex>
l\:l

o
o

STORE ADDRESS
OF MARKER IN
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
ADDRESS

SETUP
ERROR
TYPE 6

SETUP
ERROR
TYPE 5

DCIPRO
0')

o
~

CO
I:\:)

ERR
XD

o
o
o

RTJ FROM
SMM

SAVE RETURN
I-----~)I ADDRESS FOR
FNRP AND
STRP

ERR
X9/XA
MARK EXP
INTERRUPTS
AS RECIEVED

CLEAR
RECIEVED
~--~~~I INTERRUPTS
FROM EXP

ERR
XE
RESTORE RETURN
ADDRESS FOR
)>---------~)I FNRP AN D

RETURN
TO SMM

STRP

STORE ADDRESS
OF MARKER IN
ERROR RETURN
ADDRESS

0')
~

I:\:)

CJl
CJl

STORE ADDRESS
CLEAR GPGT
OF ERROR + I
MASK BIT IN
t-----~>I SETMASK AND
IN RETURN
SAVED M
REGISTERS

YES

STORE ERROR
IN
INTERRUPT
TRAP ADDRESS

>I ADDRESS

0')
~

I\:)

t.n
0')

FNER

RTJ FROM
SUBROUTINE

ENTER WITH
Q = EQUIPMENT
ADDRESS AND
COMMAND

OUTPUT
FUNCTION
OR LOAD
REGISTER

INTERNAL
REJECT

GO TO
MARKER

0')

OJ
I\:)

o
o

o
~

RETURN TO
SUBROUTINE

o
I--"
co
l\,j

o
o

t"'I

FNRP

RTJ FROM
)
SUBROUTINE

OUTPUT
FUNCTION
OR LOAD
REGISTER

/
REPLY

NORMAL
RETURN

EXIT TO
CALL

LENTER WITH
Q = EQUIPMENT
ADDRESS AND·
COMMAND

I REJECT

~
ERROR
RETURN

GO TO
MARKER

t-"
l\,j

I
C,J1

-J

EXIT TO
""'\ CALL + 2

GETRCT
0')

.....

t'V
I

CJl

RTJ FROM
SUBROUTINE

•

PICKUP WORD
FROM CHANGE
>I TABLE

CONTROL
WORD

SET CURRENT
REGISTER CHANGE
TIME =FFF STORE
CONTROL WORD
IN NEWTCW

INCREMENT
CHANGE TABLE
POINTER
(CTBPTR)

PICKUP PREVIOUS
CHANGE TABLE
' - - - - - - - - - 4 1 POINTER AND
RESTORE IN
CTBPTR

RETURN TO
SUBROUTINE

EXIT

ENTRY

STORE OUT-OF-~

0')

.....

CO
t'V

o
o

SEQUENCE TABL
ADDRESS IN
~
CTBPTR

SAVE CURRENT
CHANGE TABLE
POINTER + I

STORE CURRENT
REGISTER
CHANGE TIME
IN CURRCT

en
0

.....

cc
~

0
0
0

RINT

RTJ FROM
SECTION

ENTER WLTH
Q = BIT IN
INTERRUPT REGISTER
CORRESPONDING
TO EXPECTED
INTERRUPT

CLEAR

STORE
RETURN
ADDRESS INTO
ERROR MESSAGE

') YES

GO TO
MARKER

.....

CJl

/INTERRUPTS FROM
) EXPECTED/
1
RECIEVED WORD

RETURN TO
SECTION

m
.....

STEPER (CLOCK STEP)

STORE RETURN
ADDRESS
I-----~
.. I INTO ERROR
MESSAGE

RTJ FROM
SECTION

CLEAR
CLOCK
PHASE
(ClKPHS)

~---~)I

PICKUP CHANGE
TABLE ADDRESS
AND STORE IN
CHANGE TBl
POINTER (CTBPTR)

STORE
TERMINATING
)>-----~)'I CLOCK PHASE
IN ClKFNL
YES

Q=2

)

SET INST
.1 WORD NUMBER
AND CLOCK
PHASE TO N/A
YES

.....
00
~

o
o
o

SET P
MODIFIER
TO NEXT
INSTRUCTION

RETURN TO
SECTION

0')

STEPER (INSTRUCTION STEP)

o
~

CO
t...:l

o
o
o

PICKUP CHANGE
TABl E ADDRESS
r-----~)I AND STORE IN
POINTER
(CTBPTR)

STORE RETURN
ADDRESS
I-----~)I INTO ERROR
MESSAGE

RTJ FROM
SECTION

YES

SET INST
NUMBER
~ AND CLOCK
PHASE TO N/A

I WORD

PICKUP CLOCK
STEPPI NG TBl
ADDRESS AND
PUT IN
CTBPTR

YES

"".l

0')
~

t...:l
I
0')
~

STORE REGISTER
AND
~ MODI FI ED DATA
INTO RXTOOO

INUMBER

INCREMENT
THE CHANGE
I-----~~I TBl POINTER
(CTBPTR)

RETURN TO
SECTION_

m
I-"

t'-'
I

m
t'-'

STER

RTJ FROM
SUBROUTINE

ENTER WITH
Q : EQUIPMENT
ADDRESS AND
COMMAND

o
I-"
co
t'-'

o
o

t'"4

UNLOAD
REGISTER

REPLY
OR

INTERNAL
REJECT

RETURN TO
SUBROUTINE

I-'

CP
(\j

STRP

o
o
o

RTJ FROM
SUBROUTINE

ENTER WITH
Q= EQUIPMENT
ADDRESS AND
COMMAND,
CALL + I = NUMBER
OF TIMES TO
LOOP ON
EXTERNAL REJECT

UNLOAD
REGISTER

NORMAL
RETURN

EXIT WITH A= PARAMETER
REGISTER DATA OR TV
MONITOR WORD.
EXIT IS TO CALL + 2

INTERNAL
REJECT

ERROR
RETURN
EXTERNAL
REJECT

GO TO
MARKER

DECREMENT
TIMEOUT

m
I-'
(\j

m
(J.j

EXIT TO
CALL
3

0')

't-.:)
""""
I

WAIT

0')

IJ:>.

INCREMENT
MILLISECOND
COUNT

RTJ FROM
SECTION

ENTER WITH
A=LOWER LIMIT
IN MILLISECONDS,
Q = UPPER LIM IT
IN MILLISECONDS,
CALL +I :: NUMBER
OF MILLISECONDS
AFTER WHICH
INTERRUPT IS
CONSIDERED
MISSING

EXIT IS
TO CALL +2
STORE RETURN
ADDRESS
INTO ERROR
MESSAGE

GO TO

YES

0')

'CO
""""
t-.:)

o
o
o

RETURN TO
SECT (ERROR
IN RINT
RINT WILL
NOT ERROR

MARKER

RINT
WILL ERROR

0')

o
......
CO
I:'-'

o
o
o

XII096

RTJ FROM

XITCW

YES

C')

......

I:'-'
J
0')

CJ1

YES

XITCW (A=-,Q=J)
0)
~

N
I
0)
0)

RTJ FROM
STEPER

YES

INCREMENT
CHANGE TABLE
POINTER a Q=
MODIFIER/
REGISTER
A=CHANGE DATA

STORE CHANGE IN
EXPECTED TABLE

)-----~~I ~~~J:E~IBLE
POINTER

CLEAR CHANGE

YES
')

~ flME CHE~K
MODE

RETURN TO
STEPER

o
~

ex>
N

o
o
o

t-t

XITCW (A=O,Q=I)
0')

o
I-'

OBEY I
INST

CXl
t\j

o
o
o

RTJ FROM
STEPER

CLOCK
STEP
INCREMENT
CLOCK TIME

YES

INCREMENT
CHANGE TABLE
POINTER Q=
MODIFIER/
REGISTER A=
CHANGE DATA

•

STORE CHANGE IN
EXPECTED TABLE
I INCREMENT
~ CHANGE TABLE
POINTER

CLEAR CHANGE

~YES

0')

I-'
t\j

I
0')

-J

J TIME
CHECK
MODE

RETURN TO
STEPER

en
~

XITCW (A=I,Q=2)

en
~

OBEY I
INST

RTJ FROM
STEPER

~--""""')l1

DECREMENT
NUMBER OF
CLOCK STE~S
LEFT TO DO

INCREMENT
CLOCK TIME

INCREMENT
CHANGE TABLE
)>,"N",,""O_ _ _~)l1 ~OJCI~~~R~ Q=
REGISTER A=
CHANGE DATA

•

STORE CHANGE IN
EXPECTED TABLE
INCREMENT
)51 CHANGE TABLE
POINTER

YES
RETURN TO
STEPER

en
o
~

~
~

o
o
o

... NO

~>-----~~

INCREMENT
CLOCK
PHASE

GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHICS TERMINAL {GPGTl DISPLAY QUALITY TEST
{GT2 Test No. 72}

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this test is to verify the operation and a1ignment of
the GPGT disp1ay conso1e.

This test checks intensity 1eve1s, contrast,

trace width, drift, stabi1ity, distortion, vector end point accuracy,
character size, and variab1e spacing.
board.

The parameters are as fo11ows:

Patterns are se1ected on the keywindow 1ocation, zoom 1eve1,

mask, conditiona1 contro1 register parameter bits, and 11/12-bit window
se1ection.
II.

REQUIREMENTS
A.

HARDWARE
1.

Minimum Configuration
System Contro11er
1705 Interrupt Data Channe1
CC104A/B/C GPGT Conso1e
CA122A Keyboard
Input device for SMM17

1772 Maqnetic Core Memory Modu1e
{12K)
1775 A/Q Interrupt Data Channe1
1773 Direct Storage Access Channe1
CC104/A/B/C GPGT Conso1e
CA122 A Keyboard
Input device for SMM17

Core Requirements
The minimum amount of core required is 12K.

Equipment Configuration
Direct
1700/S C

Stora~e

A/Q
Interrupt

Access

CC104A/B/C
GPGT Conso1e

I
CA122 A
Keyboard

SOFTWARE
The test operates under contro1 of SMM17 monitor.

ACCESSORIES
None.

60182000 L

613-1

III.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The test is loaded as test number 72 using standard

SM~17

procedure.
B.

PAR AM EJERS
1.

Parameter Stops
First stop {overflow light on}
{A} = 7221 test ID stop
{Q} = Stop/Jump parameter
Second stop
{Al = Interrupt line for Display Code Interpreter
{Prestored as 0004-bit 2 designating interrupt line 2}
This parameter must not be changed after the initial
parameter stop.
{Q} = Not used

DCI Switch Setting
DCI instruction/clock control switches must be UP.
The DCI PROTECT switch must be in UNPROTECTED.
The DCI REFRESH FAULT switch must be UP.

Stop/Jump Parameter Word
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Stop to enter parameters
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Stop on error
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not used
Omit typeouts
Bias return address display
Re-enter parameters
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Run this test alone
{This bit should be set when two or more tests in the
test list use the same display code interpreter equipment number. This allows the tests to be run consecutively since they cannot be multiplexed.}

PATTERN DESCRIPTION INDEX
Since the patterns in this test are used in the alignment procedure
for the display console, a detailed description of the patterns is

613-2

60182000 L

10cated in the GPGT On-Site Maintenance Manua1 {Pub1ication
Number 82165000}.
Number
1
2

4
5
6
7

IV.

Quick Look
Focus {Vectors}
Pincushion
Text
Drift
Intensity
Focus {Dots}

OPERATOR COMMUNICATIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Norma1 Teletype Message
Program identification during test initia1ization.
GT2 {No. 72l GPGT DISPLAY QUALITY TEST
IA = XXXX

Norma1 Disp1ay Conso1e Message
Disp1ayed at the conso1e after the te1etype messaqe, during
pattern se1ection, and during pattern manipu1ation.
PATTERN NUMBERS 1 = QUICKLOOK 2 = FOCUS ••••
TO SELECT PATTERN, TYPE PTN/pattern number ETX
FUNCT

Stop an Error
A11 error message disp1ays use basica11y the standard SMM17
error message format.

The format of the first twa stops

same for a11 types of errors.

the

The format of the third and fourth

stops is determined by the type of error.

The format for

t~e

first and second stops is as fo11ows:
First stop {overf1ow 1ight onl
{A}

{Q}

72 X8 tes tID st op
where X is the number of stops
Stop/Jump parameter

Second stop
{A}

= XXOZ

where XX = Pattern number
Z = Error type
Address painter to where within the
pattern setup the error occurred

{Q}

This painter is nat the same as the return address
60182000 L

613-3

found in other SMM17 tests.
to where execution

~topped

The

adrlre~s

points

when the error occurred,

but not to where execution will continue after
error.

t~e

Execution after the error continues from

the beginning of the pattern setup.
8.

MESSAGE DICTIONARY
Subroutine
Name
01

FNRP
STRP

Subroutine
Tag Name
FNI110
STI100

Message and
Description
RESPONSE, expect reply, receive
internal reject
A
Q

FNRP
STRP

FNI110
STI100

A
CMPALL

CMI030

code

RESPONSE, expect reply, receive
external reject
Q

= I/O instruction
= Q register function
= I/O instruction
= Q register function

TV monitor
contents

ha~

code

unexpected

= Actual TV di~play
= Expected TV display
A = Failing TV word number
Q = Previous TV display
A

CMPALL

CMI030

= Actual contents
= Expected contents
A = Failing register n~ber
Q = Previous contents
A

DCIPRO

DCI002

INTERRUPT, internal reject
during interrupt state
A
Q

DCIPRO

DCI002

A
RINT

RII010

instruction
register function code

INTERRUPT, external reject
during interrupt state
Q

= I/O

= I/O instruction
= Q register function

code

INTERRUPT, missing
A = Actual interrupts {bits corresponding to register 201,~}
Q = Expected interrupts {bi~s
correspondinq to register 20 16}

613-4

60182000 L

Subroutine
Name

Subroutine
Tag Name

DCIPRO

DCI020

Message and
Des cr i p t i on
INTERRUPT, no interrupt status
bit set when an interrupt
occurred
A
Q

DCIPRO

DCI030

= 0000 {actual status}
= Expected interrupts {bits

correspondir.g to register 20 16 }
INTERRUPT, unexpected
A
Q

= Actual interrupts {bits corresponding to register 20 1
= Expected interrupts {bi~§ corresponding to register 20

DCIPRO

DCI060

Actual interrupt status after
attempted clear {bits corresponding to register 201.~}
Q = Expected interrupt states
after attempted clear {bits
corresponding to register
20 1 J... 1
A = Fun~tion
used to attempt clear
interrupt status
00 = Cleared when interrupt
status or keyboard regis ter un loaded
1A = Load interrupt enable
register
1B = Load interrupt disable
register
30 = Reset
Q = Not used
DES CRIPTION
A.

}

INTERRUPT, unable to clear
interrupt status
A

GENERAL
This test allows the selection and manipulation of alignment patterns.
These patterns are called and controlled by typing functions on the
display console keyboard.

Initially the display is as follows:

PATTERN NUMBERS 1 = QUICKLOOK 2 = FOCUS ••••
TO SELECT PATTERN, TYPE PTN/pattern number ETX
FUNCT
NOTE
Lower case on the keyboard must be selected.
Upper case codes from the keyboard are ignored. Although lower case on the keyboard
is used, display of letters is in upper case
to be compatible with normal hexadecimal A-F
notation.
60182000 L

613-5

Depressing the first key of a function type-in causes any previous
pattern to stop being displayed and the function display with
cursor to be displayed instead.

That first symbol is displayed

following the FUNCT and the cursor is advanced one space.

Each

symbol of the type-in is displayed and the cursor advanced until
an ETX terminates the type-in.
the

If you make an error while typing

depress BACKSPACE and correct your error.

function~

keys are ignored.

Illegal

Illegal functions are discarded and the cursor

replaced follOWing the FUNCT.
1.

Display a Pattern {PTNlr
Type:

P TN In CIW
where n is the pattern number

The selected pattern is displayed using prestored parameters
for window
register

limits~

bits~

zoom

level~

mask~

conditional control

and 11/12-bit window selection.

pattern has its own set of

parameters~

Since each

it is necessary to

select a pattern before any pattern parameters are typed.
NOTE
The test ignores pattern parameters
that are typed before a pattern number
has been selected.
2.

Change Window Location {81 or 911
Type: 8/nnnn CETX)for window location X
or 9/nnnn (ETX)for window location Y
where nnnn is the window location
{leading zeros need not be typed}

Change Zoom Level {18/}
Type:

Change Window Limits {19/}
Type:

613-6

18/n (ETX)
where n is the zoom level

19/wxyz (ETX)
where w is x upper
x is y upper
y is x lower
z is y lower

limit
limit
limit
1 imit

60182000 L

Change 11/12-Bit Window {PARI}
Type:

PAR/nn (ETX)
where nn is 11 for an 11-bit window
or 12 for a 12-bit window

Change CCR {B/l
Type:

B/nnnn (ETX)
where nnnn is the value to be placed in the
conditional control register

The conditional control register bits
are not sensed by all patterns. When
the CCR bits are sensed, they may have
different meaning from one pattern to
the next.
7.

Terminate the Test {END/}
Type:

EN DI (ETX)

PATTERN PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
1.

Quick Look
parameter
Window location X {8}
Window location Y {91Zoom level {18}Window limits {19}
11/12-bit window
Conditional control {B}

Window location X {81
Window location Y {9}
Zoom 1 evel {18}
Window limits {19}
11/12-bit window
Conditional control {B}

0000
12
Not Used

Prestored
0000
0000

0000
12
Not Used

Pincushion
Parameter
Window location X {8}
Window location Y {9}
Zoom 1eve 1 {18}
Window limits {19}
11/12-bit window
Conditional control {B}

60182000 L

0000
0000

Focus {vectors}
Parameter

Prestore d

Prestored
0000
0000

0000
12
Not Used

613-7

Text
Parameter

Prestored

Window location X{81
Window location Y {91
Zoom level {181
Window limits {191
11/12-bit window
Conditional control {B}

6000
9800
3

0000
12
0001

The Conditional Control register is used to select 1 or 16
paragraphs of text.

If bit 0 of the CCR is set, one para-

graph is displayed.

If bit 0 is clear, 16 paragraphs are

displayed.
5.

Drift
Parameter

Prestored

Window location X {81
Window location Y'{91
Zoom level {18l
Window limits {19}
11/12-bit window
Conditional control

0000
0000
4

0000
12
0101

The Conditiona1 Contro1 register is used to select either
the vertical or horizontal drift test and also the wait time
at each edge of the CRT.

The CCR bits are

as~igned

as follows:

Drift Test Se1ection
Bit 8 - Horizonta1 drift test
Bit 9 - Vertical drift test
Wait Time
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
6.

0
1
2
3
4

0
- 20
- 40
- 80
- 160
5 - 320
6 - 640
7 - 640

milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
milliseconds
mi1liseconds
milliseconds
mi1liseconds
milliseconds

Intensity
Parameter
Window location X {8~
Window location Y {9l
Zoom 1eve1 {18s
Window limits {19~
11/12-bit window
Conditional contro1 {B}

613-8

Prestored
0000
0000
4

0000
12
0001
60182000 L

The Conditional Control register is used to select quadrants
of the intensity pattern.
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
7.

0
1
2
3
4

The CCR bits are assigned as follows:

All quadrants
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4

Focus {Dots}
Parameter

Prestored

Window location X {8}
Window location Y {9~
Zoan level {181
Window limits {19r
11/12-bit window
Conditional control {B}

0000
0000
4

0000
12
0001

The Conditional Control register is used to select the displayed
symbol.

The CCR bits are assigned as follows:

Bit 0 - No symbol displayed {beam movements only}·
Bit 1 - Points
Bit 2 - H"s
C.

PATTERN SETUP DESCRIPTION
Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program
Description

XXOl
XX02

KEIOOl

Finish current instruction and stop.
rep ly.·

XXOl
XX02

KEI002
KEI003

Read TV DCI stopped bit.
Return control to SMM.
Wait for DCI stopped.

XXOl
XX02
XX05

KEIOO 4

Reset.

Expect

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

XXOl
XX02
XX05

Load write limits register.

Expect reply.

XXOl
XX02
XX06

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

XXOl
XX02
XX06

Load interrupt enable register with AF9F.
Expect reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect AF9F.

XXOl
XX02

KEI008

Start display. Expect reply {selected
pattern or function display}.

613-9

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program
Description

XX09
XXOA
XXOC
XXOD
XXOE

KEI020

Return control to SM~.
Wait for keyboard interrupt.

XXOB

KEI030

Verify that keyboard interrupt occurred.
St~re s~bol into display file and update
cursor pas iti on.

If symbol is an
function.

do tJ,e desiqnated

If END (ETX) has been typed, exit test.

613-10

60182000 L

GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHICS TERMINAL {GPGTl LIGHT PEN AND KEYBOARD TEST
{GT3 Test No. 731

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this test is to verify the operation of the GPGT light
pen and keyboard.

The two modes of light pen operation, picking and

tracking, are checked.

Light pen picking is checked using vectors,

points, symbols and combinations of vectors, points, and symbols.
Light pen tracking is checked using basically the same tracking routine
as used by the GPGT software system.

The keyboard is checked by de-

pressing keys in a random sequence and visually checking the resultant
display.

A symbol key results in displaying that symbol; a control

key results in the indicated function or displaying the character
sequence shown on that key.
II.

REQUIREMENT~

HARDWARE
1.

Minimum Configuration
Systems Cantrall er {S Q.
1708 Storage Increment
1705 Interrupt Data Channel
CC104A/B/C GPGT Console
CA122A Keyboard
CA203A/CA202 A Light Pen
Input device for SMM17

1772 Magnetic Core Memory Module {8Kl
1775 A/Q Interrupt Data Channel
1773 Direct Storage Access Channel
CC104A/B/C GPGT Console
CA122 A Keyboard
CA203A/CA202A Light Pen
Input device for SMM17

Core Requirements
The minimum amount of core required is 8K.

Equipment Configuration
I

Direct Storaae Access
1700/SC

A/Q
Interrupt

CA122A
CC104A/B/C
Keyboard
GPGT Consol e CA203AI
CA202 A
Light Pen
I

60182000 L

614-1

SOFTWARE
The test operates under control of the SMM17 monitor.

ACCESSORIES
None.

III.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The test is loaded as test number 73 using standard SMM17 loading
procedure.

PARAMETERS
1.

Parameter Stops
First stop {overflow light on}
{A}
{Q~

= 7321

test I D stop
parameter

= Stop/Jump

Second stop

{A}

= Section

{Q}

selection bits {prestored as 0007}
Bit 0 = Section 0 - Light pen picking check
Bit 1 = Section 1 - Light pen tracking check
Bit 2 = Section 2 - Keyboard check
Interrupt line for display code interpreter
{prestored as 0004-bit 2 designating interrupt line 2}
This parameter must not be changed after the initial
parameter stop.

DCI Switch Setting
DCI instruction/clock control switches must be UP.
The DCI PROTECT switch must be in UNPROTECTED.
The DCI SENSE REFRESH FAULT switch must be UP.

Stop/Jump Parameter Word
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

614-2

Stop to enter parameters
Stop at end of test section
Stop at end of test
Stop on error
Repeat condition
Repeat section
Repeat test
Not used
Omit typeouts
Bias return address display
Re-enter parameters
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Not sensed by this test
Run this test alone
{This bit should be set when two or more tests in the
test list use the same display code interpreter equipment
number. This allows the tests to be run consecutively,
since they cannot be multiplexed.}
60182000 L

SECTION DESCRIPTION INDEX
Number

1
2

IV.

Name
Light pen picking
Light pen tracking
Keyboard

OPERATOR COMMUNICATIONS
A.

MESSAGE FORMATS
1.

Normal Teletype Message
Program identification during test initialization.
GT3 {NO. 73} GPGT LIGHT PEN/KEYBOARD TEST
IA = XXXX

Normal Display Console Message
Displayed at the console during the keyboard check section.
KEYBOARD TEST-TERMINATE WITH RESET, E, N, D, ETX

Stop at End of Test Section
First stop {overflow 1 ight on}·
{Ar
{Qr

= 7322 - test ID stop
= Stop/Jump parameter

Second stop
{Ar
{Q}
4.

= Section
= Return

number
address

Stop at End of Test
First stop {overflow 1 ight onr
{A}
{Q}

7324 - test ID stop
parameter

= Stop/Jump

Second stop
{Al = Pass number
{Ql = Return address
5.

Stop on Error
All error message displays use basically the standard SMM17
error message format.

The format of the first two stops is

the same for all types of errors.

The format of the third and

fourth stops is determined by the type of error.

The format

for the first and second stops is as follows:

60182000 L

614-3

First stop {overflow light on)
{A}
{Q}

= 73X8

- test ID stop
where X is the number of stops
= Stop/ Jump parameter

Second stop
{A} = XXYZ

where XX = Section number
Y = Condition {or subsection}
Z = Err or type
{Q} = Address pointer to where within a condition the
err or occurr ed .
This pointer is not the same as the return address
found in other SMM17 tests.

The address points to

where execution stopped when the error occurred, but
not to where execution will continue after the error.
Where execution continues after the error is determined by the repeat conditions bit of the Stop/Jump
parameter.

If the repeat condition bit is set,

execution will continue at a backward marker, a
recovery point to repeat the condition designated
in {A} of this second stop.

If the repeat condition

bit is not set, execution will continue at a forward
marker, a recovery point to skip around the remainder
of the condition designated in {A} of this second
stop8.

MESSAGE DICTIONARY
The upper hexadecimal digit of the two-digit error message code
designates the condition {or subsection}' that failed.
digit is the error type.

The lower

This message dictionary describes the

error types.
Code
Xl

Subroutine
Name
FNRP
STRP

Subroutine
Tag Name
FNIll0
STI100

Message and
Description
RESPONSE, expect reply, receive
internal reject
A
Q

614-4

= I/O
=Q

instruction
register function code
60182000 L

Subroutine
Name

FNRP
STRP

Subroutine
Tag Name
FNI110
STI100

Message and
Description
RESPONSE, expect reply, receive
external reject
A
Q

CMPALL

CMI030

= I/O

= Actual

CMI030

TV display
TV display
Failing TV word number
Previous TV display

= Expected

CMPALL

instruction
register function code

TV monitor has unexpected display
A

REGISTER, parameter register
has unexpected contents
A = Actual register contents
= Expected register contents
A = Failing register ~umber
Q = Previous register contents

WAIT

WAI050
WAI060

TIME, interrupt did not occur
within expected time limits
A = Lower limit {in milliseconds}
= Upper limit {in milliseconds}
A = Actual time {in milliseconds)
Q = Not used

DCIPRO

1)CI002

INTERRUPT, internal reject
during interrupt state
A = I/O instruction
= Q register function code

Q
XA

DCIPRO

DCI002

INTERRUPT, external reject
during interrupt state
A
Q

RINT

DCIPRO

RII010

DCI020

code

INTERRUPT, missing
A = Actual interrupts.{bits corresponding to register 20~}
Q = Expected interrupts {bits
corresponding to register
20 1
16
INTERRUPT, no interrupt status
bit set when an interrupt occurred
A
Q

60182000 L

= I/O instruction
= Q register function

= 0000

{actual status}
interrupts {bits
corresponding to register
2016 1

= Expected

614-5

Subroutine
Name

Subroutine
Tag Name

DCIPRO

DCI030

DCIPRO

Message and
Des cr i pt ion
INTERRUPT, unexpected
A

= Actual

interrupts {bits corresponding to register 20 16}
Q = Expected interrupts {bits
corresponding to register
20 161
INTERRUPT, unable to clear
interrupt status

DCI060

interrupt status
after attempted clear {bits
corresponding to register
20 1
Q = Ex~~cted interrupt status
after attenpted clear {bits
corresponding to register
20 }A = Fu~etion used to attempt
clear interrupt status
00 = Cleared when interrupt
status or keyboard
register unloaded
1A = Load interrupt enable
register
1B = Load interrupt disable
register
30 = Reset
Q = Not used

DESCRIPTION
A.

GENERAL
Since Section 0 requires the operator to execute conditions 'in a
sequential manner, standard SMM17 error messages are provided when
an unexpected result occurs.

Sections 1 and 2 have no required

sequence and thus, expected results must be verified visually.
However, unexpected interrupts are always enabled and an error is
reported if any unexpected interrupt is received.
B.

SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
1.

Section 0 - Light Pen Picking
Each condition in Section 0 follows the same sequence of
operations.

Two DCI drawing instructions {vector and/or symbol}

are executed in each condition.

614-6

Light pen hits are enabled on

60182000 L

the first and disabled on the second.
the one that is enabled.

The operator must pick

If a vector is to be picked, it must

be picked at its end nearest the disabled vector or symbol.
This is necessary to check the light pen hit beam position
registers 06 and 07.

The vector and/or symbol combinations

for five conditions in this section are as follows:
Condition
Number

Light Pen Hit
Enabled

Li gh t P en Hit
Disabled

Long Vector

Short Vector

Long Vector

Point Symbol

Point Symbol
{on the left}

Point Symbol
{on the right}

Dollar Sign

Point Symbol

Short Vector

To execute the picking operation in each condition, the operntor
must perform the operations as follows:
a.

Begin with the light pen switch off.
When the 1 ight pen switch is off, the vector and/or
symbol combination is drawn and the alarm is sounded.

Press the tip of the light pen against the face of the
CRT so that the light pen is over the disabled vector
or symbol and the light pen switch is depressed.
When the lightpen switch is depressed, the audible
alarm is silenced. No light pen hit should occur·

c·

Move the tip of the light pen so that it is over the
enabled vector or symbol, keeping the light pen switch
depressed.
When the light pen hit occurs, the vector and/or
symbol combination is no longer drawn.

When the vector and/or symbol combination disappears,
release the light pen switch.
When the light pen switch is released, the next
condition is displayed, unless the repeat condition
stop/jump bit is set.

60182000 L

614-7

Operations 1 - 4 are repeated for each condition.
conditions have been completed, the next selected

When all
is

~ection

executed.
The sequence of operations is the same for all conditions
{subsections} of Section O.

Therefore, only one detailed

description is necessary.

614-8

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Program Description

OOXl
OOX2
OOX5

LSIOOO

Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

OOXl
OOX2
OOX6

Load and unload P register.

OOXl
OOX2

Clear audible alarm.

Expect 0000.
Expect reply.

Expect reply.

OOXl
OOX2

LSI010

Read TV interrupt status. Expect reply.
Return control to SMM.
Wait for 1 ight pen sWitch off sta"tus.

OOXl
OOX2
OOX5

LSI020

Load interrupt enable register. Expect
reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect 2E8F.

OOXl
OOX2

LSI028

Unload all scratchpad registers.
reply.

OOXl
OOX2

Start display.

OOXl
OOX2

Set audible alarm.

Expect

Expect reply.
Expect reply.

OOX9
OOXA
OOXC
OOXD
OOXE

LSI030

Return control to SMM.
Wait for light pen sWitch interrupt.

OOXB

LSI040

Verify that light pen switch interrupt
occurred.

OOX1
OOX2
OOX5

Read TV interrupt status.
pen switch on·

OOX1
OOX2

Clear audible alarm·

Expect light

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

Finish current instruction and stop.
Expect reply.

00X1
00X2
00X1
00X2

LSI041
LSI41A

Read TV DCI stopped bit.
Return control to SMM.
Wait for'DCI stopped.

,OOX5

LSI042

Verify that DCI stopped bit is set.

00X1
00X2

LSI043

Load interrupt disable register.
reply.
Start display.

00X1
00X2

Expect reply.

Expect

Expect reply.

OOX9
OOXA
OOXC
OOXD
OOXE

LSI044

Return control to SMM.
Wait for light pen hit interrupt.

OOX8

LSI04b

Verify that light pen hit interrupt
occurred.

OOX1
OOX2

Unload all scratchpad registers.
reply.

OOX1
OOX2

Unload the unload only parameter
registers Expect reply.

OOX6

LSI060

Expect

Verify that scratchpad registers have
expected contents.

OOX1
OOX2

Load interrupt enable register with light
pen switch interrupt bit. Expect reply.

OOX9
OOXA
OOXC
OOXD
OOXE

Wait 5 seconds for light pen switch
interrupt.

OOXB

LSI090

OOX6

Program Description

Verify that the light pen switch interrupt
occurred.
Verify that light pen switch status bit
is off. Check repeat condition stop/
jump bit.

Section 1 - Light Pen Tracking
The track ing routine is baSically the same program used by the'
GPGT software system.

To execute the

tr~cking

routine, the

operator must perform the operations as follows:

60182000 L

614-9

a·

Begin with the light pen switch off.
When the light pen switch is off, a small diamond
with a point at its center is drawn on the display.

Press the tip of the light pen against the face of the
CRT so that the light pen switch is depressed.
When the light pen switch is depressed, tracking is
activated. The diamond is replaced by the tracking
symbol of six points.

Move the tip of the light pen randomly across the face
of the CRT, keeping the light pen switch

depres~ed.

The tracking symbol should follow the light pen whereever the light pen is moved. If the tracking system
loses the light pen, a search pattern will scan the
entire screen until the light pen is found again.
d.

When it is desired to terminate the tracking section,
release the light pen switch.
When the light pen switch is released, the next selected
section is executed, unless the repeat condition or repeat section stop/jump bits are set.

614-10

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

0101
0102
0105

Track

Program Description
Reset.

Expect reply.

Read TV interrupt enable.

Expect 0000.

0101
0102
0106

Load and unload P register.

Expect reply.

0101
0102
0106

Load and unload conditional control
register with 0001. Expect reply.

0101
0102

TRIOlO

Read TV interrupt status. Expect· reply.
Return control to SMM.
Wait for light pen sWitch status bit to
be off.

0101
0102
0105

TRI020

Load interrupt enable register. Expect
reply.
Read TV interrupt enable. Expect AE8D.

0101
0102
0105

Load write limits.

Expect reply.

0101
0102

Start display. Expect reply
Diamond is displayed.

Read TV write limits.

Expect reply.

60182000 L

Error
Code

Program
Tag Name

program Description

0109
010A
010C
010D
010E

TRI030

Return control to SMM.
Wait for light pen switch interrupt.

010B

TRI040

Verify that light pen switch interrupt
occurred.

0101
0102
0105

Read TV interrupt status.
pen switch an.

0101
0102

Finish current instruction and stop.
Expect reply.

0101
0102

TRI041
TRI41A

Read TV DCI stopped bit.
Return control to SMM.
Wait for DCI stopped.

0105

TRI042

Verify that DCI stopped bit is set.

0101
0102

TRI043

Load interrupt enable register.
reply.

Expect reply.

Expect

0101
0102
0106

Load and unload conditional control
register with 0000. Expect reply.

0101
0102

Start display. Expect reply.
Tracking symbol i~ displayed.

0109
010A
010C
010D
010E

TRI050

Return control to SMM.
Wait for light pen SWitch interrupt.

010B

TRI060

Verify that light pen switch interrupt
occurred.
Read TV interrupt status. Expect light pen
switch off.
Check repeat condition stop/jump bit.

0101
0102
1]105
3.

Expect light

Section 2 - Keyboard Operation
To execute the keyboard section, the operator must perform the
operations as fallows:
a.

The section begins with a display of a cursor anq the
message as fallows:
KEYBOARD TEST - TERMINATE WITH RESET, E,N,D, ETX

60182000 L

614-11

Randomly depress the keyboard keys.
When a key is depressed, it results in one of the
following:
II

The symbol for that key is displayed at the cursor
position and the cursor is advanced one

spac~.

The character sequence shown on that key is
displayed and the cursor advanced the number of
spaces in the character sequence.

{F1,F2,F3,F4,F5,

F6,F7,F8,F9,F10, SUPERSCRIPT, SUBSCRIPT, NORMAL
TEXT, INT, and ETx}
3}

A function is executed as specified by any of the
keys as follows:
SKIP - advance cursor one space
BACKSPACE - backspace cursor one space
LINE DOWN - advance cursor one line
LINE UP - move cursor back one line
NEW LINE - move cursor to start of next line
RESET - move cursor to start of first line
LINE CLEAR - clear all symbols to the right of
cursor and move cursor to start of
next line
CLEAR

clear all symbols and move cursor to
start of first line

If an illegal code is received, the two digit
hexadecimal code is displayed in a message as
follows:
XX ILLEGAL CODE

{XX

= code}

The cursor is advanced 15 spaces.
c.

When it is desired to terminate the keyboard section,
type the following:

10
10
is started with the mirror already moving.
77

WARNING
The 1700 and SC1700 do not have internal clocks and,
therefore, all computed times are based on instruction cycle times. A "slow" 1700 will shorten the
above times; a "fast" 1700 will lengthen the above
times. All average times outside the above limits
should be investigated. (The test takes into account
the longer cycle times of an SC1700. )
3.

Actual data and expected data typeouts in case of data compare errors.
typeout may be omitted by setting bit 7 of the Stop! Jump parameter.
out may occur in Sections
A.

D~c

This

This type-

8, 9 or C.

yyyyyyyyyyyy.
Where yyyy . . . • is the actual data read .

D~c

zzzzzzzzzzzz..

. . . xxx . . • . . . • • . . zzz \\ss \

Where zzzz . .

. zzz is the expected data pattern.

xxxx specifies those cases where expected data cannot be predicted;
e. g., when reading the entire character set in Alpha mode, the numeric
characters may be read as rejects or as some alpha character.
\\is current printer character for a field mark (DC
indicates space codes.
4.

Section 4.

(Spaces in A.

D~:c

). Where SS
I6
line are actual spaces. )

These typeouts instruct to operator to Set or Clear the Protect

switches.
SET PROTECT SWITCH ON 1735
SET 1704 PROTECT SWITCH - RUN
CLEAR 1704 AND 1735 PROTECT SWITCHES - RUN
5.

Section 6.

These typeouts are used when checking the End-of-File status,

manual interrupt and alarm interrupt.
SET AND CLEAR EOF SWITCH 10 TIMES.
Sets EOF status and causes manual interrupt.
PRESS START, THEN STOP SWITCH 10 TIMES.
Sets alarm status and causes alarm interrupt.

bSD-4

60182000 H

End of Test Typeout
Q

x
7.

sf J Parameter

35X4
=

Q
Return Address

Pass Number

Number of stops

Error Messages
a.

All error messages are in the format specified by SMMl 7;
A

Sf J Parameter

35X8

Oyzz

Return Addre s s

x = Number of stops (if any) or number of pairs of words typed (if any)
y

= Section

number

zz = Error code
Additional information is given, depending on the type of error, if X
(number of stops) is greater than 2.
b.

See description of error codes below.

Error Codes
An error code is displayed in the lower two digits of the A register on the
second stop of all error stop sequences.

A description of the error codes

used and the additional information displayed on each error is described
below.
Error Code (Hex. ).
01

Description
Ready status not set
A

Equipment status

Q = 0000

Busy status not set
A

Equipment status

Q = 0000

An interrupt occurred but the interrupt
status bit is not set
A = Equipment status
Q

60182000 H

= 0000

650-5

Error Code (Hex. )
04

Description
The time required to sort one document
exceeded 1800 ms.
A
Q

= Sort time
= 0000

in rns Hex.

Incorrect equipment status
A = Actual status
Q = Expected status

Incorrect mirror status
A
Q

= Actual status
= Expected status

An interrupt occurred.

Interrupt status

bit was set but none of the following were
set - data, end of operation, alarm or
manual interrupt.
A

= Equipment status

Q = 0000

An interrupt occurred which had not been
selected.
A
Q

= Equipment status
= Interrupt select bits

for selected

interrupts

A clear interrupt function did not clear the
interrupt status bit.

= Equipment

= 0000

status

Line Locate did not occur within 300 ms
A

= Actual

status

Q = Expected

The character read was "out of mode. "
Example: Reading in alpha mode and a
numeric character is read.
A

= Number

of "out of mode" characters in

the line just read
Q = 0000

650-6

60182000 H

Error Code (Hex. ).

Description
External reject on a status input
A

= 0000

Q = Equipment address

Internal reject on a status input
A = 0000
Q

= Equipment

address

External reject of a function
A = Function code(s).
Q

= Function code(s)
= Equipment address

Stop read function did not clear busy status
A
Q

address

Internal reject of a function
A

= Equipment

= Equipment
= 0000

status

Space code-field mark data compare error.
Expected 7 spaces 2 field marks and a fill
character.

Actual and expected data

type-out follows error message.
A = Number of errors (i. e., number of
Q =

characters not found)
0000

Protect switches were set but a reply was
received to a nonprotected 1735/915 function.
A
Q

= Function
= 0000

code

An incorrect equipment code or interrupt line

parameter was entered.

Run to re- enter

parameters.

60182000 H

650-7

Error Code (Hex. )
14

Description
Incorrect mirror coordinate.

After mirror

motion the mirror coordinate was not the
one expected.
A = Actual mirror status
Q = Expected mirror coordinate
15

Mirror compare failed.

After mirror

motion, mirror compare status was not set.
A = Actual mirror status
Q = Expected mirror coordinate
16

Coordinate drift.

The coordinate at which

the character was read was not within :t: two
of the expected coordinate.
A = Actual coordinate
Q = Expected coordinate

Selected interrupt did not occur.
A = Function bits for selected interrupt
Q = Function bits for actual interrupt

Reject of a protected function.

Protect

switches set on 1735 and 1704.
A = Function code
Q = 0000

Data compare error.

Data read did not

match expected data.
A = Number of data compare errors
detected in the line just read (See 1. D. 2
for data typeouts. )
Q = 0000
lA

Reader Ready - should not be.

To start

Section 6, the reader must be in a not
ready condition.

650-8

60182000 H

'Error Code (Hex. ).
1B

Description
End of File status did not set when End of
File switch was pressed.
A = Equipment status
Q

= 0000

Mechanical counter Busy status did not
set after a counter function.
A = Counter function
Q

= 0000

Page advance error and/ or mirror
coordinate error occurred after executing
a page advance function.

Could not find the

expected character or could not find line
after page advance. (Note: Odd page
advance functions are executed twice. )
A

= OOOX

Where X is the number of lines
the page was advanced prior to
the error (1FX is odd 2X).

= OOYY

Where YY as the coordinate at
which it expected to find a
character.

ERROR STOPS
Stops occur upon errors if bit 3 of the Stop/ Jump parameter is set.
stops occur.

II.

At least two

Additional stops may occur depending upon the type of error.

DESCRIPTION
A.

INITIALIZA TION

Calculate and store bias value

Type test title

Store last address of test in SMM

Enter parameters if selected in Stop/ Jump word

Bias address of interrupt processing routine

60182000 H

650-9

Request interrupt lines from SMM

Go to control routine and start test

Section 0 (SO).
Busy.
B.

Check for a reply to 1735/915 functions.

Status must be Ready and Not

Error if internal or external reject.
OPERATING MODE FUNCTION (D

= 1)

Clear controller

Clear interrupts

Data interrupt request

End of operation interrupt request

Alarm interrupt request

Stop read

Manual interrupt request

Increment mechanical counter No. 1

9'.

Increment mechanical counter No. 2

10.

Increment mechanical counter No. 3

11.

Clear mechanical counter No. 1

12.

Clear mechanical counter No. 2

13.

Clear mechanical counter- No. 3
Repeat from (A) 1, 000 times

DATA MODE FUNCTIONS (D

= 2)

Clear controller

Clear interrupt

Data interrupt request

End of operation interrupt request

Alarm interrupt request

Manual interrupt request

Assembly mode

Scan mode

Read mode
(Repeat from c 1, 000 times

650-10

60.182000 H

POSITIONING FUNC TIONS (D = 3)

Page advance

Page advance - small step

Pos ition mirror forward.

Position mirror reverse.
Repeat from (D. 1) 24 times.

MECHANICAL ACTION FUNCTIONS - Except 'Mechanical Action Code (D
1.

Clear interrupt.

End of operation interrupt request.

Alarm interrupt request.

= 4)

Repeat from (D. 1) 1, 000 times.
F.

READ MODE FUNCION (D
1.

= 5)

Read function.

Zero mirror.
Repeat from (F. 1) 24 times.

Section 1.

Check Page Advance (normal and mini- step) and End of Operation Interrupt

After Page Advance.
A.

PAGE ADVANCE - Normal and Mini-step.

Sort to primary hopper

Advance page the specified increment.

Repeat A. 2 until increment equals OF 16 .

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Repeat from A. 1 for mini- step.

Normal step.

END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER PAGE ADVANCE
1.

Sort to primary hopper.

Advance page the specified increment.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from B. 2 until page advance increment equals OF 16 .

Repeat from B. 1 if repeat conditions is selected.

60182000 H

Normal step.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

650-11

Repeat from B. 1 for mini-step.

Repeat from B. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

End of section.

Section 2 (S2 ).

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Document Sorting, Sort Timing and End of Operation Interrupt After

Sorting.
A.

b50-12

SORT TO ALTERNATE HOPPERS
1.

Set counter.

Wait Not Busy.

Sort to primary hopper.

Sort to secondary hopper.

Repeat from A. 3 four times.

Control to SMM

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

SORT TIMING
1.

Set counter

Wait Not Busy.

Advance document to end of page.

Sort to primary.

Compute the time in ms that Busy status remains set during sort operation.

Error stop if sort time exceeds 1800 ms.

Repeat from B. 2 nine times.

Control to SMM

Repeat from B. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER SORT
1.

Set counter.

Sort to primary hopper and select End of Operation interrupt.

Wait Not "Busy.

Check for E. O. P. interrupt.

Repeat from C. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

60182000 H

Sort to secondary hopper.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from C. 6 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

10.

Repeat from C. 2 four times.

11.

End of Section stop.

Section 3 (S3 ).
A.

Error if it did not occur.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Mirror Motion, Status, Coordinates, Timing and Interrupts.

MIRROR MOTION TO FAR FORWARD AND FAR REVERSE AND CORREC T STA TUS.
1.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Check for Ready and Mirror Far Reverse status.
Error if status not correct.

Move mirror to Far Forward position.

Check Equipment status for End of

Operation, Ready and Mirror Far Forward status.
Error if status not correct.
5.

Check Mirror status for Mirror Far Forward and Compare.
Error if status is not correct.

Move mirror to Far Reverse position.

Check Equipment status for End of Operation, Ready and Mirror Far Reverse.
Error if status is not correct.

Check Mirror status for Mirror Far Reverse and Compare.
Error if status not correct.

9.
10.
B.

Repeat from A. 2 twenty-four times.
Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

COMPARE AND COORDINATE STATUS AT EACH COORDINATE FROM ZERO TO
FAR FORWARD. COMPARE BUT NOT COORDINATE STATUS FROM MIRROR FAR
FORWARD TO MIRROR FAR REVERSE.
1.

Set coordinate flag to one.

Zero mirror.

3.
4.

Move mirror forward to coordinate selected.
Check Mirror status for Compare and correct Coordinate.
Error if status not correct.

60182000 H

650-13

Update coordinate by one and repeat from B. 2 until coordinate reaches FF 16 .

Decrease coordinate flag by one.

Move mirror reverse to selected coordinate.

Check Mirror status for Compare only.

Move mirror to Far Forward pos ition.

Error if status not correct.

10.

Repeat from B. 6 until coordinate reaches zero.

11.

Repeat from B. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

12.

Clear controller

END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER FORWARD AND REVERSE MIRROR
MOTION CHECK
1.

Set counter

Zero mirror

Move mirror forward to coordinate 40

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from C. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Move mirror to coordinate F0

Zero mirror

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

10.

Check for interrupt.

11.

Repeat from C. 7 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

12.

Repeat from C. 2 twenty-four times.

650-14

Error if it did not occur.

END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT ON MIRROR FAR REVERSE AFTER A CLEAR
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
1.

Set counter

Zero mirror

Move mirror to Far Forward position.

Clear controller

Wait Not Busy

Check for Mirror Far Reverse status.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Error if not set.

60182000 H

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from D. 2 twenty-four times.

10.
E.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from D. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

COMPUTE MIRROR TIMING - FORWARD AND REVERSE
1.

Clear minimum, maximum and average time flags.

Zero mirror

Start mirror forward to coordinate OA 16 .

Wait for Busy to drop

Start Read from OF 16 to F0 16 .

Wait for Busy.

Determine the time in ms that Busy status remains set during mirror motion.

Update minimum, maximum and average time flags.

Repeat from E. 1 fourteen times.

10.

Determine average of the fifteen times.

11.

Convert results to decimal.

12.

Print message giving average minimum and maximum mirror forward time.

13.

Repe~t

14.

Clear minimum, maximum and average time flags.

15.

Zero mirror

16.

Move mirror to coordinate F0

17.

Wait Not Busy

18.

Start mirror motion toward zero.

19.

Determine the time in ms that Busy status remains set during mirror motion.

20.

Update minimum, maximum and average time flags.

21.

Repeat from E. 14 nine times.

22.

Determine average of 15 times.

23.

Convert results to decimal.

24.

Print message giving average, maximum and minimum times.

25.

Repeat from 14 if Repeat Section selected.

60182000 H

from 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

650-15

ALARM INTERRUPT ON ILLEGAL MIRROR MOTION CHECK
1.

Set counter

Zero mirror

Move mirror forward to coordinate F0

Attempt to move mirror forward to coordinate 80 16 .

Select alarm interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from F. 2 twenty-four times.

Repeat from F. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

End of Section 3.

Section 4.
A.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Protect Test

PROTECT STATUS FROM 1735 CHECK
1.

Get SMM parameter, save and set bit 5.

(This causes TTY to type out in

Character .mode which is necessary when using the Protect feature. )

Set counter

Type out message: SET PROTECT SWITCH ON 1735

Input Equipment status.

Check for Protect status bit.

Repea t from A. 4 if not set.

Repeat from A. 4 forty-nine times.

Repeat from A. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

REPLY TO PROTECTED 1735/915 FUNCTIONS CHECK
1.

Set protect bits in all of memory.

Type message: SET 1704 PROTECT SWITCH - RUN

Stop.

Wait for operator to set PROTECT switch on console and place

computer in Run.
4.

Set counter.

Output all function bits, one at a time, from 0 through 15.
Error if a reject is received.

650-16

Repeat from B. 5 twenty times.

60182000 H

REJECT TO NONPROTECTED 1735/915 FUNCTIONS CHECK
1.

Set counter.

Clear Protect bits in core.

Output all function bits, one at a time, from 0 through 15.
Expect a reject.

Repeat from C. 3 nineteen times.

Type message: CLEAR 1704 AND 1735 PROTECT SWITCHES - RUN.

Clear all Protect bits in core.

End of section.

Restore original SMM Parameter.

Section 5.
A.

Error if a reply is received.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Window Operation and Space Code Field Mark Generation

READ NOMINAL TEST DOCUMENTS IN ALPHANUMERIC MODE - SCAN 2
1.

Set document count.

Set up alphanumeric pattern for data checking.

Sort to primary hopper.

Set line count.

Advance page two lines.

Jump to A. 8.

Advance page one line.

Clear buffer.

Zero mirror.

10.

Clear error counters.

11.

Select Scan 2 mode.

12.

Read one line.

13.

Check actual data against expected data.

14.

Error stop if any Data Compare errors occurred in this line.

15.

Check End of Data Line for seven spaces, two field marks (DC) and a fill

Update error count if not the same.

character (DB).
16.

Error stop if any space code - field mark errors.

17.

Print actual and expected data.

60182000 H

650-17

18.

Repeat from A. 7 fifty-five times.

19.

Repeat from A. 3 four times.

20.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

21.

Wait Not Busy.

22.

Sort to primary.

23.

End of Section 5.

Section 6.
A.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check End of File Status l Manual Interrupt and Alarm Interrupt.

CHECK END OF FILE STATUS AND MANUAL INTERRUPTI LOAD A DOCUMENT
TO THE DOCUMENT READY POSITION, BUT DO NOT PRESS THE START SWITCH
TO STORE THIS SECTION

Check Equipment status for Not Ready.

Type message: SET AND CLEAR END OF FILE SWITCH 10 TIMES.

Set counter.

Select manual interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Check for End of File status.

Repeat from A. 4 nine times.

Repeat from A. 3 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

650 -18

Error if interrupt did not occur.
Error if not set.

CHECK ALARM INTERRUPT WHEN GOING FROM READY TO NOT READY
1.

Type message: PRESS START THEN STOP SWITCH 10 TIMES.

Set counter.

Select alarm interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

5•

Repeat from B. 3 nine times.

Repeat from B. 2 if Repeat conditions is selected.

End of Section 6.

Section 7.
A.

Error if Ready status is set.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Mechanical Counters

CLEAR AND INCREMENT COUNTERS INDIVIDUALLY
1.

Clear each counter separately.

Increment counter

No~

1 fifty times.

60182000 H

Increment counter No. 2 fifty times.

Increment counter No. 3 fifty times.

Control to SMM.

Repeat from A. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Delay approximately 1 second.

Clear each counter separately.

Repeat from A. 8 if Repeat Condition is selected.

INCREMENT COUNTERS 1, 2, AND 3 FIFTY TIMES SIMULTANEOUSLY
1.

Set counter.

Increment all counters fifty times.

Delay approximately 1 second.

Repeat from B. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Clear all counters simultaneously.

SIMULTANEOUSLY SET AND CLEAR ALL COUNTERS AS FOLLOWS:
1.

Clear 3 - increment 1 and 2 ten times.

Clear 2 - increment 1 and 3 ten times.

Clear 1 - increment 2 and 3 ten times.

Increment 1, 2 and 3 ten times.

Final contents of counter = 10, 20, 30.

Repeat from C. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Delay approximately 1 second.

Clear all counters.

End of Section 7.

Section 8.
A.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Read in Scan 3

READ AND CHECK DATA IN ALPHANUMERIC MODE
1.

Set document count.

Set up alphanumeric pattern for data checking.

Sort to primary hopper.

Set line count.

60182000 H

650-19

Advance page to first line.

Jump to A. 8.

Advance page two lines.

Clear input buffer.

Zero mirror.

10.

Clear error flag.

11.

Read line.

12.

Check data, one word at a time (two characters), update error count if data
word read does not match expected data.

13.

Error stop if data compare errors occurred in line just read.

14.

Repeat from A. 7 thirty-seven times (one page).

15.

Repeat from A. 3 four times.

16.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

(See I. D. 2. )

READ AND CHECK DATA IN ALPHA MODE

Set up alpha pattern for data checking.

Set document count.

Wait Not Busy.

Sort to primary hopper.

Set line count.

Advance page to first line.

Jump to A. 10.

Wait Not Busy.

Advance page two lines.

10.

Clear input buffer.

11.

Zero mirror.

12.

Clear error flag.

13.

Select Alpha mode.

14.

Read line.

15.

Check for "Out of Mode Characters".

650-20

See Error code OB.

60182000 H

16.

Check data.

(See S.ection 8, step 12. )

17.

Error stop if data compare errors occurred in line just read.

18.

Repeat from B. 8 thirty-seven times (one page).

19.

Repeat from B. 3 four times.

20.

Repeat from B. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

(See I. D. 2. )

READ AND CHECK DATA IN NUMERIC MODE

Generate numeric pattern for data checking.

Set document count.

Wait Not Busy:

Sort to primary.

Set line count.

Advance page to first line.

JumptoA.10.

Wait Not Busy.

Advance page two lines.

10.

Clear input buffer.

11.

Zero' mirror.

12.

Clear error flag.

13.

Select numeric mode.

14.

Read line.

15.

Check for "Out of Mode Characters." See I. D. 6. b.

16.

Check data.

17.

Error stop if data compare errors occurred in the line just read.

18.

Repeat from C. 8 thirty- seven times (one page).

19.

Repeat from C. 3 four times.

20.

Repeat from C. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Error code OB.

(See Section 1, step 12. )
See 1. D. 2.

CHECK DATA INTERRUPT

Set counter.

Wait Not Busy.

60182000 H

650-21

Sort toprimary.

Advance page to first line.

\Vait Not Busy.

Zero mirror.

Start read.

Select Data interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

10.

Repeat from D. 5 twenty-four times.

11.

Repeat from D. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

CHECK FOR END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER A READ
1.

Wait Not Busy.

Sort to primary.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Read a line.

Check for Mirror Compare status.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from E. 4 twenty-four times.

10.
F.

650-22

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Error if not set.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from E. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

CHECK ALARM INTERRUPT ON LOST DATA
1.

Sort to primary hopper.

Advance page to first line.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Start Read but do not input data.

Wait Not Busy.

Forces Lost Data.

60182000 H

Section 9.

Check the ability of the reader to maintain registration within reading limits

during a series of constant page advance functions of increments of (I, 2, 3 .... F 16).
Stop read function and coordinate counter drift are also checked.
1.

Set page advance increment equal to one.

Sort to primary hopper.

Clear error flag.

Set up alphanumeric pattern for data checking.

Clear input buffer.

Advance page to first line and read first line three times.

Check data read against expected data.
(two characters) are not correct.

Error stop if data compare errors occurred in the line first read. (See I. D. 2.. )

Repeat from 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Update error count if any data words

10.

Set iteration counter for this column.

11.

Select

12.

Advance page the specified increment.

13.

Repeat 12 if page increment is an add number.

14.

Zero mirror.

15.

Start Read.

16.

Check for Data Ready, if not go to 21.

17.

Input Data Word.

18.

Check for expected character.

19.

Go to 16 if not expected character.

20.

Go to 25 if expected character.

21...

Check for mirror compare i. e., EOP.

22",

Not mirror compare go to 16.

23..

Mirror compare, error stop: Expected character not found, or page advance

~lphanumeric

and scan 3.

error.
24..

Go to 28.

25 •

Stop Read when expected character is read.

60182000 H

650-23

26.

Get Mirror status.

27.

Check that the expected character was read at the expected coordinate plus
or minus two.

28~

Repeat from 12 the number of times specified for this column.

29.

Update page advance increment and repeat from 2 until increment equals OF 16'

30.

Wait Not Busy.

31.

Sort to primary hopper.

32.

End of Section.

Section A 16 .
A.

650-24

Repeat from 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Line Locate function and interrupts.

CHECK LINE LOCATE AND t.,INELOCATE FAILURE
1.

Set counter.

Inhibit interrupts.

Sort to primary hopper.

Zero mirror.

Move mirror to coordinate 25.

Line Locate. Expect Line Locate Failure and Alarm status within 300
if status does not occur within this time.

Repeat from A. 4 twenty-four times.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

10.

Advance page two lines.

11.

Move mirror to coordinate 25.

12.

Line Locate. Expect End of Operation status within 300 ms.
does not set within this time.

13.

Repeat from A. 9 thirty-six times.

InS.

Error

Error if status

CHECK ALARM INTERRUPT ON LINE LOCATE FAILURE
1.

Sort to primary hopper.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Move mirror to coordinate 25.

60182000 H

Line· Locate.

Expect Line Locate Failure and Alarm status within 300 ms.

Error if status does not set within this time.

Select Alarm interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from B. 3 twenty-four times.

Repeat from B. 2 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

CHECK FOR END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER LINE LOCATE
1.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Advance page two lines.

Move mirror to coordinate 25.

Line Locate.

Expect End of Operation status within 300 ms.

Error if status

does not set within this time.
6.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

Check for interrupt.

Repeat from C. 2 thirty- six times.

Repeat from C. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

10.
Section B.
A.

End of Section A.

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

Check Marking Function

CHECK MARKING FUNCTION
1.

Set counter.

Sort to primary hopper.

Advance page two lines.

Mark page.

Check for Busy status.

Wait Not Busy.

Repeat from A. 3 thirty- six times.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

60182000 H

Error if not busy.

650-25

CHECK FO!t END OF OPERATION INTERRUPT AFTER MARKING
1.

Sort to primary hopper.

Set counter.

Zero mirror.

Advance page two lines.

Move mirror to coordinate 25.

Line Locate.

Mark page.

Wait Not Busy.

Select End of Operation interrupt.

10.

Check for interrupt.

11.

Repeat from B. 3 thirty-six times.

12.

Repeat from B. 1 if Repeat Conditions is selected.

13.

End of Section B.

650-26

Error if interrupt did not occur.

Repeat from A. 1 if Repeat Section is selected.

60182000 H

1700/935-2 READ TRANSPORT TEST
(OC2A52 Test No. 52)

OPERATIONA.L PROCEDURE
A.

DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

No. 48705208

No. 48705209

RESTRICTIONS
Requires a minimum 8K system

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

Standard SMM17 call

Call test no. 52

PARAMETERS
1.

Fixed

All document dimensions

Data read definition

Leading edge detector distance to lens 2

Lens 2 to lens 1 and 3 distance

Manual
On a manual interrupt, control is transferred to "ENTER PARAMETERS"
routine. If phase 1 of the program is complete (see I. D. 3), changes to
parameters can be made by typing in one of the following control.

Control Code

Routine

Autoload a block

Load the controller

Request shift register dump device

Data receive from the FF406 ':c

Data send to the

End Test

':~Maintenance

60182000 J

entry':~

FF406':~

aids

652-1

Control" Code

Routine
FF406 Interrupt Line
Shift register dump parameter

I
L

Output device
FF406 equipment code
Read (lens data)

Document size

(/)

Execute test
Oscillator frequency request

Bias read coordinate

P
Q

Forced (Automatic) Requests
a.

Should anything happen to prevent the normal flow of the program before
a series of required entries are made, the program will re-start its list
of automatic parameter calls. The following is a list of those calls. (See

1. D. 2 for control code meeting).
"ENTER PARAMETERS"
The sequence that follows is:
Q, I, ColO' R, T

yntil this sequence is completed, manual selection of series will not
be allowed.
(For further information see Section II messages).
4.

STOP/ JUMP Parameter
Fourbits of the Stop/ Jump parameter are used.

They can be displayed in A

register for a change if the SKIP switch is on just after an entry in the "ENTER
PARAMETER" routine. The bits are:
Bit 8
Bit 12
Bit 5
Bit 13
E.

error message output

1 = Suppress automatic document repositioning
1 = Repeat Execution after zone error
1

= Full,

dump when listing image

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.

652-:2

= 1 = suppress

Load OC2 via SMM17 operation instructions.

60182000 J

Respond with the correct entry on the teletype to the requests (see 1. D. 3).

Manual parameter entries may be made after (1. E. 2) is complete.
If no further parameters are requested, other than "X" for execute test, the
remaining entries are prefixed at:

P
DD

= 1 = teletype
= 1 = Dump Image to standard output device

L = 2 = Shift register dump on error
The Data will be output to the selected dump device (See II. B. 3) as 400. 80
CHTR lines to the Printer or Lister. or 400. 60 CHTR lines to the teletype.
(The upper and lower 10 columns are truncated.)

If bit 13 of the Stop/Jump

parameter is not Set. the All Zero columns of the printout will be suppressed
and tallied if on the standard output device.

Upon receiving a column with data

in it. this column count will be printed as:

tc
II.

XXXX where XXXX

= the

decimal count of suppressed columns.

MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES
1.

BEGIN OC2 READ TRANSPORT TEST IA
Initial typeout where XXXX

= the

XXXX

initial address of the program.

END OC2 READ TRANSPORT TEST
Final message of test in response to control code (E).

XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
This is the format after a (DRYYYY) command where XXXX represents 4
hexadecimal digits of 8 FF406 words.

The command is DATA RECEIVE and

YYYY = the address of the FF406 at which the dump request is to start.
data is output after a line feed, and carriage return.

The

The string continues if

another YYYY is entered again followed by a line feed, carriage return, YYYY
forms the new address to start the string.

Exit from this command by MANUAL

INTERRUPT.

60182000 J

652-3

COMMAND MESSAGES

LENS NO.

SIZE

In response to code (R):<

= Desired lens

number and Y

= its

size

X = I, 2 or 3, Y = 6 for' 60 mm and 8 for an 80 mm lens.

The program continues

with:
HORR POS = XXXX.

VERT POS = YYYY.

If lens 2 is requested, part 1 of this message is omitted.

XXXX and YYYY are

the horizontal and vertical positions of the requested lens respectively.

Terminate

each entry with a period.

SiR DUMP PARAMETER

In response to code (L).
X .= 1

= no

dump

= dump

on error

= demand

An input of 3 will not disturb a previous entry of 1 or 2.

shift register dump.
An input of a 3 will not

produce 2 dump to the output device if no black data was detected during the read
if bit 13 of STJP is not set.

SiR DEVICE

In response to code (DD),

= 1 = dump to

standard output device

= 2 = dump

to lister.

This is an output

director.
4.

NORMAL OUTPUT DEVICE

In response to code (P),

= 1 = teletype, = 2 = 1742

printer.

If a 2 is entered, the program continues

with:
1742 EQUIPMENT
Where X

= O-F

OCR DRUM
Where Y
5.

= I,

as the printer equipment number.
8156-2

=2 = Y

= 1 = USASI font,

FF406 EQUIPMENT

The program continues with:

= standard

print drum.

In response to code (Q), ):<

X = O-F = the FF406 equipment number.
)::', )#"(;;0/

407-1

012'3456789)-

12F

0123456789H-

1428E

0123456789-+

1428

01234567 89H-.

7B
0123456789EP
7B INV 0123456789EP /
407E-1 0123456789-)/
OCR-B
E13B

0123456789+(#- /
0123456789! 11&-

/
FIELD MARK
653-30

60182000 J

COLUMN #
ROW

I
I I
I >!::

I
I

"-,'

:>!,

"-,'

"','

>!(

"'','-

>!:::

:>!:::

>!:::

I
I
I

I
I

+
+
+
+

+ + +

"','

>!,

>!<

>::::

>:<

:>!:::

,,','

::::::

#
1
2

4
5
6
7

8
9

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

29
30
31
32

60182000 J

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

::::::
>!:::
:>;:::

:>!:::

>::::

,,','

I
I

>;:::

::!:::

~::

~:::

::::::

::=~

+ +

:::!:::

>;:::

::;,

:::;::

::!c=

I
I
I

','
'"

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

:::;:::

::!:::

::::::

::!:::

::::::

::~

:::!<

~:::

>!:::

"-,'

>!<

:::<

::!<

:::::::

::::<:

::::c

::::::

:::!:::

::::<

:::::::

::!:::

,,','

+ +

I I
I

I
/

I
I

:::!:::

>::::

,,-

-,'

==::::

>::::
>::::
>::::

*
::!(

'"',..
::!:::

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

,,','

+
"- +
-,'
::!:::
+
"- +
-,'
::::::
+
:::!<
+
:::!<
+
::!:::
+
::~
+
:::!c
+
::!<
+
~:::
+
"','
+
,,','
+
~r:
+
::!:::
+
::;:::
+
::!:::
+
I +
>!:::

:>::::

I
I

I
I
I

653-31

1700/935 SYSTEM TEST
(OC4A55 Test No. 55)

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS

4K of memory is required to run the test.

SMM17 acts as the loading vehicle and receives control only at test termination.

The standard "AQAQ" message is replaced by descriptive error messages.

The user of this test must be familiar with the system controlware specifications.

ASCII mode must be selected in the read parameter mode word(s) for character
reading.

LOADING PROCEDURE
Standard SMM17 call as test number 55.

PARAMETER
1.

Fixed (none)

Manual
On receiving a manual interrupt, control is transferred to the "ENTER
PARAMETERS" routine.

If Phase I of the program is complete (see 1. C. 3. ),

by typing in one of the following control characters, the appropriate routine
is entered.
Code'

Routine

Description

Accept read parameters

II. B. 3

Execute the test

II. B. 14

Select error printout level

II. B. 9

Select error detection type

II. B. 8

Print error totals

II. C. 2

Print reference line

II.A.3

F
D

Select feed parameters
Select data definition method

II. B. 4
II. B. 10

Do character Deletion/Addition

II. B. 15

60182000 J

654-1

Description

Routine

Code

Q
I

Select B. C. equipment code

II. B.1

Select B. C. interrupt line

II. B. 2

L
S

Select Lister parameters
Select Sort parameters

II. B. 7
II. B. 5

Select Error output device

II. B. 11

Load B. C. controlware

II. B. 16

U
E

Unload MT output to new output device

II. B. 11, 17

End test

II.A.2

Move sort char. position

II. B. 6

Forced (Automatic) Requests
a.

The program requests a list of standard calls.

Should anything happen to

prevent the normal flow of the program before the series is complete,
the program will restart the list.

The list is as follows:

Q, I, R, F, S, L, Y, N, D

Until this sequence is complete, random selection of parameters will not
be allowed.

STOP! JUMP Parameter Switch
The STOP! JUMP parameter can be changed in the "ENTER PARAMETERS"
routine.

It will be in "A" when the computer stops, just after a parameter

entry if the SKIP switch is on.

To change the switch, change "A" and run.

The

program makes use of the following bits:
Bit
4
5

Function
Repeat execution after error.
Master clear the B. C. and ship all parameters and execute after an
error.

Suppress error output.
On autoloading, stop for a controller number change in

"Q".

NOTE
If switch bits 4 and 5 = 0, the program will turn
control over to the "ENTER PARAMETERS"
routine after having issued a stop feed, if a
status error occurs.

654-2

60182000

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.

Load OC4A55 via SMM17 operating instructions.

Respond with the correct entry via teletype.

Manual entries may now be made.

If no other entries (other than X) are made,

the following is assumed:
a.

Teletype is to be the error output device.

The controller has been previously loaded.

"SAMPLE PARAMETER SET"
The following is a list of parameters to ;icquaint the beginner with the program
operation.

They are for a lens 2 Read on document numbers 48705201, 2, or 3.

The height of lens 2 should be set to center one of the lines of the document in
the optics.
READ PARAMETERS
CC9F

Mode word

OF04

Open shutter 2 at OFO

1065
19EO

Start Read at 106

0000

Terminal parameters code

Close shutter 2 and stop Read at 19E

FEED PARAMETERS
OOE

Demand Feed, 7. 5" to 8. 5" Document

PRINT LEVEL
1

Error totals, Reference line, and Error line.

DATA DEFINITION
1

Receive data Reference line via 935 Read.

ERROR DETECTION LEVEL
2

60182000 J

Character Rejects and substitutions.

654-3

II.. MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES
1.

BEGIN OC4A55 SYSTEM TEST IA

XXXX

Initial typeout where XXXX = the initial address of the program.
2.

END OC4A55 TEST
Final message of test in response to code (E).

Error totals are printed auto-

matically with this call just prior to this message.

ABC . . . . • . . . . • . • . . . • • . . • X

In response to code (TC), as well as other programmed controls, the Comparison
(REFERENCE) line is output with an End of Field (record) code· mark.

The

End of Document code is not output.
B.

COMMAND MESSAGES
(All entries are in hexadecimal via the teletype unless other wise stated. )
1.

TYPIN EQUIPMENT = X
In response to code (Q»):C,
X

= the

FF406 equipment number.

INTERRUPT LINE

In response to code (1)*,
X

= the

FF406 interrupt line.

SELECT CONTROLLER READ TABLE
XXXX

YYYY

NNNN
0000
In response to code
XXXX -

selection.

NNNN

(R)~~,

= the

read parameter table and XXXX itself

= the

initial mode

Regardless of one's position of entry, a rub out will erase the last

full entry in the table and place the next entry back to that point.
):~These

654-4

entries are force called upon initialization of the program (See 1. C. 3. )
60182000 J

NOTE
Sequential rubouts will cause sequential deletions
but will never underflow position XXXX in the table.
An all zero entry will terminate the list.
4.

ENTER FEED FUNCTION XYZ = AAB
In response to code

(F)~:',

AA = The desired document gap in tenths of inches (HEX).
B = The document size where:
2 = 2.5" -

3.5"

4 = 3.5" 6 = 4. 5" -

4.5"

8 = 5.5

= demand

feed.

5.5"

6.5"

A=6.5"-7.5"
C = 7. 5" -

8.5"
NOTE

All entries not mentioned are illegal.
5.

NO SORT

REJECT = Y
SORT DEFINITION = DZ • . . • . . . • . . • . N
In response to code

(S)~:',

X = the no sort stacker entry 1 -

Y = the reject character stacker entry 1 If D -

C, then D -

= the

sequential stacker sort order.

A carriage

return, or 30 entries, will terminate the entry.
If D = D, then Z -

N is in alpha-numerics and represents the character from

the read line (see next message) to be sorted to stackers 1 -

B respectively.

A (?) will delete that sequential pocket from use for data sorting.
return or 11 entries will terminate entry.

A carriage

The stacker following the last

defined stacker becomes the undefined character sort pocket.

The computer

will continue with:

~:'These

entries are force called upon initialization of the program.

60182000 H

(See 1. C. 3. )

654-5

CH.i\R. POSe

= NN

Also in response to code (M),
NN = OO-FF and defines the position of the character in the read line from
which to do sorting.
NOTE
If data comparison or print mode (see X = 2 or 3 of
message II. B. 8) is selected, documents not matching
the reference line are sorted to the reject character
stacker. To avoid this, (see X = 2 of message II. B. 10)
define a no data reference line. This, however, deletes
the following test.

A test is made to ensure more reliable sorting by comparing the length of the
reference line against that of the read line.

If the reference line is longer,

that document will be sent to the character reject stacker.

It will not be tallied

as an error.
EXAMPLE:
NO SORT = 1
REJECT

SORT DEFINITION
CHAR. POSe = 01

D? ? ABC?

The above specifies the following:
Stacker

654-6

Collects

No sort documents

Character and line length reject documents

A's

B's

character position 01 =

CIS

second character of Read buffer

not used

All other documents

60182000 H

= LIST,

ENTER 1

In response to code

= 2 = Suppress

= NO

LIST,

(L)~:~,

Lister operation.

X = 1 = Use lister and the computer continues with:
LISTER UNITS
LISTER DATA

= X. • . •
= Y ...•

N
N

LISTER LINES/DOC. = Z
ENTER 1 = RIPPLE, 2
X -

= NO

RIPPLE,

C indicating the listers to use in that sequential order.

A carriage

return or 12 entries terminates entry.
Y -

= 0000000000000000 - FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

is the data to output to all listers.
Z

= 1 = Rotate

= The

Sixteen entries terminate this entry.

number of lines to print on each lister for each document feed.

the lister pattern from right to left one pos ition for each print

on that lister.
A

= 2 = Maintain the

pattern entered.

The following applies for data entries:
LIST

TELE
9

~:'These

- 9
C

TEL

LIST

TELE

B
F

LIST
S
SPACE

entries are force called upon initialization of the program.

60182000 H

TELE

LIST

(See I. C. 3)

654-7

TYPEIN 1

= REJECT,

= ERROR,

In response to code (y)>:c,

= 1! = Tally only rejects and use level
= 2 = Tally all errors and use level 1

= 3 = Tally all

1 or 2 for error output (see II. B. 9. ).
or 2 for error output (see II. B. 9. ).

errors and print all read data.
NOTE

All documents, having errors under the above
conditions, will go to the selected reject stacker.
9.

TYPEIN LEVEL = 1, 2 = X

In response to code (N)*,

10.

= 1 = yield

= 2 = yield error message II. C. 2 on detected errs.

error message II. C. 1 on detected errs.

= DOCUMENT,

TYPIN 1

= OPERATOR = X

In response to code (D )*,
X

= 1 = Take reference line
= 2 = Enter the reference

DEFINE DATA.

from document when execution takes place.
line via teletype and the computer continues with:

TERMINATE FIELD DEF BY CR

The operator now enters the reference line via teletype and terminqtes each
field with a carriage return and en.d of document with an additional carriage
return.

The error output device now receives the entire reference line as

defined and includes each end of record termination code (see II. A. 3. ).
NOTE
To define a no character reference line, enter only
a double carriage return. Mark sense and hand
print data can be defined by option 1 only.
11.

ENTER 1

= TELETYPE,

= PRINTER,

3· = MT

In response to code P, (or U) see II. B. 17 for explanation, the error output device

x = 1 = Teletype,
X
X
~:cThese

654-8

= 2 = Printer and continues from II. B. 12,
= 3 = Magnetic tape and continues from II. B. 13.

entries are force called upon initialization of the program.

( Se e I. C. 3. )

60182000 H

12.

1742 EQUIPMENT
OCR DRUM
X
Y
Y

13.

= I,

8156-2

= 0 - F = the printer equipment number.
= 1 = Convert ASCII to the special code for
= 2 = Standard print drum format.

the OCR type drum

MT = WXYZ = ABCD
A
B
C
D

=2
=0
=0
=0

= Mag tape into line.
= Converter number.
= Equipment number.
= Unit number.

(Zero

= No

Converter)

If this message is in response to code P, the characters NO are written to tape

to space off of load point and identify the field start.
controller loading proceeds.
14.

TYPIN 1 CLEARTOTAL, 2

= NO

CLEAR

If in response to code C,

In response to code X,
If X = I, Totals are cleared,
If X = 2, Totals remain unchanged,

In either case, 1700/1736/935 operation begins.

If define via document

in message II. B. 10) the following message will be output after the first

document is fed, read, sent to the no sort stacker, and normal message II. A. 3.
is output.
ENTER 1 TO REPEAT, 2 TO GO
If X

= 1,

Another document is fed as above.

If X = 2, The last document read is used as the reference line and continuous

execution begins.

Execution will halt on the following conditions:

A 1736 status error (see note below)

A manual interrupt.

No data is read from the document.
NOTE
If switch bits 4 or 5 are set, (see I. C. 4) execution
will occur until a manual interrupt occurs. If both
bits are clear, the 1700 will issue a stop read before
going to the "ENTER PARAMETERS" routine.

60182000 H

654-9

15.

ENTER CHTR DELETIONS
CHTR 00, 02, . • . . , NN =
In response to code V,

You can now delete characters from checking and the reference line.
this, enter the hexadecimal position of that character.

To do

A carriage return ends

the list of deletions and the computer continues with:
ENTER CHTR ADDITIONS
CHTR 01A, OOC, . • . • , NNB

Characters can now be added to the reference line by typing its hexadecimal
position and the character to add. A carriage return will end the list of additions.
The computer will then output message II. A. 3.
16.

LOAD CONTROLLER

In response to code C,
The system controlware should be loaded on a tape drive.

The computer will

follow this message with message II. B. 13.
On completion of the tape assignment, the following occurs:
a.

The tape will be rewound.

A search for the controlware begins.

The controlware is loaded and checksumed.

The controlware is reflected and checksumed.

The checksums are compared.

~:~

~:~The controlware number is 100(10) and is located in location 0001 of the

program.
word.

If a different program number is needed, set bit 11 in the switch

Before entering the tape parameters, set the SKIP switch.

the MT entry is made, the computer will stop.
test number into "Q" bits 00 -

07 (zero is illegal) and run.

A possibility of six errors can occur on loading which are II. C. 3 17.

After

At this time, enter the

II. C. 8.

When a code U is entered, an End of File is written on mag tape to mark the
end of list.

The request is then made (II. B. 11) to determine the dump device.

When this is complete, the tape will be rewound and dumped to 'that device.
This device now becomes the new error output device. Only one attempt is
allowed to dump the tape.

The format is 4-6-6 and Odd parity for every two

ASCII characters.

654-10

60182000 H

ERROR MESSAGES

1.
lA.

FLD A DOC B EDOC C CHTR D ERRS E REJT F
ABCDEFGH-

lB.

A - F of line 1 represents the field number (two digits) and eight digits for the
following: document count# error documents# character count# error characters
(substitutions)# and rejected character count respectively.
Line lA represents the reference line and line 1B represents the errors placed
directly below that character for which the error occurred.
On demand feed, all of the above will print out. On continuous feed, line 1 will be
eliminated, line 1A will preprint once for all errors and line 1B will print with
each error.

All numbers are in decimal.

Certain character conditio.ns exist and

are as follows:
a.

A space in error is represented by a printer underscore.

A delete character symbol will strike out the two preceding characters in
the Read buffer.

Character checking is done only to the earliest End of Field symbol regardless of which line it occurs on.

(Reference or Read. )

Reject character sorts are done as soon as the first error is detected.

Data or sequential sorts are done at the end of all character checking but
prior to error message output.

Hand print and mark sense have the same format, but each character is
output as four hexadecimal digits followed by two spaces each and the End
of Record codes are not printed.

DOC A EDOC B CHTR C ERRS D REJT E
In response to code (TT), or program demand, this is a truncation of message 1.

NO RESPONSE FROM BC
Self explanatory.

BC CHECKSUM ERROR XXXX
A checksum error has occurred while loading the B. C. XXXX

the reflected

word count in hex.

60182000 H

654-11

NO RESPONSE FROM MT X
X

MT unit number.

MT X STATUS ERROR
X

= the
= the

MT unit number.

NO BC INT.
Five seconds have elapsed and no interrupt has been received· from the B. C.
as expected on autoloading.

PROGRAM NOT ON TAPE
The B. C. controlware was not on the unit specified.

NO DATA READ
Only an End of Record and End of Document were received as data.

A forced

status output follows.
10.

ABNORMAL INT.
A call "F" was received from the B. C.

The forced status, which follows,

shows this.
11.

NO B. C. INT. FUNC

= XXXX

Five seconds of operation have elapsed with no interrupt from the B. C. as
expected.

XXXX

= the

last function request made.

A forced status follows

this message. I
12.

CONTROLLER REJECT XXXX
The B. C. has rejected the function XXXX.

13.

STATUS ERROR XXXX
RCS
FCS

(Read control status)

SSS

(Sort station status)

SFS

(Stacker full status)

SCS

(Sort check status)

ZZZZ

SLX
LRS

(Lister select status)
(Lister ready status)

XXXX

= The

YYYY

YYYY -

(Feed control status)

system status which is in error or forced.

ZZZZ are sub unit status followed by the code for that unit they

represent.

Any, all, or none may follow any system status message.

Only

those showing errors are printed.
654-12

60182000 H

14.

LOST DATA SET
The lost data bit was set in the End of Document word from the B. C.
document will be sent to the reject stacker.

The

If any data was read, it will be

tallied.

III. DESCRIPTION
A.

INITIALIZATION
1.

Set brush back roller, doubles level, and feeder.

Load the 935 with documents and set the stackers for proper document length.

OPERATION
1.

Purpose
a.

To determine system operability.

To determine operability using customer parameters.

To isolate general problem areas for further testing using more comprehensive diagnostics.

Procedure
See attached flow charts for detailed operation procedure.

60182000 H

bS4 -13

TABLE 1.
tr
lr1

.r:
I
1::-1

.r:

!i!ll1 .A1.E.

+
C
0
1
S
2
T
I
3
X
=
4
Z
5
6
sp sp.
7 rej rej~
8
9
sp.
rej.

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

rej.
err
fdr

---

HAND PRINT
AlL
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1

I N1 u 1 M

lerr I fdr

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1

DATA FORMAT

F
0
1
0
1

SI
0
0
0
0

p .1 C
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1

1
1

0111111~

0
1

- -

= code

reject for respective group only.
= read error Ex. shift register bit dropping. }
both cause a character reject.
' h or 1 ow f or recognl't'lone
= c h aracter too h Ig
CHARACTER DATA
I A A-rA-sl A-B I A-B I A-B I A-B I A-B I 0
0 I 0 I 0 I rej I 0 I 0 I 0 I

Where A represents ASCII code and B represents External BCD code.
MARK SENSE 10 and 12
'121 111-0[Q-910g] 031 041 051 061 071 081 091reirO

o
......
ex>
t\:)

o
o

t:d

The digits 12 ~ 09 represent the bits position relative to a hollerith
position. Bits 12 and 11 are in mark sense mode 12 only.

cod~

1 I TJ

HEX 935 TELE PRINT HEX 935 TELE PRINT HEX 935 TELE PRINT HEX 935 TELE PRIN r
0')

1-&

ex>
t\:)

o
o

::c

20
21
22
23

sp. sp.
!

sp.
!

1""'1

125

127

{

129

}

I2A
28
2C
2D
2E
2F

-. -.
/

3D
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
38
3C
3D
3E
3F

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

;

*
?

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
48
4C
4»
4E
4F

rej

A
8
C
D
E
F

50
P
Q
51
52
R
53
S
54
T
55
U
56
V
57
W
58
X
59
V
5A
Z
58
5C
I
6
5»
5E - SF ear

{

}

This table is arranged so as to accelerate troubleshooting for gained or dropped
bits in the data transfer between equipments on the system. Going down, one
looks for NX where N is known and X is suspect. Going across, one looks for XN.

[J""

.r::
I

Program Flow Test.55 (DC4:)

LOAD
READ
PARAMETER
TABLE
REQUEST
REQUIRED
P.~RAMETER

LIST
YES
ES

_---------_pSELEUION
ETER1
ARAM

DEMAND FEED
],

DOCUMENT

EXECUTE
START
FEED

FORM AND
PRINT
REFERENCE
LINE
RESET
LIST

WAIT FOR
A PARAMETER
SELECTION
PROCESS
PARAMETE~

SELl::CTION

'MAIN TEST-- -- ..-----t

---_.&-_--

CONTROL {MTO
MASTER
CLEAR

173b

SELECT
NO

* Refers

to a status error and certain
bits of the switch being set or not
set.

654-16

60182000 J

1700/FF406/1700-I/O INTERFACE TEST
(BCI054 Test No. 54)

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Sections 1 and 2 are primarily "go-no-go" tests.

The error printouts obtained

are not necessarily meaningful and indeed may not occur after an error because
of a program "blow-up" in the FF406.
2.

The diagnostic does not completely interface to SMM17.
permit time-sharing of the 1700 with other tests.

It will, however,

Following is a list of SMM17

features which are not used.

Repeat Test Option (the tests repeat unconditionally).

Stop On Error.

Stop At End of Section.

Messages are not reported via the normal A, Q, A, Q sequence.

A 1700 with 8K of memory is required to load and run the diagnostic.

(The

FF406 programs are constant blocks in the diagnostic resident memory. )
4.

Parameters are accepted only from the teletype (they may be re- entered at
any time by setting the Ire-enter parameter" bit in the SMM17 Stop/ Jump word).

LOADING PROCEDURE
Standard SMM17 call as test number 54.

PARAMETERS
1.

Automatic
None.

Manual
Manual parameters must be entered following the beginning test typeout.

The

program will type:
BC1 FF'406 EQUIP =

60182000 J

655-1

One character, 0-F 16 must now be entered via teletype designating the FF406
equipment number.
After this entry the program continues:
BC1 X FF406 INTERRUPT LINE

The FF406 interrupt line number 2-F 16 must now be entered.

X is equipment

number previously defined.
The program then continues:
BC1 X ENTER SECTION

Desired test sections to be run must now be selected by means of a code 1-7.
Bits 0, I, and 2 of this hexadecimal

dig~t

must be set to select the test section.
respectively, section 1, 2 or 3,

correspond to sections 1, 2 and 3 and

Thus, an entry of 1, 2 or 4 would select

A 7 entry selects all three sections.

After the entry, the program continues:
BC1 X ENTER CR TO RUN =
A carriage return should now be entered to begin execution of the test.

If a

carriage return is not entered, the program re-requests manual parameters.
II.

MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES

BC1054 BEGIN FF406 TEST IA = XXXX
Beginning test typeout where XXXX is the test initial address.

BC1 FF406 EQUIP

Parameter typeout requesting equipment code selection.
3.

BC1 X FF406 INTERRUPT LINE

Parameter typeout requesting interrupt line selection.

X is the equipment

number selected and is present on all typeouts after the select.
4.

BC1 X PASS YY
Pass yy 16 though the test has completed.

655-2

60182000 J

BC1 X SECTION ZZ RUNNING
Section ZZ

= 01- 03

is currently executing.

BC1 X ENTER CR TO RUN =
Teletype carriage return entry request.

ERROR MESSAGE
1.

BC1 X FF406 COMMAND ERROR ADDRESS YYYY
An error has occurred while executing the command test (Section 2).

Address

YYYY in the command test listing must be referenced to obtain information
regarding the error.
2.

BC1 X FF406 MEMORY
S REGISTER ERROR EXPECTED YYYY RECEIVED ZZZZ
Self- explanatory.

BC1 X FF406 MEMORY ERROR
ADDRESS AAAA EXPECTED YYYY RECEIVED ZZZZ
Self- explanatory.

BC1 X ECHO ERROR
EXPECTED YYYY RECEIVED ZZZZ
An error has occurred in section 3 while testing the 1700 110 interface.

YYYY

is the word sent to the FF406 and ZZZZ the word received.
5.

BC1 X FF406 NO RESPONSE
The FF406 has not responded with an interrupt within 6 seconds to a 1700
output in Section 3.

The firmware is likely in an error hangup loop.

BC1 X AUTOLOAD EXTERNAL REJECT XXXX
The FF406 has externally rejected an autoload output command.

XXXX is the

Q-word used.
7.

BC1 X AUTOLOAD REPLY XXXX
Same as II.B. 6 except that the FF406 has replied to the autoload output.

BC1 X INTERNAL REJ ON INPUT
A normal input from the FF406 was internally rejected.

BC1 X EXTERNAL REJ ON INPUT
An external reject was received following an input.

60182000 H

655-3

10.

BC1 X INTERNAL REJ ON OUTPUT
Same as II. B. 8 except the command was an output.

11.

BC1 X EXTERNAL REJ ON OUTPUT
Same as II. B. 9 except the command was an output.

III. TEST DESCRIPTION
A.

INITIALIZATION
Type beginning test typeout and stop to receive parameters.

OPERATION
The diagnostic consists of 4 distinct program.

Three run in the FF406 and the other

is a 1700 program which primarily is used to load the FF406 programs and to
communicate normal and error messages to the operator.

-I.

Section 1 (Memory Test)
a.

Purpose:
Test the FF406 Memory and the S-Register.

Procedure:
1)

Memory Test
The memory is checked in 1K increments beginning with upper memory.
Four "worst" memory patterns are used.
Pattern 1:
Address

655-4

Contents

0000

P+1

FFFF

P+2

FFFF

P+3

0000

P+4

FFFF

P+5

0000

P+6

0000

P+7

FFFF

P+8

0000

P+9

FFFF

P+10

FFFF

P+11

0000

etc.

etc.
60182000 H

Pattern 2:
Complement of Pattern 1.
Pattern 3:
Address

Contents

0000

P+1
P+2

0000
FFFF

P+3

FFFF

P+4

FFFF

P+5

FFFF

P+6

0000

P+7

0000

P+8

0000

P+9

0000

etc.

Pattern 4:
Complement of Pattern 3.
Note
The addresses containing all zeros
are "disturbed" periodically with
non- zero quantities.
2)

S Register Test
The S register is tested by writing OXXX at memory address OXXX,
and verifying the address expression.

Section 2 (Command Test)
a.

Purpose:
Test

most~:~

FF406 instruction commands.

Procedure:
Execute the following 23 sub-tests.

~:~Input/ Output

60182000 H

Unconditional jump

Non- zero jump (1 of 2).

instructions are not tested.

655-5

Positive jump.

Shift left.

Add / Subtract ..

Load! Store.

Load! Store indirect.

Replace add one.

Non- zero jump (2 of 2)

10)

Random non- zero jump.

11)

Random add.

12)

Random subtract.

13)

Random logical product.

14)

Random left shift.

15)

Random exclusive or.

16)

Random right shift.

17)

Random odd parity jump.

18)

Random skip A.

19)

Random overflow skip.

20)

Skip A lower.

21)

Non-zero jump indirect.

22)

Positive jump indirect.

23)

Odd parity jump indirect.

Section 3 (1700 1/ a Interface Test)
a.

Purpose:
Test the I/O Interface Package and the 1700/FF406 transmission lines.

Procedure:
This test section consists of a 1700 program which autoloads a program
to the FF406.

The 1700 then outputs one word (a counter which ranges from

0000 - FFFF) to the FF406, waits for an interrupt, reads the FF406 and
verifies that the data word output is the same as the word read.
programs may be used.
sive Echo Test".

655-6

Two FF406

The program normally loaded is the "Comprehen-

This is a FF406 program which monitors the I/O

60182000 H

Interface Package flip-flops expecting a certain state at a given time.

will hang up displaying an error message in the A register if an error
occurs.

If the repeat condition bit of the SMM17 Stop/ Jump word is set,

the. diagnostic loads the FF40B "Simple Echo Test".

This program is .

similar to the "comprehensive version" but will not hang in an error loop
and thus allows operation in FF40B "Step Mode" or permits the use of an
oscilliscope to isolate a problem.

See pages 227-8 and 227-10 for flow

charts of the two programs.
Below is a description of the 1700/FF40B interaction.

The numeric steps

are 1700 operations and the asterisked steps that of the FF40B.
1)

Autoload FF40B with Echo Program.

Initialize data word counter to zero.

Output data word to FF40B.

~~)

Input data word, output data word, and set interrupt.

Wait B seconds for interrupt.

Type BC1 X FF40B NO RESPONSE.

If repeat condition bit is set, go to 14.

Go to B.

(comprehensive version)

If interrupt occurs, go to 8.

Read FF40B and compare data word sent with data word received.
an incompare exists, type:
BC1 X ECHO ERROR
EXPECTED YYYY RECEIVED ZZZZ

B0182000 H

Update data word + 1.

= FFFF,

10)

If data word

go to 12.

11)

Go to 3.

12)

Repeat from 2 for two passes.

13)

Exit section.

14)

Autoload FF40B with Echo Program (simple version).

15)

Go to 2.

655-7

FF406 ECHO PROGRAM (COMPREHENSNE VERSION)

feD

YES
CLEAR PASS
FLAG FOR
FIRST PASS
YES
CLEAR TIME
FOR 12
SEC ON])
])ELAY

NO
YES
LOA]) ERROR
CO])E NO. 1

LOA}) ERROR
CO])E NO. 2

A])])

CHANNEL 8
= XDDD

HANG UP
WITH A =
XDDZ """

655 -8

" XDDD on CH.8 = Status.
"" DDDz
error code.

60182000 H

FF406 ECHO PROGRAM (COMPREHENSIVE VERSION)

fc1

i OUTPUT FFFF

! ON CHANNEL
\

i ... ~I~."
/(H.
8 CNG-.b'-n.;..;;o_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
t - ______ ---l

rcoA:-ti~R ;0
! CODE

-INPJ

•

NO.3

;

DATA

WORD

_ _ _ _ . _._0. _.

_oj

A~-

OR]) =

.....
'0

'. . '~")

FFFF

.? . "
"-~

r.::::-:L

I ~~~~ TE PASS

'YES

COUNT

LOAD ERROR

Ll:NO. S

-l

YES
I

------~

OUTPUT
])ATA

WORD

LOA]) ERROR
CO])E NO. 4
LOA]) ERROR
CO])E NO. 6

60182000 H

655-9

FF406 ECHO PROGRAM

fc2

(SIMPLE VERSION)

ENTER
{LOOP

ENTER A=2
{LOOP 2}

READ DATA WORD
FROM CHANNEL 0
AND OUTPUT TO
CHANNEL 1
SET &
CLEAR
INTERRUPT

655-10

60182000 H

Page 1 of 5

0
~

00
t\j

1700/FF406 I/O Interface Test

0
0
0

ttl

TIMER
TIMERl

TIMER2

TIMER2A

[]"'"

111
111

I:-'
I:-'

L])N
ST])
L])N
ST])
ST])
L])])
NJN
IAN
LP])
ST])
NJN
UJN
IAN
LP])
ST])
LM])
NJN
UJN
L])N
L])N
A0])
LM])
NJN
A0])
LM])

PASSCNT

TIME
TIMEl
PASSCNT
TIMER3
8
ETH0U
CHNL8
TIMER2
TIMER2A
8
ETH0U
CHNL8
CTH0U
ERRl
CHK0UT
0
0

TIME
0VERFLW
TIMERl
TIMEl
FIVE

CLEAR PASS
C0UNTER
CLEAR
TW0 W0R])
Tlr1ER
TEST PASS C0UNTER
G0 T0 BUFRFULL TEST
TEST
BUFRFULL,FUNCTI0N,RNI
JUMP 0NE SET
CONTINUE TIME 0UT TEST
SAVE
CHANNEL 8
TEST JUST BUFRFULL,FUNCTI0N
G0 T0 ERR0R #1
EXIT THIS L00P
"FILLER"

""""""""
TEST
F0R
TIMER
0VERFL0W

000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
A
B
C
])

E
F
010
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

COOO
0071
COOO
0074
0075
1071
9020
Fl08
4077
0072
900C
8014
Fl08
4077
0072
5076
9051
802])
COOO
COOO
7074
5079
9005
7075
5078

Page 2 of 5

0""
til
til
I

J::-I

TIMER3

TIMER4

CHKeUT

0')

o
......
C):)

o
ttl

NJN
IAN
LPD
STD
LDD
NJN
UJN
IAN
LPD
NJN
IAN
LPD
STD
NJN
UJN
IAN
LPD
STD
LMD
NJN
LDN
eAN
IAN
LPD
LDM

TIMERl
8
ETH0U
CHNL8
PASSCNT
ERR2
ERRl
8
8ITO
TIMER4
8
SIXTH0U
CHNL8
ERR2
TIMER2A
8
ETH0U
CHNL8
8ITO
ERR2
IFFF
1
8
ETH0U
CHNL8

C0NTINUE TIME TEST
SAVE
CHANNEL
8 AND
G0 T0
ERR0R #2
0R ERR0R #JJ
TEST
8UFRFULL
SKIP IF SET
TEST
FUNCTleN
RNI SET
JUMP IF ERR0R #2
C0NTINUE TIME TEST
SAVE
CHANNEL 8
TEST eNLY 8UFRFULL SET
G0 T0 ERR0R #2
eUTPUT
ALL eNES
TEST
FeR Ne
CHANGE

019
A
8
C
D
E
F
020
1
2
3
4
5
b
7
8
9
A
8
C
D
E

F
030
1

9005
Fl08
4077
0072
1071
9053
8051
Fl08
407C
9028
Fl08
407E
0072
9053
8014
Fl08
4077
0072
507C
9053
CFFF
FbOl
Fl08
4077
5072

Page 3 of 5

0')

0
....
00
N

0
0
0

::r!

CHKIN

0In
In
I
I:::-'

NJN
IAN
ST])
LM])
NJN
A'])
IAN
LP])
ST])
NJN
L])])
'AN
IAN
LP])
ST])
NJN
L])])
'AN
L])N
(IAN
IAN
LP])
ST])
LM])
NJN

ERR3
0

])ATA
MASK1
CHKIN
PASSCNT
8
ETH'U
CHNL8
ERR4
])ATA
1
8
ETHflU
CHNL8
ERRS
BITO
9
0

9
8
ETH'U
CHNL8
81T2
ERR6

G' T' ERR'R #3
INPUT
])ATA
TEST = FFFE
UP])ATE PASS C'UNT
TEST
CHANNEL
8 CLEAR
G' T' ERR'R 4
'UTPUT
])ATA W{lR])
TEST
CHANNEL 8
STILL CLEAR
G' T' ERR'R #5
SET
AN])
CLEAR
INTERRUPT
TEST
RNI
SET
G' T' ERR'R #6

032
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
])

E
F
040
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A

9055
F100
0070
5078
9038
7071
F108
4077
0072
905 A
1070
F601
F108
4077
0072
905C
107C
F609
COOD
F609
F108
4077
0072
507])
905E

Page 4 of 5
[J'"'

In
In
I
1:::-1

MILLS

ERRl
ERR2
ERR3

ERR4
ERR5
ERR6
ERRSTP

l\:)

o
o

tIl

LDN
STD
A0D
LMD
NJN
UJN
LDN
UJN
LDN
UJN
IAN
LPD
STD
LDN
UJN
LDN
UJN
LDN
UJN
LDN
ADD
UJN

MSDLY
MSDLY
DLY(T
MILLS
TIMER
1
ERRSTP
2
ERRSTP
8
ETHflU
(HNL8
3
ERRSTP
4
ERRSTP
5
ERRSTP
6
(HNL8

8SS

DELAY
96
US
F0R
1700
T0 RESP0ND
L0AD
ERR0R
(0DE
AND
ADD
(HANNEL
8 AND
G0 Tm
ST0P 0N
ERR0R

048
(

D
E
F
050
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
(

STOP DISPLAYING ERROR (O])E
& (HNL 8

D
E
F
060

(000
0073
7073
507A
904D
8002
(001
805F
(002
805F
Fl08
4077
0072
(003
805F
(004
805F
(005
805F
(006
2072
8060

Page 5 of 5

.....
OJ
I.\:)

0
0
0

::n

DATA
PASSCNT
CHNL8
MSDLY
TIME
TIMEl
CTHeU
ETHIU
MASKl
IVERFLW
DLYCT
FIVE
BITO
BIT2
SIXTHIU

[J"'"

til
til

l:-I
til

BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS

ass
BSS

CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN

1
1
1
1
1
1
ICOOO
IEDOO
IFFFE
IFFOD
10010

1000A
18000
12000

/6000

070
1
2
3
4

6
7
8
9

A
B
C
D
E

0
0
0
0
0
0
COOO
EOOO
FFFE
FFOO
0010
DOOA
8000
2000
6000

1700 / FF104 / 955 SYSTEM TEST
(RX1A30 Test No. 30)
I.

OPERATING PROCEDURES
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Requires a minimum of 8K 1700 with a 608 or 609. and a teletype.

The diagnostic interfaces to SMM17 only for loading.

Test parameters are accepted only from the teletype.

Complete control is given to the RX-1 monitor.

All entries are. in hexadecimal.

The standard "A. Q. A. Q." error messages are not used.

All errors are

typed on the teletype or line printer.

I
B.

LOADING PROCEDURE
1.

The standard SMM17 call for 8K is test number 30.

PARAMETERS
1.

Automatic
a.

A standard I/O table is used by the RX-1 Monitor.
are defined in the Standard I/O Table (Table 1).

All I/O parameters

Manual
a.

The Manual Interrupt button can be depressed at any time. All operations are stopped and control is transferred to the RX-1 Monitor. The
monitor will type:
NEXT JOB
I

Entry by teletype can be accomplished only after the monitor has typed
"Next Job".

"I". and rings a bell.

The monitor will wait for an input

to be typed and then a carriage return.

It is not necessary to type

spaces. All entries are right justified.
To repeat the last entrYJ type 2 carriage return.

60182000 L

656-1

Teletype input formats are:
1) W

2) A.B

A(Z). B

or
or

A. B(Z)
or
A(Z). B(Z)
3) C. D(X)=Y
where:
W=

Output. error totals (reference line not included).

S = Dump standard I/O table.
A = TTY = Teletype (in).
MTx
Mag tape unit x (in).
PTR
OCR

Paper tape reader.
955 Page Reader.

B = TTY = Teletype (out).
MTx = Mag tape unit x (out).
PTP
Paper tape punch.
LPR

Line printer.

ABC

Autoload buffer controller.

C = C = Change standard I/O table.
D = TTY = Teletype input/ output.
MTI = Mag tape input.
MTO = Mag tape output.
PTR

Paper tape reader.

PTP = Paper tape punch.
LPR

Line printer.

OCR = 955 Page Reader.
X = EQ = Equipment number.
INT
Interrupt line number.
MOD = Data handling mode.
FIL = Mag tape file number.
TFM = Mag tape format for each 16 bit 1700 word.
MRD = Mark document.
CV
= Converter number.

656-2

CCC

Line printer carriage control characters.

PAR

TTY parity select.

60182000 J

OLC = Drive on-line character correction option.
SEL = Paper tape reader terminator selector.
DPA = Document ready page advance.

= Buffer
= Mirror

BSC
POS
ADV

scan control.
position.

Line stepping.

= Line

LCT
EOL

count/ page.
Line terminate symbol.

ESP

Line terminate space count.

= Blank

BLC
RSC

line coordinate.

Line rescan count

= Cancel

(on rejects).

character.

DL
QL

Delete character.
Quantizing level.

SN2

Scan mode.

KRL

Keep reference line.

lOT

Inhibit output.

= Suppress

SLL

line locate.

x = CMP = Comparison
DeC

mode.

De-select cancel character.

= De-select

DDL

delete line character.

CPV = Character peak voltage.

= Horizontal

HLT
VLT

Vertical line thickening.

IMC

= lnitial

TMC

= Terminal mirror coordinate.
= Field/font word w = 0 - 7.
= Initial field coord. w = 0 - 7.
Terminal field coord. w = 0 -

FFw
lew
TCw
y

line thickening.

mirror coordinate.

A value for X. See I. C. 2. c. for
acceptable values.

= One
b.

of the temporary modes in the table below.
The following is an option association table that goes with the
format A(Z). B(Z). Any input device "A" in its allowable temporary
mode (Z) can be output to any output device "B" in its temporary
mode (Z).

60182000 L

656-3

OCR

(Z)

PDM
.-

Packed data mode

ASC'
Mrx
, - BCD .. BIN ..

UCD

Unpacked chtr data

SDM

Servo data mode

CPV

Chtr peak voltage

TTY BCD .. BIN .. ASC~~
PTP BCD .. BIN .. ASC
LPR BCD, BIN. ASC*

MTx

BCD, BIN, ASC

ABC'

TTY

ASC

PTR

BCD. BIN, ASC

-------------

While ASCII is the only real mode,
these entries will cause conversion to
show representative data.

The following is an as sociation table that goes with format
C, D(X)=Y; where C indicates a change in the standard I/O table
is requested. D = the device to change, (X) = the unit to change,
and Y = the actual change.

OCR

*If

656-4

Range

INIT.

Equipment no.

0 -F

INT

Interrupt line no.

1 -F

LCT

Lines/page

ADV

Stepping increment/line

0 - FF
TABLE 2

DPA

Units of .008" after 'doc. ready

·3FF

pas

Mirror retrace position

IMC

First coor. where read can start

00 - FF
00 - FF

TMC

Terminating mirror coordinate

FFw

Font selection for field w.

ICw

Initial read

TCw
RSC

Terminal read coord for field w.
Rescan count/line (on reject)

EOL

Line terminate symbol

ESP

Line terminate space count

coord~

for field w.

00 - FF
TABLE 5

00 - FF
00 - FF~'(

0 - 7
ASCII chtr. in HEX
0 -

0
0
0

0
2

a third digit , = 8, is added here, end of field codes are added.

60182000 L

DO
OCR

Range

BLC

Blank line coord.

Cancel character

ASCII chtr. in HEX

Delete line symbol

ASCII chtr. in HEX

Quantizing level

SN2

Scan mode

CMP

Compare mode

INIT.

Scan3. 1

Scan2

D = Print all. disable err. ck.
E

80
0
-A

= Print all. enable err. ch.

A = Print all errors only.
R = Print all errors when rej.
only.
S = Print all errors when sub.
only.

LPR

DCC

De~select

lOT
SLL

Suppress Line Locate

Y = Yes. N = No
Y = Yes. N = No

KRL

Keep reference line

Y = Yes. N ~ No

DDL

De-select delete line chtr. selection

CPV
HLT

Adjust chtr. peak reference
Adjust horizontal line· thickening

0
00

VLT

Adjust vertic al line thickening

MRD

Mark document on chtr. reject.

o = No

BSC
OLC

Buffer scan control
Drive OLCC option

TABLE 9
Y = Yes, N =No

Equipment no.

MOD
CCC

ASC. BIN. BCD
Carriage control characters

Equipment no.

INT

Interrupt line no.

Converter no.

cancel chtr. selection

Inhibit output

3F
1

Mark. 1 = Mark

o
o
o

ASC
Y

=Yes.

N = No

MTI
MTO

TTY
PTR

o
BCD

MOD

ASC • BIN. BCD

FIL

Mag. tape file no.

TFM

Mag. tape format/1 1700 word

PAR

Parity select

SEL

PTR terminator selector

60182000 L

= Even.

= Odd

656-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.

Set up the parameters for the desired operation via the format in (I. O. 2. 1. 1).
(See I. D. 5. for std. par.)
EXAMPLE 1:

C,OCR(EOL)=4B

This would change the existing EOL symbol from a + to a K.
EXAMPLE 2:

C, MTO(MOD)=BIN

This will change the output mag. tape mode to binary.
EXAMPLE 3:

C, MTI(EQ) =3

This will change the input mag. tape equipment number to 3.
2.

Execute the operation via the A(Z), B(Z) format in I. O. 2. a. 2)
EXAMPLE 1:

OCR(CPV), LPR

This will cause the 955 to read according to preset parameters and
direct the output to go to the line printer.

Character peak voltages

will also be output.

EXAMPLE 2:

MT1, LPR

This will cause the contents of mag. tape unit 1 to dump to the line
printer. It is recommended that the tape would have been written in
the ASCII mode to avoid time consuming conversion which may force
the tape to hang up on slow systems.
3.

The Reference Line
"When operating the OCR in a reference mode (CMP = A, E, R, or S), a
reference line will be read from the first line in the optics and output to
the teletype for examination.

To request that this line not be accepted,

depress the rubout on the TTY and another attempt will be made to get a
reference line from the 955.

If the reference line is acceptable, a

carriage return will put that line in the reference buffer as is.

If cor-

rections to that line are desirable, the following rules apply.
a.

Space to the undesired character and type in an ):~ to deiete checking
that character or, type a character to substitute for it.

When all correcting has. been completed, a carriage return will cause
the acceptance of the remainder of the reference line as is.

When correcting hand print characters, the character input via TTY,
determines the type of character to read.

For example, if an alpha

character is typed in, that character will always compare against the
alpha extraction from the data read and the alpha portion of the read
line will be output from now on for that character.

656-6

60182000 J

Upon compl etion of the reference line. it will be output to the teletype
in its corrected form and the requested operation will begin.
NOTE
In an error output only mode. the reference line
will be output for every fifth error line.
A blank (space). character substitution error will appear as an underscore in the teletype e!ror message.

A utoloading the FF 1 04

a ..
5.

MT~J

ABC

Standard (Preset) Parameters.
a.

The parameters are initially set to allow execution of autoload from
MT~

and running using the standard series of USASI test documents.

To review the standard parameters, see the column marked INIT of
the table at I. C. 2. c.

Character Peak/Servo Data
a.

Character peak is a number representing the peak voltage at chtr.
recognition time.
should always = F.

It's value ranges from 0 through F.

Ideally it

It's output format is the same as that for servo

data.
b.

Servo data represents the number of shifts in a vertical plane required to shift the character upward to the point of recognition.

It is

sent to the 1700 as a complemented value and has a range of 0 througb
37 hex.

The 1700 divides this number by 4. complements and out-

puts it following the character data in the following manner.
ABCDEFG HIJKLMNOP- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Z
77776666555444443333------------------------1*
The above values were used to illustrate the method of output and
show the servo data in a possible skew situation.

The right hand

side would be higher in the optics than the left.
~~

A false indication is -given when the character is rejected; aSj a value is
given where none was generated. i. e.. the register is not cleared.
The above values were used to illustrate the method of output and show the
servo data in a possible skew situation.
in the optics than the left.

60182000 L

The right hand side would be higher

656-7

In the FF104. servo data is used to determine topless and bottomless
data and as a guide to the degree and direction of servo necessary to
line locate.

Zone 5 (see chart) is ideal positioning for the FF104.

This falls into zones 3 and 4 of the RX1 output.
7.

Hand Print
a.

In RX1. a code is used to determine the data for extraction on each
hand-print character. It is initially set for all numeric data and can
be changed when building a reference . line. The basic hand-print data
to the 1700 is as follows:
21521421321221121°2°92°82°72°62°52°42°32°22°12°°

CODE

NUMERIC

ALPHA SYMBOL

N A S 0

VALUE

U L y D
M F M E

°
1

° C +
1 S - L

3 X

I
Z R H

5 R I

I
7 @ -@'I

8
9

8·
9

C
D

I
I

where:
E = Error
I

= Illegal

L = Low

H = High
R = Controller Reject·
High and Low
B
@ = Reject

E
F

656-8

60182000 L.

To run using hand print. change the following parameters to:
(ADV)=O
(DPA)=

(see Table 2)

(IMC)=2A
(TMC)=D4
(FFO)=7
(LCT)=O
These entries will allow continuous reading of the same line.

The

reference lme for lines F· and H must be modified at the teletype to
the correct alpha or symbol as the- basic mode of extraction is numeric.
c.

On Line Character Correction Option
The OLCC option may be d:r.:iven by entering the parameter C,
OCR (OLC) = Y.
tube.

*Each Reject Read will then be displayed on the

To continue test after each display, depress a rubout character.

A ctual character correction of rejected character is beyond the scope of RX 1.
II.

MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES
1.

BEGINRX1A30 V2.

IA = XXXX V3.1, CP03.

Initial typeout where XXXX =
2.

th~

initial address of the program.

NEXT JOB
I

The computer is waiting for an input.
3.

THE B/c IS LOADED
The FF104 has been loaded correctly.

EOF
The end of file has been depressed on the 955.
output to the standard output device.

LINES = A CHTRS.

SUB.

REJ~

Normal message 5 will be

In response to command E or an EOF from the 955. the above message
will output where. A. B. C. and Dare 8 digit decimal numbers noting the
number of lines read. characters read and compared. substitution errors.
and reject errors respectively.
6.

END OF RX-1
In response to command T. the RX1 test is terminated.

~~ A handprint reject typed and not displayed on OLCC indicates that not all extractions are
rejected.
60182000 L
656-9

I
.

COMMAND MESSAGES
1.

MANUAL INTERRUPT
The manual interrupt has been depressed.

Message II. A. 2. will now be

output.
2.

READY OR EOF
In response to the 955 going not ready.

depressed~

If the end of file is

see message II. A. 5. If the system is made ready (EOF not depressed)
normal operation will continue.

CLEAR SKIP SWITCH
The SKIP switch is set while autoloading the buffer controller.

Clear

the SKIP sw itch.
C.

ERROR MESSAGES
1.

ILLEGAL ENTRY
Self - explan atory •

MT CHECKSUM ERROR FILE NO. XX.
The output checksum does not match with the iIiput checksum.

the

tape file number.
3.

B/C CHECKSUM ERROR
A checksum error occurred while loading the FF 1 04'.

B/C FAILED TO RESPOND
The FF104 generated an external reject to a director function.

Mr DOES NOT RESPOND
The mag tape externally rejected a function.

CHECK FF104 CONV. AND EQUIPMENT NUMBER
The 1700 internally rejected when trying to function the FF 104.

Q REG. VALUE

= XXXX

The value in the Q register at the time of a reject.
8.

SYSTEM STATUS

= XXXX

The 955 system status after an error.

656-10

60182000 L

I
DATA SKEWE

~RJ

DOC. NO S

TRANS. STAT • FAULT
END OF FILE

I
RE ADY
BUSY
INT.
DATA

ALARM

CHTR.REJ~

LOST DATA

LINE DELETE

EOP

LINE LOCATE FAIL

AUTOLOAD

T 1

PROGRAM PROTECT

955 STATUS = XXXX
The 955 mechanical status after an error.
21521421321221121°2°92°82°72°62°52°42°32°22°12°°
MIRROR POSe STATUS
PARAMETER FAULT
MIRROR STOP FAULT
COORDINATE FAULT
MIRROR VELOCITY FAULT
SCAN GATE

10.

EXTERNAL REJECT
Self- explanatory.

11.

FF104 PROGRAM PROTECT SWITCH IS NOT SET
Self-explanatory.

12.

PROGRAM PROTECT FAULT AT LOCATION $XXXX
XXXX = the 1700 core location.

13.

lVIEMORY PARITY ERROR AT LOCATION $XXXX
XXXX

14.

= the

1 700 core location.

FF104 BUSY FROM START
FF104 external reject.

15.

FF104 NOT READY
Self-explanatory.

16.

DELETE LINE
Taken from 955 system status.

60182000 J

656-11

17. BLANK LINE
Taken from 955 system status

(lost data).

18. DOCUMENT NO SORT
Taken from 955 system status.
19. TRANSPORT FAULT OCCURRED THIS LINE
Taken from 955 system status.
20. LOST DATA
Taken from 955 system status.
21. LINE LOCATE AND DATA SKEW
Taken from 955 system status.
22. BLK. CH. FAIL, RUN BC2
One of 3 possible conditions exists and control is returned to the teletype.
The conditions are:
a. A reject when the status says that data is ready.
b.

A reject before the data transfer is complete.

No reject when extra data is requested.

23. MT FORMAT ERROR
Mag tape format = O.
24. UNDEFINED ALARM STATUS
An alarm status was received from the FF 1 04 but, the remaining status
does not indicate the error.
25. PRINTER ALARM
Self- explanatory.
26. AUTOLOAD REQUIRED
Taken from 955 system status.
III. TEST DESCRIPTION
A.

656-12

INITIALIZATION
1.

Load the standard set of test documents.

Put the 955 in a ready condition.

60182000 J

OPERA.TION
1.

Purpose
a.
b.

Determine the system operability.
Isolate general problem areas for further testing using the more comprehensive diagnostics.

Procedure
a. Execute the test using the A(Z).B(Z) command,s.
EX: Read and print using the standard test documents.
siderations for hand-print I. D. 7. b.) simply type:

(See special con-

OCR.LPR
b.

60182000 J

See attached flow charts for a detailed flow of OCR testing.

656-13

TABLE 1
STANDARD I/O EQUIPMENT TABLE

**************************************************************
EQUIPMENT

7
3

INTERRUPT

MODE

~:<

FORMAT
CONVERTER

~:<

7
3

*
~~

~:::

:::<

~::

1
1
*
**************************************************************

FILE

,o,c

~:c

~::

NOTE
Mode = 1 = BCD, 2 = BIN, 3 = ASCII
Format = The frame arrangement in each
1700 word. Example: 66 would represent
12 bits or 2 frames in each 1700 16-bit word.
TABLE 2.

PAGE ADVANCE

20720620~204203202201200

1 ,I

Page Advance Count
Page Advance (small step)

Enable PCl;ge Advance Increment
Ox = 6/in.
4x

= 5/in.
= 4/in.

5 1 /3 / in.

TABLE 3.· 955 TRANSPORT STATUS

Document length fault
Parameter Fault
lV5.rror POSe Stat.

MirrorStop

Fault

Coordinate Fault
Mirror Velocity Fault
Scan Gate
656-14

60182000 L

TABLE 4. ALTERNATE FONT (FF~ w

=°

21121°2°92°82°72°62°52°42°32°22°12°°

°
Case
USASI Font Select
USASI Size C
In Table 4. if 2°

= 1.

the remaining bits change their meaning as follows:

NOT USED

I-'

Hand Print SeL
Horizontal Spacing
00

= No

Space Generation

TABLE 5. ALTERNATE FONT LINE NUMBER (A02. A01)
Alternate Font Line

A02

A01

No Selection

Alternate Font Line 1

Alternate Font Line 2

Alternate Font Line 3

I
60182000 L

656-15

TABLE 6.

ALTERNATE FONT HORIZONTAL CHARACTER PITCH (A05. A04. A03)
Pitch

Size

No Select

-------

1403

10/in.

1428

Font

A05

A04

A03

10/in.

12F

10/in.

7/in

10/in.

8/in.

10/in.

NOF
E13B
OCR-B

TABLE 7.

ALTERNATE FONT HORIZONTAL CHARACTER PITCH (A04, A03)
Pitch

A04

A03

10/in.

8/in.

7/in.

Undefined

656-16

60182000 J

· TABLE B.

USASI FONT SELECT (A10, A09, AOB)

USASI FONT

A10

A09

AOB

Full USASI Select

Mark Sense

Numeric

Numeric and Control

Numeric and Alpha 5

Numeric Alpha-26 and Punctuation 1

Numeric Alpha-26 and Punctuation 2

Unused

TABLE 9.

JOURNAL TAPE CONTROL

Scan Right to Left
Reverse Buffer

601B2000 J

656-17

TABLE 10. READER AND CHARACTER CODES

7
6
5

Bit

Position

#
0

#
1

#
0

#
1

1
0

REJ

P
q

"
~

#
$

(

w
x

)

;

656-18

unused

=J:

-rta.!t.

=
r;-~
?

j
k

Y
z

&0182000 J

Column
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

Scan 3
B

Scan 2

Topless

-----

D
Topless
2

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

60182000 J

Bottomless
8

- - --Bottomless

Figure 1. Servo Data (RX1 VRS FFI04)

656-19

(DPA)

A 4 8 7 6 4 1 o 0
B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 222 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 7 7 777 7
55555 5
C 4 4 4 4 4 444
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 999 999
o 1 2 3 456 7 8 9
D 0 0 0 0 0 888 888 888 888 8 8

104

FCCCCCC

12E
158
182

G
H++++++

lAC

J 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

lD6

K 3 2 1 0 5 6

32
5C
86

S S S S S S
=

TTT T T T

XXXXX

Z Z Z Z Z

Figure 2.

00112 233 4 4 5 566 7 7 8 899
213 1 5 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Hand Print Document as Seen in RXl Reference Line

NOTE
Line K is shown as reading without space generation. If
space generation is used. many controller rejects are to
be expected. R type.

656-20

60182000

Q')

o
.....

O:l
I.\.:)

o
o

C-.t

NOTE:

•

THIS CODE IDENTI'IU THE CONTIIOL WOIID AND IS
. ADDED TO A IIEtISTEII IEFOIIE OUTPUT.

RIPII4

Q')

01
Q')

I
I.\.:)

.....

Figure 3.

Flow Chart of RX-l System Test (Sheet 1 of 5)

en
01

en
I
I.\:)
I.\:)

en
o

......
CO

NOTE:

I.\:)

o
o
o

RIPII4

Figure 3.

Flow Chart of RX-l System Test (Sheet 2 of 5)

SEE NOTE ON SHEET I

0')

o
....
ex>
t\:)

o
o
o

<:....t

0')
(Jl

0')

I
t\:)

Figure 3.

Flow Chart of RX-l System Test (Sheet 3 of 5)

m
m

(Jl

I
t\:)

IJ::.

NOTES.
ENO Of fiELD IEOfl •• ff
ENDOf LINE IEOLI •• FE
• • BOXX INDICATES HANDPIlINT
CHARACTEIII • COXX INDICATES
HANDPIlINT [1111011 CODE

....o

OJ
t\:)

o
o
o

I:...j

Figure 3.

Flow Chart of RX-l System Test (Sheet 4 of 5)
RIPII4

o
.....
CX)
t\:)

o
o
o

C-.t

01
0)

I
t\:)

Figure 3.

Flow Chart of RX-l System Test (Sheet 5 of 5)

scI 1700/955

MODULE TEST
(LDRA32 Loader and RX3A33 Test No. 33)
1.

OPERATING
A.

PROCEDURE):~

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Requires an 8K 1700 with a 609 or 608 MT and a teletype.

The diagnostic interfaces to SMM17 only for loading.

Test parameters are accepted only from teletype.

Manual parameters must be terminated with the BC equipment code.

Entries performed after a parameter request must be terminated with a CR.

Module tests may not be run in an off line mode unless the system includes
a maintenance console.

LOADING PROCEDURE
The standard SMM17 calls as test number 32.

See Appendix A for loading

procedure.
Following the inftial test typeout [BEGIN RX -3 1700/FR101/955
MODULE TESTS (IA=XXX)] the program will request module selection by typing:
SMX=Y
The operator should now define the BC equipment code (X) before selecting the
desired module (Y).
Module Number 1
Module Number 2

Electronic Read and Verify Test
Page and Document Handling Test

Module Number 3

Operator Panel Test

Module Number 4

Mirror Test

Module Number 5

Handprint Electronic Read and Verify
NOTE

Modules 1-4 are on auxiliary 1 tape and module 4 is
on auxiliary 2 tape.
After module selection the program will request the BC interrupt line by typing:
BIX=Y
Where X = the buffer controller equipment number and Y = its

interrupt line.

):~A

more detailed procedure can be found in the CJ122 Maintenance Manual Volume.
48430080.

60182000

657-1

AUTOLOADING MODULE PROCEDURE

Select Automatic Parameter

(AP)

Upon selection, the program will set up the Standard 110 Equipment Table
(see Table 1»):o~ and the Automatic Parameter Table to run the selected
module.

See Table 2 for Electronic Read and Verify and Table 3 for

Page and Document Handling Automatic Parameters.
The Standard 110 Equipment Table and the Automatic Parameter Table
assigned to the selected module may be changed at any time by qsing the
Manual Interrupt button on the teletype.
The program upon sensing the
Manual Interrupt button depressed will complete the function currently in
progress and return program control to the monitor.
type:

The monitor will

ENTER PARAMETER
The operator should now define a parameter.
See Table 4 for Common Manual Parameters
See Table 5 for Electronic Read and Verify
See Table 6 for Page and Document Handling
See Table 7 for Mirror Test
NOTE
If the mag. tape driver is a 659, select TD parameter.
(See Appendix B Section 28. )

2.
D.

Select autoload parameter (AL):'). See Appendix B.

MODULE 1 OPERATING PROCEDURE

Electronic Read and

Verify):o:o~

If using the automatic parameters:

Define font (DF*).

See Table 9.

Define data, subset, or font

(DD~',

SS~',

LF~c).

See Appendix B, Section B.

):'Buffer controller equipment code.
):'):'Tables begin at the end of this test.
):o:o:'For sync purpose, use general sync 1 or read.

657-2

60182000

If not using the automatic parameters (see Appendix B,

Define image position and read mode

b.
c.
d.
e.

Define read parameters
Define repetitions
Define output device
Define font

f.
g.

Define data
Execute test

Section B):

(IP~:c)

(RP>;c)
(RE~:c)

(OT>o\

OP~:c,

OM~:c)

(DF*)
(DD~:c,

SS~:c,

LF*)

(EX~:c)

Recirculate Image Test (RI) ~:o:o:c

a.
3.

Define image to be recirculated.

Load and Shift Register Test (SR)>o'c>;c
a.

Select data pattern no. (see Table 11).

Set 955 DUMP switch to INPUT.

Press 955 READY switch.

The Load Register Test is now in progress.
To terminate the Load
Register Test and begin the Shift Register Test do the following:
a.

Press 955 STOP switch.

Set 955 DUMP switch to OUTPUT.

Press 955 READY switch.

To terminate the SIR test press STOP switch.
4.

Quick Look Test
a.

(QL~:c)

Purpose
To obtain a quick summary of the 955 electronic reading capabilities
on standard and optional fonts.

Restrictions
Repetition parameter may not be zero since zero repetitions means to
read the selected font indefinite.

~:cBuffer

controller equipment code.

>;o:cFor sync purpose use general sync 2 or read.
***For sync purpose use general sync 2.

60182000

657-3

Operating Procedure
1)

Define repetitions (RE):c).

If optional fonts are going to be tested and this is the first time,

define font enable lines (RP>:c).
3)

Select quick look parameter. (QL*).

See quick look specifications

in Appendix B under Electronic Read and Verify Manual Parameters.
5.

OLCC (On Line Character Correction) Test (LC>',c)
a.

Purpose
To align and troubleshoot the OLCC device.

Operating Procedure
1)

Autoload Module 1 (AL*).

Select

LC)~

parameter.

In response to

"LC'~="

enter (CR) or A (CR).

(CR) leaves all

parameters unchanged and begins the test. A (CR) sets up the
following automatic parameters and begins the test.
c.

OLCC Automatic Parameters
1)

Font = ANSI medium

Character images A through E

Image position = bottom

Character pitch = 7 clear columns

Dino time = 2 seconds (see Appendix B, Section B-11) (DT>:c)

Column count = 35

(see Appendix B, Section B-12) (CC*)
NOTE

Change any of the automatic parameters specified
above at any time.
EXAMPLE 1:

Character images changed from A- E to F- J.

MI (Manual Interrupt)

b.
c.

Select SS':c parameter and define F-J subset
Enter LC* (CR)

*Buffer controller equipment code.

657-4

60182000

EXAMPLE 2:

The Dino time changed to 5seconds.-

a.
b.

MI (Manual Interrupt)
DT~~ = 5000 (CR)

LC* (CR)
NOTE
Change all the parameters back to automatic at
any time as follows:

MI (Manual Interru}JI.'

(CR)

Theory of Operation
The RX3 module 1 upon receiving the command to start the test,
begins to load the images (one column at a time) to the Shift register.
When the program detects that the column just loaded to the Shift
register is equivalent to the column count (CC*) parameter, it sets
the Dino signal and continues to output the remaininR character images.
After the last column of data has been outputted the program checks
the Dino time (DT>:~) parameter. If it is set to zero, the program
will leave the Dino signal set and goes into an idle loop where it
awaits new instructions from the operator. If the Dino time is set
to non zero, the program will leave the Dino signal up for the duration
of the Dino time parameter before dropping the Dino signal and
repeating the test.

Servo Data Test
a.

Purpose
The purpose of the Servo Data Test is:
1)

Verify the accuracy of the Serve Data Count in determining the
accurate position of an image within Ithe Shift register.

~:~Buffer

Check Topless logic.

Check Top Scrub logic.

Check Bottomless logic.

controller equipment code.

60182000

657-5

Operating Procedure
(AL>:~).

Autoload module 1 to BC

Define Servo Data Test font (DF*=SDTST).

Define repetitions

Execute Test. (EX*).

(RE):~=100).

Theory of Operation
The RX3/Module 1 upon receiving the command to begin the Servo
Data Test, will read the Servo Data Image Font, which consists of
39 character images.

After the 39 images have been read, the

RX3 / Module 1 transfers to the RX3 / 1700 monitor the Character
Voltage, Character Data, and Servo Data.

The RX3/ 1700 monitor

performs the Topless check, the Top Scrub check, Servo Data check,
and Bottomless check.

Any failure will now be reported with an

appropriate message.

The Servo Data Test will be performed 100

times.

Upon completion the RX3/ 1700 monitor will display the End

of Test message.
E.

MODULE 2 OPERA TING PROCEDURE

>:~Buffer

657-6

Light Sensor Test
a.

Select subtest number 1 (ST*)

Define repetition

(RE>:~)

Execute test

(EX>~)

Dark Sensor Test (Sort of Pocket 1)
a.

Select subtest number 2

(ST):~)

Define repetitions

(RE>:~)

Execute test

(EX>:~)

Put one document on the feed-up table

Press 955 READY switch

Wait for STOP indicator to set

Repeat from step d

controller equipment code.

60182000

Dark Sensor Test (Sort of Pocket 2)
a.

Select subtest number 3

(ST):~)

Define repetition

(RE*)

Execute test

(EX*)

Put one document on the feed-up table

Press 955 READY switch

Wait for STOP indicator to set

Repeat from step d-

Transport Speed Test (Check points RZ and SST1)

Select subtest number 4

(ST~~)

Define repetitions

(RE*)

Define feed parameters

(FP~r)

Execute test

(EX*)

Put one document on the feed-up table

Press 955 READY switch

Transport Speed Test (Check points RZ and SST2)

Select subtest number 5 (ST):<)

b. - Define repetitions

(RE):<)

Define feed parameters

(FP*)

Execute test

(EX):<)

Put one document on the feed-up table

Press 955 READY switch

Transport Slippage Test (Not Available)

)::c)

Define sort parameters

(SP>:c)

Exec ute test

(EX*)

Place documents in the hopper

Press 955 READY switch

MODULE 3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
a.

Execut~

Test (EX):c)

The Indicator Test is now :in ,progress. The operator should now observe
the indicators flashing sequence. The flashing sequence is Top to Bottom,
Left to Right.
To terminate the indicator test and begin the 955 Switch Test, perform
step b.
b.

Press the EOF (End of File) Switch
All the indicators should now be on and they should remain on for as long
as the EOF switch is depressed. Upon release of the EOF switch, all
the indicators should clear and the Switch Test begins.
The module will now begin to flash one of the switches to be tested.

The

operator should now press that switch. The indicator corresponding to
the switch which is being tested, will continue to flash if the module does
not detect the switch depressed. If the module detects the switch depressed,
it will light the indicator and leave it on for as long as the operator holds
the switch down. Upon release of the switch under test, the module begins
to flash the next switch to be tested. Upon completion of the Switch Test
the module repeats the test all over again.

)~Buffer

657-8

controller equipment code.

60182000

MODULE 4 OPERATING PROCEDURE

Define mirror coordinates (MC>!').
The operator should define only the Forward coordinate

if the mirror

must be reversed with a Zero Mirror command.
This is accomplished
by entering a (CR) when the RX3/1700 monitor requests the REVMC.

(EX~:').

Execute test

Press 955 READY switch.

MODULE 5 OPERATING PROCEDURE
1.

If using the automatic parameters:
(DF~~)

Define Handprint font

(see Table 13)

b.'

Define Data, Subset or Load font

Execute test

(DD~~,

SS~~.

LF:.")

(EX~~)

Automatic parameters for module 5 are as follows:

~:'Buffer

60182000

On- Line Mode

Standard Output Device (TTY)

Co'

Normal Output Level

d.'

Character Pitch = 3

Test Is Set To Run Indefinite

If not us ing the automatic parameters:

Select the output device (OT*. OP>!', OM*)

Define character pitch

(RP~~)

Define repetitions

(RE~:')

Define Handprint font (DF*) (see Table 13)

Define Data, Subset or Load font (DD>:',

Define the output level (EO>:'. SO*)

SS~~.

LF>!')

controller equipment code.

657-9

Quick Look Operating Procedure
(RE~{)

Define repetitions

number range 1- 65 000.

Select Quick Look parameter

(QL~~).

See Quick Look Specifications in

Appendix B, under Electronic Read and Verify.

II.

MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES

BEGIN RX-3 1700/FR101/955 MODULE TESTS lA-600
Initial typeout.

600 is the initial address of the program.

ENTER PARAMETER
The RX- 3 monitor has control and is awaiting an input from

teletyp~.

THE BC IS LOADED
The selected module has been loaded to the FR101 and the checksums
are correct.

END OF TEST

COMMON ERROR MESSAGES

ONA (Option Not Available)

MT DOES NOT RESPOND
The program received an external reject while trying to connect the MT.
Verify MT equipment code and unit number.

MT STATUS ERROR
The program has detected a parity error.

ILLEGAL AUX. TAPE

BC/X FAILED TO REPLY ON FUNCTION RELOAD BC/X
The 1700 program is unable to communicate to Be/X.

The program

requests that BC/X be reloaded.
NOTE
Verify BC interrupt line.

*Buffer controller equipment code.

657-10

60182000

CHECKSUM ERROR
The checksum computed on the module while being loaded to the FR101 is
not equal to the checksum computed during the transfer of the module from
the FR101 to the 1700 program.

INCORRECT REPLY FROM BC/C RELOAD BC/X
The module residing in BC/X has lost control.
correct reply to the 1700 program.

It is not sending the

ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY ERROR MESSAGES
All error messages are prefaced by RX-3 MOD/Y/X; where X is the BC
equipment code, and Y the module number.

NO DATA RDY RESP. ON X
The image of the character X was not responded by the 955 DATA READY
switch in the time in which the image was centered in the matrix.
(Make
sure that the switch on the 955 is SIMULATED DATA and not on OPTICAL
DATA. )

CONTINOUS DATA READY X
The image of the character X generated more than one data ready.

(The

op.erator should now suppress character data ready (SD) in order to be able
to continue with the test and determine cause of data ready failure.)
3.

CHARS-READY = XXXXXXXX ERR = YYYYYYYY REJ = ZZZZZZZZ
REF.
ERR.

LINE=
LINE=

VOLT.

LINE=

The above printout occurs whenever images are misread or rejected.
(X) is the total number of images read including those which are either
misread or rejected.
(Y) is the total number of images misread.
(Z) is the total number of images rejected.
The characters contained in the error line corresponding to the reference
line represent the images which were either rejected or misread.
Those
which were rejected are indicated with a character typeout. A question
mark (?) in the error line may indicate that the 955 generated an illegal
character code (not an ANSel code) on the image indicated by the character
in the reference line.

60182000

657-11

LIR FAILED
EXP PA TRN=XXXXXXXXXXXXXX~~YXXXXXXXXXXXXXX~~Y
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX~:~YXXXXXXXXXXXXXX~~Y

The pattern as indicated above is divided into four groups of 14 bits (X).
Each group is separated by (~~Y) where Y is the control code.

SiR FAILED
EXP PA TRN=XXXXXXXXXXXXXX):~YXXXXXXXXXXXXXX~~Y
YXXXXXXXXXXXXX*YXXXXXXXXXXXXXX~~Y

REC PATRN=(SAME AS ABOVE)
6.

COLUMN READY FAILED
The Column Ready signal from the reader to the BC is not changing state.
It is constant zero.

TOPLESS, NO REJECT
The reader has not generated a Reject on a Topless condition.

REJECT, NO TOPLESS
The reader has not generated Topless condition status.

NO TOPLESS, NO REJECT
The reader has neither generated a Topless condition nor a Reject.

10.

TOP SCRUB LOGIC FAILED
The reader failed to scrub the black data from the Top Scrub image and
in consequence, the image was not read as a space.

11.

BOTTOMLESS, NO REJECT
The reader has not generated the reject on a Bottomless condition.

12.

REJECT, NO BOTTOMLESS
The reader has not generated Bottomless Status condition.

13.

NO BOTTOMLESS, NO REJECT
Neither Reject nor Bottomless Status was generated.

657-12

60182000

14.

SERVO DATA

500000000111111111122222222223333333

EXPECTED

723456789012345678901234567890123456

SERVO DATA
RECEIVED
The servo data received is not equal to the Servo Data expected.
D.

PAGE AND DOCUMENT HANDLING TEST ERROR MESSAGES
All error messages are prefaced by RX-3, MOD/X/Y/Z where (X) is the
module test number, (Y) is the BC equipment code, and (Z) is the subtest
number.

Subtest Number 1 Error Message
955 SENSOR STATUS XXXX EXP X REC Y
The underscored portion specifies the sensor being tested.
READ ZONE

RZ
SE

SORT ENTRY

= DOUBLE

SST1

= SORT

DETECTOR

STATION 1

SST2

SORT STATION 2

SPF1

SORT POCKET FULL 1

SPF2

SORT POCKET FULL 2

Subtest Numher 2 Error Messages
Subtest number 2 messages are the same as those in subtest number 1.
Subtest number 2 however, feeds and sorts a document in the primary
pocket checking Read Zone, Sort Entry, and Sort Station 1 for an
uncovered to covered and uncovered condition.

Subtest Number 3 Error Messages
Subtest number 3 messages are the same as those used in subtest number 1.
Subtest number 3 however, feeds and sorts a document in the secondary
sort pocket checking Read Zone, Sort Entry, Sort Station 1, and Sort
Station 2 for an uncovered to covered and uncovered condition.

60182000

Subtest 4 Error Messages

DOC. VEL. AT RZ EXP XX. XX REC XX. XX INCHES/SEC.

DOC. VEL. AT SST1 EXP 75.00 REC XX. XX INCHES/SEC.

657-13

Subtest 5 Error Messages
a.
b.

DOC. VEL. AT RZ. EXP XX. XX REC XX.XX INCHES/SEC
DOC. VEL. AT SST2 EXP 75.00 REC XX.XX INCHES/SEC

Subtest 6 Error Messages
a.

FWD SLIPPAGE XX CONVEYOR COUNTS

b.
c.

REV SLIPPAGE XX CONVEYOR COUNTS
TRANS-MOTION = FSTOP
XX FPNZV=XX FDWELL=XX
RSTOP = XX RPNZV=XX RDWELL=XX

FSTOP (forward stop) is the transport coordinate or conveyor counts
recorded from the time read zone sensor was covered by a document.
The transport speed was changed to 5 IPS and allowed to drop to 5 IPS
and finally the forward motion was stopped.
FPNZV (forward page near zero velocity) is the difference between the
FSTOP coordinate and FPNZ V representing the number of conveyor counts
elapsed since forward motion was stopped, until PNZV was sensed.
FDWELL (forward dwell) is the difference between FPNZV and FDWELL
coordinates representing the number of conveyor counts in which the transport
moved from the time PNZV was sensed until after a 5 second delay.
RSTOP (reverse stop) is the transport coordinate or conveyor counts in
which the document was reversed before motion was stopped.
RPNZV (reverse page near zero velocity) is the difference between Stop
and RPNZV coordinates representing the number of conveyor counts elapsed
since reverse motion was stopped until PNZV was sensed.
RDWELL (reverse dwell) is the. difference between ,RPNZV and RD.WELL
coordinates representing the numbers of conveyor counts in which the transport
moved from the time RPNZV was sensed until after a 5 second delay.
The above message will be presented to the operator whenever the program
detects document slippage and the difference between either FSTOP and
FDWELL or RSTOP and RDWELL is less than or greater than 4.
Example:

FSTOP=40 FPNZV=42 FDWELL=45 means that 40 conveyor

counts after read zone was seen covered forward motion was stopped.
Two counts later PNZV was sensed, and during the 5 seconds dwell time
the. trans port moved three more counts forward.

657-14

60182000

Procedure To Recover From System Shutdown (Subtest 7)
a.

Hopper Empty
1)

Press the EOF (end of file) switch.
The END OF TEST message will now be displayed on the output
device.

The system will now be idling until a new EX command

is performed.
The throughput rate may now be requested by
using the (ET) manual parameter.
b.

Transport Check Or Misfeed
1)

Remove document which caused the jam.

Remove documents from feed-up table.

Press READY switch.

Wait for STOP indicator to light.

Replace documents in the feed-up table.

Press READY switch.

Sort Check
1)

Remove all documents from sort area.

Press READY switch.

Sort Pocket Full
1)

Empty sort pockets.

Press READY switch.

Doubles
1)

Remove double documents.

Remove documents from feed-up table.

Press READY switch.

Wait for STOP indicator to light.

Replace documents on the feed-up table.

Press STOP switch and READY switch.

MODULE 3 ERROR MESSAGES
Module 3 being strictly an off-line test does not have error messages.

60182000

657-15

MODULE· 4 ERROR MESSAGES
1.

MNZV NOT GENERATED WITHIN 10 MSEC FOLLOWING STOP COMMAND.

MIRROR COUNT OR VELOCITY FAULT XXXX (XXXX=STATUS)
1000= mirror velocity fault and 0020= mirror count fault.

ENCODER COUNT EXP 00 REC XX
The Encoder was expected to be zero when the mirror was out of Scan
Gate.

XX is the actual status.

FWD MIRROR COUNT FAULT
Mirror count fault detected after the mirror reached the forward coordinate.

FWD·.COORD ACT=XXXX MNZV=YYYY DWELL=ZZZZ
The mirror moved more than three coordinates from the time Scan Forward
command was dropped until after the Dwell time.

SCAN FWD MIRROR SPEED ~~ EXP 75. 00 REC XX. XX INCHES/SEC.

REV. MIRROR COUNT FAULT
Mirror count fault detected after the mirror reached the reverse coordinate.

REV. COORD MDPNT=WWWW ACT=XXXX MNZV=YYYY DWELL=ZZZZ
The mirror moved more than three coordinates following Stop command.

REV. PULSES REC. IN FWD. MOTION X- Y
Encoder generated reverse pulses while the mirror was scanning forward.
X is the ENCODER status before reverse pulses were detected and Y after.

10.

ENCODER COUNT OUT OF SEQUENCE (FWD) X-Y
Encoder count incremented by more than 1.

X is the encoder status

before it went out of sequence and Y after.
11.

FWD. PULSES REC. IN REV. MOTION X-Y
Encoder generated forward pulses while the mirror was in a reverse
motion.

X is the encoder status before the forward pulses occurred and

Y after.
12.

ENCODER COUNT OUT OF SEQUENCE (REV) X-T
Eocoder count decremented by more than 2.

X is the encoder status

before it went out of sequence and Y after.

657-16

60182000

MODULE 5 ERROR MESSAGES

NO DATA RESP. ON X
The image indicated by X was not responded by the 955 data ready within
the time in which the image was centered in the matrix ~~.

CONTINUOUS DATA READY X
The image indicated by the character X generated more than one data
ready.
(SD*).

To restart and determine data ready failure, suppress data ready

RX3/MOD/5/X:

HANDPRINT REV. X~ Y

CHARS READ=XXXXXXXX ERR=XXXXXXXX

SUB=XXXXX~X

REJ=XXXXXXXX

REF. LINE=
NUMERIC=
ALPHA=
SYMBOL=
The above printout occurs whenever an error, substitution, or reject is
detected.
4.

Use manual parameter

(SO>~)

to suppress printout.

COLUMN READY FAILED
The column ready signal from the reader to the BC is not changing state.
It is either a constant 1 or a constant

III. OFF LINE MODE OPERATING PROCEDURE
A.

ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY ERROR HALTS
If the SELEC TIVE STOP switch on the maintenance console is set, the module
will come to a halt under six conditions.
This is determined by examining

the contents of the A register on the maintenance console.

End of Test A Register = 0000
The module has read the selected set of images the requested number of
times.
To r'epeat the test the operator should now enter in A register
the number of repetitions (zero for indefinite) and pres s the GO button.

l:~Verify

SIM/ OPT switch on the 955 back panel, it should be on SIM.

60182000

657-17

Continuous Data Ready A Register = XX40
The 955 is generated more than one character data ready for every image
being read.

XX is the number of character data ready generated.

continue enter in the A register 0001 to suppress character data ready
and 0000 to enable character data ready.
3.

Press the GO button.

No Data Ready Response A Register = OOXX
The 955 has failed to give out the ASCII code on the image indicated by
XX ASCII code.

To restart the module press GO.

Character Image Rejected A Register

= XX40

The image indicated by XX ASCII code was rejected by the 955.

continue press GO.
5.

Character Image Misread A Register = XXyy
The 955 misread the image indicated by ASCII code.

YY is the ASCII

code given out by the 955.
6.

Load Register Test Failed A Register = OOCO
The Load register failed to give out the same pattern.
expected pattern press the GO button four times.
more times to verify the pattern received.

Shift Register Test Failed A Register

To verify the

Press the Go button four

To repeat the test press go.

01CO

The pattern changed while going through the Shift register.
button four times to verify the expected pattern.

Press the GO

Press four more times to

verify the pattern received.
B.

PAGE AND DOCUMENT HANDLING TEST ERROR HALTS

OPERATOR PANEL TEST ERROR HALTS

657-18

60182000 J

MIRROR TEST ERROR HALTS
If the SELEC TIVE STOP switch on the maintenance console is not set, the
If the switch is

program will bypass all m1rror failures which might occur.

set, the program upon detecting a mirror fault will come to a halt displaying
in the A register the error halt number.

Additional information on some of

the error halts are obtained by pressing the GO button and observing the
contents of A.

ERROR HALT NUMBER 0 = SCAN FORWARD SPEED FAULT
The mirror speed was not 75 inches per second as expected.
GO button A=expected msec count.

Press the

Press -it again A=actual msec count

in which the Scan Forward command was up.
2.

ERROR HALT NUMBER 1 = MNZV FAILED
Mirror near zero velocity was not generated within 10 msec following
Stop Mirror command.

ERROR HALT NUMBER 2 = MIRROR ,COUNT OR VELOCITY FAULT
Mirror status error.
Press GO; A= mirror
fault, 0020=mirror count fault.

statu~,

1000=mirror velocity

ERROR HALT NUMBER 3 = MIRROR ENCODER FAILED
Press GO.
If A =OOOX

A will contain the ENCODER status.
The ENCODER count was not zero as expected when mirror
was out of Scan Gate.

If A=01XV

X=Encoder Count.

Reverse pulses were received in forward motion.

X=Encoder

count status before reverse pulses occurred and Y after.
If A=02XY

Encoder count out, of sequence (FWD).
incremented by more than 1.

The encoder

X=Encoder count status

before it went out of sequence and Y after.
If A=03XY

Forward pulses were received in reverse motion.

X=Encoder

count before forward pulses were detected, and Y after.
If A=04XY

Encoder decremented by more than 1.

X=Encoder status

before it went out of sequence and Y after.
5.

ERROR HALT NUMBER 4 = FWD MIRROR COUNT FAULT
Mirror count fault detected after the mirror reached the forward
coordinate'.

60182000

657-19

ERROR HALT NUMBER 5

FWD COORDINATE FAULT

The mirror moved more than three coordinates from the Time Scan Forward
command was dropped until after the dwell time.
Go A = Forward Coordinate
Go A = MNZV Coordinate
Go A
7.

= Dwell

Coordinate

ERROR HALT NUMBER 6

= REV

MIRROR COUNT FAULT

Mirror count fault detected after the mirror reached the reverse coordinate.
8.

ERROR HALT NUMBER 7

= REVERSE

COORDINATE FAULT

The mirror went behind the reverse coordinate by more than three
coordinates following Stop command.
Go A = Midpoint Coordinate
Go A

Reverse Coordinate

Go A = MNZ V Coordinate
Go A
E.

= Dwell

Coordinate

HANDPRINT ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY ERROR HALTS
All error halts will be bypassed if the SELECTIVE STOP swich on the
maintenance console is not set.

NO DATA READY RESPONSE A

OOXX

Where XX is the ASCII code corresponding to the image which failed to
generate Data Ready.

To suppress data ready clear A register.

Press

GO button.
2.

CONTINUOUS DATA READY A = 0140
To suppress Data Ready, clear A register.

ERROR, SUBSTITUTION OR REJECT DETECTED
A register

= OOXX
= OOXX
= OOXX

(Expected ASCII code) Press GO
(NUMERIC code)
(ALPHA code)

OOXX (SYMBOL code)

657-20

Press GO button.

Press GO
Press GO
Press GO

60182000

TABLE 1.
MTI
7

STANDARD I/O EQUIPMENT TABLE
MTO
7

TTY

LP
F

Equipment ~:~

,:~

Interrupt

>:~

>.'c

~'c

:::c:

Mode

::!::

:::::

>:::

:::'

Format

:::::

466

:::::

466

::!::

:::::

Converter

:::::

::!::

:::::

::!::

-,-_,-

Unit Number
Drum

:::::

::!(;

_,.,..

::!::

>:::

_t.

'I-

Common Automatic Parameters
Output Device
Output

TTY

Normal

Repetitions = Zero or Indefinite

TABLE 2.
Character Pitch

ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY AUTOMATIC PARAMETERS

Read Mode

Normal

Character Peak = 12
Font Enable = ANSI
Character Data Ready Enabled
Image Position

60182000

TOP

657-21

TABLE 3.
Document Length
Transport Speed
Sort Sequence
Subtest

PAGE AND DOCUMENT HANDLING AUTOMATIC PARAMETERS
13 Inches

= 20

Inches/Sec.

Primary - Secondary

=7
TABLE 4.

COMMON MANUAL PARAMETERS

AL):~I

Autoload Module to FR101

AP):~

Automatic Parameters

BD):~

= Buffer Controller Dump

Buffer Controller Equipment

BE):~

BP:~

= Buffer Controller Interrupt

DR):~

= Data Receive From Controller

DS):~

= Data Send to Controller

EC):~

= Enable Controller Communication (On Line Mode)

EO>:~

= Enable Controller Output

EX):~

Execute Module

ME):~

Mag Tape Equipment
Mag Tape Interrupt

MP:~
OM):~

Output to Mag Tape

OP):~

Output to Printer

OT):~

PC):~

Output to Teletype
Punch From Core

PD*

Printer Drum

PE):~

Printer Equipment

PP:~

RE*

Printer Interrupt
= Repetitions

SC):~

Suppress Controller Communication

SM)~

Select Module

SO):~

= Suppress Controller Output

Mag Tape Converter

TC):~
TM):~

= Terminate Module

Mag Tape Unit Number

TN):~
XT):~
TD):~

Exit From Test to SMM17
= Tape Driver Select

):~Buffer

657-22

controller equipment code.

60182000

TABLE 5.
DD~~
DF~~

= Error

QL>:~

Totals

Image Pos ition And Read Mode
Load Font

IP~:'
LF~:~

Define Data
Define Font
Enable Character Data Ready

ED~~
ET~:~

ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY MANUAL PARAMETERS

=
= Quick

SD*

Look Test
Recirculate Image
= Read Parameters
Suppress Character Data Ready

SR~~

= Shift Register Test

SS*

= Select

RP:~

RP~:~

Subset

TABLE 6.
ET~c
FP~c
Sp~:c

ST*

PAGE AND DOCUMENT HANDLING MANUAL PARAMETERS

= Error Totals.
= Feed Parameters
= Sort Parameters
= Subtest

TABLE 7.
MC*

MIRROR TEST MANUAL PARAMETERS

Mirror Coordinates

>:cBuffer controller equipment code.

60182000

657-23

TABLE 9.

IMAGE FONT SELECTION

Type the full name of the font desired.
ANSI Thin

Thin

ANSI Medium

Medium

ANSI Thick

Thick

RABINOW Thin

12F

Thin

RABINOW Medium

12F

RABINOW Thick

Medium
12F . Thick

1428 Thin
1428 Medium

NOF Thin
NOF Medium

1428 Thick

NOF Thick

1403 Thin

OCR-B71 Thin

1403 Medium

OCR-B71 Medium

1403 Thick

OCR-B71 Thick

E13-B Thin

Lower Case Medium

E13-B Medium
E13-B Thick

657-24

SDTST (Servo Data Test)

60182000

TABLE 10.

FONT ENABLE

Recognition
Control Lines

Signal

Character Enabled

0
1
2
3

Mark Sense
USASI Numeric
USASI Control
USASI Alpha 5

ZERO and CANCEL

USASI Alpha 21
USASI Punct. 1
USASI Punct. 2
Optical Scaling

A, B, D-R. U- W. Y

5
6
7

1 - 9

CHAIR, FORK, HOOK
C, S, T. X, Z
.$-?&%:=+()?
','
'"

ALT. Font 1
ALT. Font 2
ALT. Font 3

TABLE 11.

SHIFT REGISTER TEST PATTERNS

00100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000100

00101010101010101010101010101010101010101010101010101010000

00111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100

00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

60182000 J

657-25

TABLE 12.

955 TRANSPORT MODULE SUBTESTS

Light Sensor Status Test

Dark Sensor Status Test

(Sort Station 1)

Dark Sensor Status Test

(Sort Station 2)

Transport Speed Test

(Sort Station 1)

Transport .Speed Test

(Sort Station 2)

Document Slippage Test

Feed - Sort Throughput Rate

657:-26

60182000

TABLE 13.

HANDPRINT IMAGES FONT LIBRARY LIST

Font Name

Contents

ENCODER (complete HP set)
HPO (0 char. set)
HP1 (1 char. set)

0123456789@

HP2 (2 char. set)

22222

HP3 (3 char. set)

3333333333333333333333

HP4 (4 char. set)
HP5 (5 char. set)

444444

HP6 (6 char. set)
HP7 (7 char. set)

6666666666666

HP8 (8 char. set)
HP9 (9 char. set)

8888888888888888888

HPC (C char. set)
HPS (S char. set) .

CCCC
sss

HPT (T char. set)

TTTTTTTTT

HPX (X char. set)

XXXXXXXXXXXX

HPZ (Z char. set)

ZZZZZ

HP+ (+ char. set)

+++++++++++++

CSTXZ@ +-1 +HEL@

0000
1111111111

55555555
7777777777
999999999999

HP- (- char. set)
HP= (= char. set)
HPM

char. set)

.III

(field mark)

N REJECTS
A REJECTS
S REJECTS
HPE1
HPE7
USA@
GOTHIC
BLACK GOODIES
SUPER GOODIES
FEATURES
FLATS/SLOPES
SPLITS/ JOINS
NOTE

1. When selecting font, spell full name as it appears
in the font list.
2.

60182000

Except for the ENCODER, font selection of a specific
character image or subset is illegal. Use (LF~:<)
manual parameter.
657-27

APPENDIX A
A.

Manually load the following bootstrap.
1FCO = 681B

1FCD = 02FE

1FC1 = EOOO
1FC2 = 0382

1FCE = OFCC
1FCF = 7COC

1FC3 = CODa
1FC4 = 0404

1FDO = 02FE
1FD1 = OFC6

1FC5 = 03FE
1FC6 = 09FB

1FD2 = BC09
1FD3 = 7C08

1FC7 = ODFE
1FC8 = 03FE

1FD4 = 02FE

1FC9 = OF42
1FCA= 03FE

1FD6 = 6C05
1FD7 = D804

1FCB = ODFE
1FCC = OAOO

1FD8 = 0101
1FD9 = 18F2

1FD5 = BC06

Set SELECTIVE STOP and SELECTIVE SKIP switches.

Set P = 1FCO

Run and set up stopping.
First Stop:

Q = 0205 and Run

Second Stop: A = 08BO Q = 0381 Run
The TTY will reply by typing:
SMM17 ED. 2. 3
BUILD TEST LIST
Third Stop: A = 3201 Q = 0381. Run.
Fourth Stop: Clear A register and SELECTIONSKIP switch.

657-28

Run.

60182000

APPENDIX B
A.

COMMON MANUAL PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS
1.

AL~:~

BD*

BE~:~

Change Be equipment code (l-F)

BP:~

Define BC interrupt line (I-F)

DR~:~

The monitor will type:

= Select autoload mode

(H=Hardware, S=Software)

FWA = (Define FR101 dump starting address)
The monitor will type:
LWA = (Define FR101 dump terminating address)
DS~:~

7•

= The monitor will type:
ADR = (Define core location to be changed)
The monitor will type:
XXXX = (Define FR101 change)
Terminate change with a comma (,) for sequential store and with
a period (.) for single store.
To terminate update type STOP.

EO~:~

10.

EX~:~

11.

ME~:~

Select MT equipment code (l-F)

12.

MP:~

Select MT interrupt line (l-F)

13.

OM~:~

Define file number (l-F)

15.

OT~:~

16.

PC~:~

17.

PD ~:~

Select printer drum

18.

PE~:~

Select printer equipment code

(O=OCR, S=Standard)
(l-F)

Select printer interrupt line (l-F)
~:CBuffer

controller equipment code.

60182000

657-29

20.

RE~:~

21.

SC~~

Define repetition

(0- 65, 500)

Upon selection the program changes from On- Line Mode to Off-'Line
Mode and the test is restarted.
22.

SM>~

The operator should now select a module (1-5)

Upon selection the program changes the output level to suppress and the
test is restarted.

No error messages will now be displayed.

24.

TC ~~ = Select MT converter code (0- F)

25.

TM~~

26.

TN~~

Select MT unit number (0-7)

27.

XT~~

Call SMM17 loader

= (Not Defined)

NOTE
SELECTIVE SKIP and SELECTIVE STOP switches
must be set prior to selecting this parameter.
28.

TD~~

= Select

tape driver (608, 609, or 659)

If a 659 is selected, the program will request the equipment code for the

3518 by typing:
3518 # =
NOTE
3518 equipment code is set to 1 if not selected.
B.

ELECTRONIC READ AND VERIFY MANUAL PARAMETERS

The operator may now enter as many as 60 characters to determine the
set and sequence of the previous Py is rested by the program for validity
and if valid the program will respond with a comma C) typeout. If the
entry is illegal (does not belong to the selected font), the program ignores
it and the operator may continue.
If a valid entry is made, which the operator wishes to change, he should

now enter a RB (Rubout) followed by the change.
Data definition is terminated with a (CR).
~:~Buffer

657-30

controller equipment code.
60182000

DF~:c

For standard and optional fonts refer to Table 9 for font selection.
If the font which is to be tested was generated with the 955 optical data,

an
3.

~:c

(asterisk) must precede the name.

ED>:c
This parameter instructs the RX3/module 1 to read normal without suppressing character data.

ET>:c
The following summary will be displayed on the output device.
CHARS - READ

= XXXXXXXX

ERR

= YYYYYYY

REJ = ZZZZZZZZ

LINE =
ERR. LINE =

REF~

VOLT. LINE

IP*

The operator should now define where and how he wishes to read the
images.
WHERE OPTIONS
T (top) most significant 28 bits of the Load register
C (center) middle 28 bits of the Load register
B (bottom) least significant 28 bits of the Load register
HOW OPTIONS

(Normal)

t..

1 (Upside Down)
2 (Shift Reverse Normal).,
3 (Upside Down Shift Reverse)

.:I

Examples:
a.
b.

Top + Normal = IP*T, 0 (CR) or (IP~:cT (CR)
Center + Upside IX>wn = IP*C, 1 (CR)

Bottom + Shift: Reverse "Normal.

IP~'B,

2 (CR)

NOTE

These options are not available for handprint
images or captured video data.

Following IP* define DD, .sS, or LF.

>:cBuffer controller equipment code.
60182000

657-31

LF*
All the images contained in the defined font will now be transferred to
the BC.

For font name and sequence, see Table 9 for standard and optional fonts.
See Table 13 for handprint.
If the fonts desired to test are in sequence,
enter:
QL*=FIRST - LAST (CR
WHERE
FIRST = Initial font name and
LAST

Last font name to be tested

IT the fonts are not in" se"quence, enter

QL>:<=FONT NAME,
The program will now perform an (LF) + (CR).

Define the next "font.

Terminate with a (CR) last font name.
Example 1:

QL>:~=ANSI

Example "2:

QL*=ANSI THIN,

THIN - ANSI THICK (CR)
QL):~=ENCODER - BLACK GOODIES (CR)

1428 MEDIUM,
E13-B THICK,
7B THIN (CR)

Define image to be recirculated.
9.

RP>:c
The program will type:
CHAR - PITCH =

(Range 0-13)

Enter a (CR) if the pitch has already been defined, otherwise specify the
number of clear columns to be inserted between the images as they are
read.
The program will type:
FONT ENABLE =
If the font line for the font or fonts which are about" to be tested have
already been defined, enter (CR). Otherwise, enter font name (see Table 9)

followed by an = (equal sign) and the font line number or numbers.
to the table below for font line number selection.

Refer

*Buffer controller equipment code.
657-32

60182000

NOTE
For handprint font name use *HP=
Example 1:

Font line selection for one font

Font Enable

E13-B=X (CR)

Font Enable

ANSI = ·0123456 (CR)

Example 2:

Font line selection for multi fonts,

Font Enable = 1428=X, 1403=Y, RABINOW=g.(CR)
Example 3:

Font line selection for fonts generated by RX4 Optical
Dump program

Font Enable =

~:'NAME=X(CR)

After the font line selection the program will type
CHAR- PEAK = Enter a (CR) if character peak has already been defined.
FONT LINE SELECTION TABLE
Line Number

Font Enabled

USASI Mark Sense

USASI Numeric

2
3

USASI Control
USASI Alpha "5"

4
5

USASI Alpha "21"

USASI Punctuation 2

Optical Scaling (Siz e C)

Alternate Font Line 1

Alternate Font Line 2

Alternate Font Line 3

USASI Punctuation 1

Upon selection of this parameter the program instructs the RX3-module 1 to
begin the electronic read test and suppress character data.

In other words, the

BC program will not verify the character data generated by the 955.
NOTE
It is illegal to request totals when the SD~:' para~eter
is selected. The BC program is not accumulating
any totals in this mode.
~:'Buffer

controller

60182000

equipmen~

code.
657-33

11.

DT*. OLCC DINa TIME (DEFINE TIME IN MILLISECONDS)
This parameter represents the duration of the Dino signal from the time
the last column of data has been outputted.
If the Dino Time is set to
zero the Dina signal will get set at the requested column count, and it
will remain set until interrupted.

12.

CC):' = COLUMN COUNT WHERE THE DINa SIGNAL MUST BE SET
The column: count is 'computed as follows:
I + P + I + P .••.•...•.. WHERE
I

= Image width (column count)

Character pitch (clear columns)

Example:
Character images

A through E

Character pitch = 7
Image width = 15
Dina signal on the first column of D.
A + P + B + P + C + P + D1
15 + 7 + 15 + 7 + 15 + 7 + 1

(D1 = First Column of D)

= 67

Answer

PAGE AND DOCUMENT HANDLING MANUAL PARAMETERS

The program upon selection of this parameter will display the following
summary on the output device.
XXXXXX DOCUMENTS
2.

FP>:'
DL

FEED

MIN.

SEC.

DBLS

JAMS

The monitor will type

Define the document length in tenths .of inches.

After selection the

program .will request the transport .speed by typing:
TS = (options 5, 10, 20, 40)
3.

SP):'

DEFINE SORT SEQUENCE (P=Primary, S=Secondary)

ST>:' = SELECT SUB TEST (See Table 12)

):'Buffer controller equipment code.

657-34

60182000

MIRROR TEST MANUAL PARAMETERS
1.

MC>:~

The monitor will type:
FWDMC = (Define forward mirror coordinate)
The monitor will type:
REVMC = (Define reverse mirror coordinate)
The monitor will type:
DWELL TIME = (Define dwell time)

~~Buffer

controller equipment code.

60182000

657-35

SC 17/1700 - FR101 MEM/ COMM/IFP TEST (BC2A56)
I.

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS

Requires an 8K 1 700.

Requires a (TF201-A01) FR101 Maintenance Console.

The 1700 does not give error messages detected by the command and memory
tests.

4.
B.

LOADING PROCEDURE

1.
2.
C.

SMM17 is used for overlay loading.

Standard SMM call.
Test number 56.

PARAMETERS
1.

Automatic (none)

Manual
a.

On receiving a "MANUAL INTERRUPT (MI)", control is transferred to the
"ENTER PARAMETERS" routine (see flow chart fco).
complete (see I. C. 3.), parameters can now be entered.

If initialization is

An "ONA"

response to an entry indicates that the option is not available.

The follow-

ing is a list of options.
Code

Reference

Autoload test n

II. B. 14

Buffer controller dump

II. B. 15
II. B. 5

AL
BE

Select buffer equipment no.

Select buffer interrupt line

II. B. 6

Delete autoloading

II. B. 10

Enable au toloading

II. B.11

Execute test n with program loading

II. B. 12

Select printer for error output

II. B. 1

Select teletype for error output

II. B. 2

Select printer drum type

II. B. 3

Select printer equipment no.

II. B. 4

Punch program boot loader

II. B. 13

Punch program

II. B. 16

EX
OP

60182000 K

Task

Select upper and lower transfers

II. B. 9

Select lower transfers

II. B. 9

Select upper transfers

II. B. 9

Exit from test to SMM17

II. A. 2
658-1

Forced (Automatic) Requests
a.

Should anything happen to prevent the normal flow of the program before a
series of required entries are made, the program will re-start its list of
automatic calls.

The following is a list of those calls.

ENTER PARAMETERS
BE = Requesting buffer equipment no.
BI = Requesting buffer into line.
4.

Stop/ Jump Parameter
a.

The parameter can be displayed in A for a change, just after an entry in
the enter parameters routine if the SKIP and STOP switches are set.

The

used bits are:
Bit 8
D.

= 1 = Suppress Error Message Output

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.

Load BC2 via SMM17 operating instructions.

Respond with the correct entry on the teletype to the request (see I. C. 3. ).

After I. D. 2 is complete, manual entries can now be made.

If no other entries

(other than to execute test) are made, the following is assumed in the program:
a.
II.

OT, PD = S, PE = F, EL, and TB.

MESSAG ES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES
1.

BEGIN BC2 FRI01 TEST IA

XXXX

Initial typeout where XXXX = the initial address of the program.
P

Rerun from

= IA.

END BC2 TEST
In response to code (XT), the test is terminated and control is returned to
SMM17.

COMMAND MESSAGES
1.

OP
Request error output to go to printer.

OT
Request error output to go to teletype.

658-2

60182000 K

X
==

Requesting buffer controller equipment number where X

Request printer drum type where X
4.

0 -

standard and

OCR.

0 -

== X~:'

Requesting buffer controller interrupt line where X
7.

== X~:'

Request printer equipment where X
5.

ENTER PARAMETERS
In response to a manual interrupt or on an entry completion, entries may now
be made via teletype (see 1. C. 2).

PROGRAM X WAITING FOR PARAMETERS
In response to codes (EX or AL), this message denotes that text X has been
loaded and is waiting for manual intervention at the Maintenance Console.
Master clear the BC and run the test according to the procedures for that test.
The tests are as follows:
Test

BC2 Listing
Page

Remarks

BCQ

Quick Look Program

BCCOM

Buffer Controller COM Test

MEM

2 1/2D Memory Test (750 nanoseconds)

178

MMI

Memory Test (1. 1 microseconds)

236

MM2

Memory Test (1. 1 microseconds)

265

MYI

Memory Test

288

MY2

Memory Test

BCM (Y4)

Memory Test

50
70

(200 nanoseconds)

316
341

TX
Where X

U for

upper~ ==

L for lower, and

B for both upper and lower.

This

command modifies the program boot loader, henceforth referred to as PBL,
accept data on only that specified portion(s) of the block transfer channel as
valid data.

TU and TL will disable autoloading the PBL.

If DL (see II. B. 10)

has not been entered, a jump to the PBL will be autoloaded.
is entered, the modified boot will be autoloaded.
ing.
~;,

If EL (see II. B. 11)

TB will re-enable PBL load-

See Figure 2 for combinations.

These entries are force requested at initialization.

60182000 K

658-3

10.

DL
This option will delete the autoloading of the PEL and a jump to it.
sumed that a boot is in at $F6F.
before execution takes place.

11.

It is as-

The EC must be set to that address and run

(See EX at II. E. 12 and Figure 2. )

EL
This option enables autoloading of the PEL in its existing configuration.
(Cancel DL option and TU/TL boot loading restrictions.) (See Figure 2.)

12.

EX = x
This option begins the program controlled loading of text x and does an interface coupler check (Figures 1 and 2).
restricted by TU, TL, or DL options.

It begins by autoloading the PEL if not

It next runs an interface check and

finally loads the program (see fc1, 2, 3, and 4).

13.

PL
If the 1700 has a paper tape punch, this option will generate a paper tape of the

PEL in its current configuration.

It should be loaded and run at P = 0000 on

the Maintenance Console.
14.

AL = x
Autoloads program x (Figure 2).

15.

ED
FWA

XXO LWA

YYF

This option will cause the 1700 to autoload a small boot into the first 15 locations
and dump XXO YYF to the selected error output device.

If locations 000 OOF

are important, they should be written down before execution of this option begins.
F is not actually printed but should be understood.
16.

PP
Punches the last program executed onto paper tape in console loading format.

ERROR MESSAGES
1.

ONA
Notes that the requested option is not available.

AUTOLOADING LOADER FAILED
Five attempts to load the FR101 Loader (or a jump to it) were made but an
initial interrupt response from the loader was not received.

658-4

60182000 K

CH X FAILED SET = XXXX CLR = YYYY
Some of the channel bits have failed to be as expected. either solidly or intermittently.

Those that failed to set are in (CLR = YYYY) and those that failed to

clear are marked in (SET = XXXX).
block transfer channel).
4.

Possible channels are 0, 1. and B (for

The l' s in either word mark the bit in error.

FR101 PROGRAM LOADING FAILED
After a required amount of time without a data interrupt or five consecutive
errors on the same transfer. program loading is aborted and the above message
is output.

NO BC INT. X
In the required amount of time, an interrupt was not received during program
loading.
X = 1 = No controlware alarm and end of operation.
= 2 = No data interrupt during interface check.
= 3 = No data interrupt during actual program load.

INTERNAL REJ. ON INPUT DIRECTOR = X
The computer internally rejected on an attempt to input using director X.

EXTERNAL REJ. ON INPUT DIRECTOR = X
The buffer controller rejected the 1 700 on an attempt to input using director X.

INTERNAL REJ. ON OUTPUT DIRECTOR = X
The computer internally rejected on an attempt to output using director X.

EXTERNAL REJ. ON OUTPUT DIRECTOR = X
The buffer controller rejected the 1700 on an attempt to output director X.

10.

COUPLER STATUS E= XXXX A= YYYY S= NN
While all directors were being exercised. the coupler status was collected by
the buffer controller and later sent to the 1 700 for analysis.
were found to be in error.

The ones output

E = expected and A = actual (see Figure 1) NN = the

status position in the table.
11.

SMM OVERLAY LOADING FAILED
Self explanatory

60182000 K

658-5

III. DESCRIPTION
A.

INITIALIZA TION
1.

Clear the buffer controller via the Maintenance Console.

Set the Maintenance Console STOP switch.

OPERATION

Purpose
a.

Check all directors.

Check all data lines.

Check all interrupts.

Check coupler status.

Check system status.

Check the BC memory.

Check the BC instructions.

Procedure
a.

See flow charts for execution flow.

Load one of the tests via AL or EX options.

When the test is loaded, examine 'all errors in the priority order given:

Coupler status errors (Figure 1)

System status (channel 0 errors)

Interrupt errors

From the Maintenance Console, run the test just loaded, according to the
following procedures.
FRIOI BC QUICK LOOK COMMAND AND MEMORY TEST

Operating Procedure
Restrictions
The SLS instruction must be operational to flag a UJR error and when the CE assembly
option is selected.
The Jump instructions must be operational to flag most other instruction failures and when
the HANG assembly option is selected.

658-6

60182000 K

The SCB instruction must be operational to flag errors when the BUZZ assembly option is in
use.
At least one of the assembly options must be selected.
1.

CE - Stop on an SLS instruction at the failing routine.

HANG - Hang on a Jump instruction at the failing address.

BUZZ - Alert buzzer upon errors and hang.

One direct cell must be available for testing purposes.

(COMQL) is preset to a 2 for this.

The original contents are reset at the end of a pass.
Channel instructions are not tested.
The loading address through the loading address +100 is not tested in the memory test.
Loading Procedure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL = 1" for autoloading or,
"EX = 1" for controlled loading.
Using the Maintenance Console, clear and start the test at P = 0000.
Parameters
None - except for the assembly options: CE, HANG, BUZZ, COMQL, (LWATEST)

the

last memory test address.
Messages
The failing address (observe P by use of the Maintenance Console) must be compared with a
listing of BCG to determine the failure.
(B1) = Failing memory address in memory test.
Significant Locations
Direct cell COMQL is preset to a 2 for direct testing.
(LWATEST)

= FFF to test 4K.

Description
Command Test
Execute at least one of each format one instructions and check the results.

Stop if any

errors.
60182000 K

658-7

Execute at least one of each format two instructions and check the results.
errors.

Stop if any

Memory Test
Set the address into the first available location after BCG.
Continue setting and checking each location with its address until the (LWATEST) is reached.
(Preset to test 4K. )
On errors
a.

(B1) = Failing address.

(B1)

= Expected

data.

End of Pass
Reset address COMQL to original data.
Exit to loading address +3 to restart test.
The test will keep looping if no error is encountered.
Comments
The UJR instruction is tested first and if a failure occurs, BCG will stop on an SLS instruction and alert buzzer if selected.
All other Jump instructions are tested next and if a failure occurs, BCG will stop on an SLS
instruction (if CE enabled) or hang on a UJR .0 instruction (if HANG is enabled).
All other instructions follow in logical order.
(BCQRST) approximately = 7.0 may be set to .0 for an end of pass SLS.
Timing
The test takes less than 1 second to run the command test.
The memory test takes less than 1 second to test 4K of memory.
One complete pass is equal to the command test time plus the memory test time.

658-8

6.0182.0.0.0 K

BUFFER CONTROLLER COMMAND TEST (BCC)
(Formerly BCCOM)
Operating Procedure
Restrictions
The Input/ Output tests will require ~ strap to shunt output channels to a corresponding input
channel for test purposes.
Loading Proc edure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL = 2" or,
"EX = 2"
Master Clear and Channel Clear the Maintenance Console.
Run from location 0000.
Parameters
Five programmed stops occur in the I/O instructions test of Section 4.

The action required

for each of the stops is as follows:
Stop 1 - Set a not equal to zero to bypass the block transfer test •
. Stop 2 - Set a not equal to zero to bypass the normal channel test.
Stop 3 - Set A to designate the initial hexadecimal numbers of the output channel-bit and the
corresponding input channel-bit to be tested.
Output

CH
XXXX

Input
BIT

XXXX

CH
XXXX

BIT

XXXX

Each channel and bit number is to be designated by one hexadecimal digit 0 through F,
Stop 4 - Set A to designate the number of succ.essive channels (M) and bits (N) to be tested
starting with the I/O channel-bit numbers specified in stop 3.
Channels (M)

A = XXXX

XXXX

Bits (N)

XXXX

The normal channel test will loop through the instruction test sequence N - times,
one loop for each consecutive increment of both input and output bit numbers
designated in stop 3.

60182000 K

The input-output channel numbers do not change.

Upon

658-9

completion of the bit incrementing loop both input and ou tpu t channel numbers are
incremented and the bit sequence test repeated.

Upon completion of M times N

loops through the normal channel test the program will exit to stop 5.

If A is not

changed during stop 4, the normal channel test makes one pass to test the I/O
channel-bit combination specified in stop 3 and exits to stop 5.
At stop 4 the test operator can insert the hexadecimal digits 01, 02, ..• , OE, OF,
through 10 to represent from 1 to 16 channels and from 1 to 16 associated bits to be
tested.
Stop 5 - (A) is initially set at 1 by parameter flag RPTFLAG.
exit from the normal channel test.

Clear (A) to zero in order to

Else, the program will return to stop 3 for

repeating the normal channel test.
Error Stops and General Information
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.

No programmed

stop will occur in test sections 1, 2, or 3 unless a failure is encountered.
The encounter of an error stop requires the test operator to review the series of assembled
instructions (see listing) leading up to the SLS Stop instruction (error).

In most cases the

operator would only have to look at the instructions contained within one or two SLS instructions just prior to the error stop.

The instruction under test would be similar to an elemen-

tary test sequence out of the overall command test and separated from other instructions
under test by SLS stops.

Error stops are designated by EEEEE in the rightmost portion of

the assembly listing.
Instructions being tested are noted by

~:o:o:o::~::

in the rightmost portion of the assembly listing

comment field.
BC Core Locations of Interest (with Maintenance Console)
Specific Locations
Start of Program

Address - 0000

Restart

Address - OF48

Stop 1 - Bypass Block Transfer Test

Address - OE4D

Stop 2 - Bypass Normal Channel Test

Address - OE52

Stop 3 - Normal Channel 1/ a Setup

Address - OE56

Stop 4 - Normal Channel Counter

Address - OE5B

Stop 5 - Repeat Normal Channel Test

Address - OEFA

658-10

60182000 K

Section Description
Basic Command Test Sequence
This test is divided into four different sections based upon the number of storage reference
cycles of the instruction.

The sections are arranged in the following order:

Section 1 - One Storage Cycle
Direct Jumps
No Address
Condition Jumps
Relative Address Test
Condition Bit Test
Shift Test (see Table 1)
Scale Test (see Table 1)
Adder Test (see Table 2)
Select Bits in A
Enter Instructions
The following instructions are tested in this order:
Direct Jumps
UJD - Unconditional Jump
ZJD - Zero Jump
NJD - Non-Zero Jump
PJD - Positive Jump
MJD - Minus Jump
No Address
LDN - Load
ADN - Add
SBN - Subtrac t
LMN - Logical Minus
LPN - Logical Product
LCN - Load Complement
Condition Jumps
FJD - False Jump Direct

60182000 K

658-11

TJD - True Jump. Direct
FJR - False Jump Relative
TJR - True Jump Relative
Relative Address Test
ADR - Add Relative
SBR - Subtract Relative
LCR - Load Complement Relative
Condition Bit Tes ts
TOV - True on Overflow
TOP - True on Odd Parity
TAB - True on Bit of A
INT - True on "OR" of Internal tests
Shift Test (Table 1)
S RC - Shift Right Circular
SLC - Shift Left Circular
SRO - Shift Right Open
Scale Test (Table 1)
SCA - Scale A to A
Adder Test (Table 2)
Select Bits in A
SAB - Set Bit in A
CAB - Clear Bit in A
MAB - Complement Bit in A
Enter Instructions
EN1 - Enter Index 1 Direct
ENA - Enter A Direct
EN2 - Enter Index 2 Direct
IN1

- Increase Index 1

Ell

- Enter and Increment Index 1

EI2

- Enter and Increment Index 2

658-12

.60182000 K

IN2

- Increase Index 2

TAl - Transfer A to Index I
T A 2 - Transfer A to Index 2
Section 2 - Two Storage Cycles
~e~ory

References Direct

Load Bytes
Clear
Loads and Enters
Indirect Addressing Test
Indirect Jump Test
Index I Tests
Index 2 Tests
Section 3 - Three and Four Storage Cycles
Destructive Load
Replaces Test
Four Storage Cycle

Section 4 - 110 Instructions
Normal Channel Tests
SCB - Set Channel Bit
IA N - Input From Channel to A
CCB - Clear Channel Bit
TCB - Test Channel Bit
OAN - Output From A to Channel
OSN - Set Channel for Ones in A
OCN - Clear Channel for Zeros in A
Block Transfers
OTD - Output
IND - Input

60182000 K

658-13

General Notes on Section 4
Program Stops (with 'Maintenance Console)
Two program stops (SLS) (stop 1 and stop 2) are found at the start of the I/O instructions
test.

These stops allow the test operator to bypass either the normal channel test and/ or

the block transfer test.

The bypass parameter flags "CHKBLOK" and "CHKNORM" are'

initialized during their respective stops and remain in effect for all subsequent passes
through the command test.

The bypass parameters can be reset by setting (P) to location

"CBSTOP" and processing the stop 1 and stop 2 test operator options.
Three program stops (SLS) (stop 3. stop 4, and stop 5) are contained within the normal
channel test.

Stop 3 allows the test operator to select an input/ output channel and bit combi-

nation for use as operands in the instruction test sequence.

Stop 4 is used as a counter to

designate the number of channels and number of bits that are to be tested. The initial value
of the counter contains a channel count of 1 and a bit count of 1. Stop 5 occurs at the end of
the normal channel instruction test sequence.

This stop allows the test operator the option

to either continue the normal channel test or to exit from the test.
Following an initial pass through the program stops in Section 4, the command test executes
a series of parameter initializing instructions.

These instructions allow the test to restart

and provide a jump to the start of the command test.

Assuming no error stop will occur,

the command test will continuously loop through the entire program (including the I/O tests
if previously selected).

Restart - Restart of Test
Assembler instructions for command test restart.

658-14

60182000 K

TABLE 1.

SHIFT/SCALE TESTS

The following are the Shift/ Scale netw~rk operands used in the Be Command Test.

A-Register

Correct Result

Bit 8

Shift Count

Input Number

0000

3
4

0000

FFFF

4020

0001

0002

FFFE

AAAA

5555

AAAA

5555

AAAA
55,55

5555

AAAA

CCCC

3333

CCCC

3333

3339

4CCE

FOFO

OFOF

OF4F

FOF4

FFOO

OOFF

FFOO

7F80

FFOO

FOFO

OOFF

OOOF

0000

0003

0000

0001
OOFF

0000
0000

0
0

1
8

35
36

FFOO

3FCO

60182000 K

658-15

TABLE 1. SHIFT/SCALE TESTS (Cont'd)
A-Register

Correct Result

SCALE

FFFF
0000
8000
4000
2000
1000
0800
0400
0200
0100
0080
0040
0020
0010
0008
0004
0002
0001
F7FF
1FFF
OOFF
00F7
00F3
40F3
42F3
02F3
0273
4273
4233
80CO
800C
0030
8010

0000
0010
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
OOOA

0000

SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE

0000
0000
0000

SCALE
SCALE
SCALE

8001
COOl
E001

658-16

OOOB
OOOC
OOOD
OOOE
OOOF
0000
0003
0008
0008
0008
0001
0001
0006
0006
0001
0001
0000
0000
OOOA

Input Number
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47i
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
. 55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

60182000 K

TABLE 1.
A-Register

60182000 K

SHIFT/SCALE TESTS (Cont'd)

Correct Result

SCALE

Input Number

FOOl

0000

SCALE

F801

0000

SCALE

7FFF

0001

SCALE

07FF

0005

SCALE

007F

0009

SCALE

0007

OOOD

SCALE

658-17

TABLE 2.

ADDER TESTS

The following are the adder operands used in the BC Command Test.
A-Register

Memory

Correct Result

G349

Adder General Bit

Input No.

Logical Product
0000

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

Exclusive OR
0000

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF
Add

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

0001

FFFF

0000

FFFF

FFFE

1111

2222

4444

4444
8888

8888
1110

0
1

·15
16

0000

4444
8888
Subtract
0000

0000

FFFF

0000

FFFF

8888

0000

CCCC

5555

7777

DDDD

FFFF

0000

Add
3333

AAAA
Subtract

0000

0001
Add

FFFF

658-18

0001

60182000 K

TABLE 2.
A-Register

'Memory

ADDER TESTS (Cont'd)
Input No.

Correct Result

G349

Adder General Bit

OFOF

Subtract
FEFE

EFEF
Add

6666

5555

BBBB

9999

5555

EEEE

Subtract
FDFD

DFDF

lE1E

F7F7

7F7F

7878

Add
DFDF

0202

E1E1

EFEF

0101

FOFO

Subtract
9999

5555

4444

FBFB

BFBF

3C3C

Add
7F7F

0808

8787

1111

3333

4444

2222

Subtract
CCCC

AAAA
Add

BFBF

0404

C3C3

1111

7777

8888

Subtract
815F

5555

2COA

D52A

5555

7FD5

Add
1111

BBBB

CCCC

3333

7777

AAAA

0707

OAOA

1111

60182000 K

658-19

TABLE 2.
A-Register

Memory

ADDER TESTS (Cont'd)

Correct Result

G349

Adder General Bit

Input No.

Subtract
7070

5F5F

1111

0000

0100

FFOO

0000

0010

FFFO

OCOC

AAAA

6162

F59F

5555

A04A

5555

AAAA

AAAB

8888

5555

3333

COCO

AAAA

1616

6161

Add
OCOC

658-20

5555

60182000 K

INDEX TO ADDER ANALYZER
Primary
Inputs
M
A0000

0000

FFFF

Tested
Instructions

4444

8888

6161

137

OCOC
6666

815F

BBBB
2COA

108
124

8888

3333

135

73
95

9999

ADD
SUB

EEEE
4444

CCCC
D52A

SUB

7777

109
117
97

7FD5

125

A04A
1111

133
129

ADD

8888

123

SUB

AAAA
7878

127
112

ADD

1110

SUB

0000
6162

ADD

DDDD

SUB

AAAB
1616
2222

3333

1111

4444

ADD

5555

SUB
LP
FFFF

ADD
SUB
LP

0000

FFFF

0000

71
74
29
53

ADD

FFFE
0000

82
75

ADD
FFFF

Page

0000

0001
0001

0000

SUB

FFFF

103

ADD

0000

0010

FFFF
0000

SUB

FFFO
FFOO

·104
131

0100
0202

ADD

113
116
122
128
87
89

0404
0808
OAOA

0707

1111

1111
2222

2222

4444

60182000 K

130

E1E1
FOFO
C3C3
8888

DFDF
EFEF
BFBF
7F7F

Tested
Instructions

Correct
Answer

Page

FFFF 0000

Primary
Inputs
A
M

Correct
Answer

119

5555

5F5F
7777

F59F
0707
1111

120

SUB

3333
7F7F
8888

F7F7
8888

AAAA OCOC
3333
5555
COCO
CCCC
BBBB 1111
BFBF FBFB

ADD

132
101
134
136
121
126

DFDF FDFD

CCCC
3C3C
1E1E

118
110

EFEF FEFE

OFOF

105

SUB

658-21

BLOCK D.IAGRAM

START

SECT.lON 1
TESTS

SECT.lON 2
TESTS

SECTION 4 TESTS
~

STOP 1

1 I
I
STOP 2

SET FLAG TO
BYPASS BLOCK
TRANSFER
TEST

SECT.lON .3
TESTS

YES

AL
ItllTI
PASS
THR OUGH
SEC T.ION 4
TESTS

SET FLAG TO
BYPASS NORMAL
CHANNEL TEST

BYPASS
NORMAL
CHANNEL
TEST

NO
YES

NORMAL CHANNEL TEST
STOP.3 - SET UP .1/0
CHANNE~/B.IT NUMBERS
[

STOP 4 - SET UP COUNTER'
RUN .INSTRUCT.lONS
STOP 5 - REPEAT NORMAL
CHANNEL TEST

BLOCK TRANSFER TEST

'-------------ft

658-22

RESTART

BYPASS
BLOCK
TRANSFER
TEST

YES

~~---_---1--~

60182000 K

BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (MEM)
(Formerly MEMORY)
(2 1/20, 750 Nanoseconds Memory)

Operating Procedure
Res tric tions
None
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Loading Procedure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL=3" or "EX=3".

Master Clear and Channel Clear the Maintenance Console.
Run from location P = 0000.
Parameters
The operator may view/change the test parameters by enabling breakpoint on"instruction at
location X0080.

There are two consecutive stops:

First Stop
B2 = 0000
B1 = Test number + section
A

= Pseudo switches (preset to 0200)
Bit 0 - Not used

8000

1 - Stop at end of test/bank

4000

2 - Stop at end of pass

2000

3 - Stop at end of section

1000

4 - Stop at end of condition

0800

5 - Not used

0400

6 - Stop on error

0200

7 - Repeat test in same stack

0100

8 - Repeat test in same test area

0080

9 - Not used

0040

10 - Repeat pass

60182000 K

0020

658-23

Bit 11 - Repeat section

0010

12 - Repeat condition

0008

13 - Not used

0004

14 - Not used

0002

15 - Not used

0001

Second Stop
B2 = 0000
B1 = Test number + section

= Sections (preset to FFCO)

Bit

a = Section a - Addressing

test

1 = Section 1 - Zeros test
2

= Section

2 - Ones test

3 = Section 3 - Checkerboard test
4 = Section 4 - Worst pattern test

a - bit
6 = Section 6 - Sliding 1 then a - word
5 = Section 5 - Sliding 1 then
7 = Section 7 - Disturb test
8 = Section 8 - Worst pattern disturb
9

Section 9 - Random

Normal Stops
B2 = 0000 - Parameter Stop

First Stop - . B1 = Test number + section
B2 = 0000

= Pseudo switches

Second Stop - Bl = Test number + section
B2 = 0000

= Sections

B2 = 0800 - Condition Stop

First Stop

- B1 = Test number + section
B2 = 0800
A

Second Stop - B1

= 0000
= 1111

B2 = 2222
A

658-24

= 0000

60182000 K

B2 = 1000 - End of Section Stop
First Stop

- B1 = Test number + section
B2

1000

0000

Second Stop - B1
B2

= 1111
= 2222

B2 = 2000 - End of Pass Stop
First Stop

- B1
B2
A

Test number + section

= 2000
= 0000

Second Stop - B1 = 1111
B2
A

= 2222
= 0000

B2 = 4000 - End of Test Stop
First Stop

- B1

= Test number + section

= 4000

= 0000

Second Stop - B1

= 1111

2222

= 0000

Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.
On error stops, the following is displayed:
B2 = 0200 - Error
First Stop

- B1

Test number + section

B2 = 0200
A
Second Stop - B1

Error code

= Actual

data

B2 = Expected data
A
Third Stop

60182000 K

= Failing

address

- B1 = 1111
B2

= 2222

= 0000

658-25

Section Description
Section 0 (Bit 0) - Addressing Test
Each address contains its own address.

Write up, read up, and check.

Write down, read down, and check.

Write up, read down, and check.

Write down, read up, and check.

Section 1 (Bit 1) - Zeros Test

1.
2.

Fill test areas with zeros, read, and check.
Repeated ten times.

Section 2 (Bit 2) - Ones Test

Fill test areas '\-vith ones, read, and check.

Repeated ten times.

Section 3 (Bit 3) - Checkerboard Test

Fill test areas with alternating.1 + 0, read, and check.

Repeated ten times.

Fill test areas with alternating 0 + 1, read, and check.

Repeated ten times.

Section 4 (Bit 4) - Worst Pattern Test

Fill test areas with worst pattern.

Read, and store all words on this word,line.

Read, complement, and store all words on this word line.

Test all words on this word line.

Repeat from 2 on all word lines in test areas.

Check all word lines in test areas.

Section 5 (Bit 5) - Sliding 1 Then 0 on Bit Line

1.
2.

Slide a 1 down the bit line, test, and restore to zero.

Repeat from 2 for all bit lines.

Fill test areas with all ones.

Slide a 0 down the bit line, test, and restore to zero.

Repeat from '2 for all bit lines.

Fill test areas with zeros.

658-26

60182000 K

Section 6 (Bit 6) - Sliding 1 Then 0 On Word Line
1.

Fill test areas with zeros.

Slide a 1 across the word line, test, and restore to zero.

Repeat from 2 for all word lines.

Fill test areas with all ones.

Slide a 0 across the word line, test, and restore to one.

Repeat from 2 for all word lines.

Section 7 (Bit 7) - Disturb Test
1.

Fill test areas with all ones.

Store zeros in word to be tested.

Store a word of all ones 100 times above, below, and on either side of test cell.

Check test cell.

Repeat from 3 for all words in test area.

Perform 100 loads above, below, and on either side of test cell.

Check test cell.

Repeat from 6 for all words in test area.

Section 8 (Bit 8) - Worst Pattern Disturb
1.

Fill test areas with worst pattern alternately reversing the current direction on the
X line.

Read and verify the test areas.

Section 9 (Bit 9) - Random Test
1.

Randomly write addresses in their address in test areas.

Repeat random sequence in 1 above verifying addresses.

Randomly generate code to execute a load, store, or no operation (TOV) sequence on a

Execute the generated code.

Verify the data.

Repeat 4096 times.

randomly generated address using random data.

60182000 K

658-27

MEMORY MAP 4K

MEMORY MAP 8K
(LOADED AT·O)
0000

0000
RESIDENT
PART 1
03FF
0400

RESIDENT
PART 1
03F F
0400

TEST AREA
07FF
0800

07FF
0800

RESIDENT
PART 2
OBFF

RESIDENT
PART 2
OBF F

oeoo

oeoo
TEST AREA

OFFF

OFF F
1000

13FF
1400

TEST AREA
17FF
1800

1BFF

leoo

TEST AREA
1FFF

The test resident and test areas move end around within
their respective stacks until all sections have run on all
quarters. The resident then moves to the next stack if 8K
or to address 0000 if 4K.

658-28

60182000 K

BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (MM1)
(Formerly MEMT1)
(FR101/BB104, 1.1 Microsecond)
Operating Procedure
Restrictions
Do not master clear unless the test is in low core and a restart is desired.
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Loading Procedure
Set the SELEC TIVE STOP switch to ON.
Type "AL = 4" or, "EX = 4".
Master Clear and Channel Clear at the Maintenance Console.
Run from location 0000.
Parameters
Test selections and control parameters can be inserted by starting at location 0000 with the
A register not equal to zero.
Parameters are preset to run all tests and repea:.t the section.

Halts will occur only on

detection of errors.
Procedure
After loading Master Clear, set the HALT on PARITY ERROR switch.
changes are to be made, run.
Run.

If no parameter

If parameters are to be entered, set any bit in the A register.

The program will halt at location 0004E.

Setting the indicated bits in the A register

will select the following:
Bit 15

Test 6 selected

Bit 14

Test 7 selected

Bit 7
Bit 6

Halt at end of section

Bit 5

Repeat selected test

Bit 4

8K memory option

Halt at end of test

After setting bits, run.
NOTE: When selecting the repeat test option, select only one test.

60182000 K

658-29

Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.
Two error routines are incorporated in MEMT1: Disturb Error Analysis and Error Analysis.
Disturb Error Analysis
When an error is encountered during a Disturb cycle, this routine is used to display the
pertinent data.

Two halts take place in this routine.

Depending on where the program

is resident, X will equal 0 for lower core and 8 for upper core.

Z will equal the bank

number.
First error halt at locatipn P - ZX96
Register contents:
Bl - Correct word
B2 - Error data

- Address of error cell

Second error halt at location P - ZX98
A

- Current test number

Error Analysis
When an error occurs while reading data, this routine is used to display pertinent data.
First error halt at location P - ZX76
Register contents:
Bl - Correct data
B2 - Error data

- Address of error cell

Second error halt at location P - ZX84
Register contents:
Bl - Test resident
B2 - Testing

A
NOTE:

area~:~

area~~

- Current test number

The error data located in B2 is the logical difference between the correct data word
and the incorrect data word.

This represents bits picked up or dropped.

Therefore,

it is possible to determine the incorrect word as follows:
Example:

FFFF

CORRECT DATA

(Bl)

0100

ERROR DATA

(B2)

EXC. OR
FEFF
ERROR WORD
~:~ Lower core - 1; upper core - 2.
658-30

(IN CORE)
60182000 K

Memory parity errors cannot be detected by the software.

If the PARITY ERROR switch is

in the HALT position, a halt will occur and the operator can manually inspect the following
registers.
S - Contains the address of the error cell
X - Contains the error data
To resume testing after a parity error halt, clear the parity error indication and run.
Section Description
This memory test consists of two segments labeled MEMT2 and MEMTl.
MEMTl contains two comprehensive worst pattern tests.
Test 6 - Parity Plane Test
Tests the ability of each core in the parity plane to hold zero and one while the rest
of the plane holds worst pattern and complement worst pattern.
Test 7 - Worst Pattern Test
Tests the ability of each location in the test area to hold worst pattern and complement worst pattern while the remainder of the test area holds worst pattern.

Each

location is tested to hold complement worst pattern and worst pattern while the
remainder of the test area holds complement worst pattern.
Both tests use the following disturb method.
Disturbs are accomplished by reading a combination of locations (YO and (Y2).
(Yl) is a location that contains all zeros and is in the same inhibit group as location
(X) but not on a common drive line with (X).

(Y2) has the same specification as

(Yl) except that it is on a common drive line with location (X).
Philosophy
The tests in MEMT1 are designed to reside in and test a 4K memory stack.
provided to test two 4K stacks or 8K of memory.
number of 4K stacks of the same memory.
each stack were an individual memory.

An option is

This option can be expanded to test any

However, testing will remain the same as if

All tests use a common relocation and error routine.

Additional tests can be added provided they conform to the existing concepts, parameters,
etc.
Method
The 4K stack is divided into two sections referred to as lower core (OOOO-07FF) and upper
core (0800-0FFF).
and be tested.

When the test resides in lower core, upper core will contain the pattern

The test is then relocated to upper core and then lower core will contain the

pattern and be tested.

60182000 K

658-31

0000
LOWER CORE
07FF

0800

UPPER CORE
OFFF
BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (MM2)
(Formerly MEMT2)
(FR101/BB104, 1.1 Microsecond)

Operating Procedure
Restrictions
After an error stop, do not Master Clear unless test is resident in quadrant zero, and a
restart is desired.
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Loading Procedure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch to ON on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL = 5" or "EX = 5".
Master Clear and Channel Clear on the Maintenance Console.
Run from location 0000.
Parameters
Test selection and control parameters can be inserted by starting at location 0000 with the
A register not equal to zero.

Parameters are preset to run all tests and repeat the section.

Halts will occur only upon detection of errors.
Procedure
After loading Master Clear, set HALT on PARITY ERROR switch.
are to be made, run.

If no parameter changes

If parameters are to be entered, set any bit in the A register.

Run. The program will halt at location 002C.
will select the follc;>wing.

Setting the indicated bits in the- A register

NOTE: The 8K memory option must be selected when 8K is available.
Bit 15

Test 1 selected

Bit 14

Test 2

Bit 13

Test 3

658-32

60182000 K

Bit 12

Test 4

Bit 11
Bit 7

Test 5
Halt at end of section

Bit 6

Halt at end of test

Bit 5

Repeat selected test

Bit 4

8K memory option

After the A register is set up as desired. run.
NOTE:

When selecting the repeat test option. select only one test to run. otherwise the
first test selected will be repeated.

Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.
Error Analysis
Upon detection of an error the first of two error halts will occur at location ZX57 (x - O. 4.
8 or C depending on the quadrant the test resides in at the time and Z

- bank number).

Pertinent data is displayed in the following registers.
First error halt at location P - ZX57
B2 - Error data
Bl - Correct data
A

- Location of error cell

Second error halt at location P - ZX6E
B2 - Number of test quadrant
B1 - Number of quadrant test resides in
A
NOTE:

- Number of test running
The error data located in B2 after the first halt is the logical difference between
the correct data word and the incorrect data word.

This represents bits picked up

or dropped. therefore. it is possible to determine the incorrect word as follows:
Example 1

012F
EXC. or 1001
112E

Example 2

Error data (B2)
Error word (in core)

FFFF Correct data
Error data
EXC. or 0100
FEFF

60182000 K

Correct data

Error word (in core)
658-33

After the first halt, returning the switch to RUN will result in the second halt.

After the

second halt, returning the switch to RUN will resume the testing where it left off.
CAUTION:

Do not Master Clear unless test is resident in quadrant 0 and you desire to
start over.

NOTE:

Error data displayed in B2 represents bits dropped or picked up (failing bits).

A memory parity error indication cannot be sensed by the program.

If the PA RITY ERROR

switch is in the HALT position, a halt will occur on a parity error and the operator can
manually inspect the following registers:
S register

Contains the error cell address

X register

Contains the error data

After a parity error halt, clear the parity error and run.
Section Description
This memory test will consist of two segments labeled MEMT2 and MEMTl.
MEMT2 contains five memory quick check tests.
Test 1 - Zeros Test
Tests the ability of locations to hold all zeros.
Test 2 - Ones Test
Tests the ability of all locations to hold all ones.
Test 3 - Address Test
Tests the S register and the ability of each cell, in the test stack, to hold its own
address.
Test 4 - Shifting Zeros
Tests the ability of each plane to hold all zeros while the rest of the planes hold all
ones.
Test 5 - Shifting Ones
Tests the ability of each plane to hold all ones while the rest of the planes hold all
zeros.

658-34

60182000 K

Test Philosophy
The tests in MEMT2 are designed to reside in and test a 4K memory
two 4K stacks or 8K of memory is provided.
each stack were an individual memory.

stack~

An option to test

However, testing will remain the same as if

All tests use a common relocation and error routine

and all testing is done on a quadrant basis.
Method
The 4K stack is divided into four sections referred to as quadrants.

When the test is

resident in quadrant 1 a pattern will be written into quadrants 2, 3, and 4.
be tested.

Quadrant 4 will

The test will then be moved to quadrant 2, a pattern will be written into quadrants

1, 3, and 4 and quadrant 3 will be tested; and so on in this manner until all quadrants are
tested.
0000

60182000 K

4K Stack
1

OFFF

658-35

BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (MY1)
(Formerly BCMY1)
(FV156, 200 Nanosecond Memory)
Operating Procedure
Restrictions
None
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Restart of the test following any stop is accomplished by setting the (P) to location
NOTE:

Location 0 may be at 0, 200 hex, 800 hex or at AOO hex depending on where the
test is residing at the time it is stopped.

Loading Procedure
Set the SELEC TIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console
Type "AL

= 6"

or "EX

= 6".

Master Clear and Channel Clear the Maintenance Console.
Run from location 0000.
Parameters
The operator may select certain parameters by enabling SELECTIVE STOP.

There are two

consecutive parameter stops at which point the operator can select parameters.
The First Stop
(A) = OOXX - 0001 initially

= 00X1 - Stop on error

= 00X2
= 00X4
= 00X8

- Stop at end of section
- Stop at end of test
- Repeat section

The Second Stop
(A) = XXXX - F860 initially
= 8XXX - Addressing test

658-36

60182000 K

(A)

4XXX - Zeros test

2XXX - Ones test
1XXX - Checkerboard test
=

X8XX - Odd parity pattern test

XX4X - Random data test

= XX2X

- Random addressing test

Parameters can also be changed at end of test stop same as in 1 and 2 above.
Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.

No programmed

stop will occur in test sections 1 .. 2. 3 .. or 4 unless a failure is encountered.
On error stops .. the following is displayed:
First Stop
A

= A ddress of tested location

B1 = Correct data

B2 = Actual data

Second Stop
A

(PARM001)

B1 = FWA of parameters

B2 = Section number

60182000 K

658-37

Section Description
NOTE: All referrals to complemented data are one's complement.
Addressing Test (each location holds its own address)
1.

Write up, read up, and check.

Write down, read down, and check.

Zeros Test
1.

Write zeros in all locations.

Read each location three times checking data on the third read.

Ones Test
1.

Write ones in all locations.

Read each location three times checking data on the third read.

Checkerboard Test
1.

Write alternate word lines of AAAA, AAAA, AAAA, AAAA and 5555, 5555, 5555, 5555.

Read each location three times checking data on the third read.

Complement the pattern and repeat 1 and 2.

Odd Parity Pattern Test (special parity pattern)
1.

Write pattern in memory.
Read each word three times and check data on the third read.

Random Data (a pass number is available to change the random data generated)
1.

Generate and store random data.

Read and check data.

Random Addressing
1.

Each location has its own address written into it.

A group of 32 addresses are formed, read, and checked.

Repeat 1 and 2 1000 times.

658-38

60182000 K

Sample of Sliding One On Bit Line
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010'
00100000000000000010

Across is word line

Up is bit line
Sample of Sliding One On Word Line
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
11111111111111111111
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000

Across is word line

Up is bit line
Test Layout
Test resides respectively in:
1.

Area marked "RES1", testing area marked "TEST1"

Area marked "RES2", testing area marked" TEST2"

Area marked "RES3", testing area marked "TEST3"

Area marked "RES4", testing area marked "TEST4"
SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

SEG4

03FF

07FF

OBFF

OFFF

RES3
TEST2

RES4
TEST1

0200

0600

OAOO

OEOO

01FF

05FF

09FF

ODFF

RES1
TEST4

RES2
TEST3

0000

0400

0800

oeoo

60182000 K

Memory Plane 1

Memory Plane 0

658-39

BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (MY2)
(Formerly BCMY2)
(FV156, 200 Nanosecond

Memory)

Operating Procedure
Restrictions
None
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Restart of the test following any stop is accomplished by setting the (P) to location O.
NOTE:

Location 0 may be at 0, 200 hex, 800 hex or at AOO hex depending on where the test
is residing at the time it is stopped.

Loading Procedure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL

7" or "EX

7".

Master Clear and Channel Clear the Maintenance Console.
Run from location 0000.
Parameters
There are two consecutive parameter stops at which point the operator can select parameters.
On the First Stop (A) = OOXX - 0001 initially

= 00X1

- Stop on error

= 00X2 - Stop at end of section

= 00X4
= 00X8

- Stop at end of test
- Repeat section

On the Second Stop (A)

= XXXX

- 0780 initially

= X4XX
= X2XX

- Sliding one, then zero on bit line
- Sliding one, then zero on word line

= X1XX - Disturb test
= XX8X - Disturb complement test

658-40

60182000 K

Parameters can also be changed at end of test stop same as in 1 and 2 above.
Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.

No programmed

stop will occur in test sections 1, 2, 3, or 4 unless a failure is encountered.
On error stops, the following is displayed:
First Stop
A

Address of tested location

B1 = Correct data
B2 = Actual data
Second Stop
A

= (PARM001)

B1 = FWA of parameters
B2 = Section number
Section Description
NOTE:

All referrals to complemented data are one's complement.

BCMY2 Test Sections
Sliding One, Then Zero on Bit Line Test
Sliding One
1.

One of the 16 bit lines of a word on a word line is set to one, the other bits in that word
are set to zero.

The same pattern is repeated for the other three words on the word line and throughout
the portion of memory being tested.

60182000 K

658-41

Read data and check it.

Shift pattern to other 15 bit positions and repeat 1, 2, and 3

Sliding One, Then Zero on Word Line
Sliding One
1.

The portion of memory being tested is set to all zeros.

Set one entire word line to all ones.

Read word line of all ones and check data.

Repeat 1, 2, and 3 with next word line set to all ones.

Sliding Zero (same as sliding one with complement data)
Disturb Test (each location X is tested as follows)
1.

Write X with all ones, 1000 times.

Write (X-1) and (X+1) locations with zeros 1000 times each alternating between the two.

Write X with zeros.

Write (X-1) and (X+1) with ones, 1000 times alternating between the two.

Location X is quickly read out and checked.

Disturb Test Complement
Same as Disturb Test with complemented data.

658-42

60182000 K

BUFFER CONTROLLER MEMORY TEST (BCM)
(Formerly BCMY4)
Operating Procedure
Restrictions
None
General Information
The memory test starts at location 0 upon completion of test loading and master clear.
Restart of the test following any stop is accomplished by setting the (P) to location O.
NOTE:

Location 0 may be at 0, 200 hex, 800 hex or AOO hex depending on where the test is
residing at the time it is stopped.

BCM is the same as BCMY4 the Word Organized Memory Test.
Loading Proc edure
Set the SELECTIVE STOP switch on the Maintenance Console.
Type "AL

= 8" or "EX = 8".

Master Clear and Channel Clear the Maintenance Console.
Hun from location 0000.
Parameters
Parameters start at address 2:
PARM001 Preset to 4600 Hex
Bit 1

Stop at end of test (4XXX)

Bit 3

Stop at end of section (lXXX)

Bit 5

Stop on error (X4XX)

Bit 6

Run 8K on second pass (X2XX)

Bit 11 = Repeat section (XXlX)
PA HM002 Preset to 7800 Hex
Bit 0

Not used

Bit 1

Section 1 (digit noise)

Bit 2

= Section 2 (sliding one, then zero)

Bit 3

= Section 3 (add one, FFFF times)

Bit 4

= Section 4 (word line disturb)

60182000 K

658-43

Error Stops
The SELECTIVE STOP switch must be set before running the test.

The Selective Stop

instruction (SLS) is used for error stops and is assumed to be working.

No programmed

stop will occur in test sections 1, 2, 3, or 4 unless a failure is encountered.
When running from SMM 6000 or 7000, the section counter will stop incrementing when an
error occurs.
On error stops, the following is displayed:
First Stop
A = Address of tested location
Bl = Correct data
B2 = Actual data
Second Stop
A

= (PARMOOl)

Bl = FWA of parameters
B2 = Section number
Section Description
NOTE:

All referrals to complemented data are one's complement.

BCM Test Sections
. Digit Noise Test (Attempt to generate noise on digit current turnoff, thereby causing a
failure on the next Read operation. )
1.

Store all ones in memory portion to be tested.

Store all zeros in same memory segments but in the other memory plane.

Store all zeros in memory word (X).

658-44

60182000 K

Store Load A (X) instruction on the same word line as .(X).

Jump to Load instruction stored in 4 above, read and check data.

When each location has been tested, repeat 1 through 5 using complemented data.

Sliding One, Then Zero in One Word Test 1.

Store all zeros in memory.

Store all in location (X).

Read and write location (X) three times (check data on last read).

Shift data left one place in location (X).

When each location has been tested, repeat 1 through 4 using complemented data.

Add One, FFFF times, to each location.

No data check is done.

Parity error stop is

expected if a memory problem exists.
Word Line Disturb Test
1.

Write all ones in the first test segment.

Write all ones in the corresponding non-test segment.

Write the first test location 100 times using the same pattern of step 1.

Store the complement of step 3 at the test location.

Disturb memory by performing a 2-instruction loop 100 times.

Read and check the test location.

Restore the test location with the original pattern.

Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each of 200 hex test locations.

Repeat steps 3 through 8 with the complement patterns.

10. Calculate the word line address.

Use the address of the store instruction of step 4 to

define a corresponding location within the non-test segment.
11. Store the complement of the contents of the word line address at the word line address.
12. Repeat steps 3 through 9.
13. Repeat steps 1 through 12 using the following patterns for steps 1 and 2.
Step

Test Segment
Pattern

Non-Test Segment
Pattern

All Ones

All Zeros

60182000 K

658-45

Step

Test Segment
Pattern

A
B

All Zeros

Non-Test Segment
Pattern
All Ones
All Zeros

14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 for the second segments.
15. Relocate test.
Sample of Sliding One On Bit Line
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010
00100000000000000010

Across is word line

Up is bit line
Test Layout
Test resides respectively in:

Area marked "RES1 ", testing area marked" TEST1"

Area marked "RES2", testing area marked "TEST2"

Area marked "RES3", testing area marked "TEST3"

Area marked "RES4", testing area marked "TEST4"

658-46

60182000 K

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

SEG4

03FF

07FF

OBFF

OFFF

RES3
TEST2

RES4
TEST1

0200
01FF

0600
05FF

OAOO
09FF

OEOO
ODFF

RES1
TEST4

RES2
TEST3

0000

0400

0800

OCOO

Stored In
BC At~:<

S
No.

Memory Plane 1

Memory Plane 0

1700
Expects

Comments
Number of captured status words in the BC

000
01

001

FF80

First capture depicting coupler not ready

002

FF89

Coupler ready/ data time out

003

FF81

Coupler ready, data time out cleared

004

FF80

Coupler ready cleared

005

FF84

Director 1 A

006

FF80

Clear above

007

FFA3

Direc tor 2 A

008

FF80

Clear above

009

FFB3

Director 3 A

OOA

FF80

Clear above

OOB

FFC3

Director 4 A

OOC

FF80

Clear above

13
14

OOD
OOE

FFD3
FF80

OOF

causing clear coupler status

clear coupler

= 1/ clear

coupler

= 1/ clear

coupler

Director 5 A
Clear above

= 1/ clear

coupler

FFE3

Direc tor 6 A

= 1/ clear

coupler

010

FF80

Clear above

011

FFF3

Director 7 A

= 7/ clear

coupler

012

0000

Status extension area

013

0000

Status extension area

014

0000

Status extension area

~:<

The actual status may be examined in the buffer controller should it not be transferred to
the 1700. Three conditions can cause the data not to be shipped back to the 1700:
1.
2.
3.

~:o:<

The EOP / Alarm interrupts did not issue to the 1 700 (step the 1 700 and status the
coupler via Director 1) or coupler busy did not set on Director 2 in the 1700. Both of
these conditions will not give any coupler status (junk at 02 - 14).
A Director 7 with A = 7 was never received (coupler status list incomplete).
The status was taken and an attempt to ship was made but the Data interrupt failed.

A Director 7 or A = 7 is sufficient to terminate the coupler status collection and force the
return of the status to be 1 700.
Figure 1. Coupler Status

60182000 K

658-47

m
CJl

D:J

c:>

-t

D:J

c:>

>< ><

-t
r

m
r

-t

>< c: ><
II

1/
~

VNr--------1 ~
II

n~
"'

~ ~
e c:

1/ ~
[7 [7

[X
[X

m
'"
e

'11

c;
c:

::0

to.)

~e'"
m"'O
e~

<-t
_-t
~m

-t::O
:J:%
m~

~~
~c:

-~
%m
-t",
m-t
%:J:
~~

~-t

m-t
n:J:
Om
%"'0
",::0

m
0
......
c:>
~

0
0
0

r"'O
!'1 m
::0

::0
~
~

'"
~

r-t
O:J:

AIL LOADER

AIL PROGRAM

~
~

[X
~
~
~

MOD. LOADER

DISABLE LOADER LOAD.
DISABLE AIL

....

AIL DUMP

[X
%
0
-t
m

AIL JUMP TO LOADER

[X
~

ENABLE AIL

ASSUMES LOADER IN

'" " "" "'" X
'""-" ""'" " "
"
'
"
" " V '"
~

~
~
~

~
~

[7
~

1"\ 1"\

[X
~

~
~

'" ''"" '"
I\.
~

't><"

~
[X

I':
~

~
~

EOPINT.CHECK
ALARM INT. CHECK
DIRECTOR 8 & 9 CHECK
DIRECTOR 0-.7 CHECK
COUPLER STAT. CHECK
INTERRUPT STAT. CHECK
CHECK BLK. CH. 2°.2 15 IN
CHECK BLK. CH. OUT 2° ..2 7
CHECK BLK. CH. OUT 2 8 .2 15
LOj~DS

PROGRAM

VERIFIES DATA TRANS.•
CHECK B. C. CH. 1
DATA INTERRUPT CHECK
SEI: NOTE 1

en
o

1
I ® CLR
I ® CLR

ADDER INDICATORS

......
OJ
~

o
o
o

A REGISTER ENTRY

P REGISTER ENTRY/DISPLAY
BREAKPOINT SWITCHES

B1 B2 OFF A

NOT
RUNNING

L\t!~

LAMP
TEST

_
T

OFF X

TCI
NORM

_
X

L\t!~

IND/CLR
MEM
PAR
ERR

OFF

en
U'I
OJ
I

RADR

ROP

STO

OFF INST OPER BOTH

NORM

ENTER

OFF

SLOW

SWEEP

0
®

STOP

0
®
0

0
®

L~~
0=
®=
0=

FAST

SLOW

BKPT

RNI

CYC
STP

NOT
RUNNING

t t t t t

FAST

OFF

JMP

CHL
CLR
I

INDICATOR
SWITCH
INDICATOR/SWITCH

CONT

•

INST STP

OSC

I I

OFF
SEL
STOP

OFF
TST
MODE

M1NOMAX
T

M
TIMING

-=co

ENTER PARAMETERS

INITIALIZE
PROGRAM

REQUEST
REQUIRED
PARAMETER
LIST

SET REQUIRED
LIST COMPLETE
FLAG

RESET
LIST
STOP AND
DISPLAY
STOP/JUMP
PARAMETER (A)
ACCEPT
MANUAL
ENTRIES
RESTORE
STOP/JUMP
PARAMETER
YES

DISPATCH
TO SELECTED
PARAMETER
ROUTINE

658-50

~_ _ _ _ _- '

60182000 K

LOAD PROGRAM (1 OF 2)

FC1

YES

LOAD A
JUMP TO
LOADER

-T---------------~

LOAD
PROGRAM
LOADER

---------'-7

SET UP AND
WAIT FOR =
CWALM/EOP
INTERRUPTS

MOVE LOADER
TO HIGH CORE

SAVE COUP.
STAT.
SEND A = 1 DIR=
DIR + 1 AND
REPEAT TO
DIR=7

f - - - - - -. - - - - - -

INT. THE 1700

SAVE COUPLER
STATUS AFTER
CLEAR BFR

SET UP AND
WAIT FOR A
DATA INT.

r---~--~

f----,I
I
I
I

TEST FOR
ERRORS

60182000 K

658-51

1700

B.C.
LOAD P OGRAM (2 OF 2)

FC2

SAVE PART 1
OF WORD

SET UP FOR
DATA INT'S
CURRENT

FORM WORD
FROM 2 PARTS

WORD=
PROG.FWA
A =PROG. SIZE

SAVE THIS
PROG.WORD
AT 0 +B2

SAVE
PROG.
SIZE

FORM A IN
TO 2 PARTS*

I-

w ~

WAIT FOR
DATA INT.

A=O

f------\----------r ----

PART 2

A =ERROR

INC.
CURRENT
WORD
ADDR.

A=
CURRENT
WORD

*EX: IF A=0205 THEN
PART 1 =0202
PART 2 =0505

658-52

60182000 K

FC3

1700 DATA READIWRITE/CHECK

NO
OUTPUT
DIR.O
(BlK CH)

SAVE CH 1
ERRORS
WAIT 440
- 720 USEC

NO
INPUT
DIR.2
(CH. 1)

SAVE BlK
CH ERRORS
INPUT
DIR.O
(BlK CH)

NO
YES

ADD CH 1
TO BlK CH

YES

CLEAR 5
TRY FLAG

60182000 K

658-53

BUFFER CONTROLLER READ/WRITE ROUTINES

ENABLE DATA
INTERRUPT
AND TIME OUT

FC4

OUTPUT
TO CH 1, 1
DATA WORD

ENABLE DATA
INTERRUPT
AND TIMEOUT

BLOCK INPUT
1 DATA WORD

CLEAR DATA
TIME OUT

BLOCK OUTPUT
1 DATA WORD

DISABLE DATA
INTERRUPT &
TIMEOUT

CLEAR DATA
TIME OUT

DISABLE DATA
INTERRUPT &
TIMEOUT

658- 54

60182000 K

1700/FR101/955 TRANSPORT TEST
(RX4A34 Test No. 34)
I.

OPERATING PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS

Requires an 8K 1700 with a 608 or 609 MT and a TTY.

The diagnostic interfaces to SMM17 only for loading.

Test parameters are accepted only from TTY.

Manual parameters must be terminated with the BC equipment code.

Entries performed after a parameter request must be terminated with a
CR.

The test may not be run in an off-line mode unless the system includes
a maintenance console.

RX4 LOADING PROCEDURE
The standard SMM17 calls as test number 34.
cedure.

Following the initial test typeout

See Table 1 for loading pro-

(begin RX4/1700/FR101/955 Trans-

port Test IA = XXX. Rev. X. X.) the program will request module selection by
typing:
SMX=Y
The operator should now define the BC equipment code (X) before selecting
the desired module (Y).
Module 1

Optical Dump and Stepping Accuracy Test

Module 2

Undefined

After module selection the program will request the BC interrupt line by
typing:
BIX = Y

The operator should now define the interrupt line (Y) for the BC X.

60182000 J

660-1

TABLE 1.
Step

RX-4 STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE
Procedure

NOTE
Manual parameter entries following the
"=" sign at the TTY must be terminated
by a carriage return. The asterisk (*)
equals buffer controller equipment code
selected.

Ensure that system is energized •
.2

Set EQUIPMENT SELECT switches at rear of buffer controller to selected
equipment code (1 to F).

Open rear door of tape controller and set EQUIPMENT switch to 7.

At tape transport. set UNIT SELECT switch to O.
Mount SMM17 controlware maintenance tape and position to load point.
NOTE
Perform step 5 only if two tape transports
are available. If only one tape transport
is available. proceed to step 6.

At second tape transport. set UNIT SELECT switch to 1.
Mount SMM 1 7 auxiliary test tape and position to load point.

Set CLEAR.
Press P REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 1FCO (0001 1111 1100 0000) into Display register.

660-2

60182000 J

TABLE 1.

RX-4 STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

Step
7

Procedure
Press X REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set ENTER.
Set SELECTIVE STOP.
Enter SMM17 bootstrap program instructions (see SMM17 Reference Manual) as
follows:
a.

Set instruction into Display register

Set STEP

Press CLEAR pushbutton

Repeat until all instructions are entered.

60182000 K

660-3

TABLE 1.

RX-4 STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

Step

Procedure
Set ENTER SWEEP switch to center position.
Set CLEAR.

Press P REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 1FCO (001 1111 1100 0000) into Display register.
Set SELECTIVE STOP and SELECTIVE SKIP switches.
Set RUN.

Press Q REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 0205 (0000 0010 0000 0101) into Display register.
Set

10.

RUN~

Press AQ REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 30BO 0011 0000 1011 0000) into Display register.
Set SELECTIVE SKIP switch to center position.
Set RUN.

11.

TTY prints SMM17 ED 3. 0 •

12.

Press A REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 3401 (0011 0100 0000 0001) into Display register.
Set RUN.

13.

Press A REGISTER SELECT pushbutton.
Set 0000 (0000 0000 0000 0000) into Display register.
Set RUN.

660-4

60182000 K

TABLE 1.

RX-4 STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

Step"
14.

Procedure
TTY prints BEGIN RX-4 1700/FR101/955 TRANSPORT TEST lA-XXX.
Prints SM~:~.
Type selected buffer controller equipment code (1 to F).

15.

TTY prints =.
Type number of module test to be performed (1 to 2).

16.

TTY prints BI*=.
Type interrupt line for selected buffer controller (1 to F).

17.

TTY prints ENTER PARAMETER.
Type AP*.

18.

TTY prints ENTER PARAMETER.
NOTE
Perform step 19 only if SMM 17 auxiliary
test tape is not loaded. If two tape transports are available and SMMl. 7 auxiliary
test tape is already loaded (step 5)" p~o
ceed to step 20.

19.

At tape transport" set UNIT SELECT switch to 1.
Mount RX4 auxilia"ry test tape and position to load point.

20.

If the tape transport is a 659:

Type

TD~c

TTY prints =
Type 659
TTY prints 3518 #=
Type 3518 equipment number (1-7).
21.

Type

22.

TTY prints =.
Type H (hardware) or S (controlware).

AL~~.

Program autoloads selected module to buffer controller.

60182000 K

660-5

TABLE 1.

RX-4 STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

Step

Procedure
TTY prints THE BC IS LOADED if autoload was successful.

23.

If autoload

failed. TTY prints CHECKSUM ERROR, or BC does not respond.
NOTE
RX-4; standard loading procedure complete.
Proceed to appropriate module test operating procedure as follows!
Module 1 - Section I. D.
Module 2 - Undefined

MODULE AUTOLOAD PROCEDURE
1.

Select Automatic Parameter (AP>:<)
Upon selection the program will set up the standard I/O equipment table
(see Table 2) and the automatic parameter table for the selected module.
See Table 3 for module 1.
The standard I/O equipment table and the automatic parameter table assigned to the selected module may be changed at any time by using the
MI (Manual Interrupt) button on the TTY. The program upon sensing the
MI button depressed will respond with:
NEXT
The operator should now define a parameter.
See Table 4 for common manual parameters.
See Table 5 for module 1 manual parameters.

Select autoload parameter (AL*). See Table 5.

The program will now

autoload the selected module to the Be and will respond with an appropriate message to informing the autoload status.

660-6

60182000 J

TABLE 2.

STANDARD I/O EQUIPMENT TABLE

MTI

E= 7.

I = 3.

M= B.

F = 466.

C= O.

MTO

E= 7.

I = 3.

M= B.

C= O.

U = 2.

E=F

1=5

466.

Common Automatic Parameters
Output Device = TTY
Output Level
Repetitions

Normal
= Zero (Run test indefinite)

E = Equipment
I

= Interrupt

M = Mode
F

= Format

C = Converter
U = Unit

60182000 J

660-7

TABLE 3.

MODULE 1 AUTOMATIC PARAMETERS

Black fill dis abled

(BF~:c=O)

Character peak = A

(CP*=A)

Document position = 500 mils

(DP~c=500)

Dwell time = 32 millis econcfs

(DT~:c=32)

Final coordinate = 50

(FC):c=50)

Font enable = ANSI

(FE*=FEOO)

Forward step = 1/3 inch or 336 mils

(FS~:c=336)

Horizontal line thicken = dis abled

(HT~:c=O)

Initial read coordinate = 2A

(IC*=2A)

Character image width = 22 columns

(IW~c=22)

Optical dump mode = reject

(OD):<=R)

Quantize level = 78

(QI>.'<=78)

Steps per page = 32

(SP):c=32)

Subtest number 5 optical dump

(ST~c=5)

Transport speed = 20' IPS

(TS~c=20)

Vertical line thicken = 30

(VT*=30)

* Buffer controller equipment code.

660-8

60182000 J

TABLE 4.

COMMON MANUAL PARAlV1ETERS

AL*= Autoload module to FR101

AP>:<

BD*

BE~~

BI>',c = Buffer controller interrupt

DR~:~

= Data

DS~:C

= Data send to controller

EC * = Enable controller communication

Automati9 parameters

= Buffer

controller dump

Buffer controller equipment

receive from controller

(On-line mode)

= Enable

EO*

10.

EX~~

11.

ME~c

12.

MI~c =

13.

OM"~

14.

Op~c

15.

OT>:<

Output to TTY

16.

PD ~c

Printer drum

17.

PE~c

18.

PI"~

19.

RE~~

= Repetitions

20.

SC~c

= Suppress

21.

SM~:c

= Select

22.

SO~:c

= Suppress

23.

TC ~:c

24.

TN*

= Mag.

25.

XT*

= Call

26.

LI* =

List captured video data images from mag. tape

27.

ID~:c

Dump captured video data images from mag. tape

~:c

output

Execute test
= Mag. tape equipment
Mag. tape interrupt

= Output to mag. tape

= Output

=
=

to printer

Printer equipment
Printer interrupt

communication (Off-line mode)

module
controller output

Mag. tape converter
tape unit number
SMM17 loader

Buffer controller equipment code.

60182000 J

For more detailed information see Table 6.
660-9

TABLE 5.

MODULE 1 MANUAL PARAMETERS LOOK UP TABLE

BF>:{

Black fill

CP~:{

Character peak

DP>:{

Document position

DT>:{

Dwell time

FC*

Final read coordinate

FE~:(

Font enable

FS>:{

Forward step

HT>:{

Horizontal line thicken

IC~:{

Initial read coordinate

10.

IW>:(

Image width

11.

OD>:(

Optic al dump

12.

QL>:{

Quantize level

13.

RS>:{

Reverse step

14.

SP~:C

Steps per page

15.

ST>:{

Subtest select

16.

TS>:{

Transport speed

17.

VT*

Vertical line thicken

18.

ER~::

Electronically read captured video data
NOTE
Refer to Table 7 for more detailed information.

* Buffer controller equipment code.

660-10

60182000 K

TABLE 6.

COMMON MANUAL PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS

Step

Procedure

AL~'c

AP* = Upon selection. the program will set up the automatic parameters and
returns to the monitor.

BD>:c = Buffer controller core dump.

BE* = Change BC equipment code (code range 1-F).

BI* = Define. BC interrupt line (range 1-F).

DR* = Any section of the FR101 memory is to be dumped on the output device
by defining FWA (first word address) and LWA (last word address)~

DS"'c = Modify. insert. or delete any section of the FR101 memory.

= Select Autoload mode (H=hardware, S=contro1ware),

Upon

s election, the program will type:
ADR =
Define BC core location address.

Terminate with a (CR) define operand.

Terminate operand with a comma (.) for sequential store and with a
period (.) for single store. To terminate update enter "STOP (CR)" in
response to ADR =
8.

EC * = Upon selection. the program changes the mode of operation from offline to on-line and the test is restarted.

EtD~:c

= The program sets the output level to normal and the test is restarted.

10.

EX* = Send to the FR101 module the parameter table and execute the test.

11.

ME* = Select mag. tape equipment code (range 1-F).

12.

MI-* = Select mag. tape interrupt line (range 1-F).

13.

OM':C = Enter (CR) to output on mag. tape. the video data in a listing format.
Enter font name or file name to dump on mag. tape the video data in
auxiliary format.

14.

OP~:C

= The program selects the line printer for the output device.

15.

OT~c

= The program selects the TTY for the output device

16.

PD* = Select printer drum

17.

PE* = Select printer equipment code

18.

PI~c

60182000 J

(O-OCR. S=standard).
(range 1-F).

= Select printer interrupt line (range 1-F).

660-11

TABLE 6.

COMMON MANUAL PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)

Step

Procedure

19.

RE~~

= Define

20.

SC>:~

Change output mode from on-line to off-line and restart the test.

21.

SM>:~

Select module.

22.

SO>:~

Change the output level so that all error messages will be suppressed

repetitions (number range 0-65500 10 ).
This parameter corresponds to the number of pages to be processed.

and restart the test.

23.

TC>:~

24.

TN>:~

= TN>:~ = Select mag. tape unit number (range 0-7).

25.

XT>:~

= Call

Select mag. tape converter (range O-F).

SMM17 loader from MTO.
NOTE

SELECTIVE STOP and SELECTIVE SKIP switches
must be set prior to the selection of this parameter.
26.

LI>:~

Define file number in decimal.

To dump all the files# enter 0 (zero).

Dump on the selected output device the summary and the video data
captured on mag. tape in a listing format.
NOTE
Select output device (OT or OP) before selecting
parameter.
27.,

ID~~

LI>:~

This parameter allows character images captured on mag. tape to be
dumped in auxiliary tape format. Dump anyone of the fonts captured.
Dump only those characters which there is concern with. Here are
some examples on how to dump these fonts.

Example 1:
ID>:~

(SINGLE FILE DUMP)
= File name (CR)

Dump all the images contained in the request file.
NOTE
1. Refer to the typeout or printout for file
name s election. The typeout or printout was
given at the time the data was captured on
mag. tape.
2. Select the output device prior to the
selection of ID~~ parameter.

660-12

60182000 J

TABLE 6.

COMMON MANUAL PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)

Step

Procedure
Example 2:
ID':c

(MULTI FILES DUMP

SEQUENTIAL)

File Name A, File Names (CR)

Dump file name A, file name B, file name C, and file name D.
Example 3:
ID':c

(MULTI FILE DUMP

= File

,:~

RANDOM)

name B, file name D (CR)

Skip file name· A, dump file name B, skip file name C, dump file
name D.
Example 4:

(SINGLE FILE DUMP ':c PARTIAL RANDOM)

ID':' = File name A (1,5,14,16)
Looking at the Error Line below, character position 1, 5, 14, and 16
correspond to A, E, N, and P, respectively.

The images A, E, N,

and P will be displayed on selected output device.
Example 5:
ID':c

(SINGLE FILE DUMP ':c PARTIAL SEQUENTIAL)

= File

name B (5-7)

Looking at the Error Line below, character position 5, 6, and 7,
correspond to E, F, and G, 'respectively.

The images E, F, and G,

will be displayed on output device.
ERR. LINE = ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
CHARACTER = 0000000001111111
POSITION

60182000 J

1234567890123456

660-13

TABLE 7.

MODULE 1 MANUAL PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS

CP~:c

=
=

Character peak reference (range I-F).

DP~c

Document position or document ready.

BF~:<

2.
3.

Black fill 0

= Disable

= Enable'.
Enter in mils the distance from the

leading edge of the document to the center line of the first line to begin
reading.
Dwell Time (millisecond- range 1-65-000'10)'
This is a time delay performed after every step and upon sensing page
near zero velocity.
5.

FC~:c

FE~c

Final read coordinate (range I-FC).

Font enable for selection. refer to BC channel 5 output.

For ANSI enter

FEOO.

10.

=
HT~:c =
IC~:c =
IW* =

11.

OD~,c

7.
8.

FS~:<

Forward step

(distance in mils· from centerline-to centerline).

Horizontal line thicken 0

= disable

1 = enable.
\

Initial read coordinate (range 6-FA).
Character image width (column count).
Optical dump mode respond with A. R. or S where:
A = Absolute dump
R = Dump on reject only
S = Dump on substitutions or rejects
If S is selected. the program will type REF LINE
Define the reference line.

12.

QL~:c

13.

RS*

Reverse step. (distance in mils).

14.

SP~:<

Steps per page (steps to be performed on one page).

15.

ST~:c

Subtest Select 1. 3. or 5 where:

Quantize level (range 1-FF).

1
3
5
16.

TS~:c =

17.

VT~<

~:c

= Forward

Stepping Accuracy Test
Troubleshooting ~tepping Test
Optical Dump Test

Transport speed; 5. 10. 20. 40. (IPS).
Vertical line thicken (range 1-3F).

Buffer controller equipment code.

660-14

60182000 K

18.

NR~:'

= Number of rescans (range 1=65000).
This parameter specifies the number of times each line must be read.

19.

ER~:'

= Electronically read captured video data from the optics.

After selection of this

parameter perform the following steps:
a.

Set the 955 SIM/ OPT switch to SIM.

Press 955 READY switch.

The RX4/ Module 1 Firmware is now circulating the character images captured
from the optics during live read.
An

EX~:'

NOTE:

command will terminate Electronic Read and initiates live read.

Character Data Ready are not verified during Electronic Read.

Character images captured from the optics and residing in the
buffer controller~ can be modified for study purposes while they
are being read electronically.

The procedure is as follows:

PROCEDURE TO MODIFY CHARACTER IMAGES.
SAMPLE OF VIDEO DATA DUMP
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::~~, ~:, : : : ":: : ,~::: ":: : : : : : : : : ,!, ,~ ,~ : : : : : : : : : ~~ ~::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • t.c : : : ~:::

::!< :::::: ~::: :::::: :::::: ~::: :::::: :::::: ~::: :::::: >!c ~:::

Column

*: : : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::~ ::!::: ::!::: ::!::: ::::. ::~. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!::: >::::.

· . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
· ...................
· . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
·.. .. ... ... . .. ... .
· .. ..... .... . ... .
·... ..... .......

•••• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

:::::: ~~ :::::: ::::::.

. ... . . .. .... . ... . .... .. . . ..... . . .

............................... .
.. .... ........................ .'
..... ........ . .. .. ....... ....... .
... .. .. ..... . ....... . . ............
.... ... .. .......... ..... ... ........

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!::: :::::: ::.:::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
....1.......' ......1.....1..

"',"" ',"" ',"" """'

~:~ ~:~ ,:~ ~:~.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~!~ ~:~ ~:~ ~:~ ~:~. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
~:~ ~:~ ~:~ ~:~.

~:~ ~~ ~:~ ,:~.

~:{ ~:::: ~~ ~::::.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~:~ ~:~ ~~ ~::: >:::: ~:~ >:~ >:~ ~::::: ~::::: >:: : ~:::: ~!::: >::::: ~:~ ~::::: ~:~ ~:~. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~:::: >:::: >::::: >:::: >::::: >:~ >:~ ~:~ >!:::: ~~ ~::::: ; : : : >:~ >:: : ~:~ ~::::: ~::::: >!::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•

• • •

• • • • •

• • • •

• •

~::::: ~::::: ~:~ >!:::: ~:~ ~:~ ~:~ >::::: >!: : ~::::: >::::: >::::: >::::: >:~ >:: : >:: : >:~. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14
15

CW= 15

IA=BFD

BINARY DATA EQUIVALENT FOR THE IMAGE LISTED ABOVE
Data

ADR
BFD
COl
C05
C09
COD
C11
C15
C19
C1D
C21
C25
C29
C2D
C31
C35

= 0003 1FFE FC01 0000
= 0003 3FFE FC01 0000
= 0003 3FFE FC01 0000
= 0003 3C02 0001 0000
= 0003 1E02 0001 0000
=0003 OF02 0001 0000
= 0003 07C2 0001 0000
= 0003 03C2 0001 0000
= 0003 03C2 0001 0000
= 0003 0702 0001 0000
= 0003 OE02 0001 0000
= 0003 1C02 0001 0000
= 0003 3E82 0001 0000
= 0003 3FFE FC01 0000
= 0003 3FFE FC010000

60182000 K

Column
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
660-14.1

If we wish to delete the bit circled in column 3 and add the two bits in column 6, perform

the following steps:

1.
2.

MANUAL INTERRUPT RX4
TTY PRINTS : NEXT
TYPE DS~:~
TTY prints

ADR = C2E (CR)
TTY prints
C2E = 3E02.
TTY prints

ADR = C22 (CR)
TTY prints
C22 = 07C2
TTY prints
ADR = STOP (CR)
TTY prints
NEXT

NOTE:

Four computer words are required for every column of data.

Only the most significant 14 bits of a computer word represent data,
the least significant two bits (bit 2/0 and bit 2/1) is a code which
specifies the position in the L/ R (Load/ Register) where the 14 bits of
data must be loaded.
CONTROL CODE 3 = Upper 14 positions of L/ R
2 = Upper middle 14 positions of L/ R
1 = Lower middle 14 positions of L/R

o = Lower 14 positions of L/R
3.

Referring to step 3, the period (.) after 3E02 implies that the next
change is not sequential.

For sequential store use comma (, ) instead

of period (.).
4.

660-14. 2

Step 5 return control to RX-4 monitor.

60182000 K

OPERATING PROCEDURE
1.

Forward Stepping Accuracy Test ):'
a. Select subtest number 1 (ST):'=l).
Upon selection, the program will set up the following parameters for
subtest number 1, section 1.
Section 1 Automatic Parameters
Initial read coordinate

Terminal read coordinate

Transport speed

= 20 IPS
1/3 inch
25

Step length
Steps per page

= 500 mils
78

Document position
Quantize level
Font enable
Pages to be processed

ANSI
40
= 50 millis.econds
= 30 mils

Dwell time
Tolerance

b. Place at least 40 documents in the hopper.
c. Verify that on maintenance panel OPTICAL/SYM switch is set to OPTICAL.
d. On the Operator's Control Panel press READY switch.
running.

Section 1 is now

Section 1 will perform 1000 1/ 3-inch steps at 20 IPS.

Upon

completion, the RX4/1700 program will inform the operator whether or
not the test is accepted, and sets up the following parameters to run
Section 2.
Section 2 Automatic Parameters
Initial read coordinate
Terminal read coordinate
Transport speed

~nch

Steps per page
Document position

10
500 mils

Quantize level

Pages to be processed

= ANSI
40

Dwell time

Tolerance

42 mils

Use document number

60182000 K

= 50
40 IPS

Step length

Font enable

>:c

60217511A~

60217512A, or 60217513A.

660-15

The operator should now do the following:
1) Place at least 40 documents in the hopper.
2)

On Operator's Control Panel press READY switch.

Section 2 is now running.

Section 2 'will perform 400/1-inch steps at

40 IPS. Upon completion. the RX4/1700 will inform the operator
whether or not the test is accepted.
Theory of Operation for Section 1
The RX4 controlware performs a document ready and positions the first
line on the document at servo data 16+ 3.

A 113 - inch step (336 mils) is

now performed at a speed of 20 IPS. The controlware scans between
coordinate 2A and 50 capturing the first four characters and compares
it to the average servo data obtained on the first line. If the difference
is greater than 30 mils, the controlware will inform the RX4/1700 monitor that a stepping error has been detected and transfer the following
information to the RX4/1700 monitor:
1) P age count
2) Line count
3) Servo data average of the first line
4) Servo data average after stepping
5) Transport coordinates
The RX4/1700 monitor processes the page count and line count by transferring their respective values to a print picture. analyzes the transport coordinates and determines tra,nsport drift. A forwa:t:'d (+) drift
of a 3-conveyor count is accepted and a reverse (-) drift of 1-conveyor
count is also accepted. If there is any drift the program transfers the
conveyor count to the print picture. By analyzing the servo data. the
program determines if the amount of error is greater than 48 mils
(Xl X > 48 mils). This is considered a fatal error and the test will be
rejected.

The program will display the following mess age:

SECTION 1 FAILED
If the error is greater than 30 mils but less than or equal to 48 mils,

the program will register the error incrementing a counter. Upon completion of Section 1 the program will monitor this counter. If the total
number of errors is greater than '5 percent, the program will display the
foll,owing message:
SECTION 1 FAILED

660-16

60182000 K

If the total number of errors is less than or equal to 5 percent, the
program displays the foliowing message:
SECTION 1 PASSED
Section 2 Theory of Operation
The theory of operation described in Section 1 applies also to Section 2.
The only difference is that the tolerance is greater and the number of
steps is 400 instead of 1000.
Upon completion of Section 2. the program wili display one of the
foliowing messages:
SECTION 2 PASSED
SECTION 2 FAILED

Troubleshooting Stepping Test (Subtest #3)
The foliowing parameters are required:
Transport speed

(TS*)

Forward step length

(FS~c)

Dweli time

(DT*)

Number of steps

(RE*)

The above parameters are already set to automatic (see

Tab~e

5), however

change any of them as desired.
Perform the foliowing steps:

Execute test

(EX*)

On Operators Control Panel press READY switch to begin test.

Optical Dump Test (Subtest #5)
The foliowing parameters are required:

60182000 K

Initial read coordinate

(IC*)

Final read coordinate

(FC~:~)

Forward step length

(FS~~)

Document position

(DP':c)

Quantize level

(QL*)

Font enable

(FE*)

Steps per page

(SP*)

Dweli time

(DT".c)

Number of pages

(RE~~)

j.
k.

Transport speed

(TS*)

Optical dump mode

(OD*)

Char acter width

(CW*)

660-17

The preceding parameters are already set to automatic (see Table 5);
change any of them as desired.
Perform the following steps:

II.

Execute test

Place documents in the hopper

On Operators Control Panel press READY switch

MESSAGES
A.

NORMAL MESSAGES

Begin RX4 1700/FR101/955 Transport Test IA=XXX

(REV X.X).

The RX4 monitor has control and is awaiting on an input from TTY.
3.

THE BC IS LOADED
The selected module has been loaded to the FR101 and the checksums
are correct.

4.
B.

END OF TEST

COMlVION ERROR MESSAGES
1.

ONA (option not available)

MT DOES NOT RESPOND
The program received an external reject while trying to connect the Mr.
Verify Mr equipment code and unit number.

MT STATUS ERROR
The program has detected a parity error.

ILLEGAL AUX. TAPE

BC/X FAILED TO REPLY ON FUNCTION RELOAD BC/X
The 1700 program is unable to communicate to BC Ix. The program requests that BC /X be reloaded.

CHECKSUM ERROR
The checksum computed on the module while being loaded to the FR101 is
not equal to the checksum computed during the transfer of the module
from the FR101 to the 1700 program.

660-18

60182000 J

INCORRECT REPLY FROM BC/X RELOAD BC/X
The module residing in BC /X has lost control.
correct reply to the 1700 program.

It is not sending the

MODULE 1 ERROR MESSAGES
1.

Subtest Number 1 Normal and EJrror Messages
SECTION 1 PASSED
The RX4 controlware has performed the 1000 1/3-inch steps and the number of steps in error does not exceed 5 percent.
SECTION 1 FAILED
Either a fatal error just occurred or the number of steps in error at the
completion of the test is not within 5 percent. Fatal error (X Ix > 48
mils).
SECTION 2 PASSED
The RX4 controlware has performed the 400/ I-inch steps and the total
number of steps in error is within 5 percent.
SECTION 2 FAILED
Either a fatal error just occurred or the number of steps in error at the
completion of Section

2 is not within 5 percent.

Fatal error =

(X IX > 60 mils).
EXPSD---ACTSD---MILS OFF--DRIFT-LC--PC--EID
XX

XX XXX

The preceding message is displayed whenever a stepping error is detected.
EXPSD:
Average servo data obtained from the first line of the document.
ACTSD:
Average servo data obtained after the step was performed.
MILS OFF
Difference between the EXPSD and ACTSD multiplied by 6.
1 light pipe = 6 mils.
+ XXX indicates overstepping - XXX indicates understepping.

60182000 J

660-19

DRIFT:
Number of conveyor counts which the transport moved from the time the
stop Motion command was executed until after the 50-millisecond. dwell
time.
Drift of +3 and -1 is accepted.
+X indicates a forward drift greater than 3.

-x
LC:

indicates a reverse drift greater than

I -11.

Line count

pc: Page count

EID: Error identific ation
FSE
TLD

= Forward
= Topless

stepping error
data

BLD = Bottomless data
2.

Subtest Number 5 Error Messages
a.

VIDEO DATA OUT OF SEQUENCE EXP. 3.2.1. 0 Rec W. X. Y.- Z
As each column of video data comes out of the Dump register (1 column

words) the first word should have a control code of 3 (bit 14

and 15 set). the second word should have a 2 (bit 14 set). the third
word should have a 1 (bit 15 set), and the fourth word should have a
o (bit 14 .+ 15 clear).
The 1700 program prior to dumping a column of data will monitor
these codes and if it detects that they are out of sequence. it will
display the above message.
b.

MAXIMUM CHARACTER

Width Exceeded (37 columns)

The program has detected that the width of an image (black data only)
is greater than 37 columns.

This exceeds the size of the buffer

which holds the black video data.

Change the optical dump mode to

Absolute (OD*A) in order to obtain a video data dump.

In Absolute

mode the program dumps one column at a time without looking for
transition.

660-20

60182000 K

Delete Line Detected, DUMP is in Absolute Mode
Delete line detected on the line just read.

The RX4 will now change the

optical Dump mode to absolute in order to perform the video data dump on
a character width greater than 37 columns of black.

At the completion of

the dump, the RX4 will reset the optical dump to its original mode.
d.

Dump Regis ter Failed
During one Column Ready pulse time the BC program did not detect a word
coming out of the Dump register with a control code of 3 (bits 14 and 15 set).

Sample of Video Data Dump in Absolute Mode
PC=XXXX LC=XXXX
LINE READ=ABCD ••••
VOLT LINE=FFFF ••••
SERVO
=2222 •••••
DATA=2122 .••••
20 CLEAR COLUMNS

·...................................... -'-

"'."

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!::: ::!::: ~::: ::::::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ,:.c :::::: ::!::: ::!::: '::: ~:::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ':::: ,!::: >:::: :::::: ':::: :::c ,!::: ::::::

............... ********* .•. ***
............... ******** .... ***
.•................. ********* ... ***
................. *************

6 CLEAR COLUMNS

.. *******************
...... *******************
...... *******************
~~~

•

• •

•

~~~

','" """, '."'. •

•

~~~

"'.'" ,.' ','. •

• •

•

','" ' .." 'I""

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ':::: ':::: ,::::. • • • • -::::::~::: ::!:::. • • • • ::::::~:::~:::
• • • • • • :::::: ::!::: ::!:::. • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::
~~~

~~~

• • • • • • • • • • • • • "'.' 'I"" ' ................................... ,.' .............

• • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • :::::: ::!::: ::::::. • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!::: ::!::: ::::::. • • • • ::!::: :::::: ::::::. • • • •

·............

,....

~~~

"','" "','" ...

. .. .

,....

~~~

....'" "'.'" ...

....

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::::: ::!:: :::::. • • ::::: ::::: ::!:: ::!:: :::::.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::: ::: ::::: ::!:: ::!:: ::!:: ::!:: ;::::: ;::::: ::::: ;: :.: ::!::

t.::: :::::: ~:::
~~~

"','" "','" ...,'"

• • :::::::!::::!::::!::

*: .: ;: .: ': :

::!.::

..........•....•....... ***************

.......•.....•..........
AND SO FORTH •••••

60182000 K

...1......1............1......1.....1..

~~~~~~

...... ...J.. .J.. ..., ........

~~~~~

660-21

NOTE

PC = Page count, LC = Line count.

Servo data consists of two lines.

The video data is rotated 90 degrees. This is because in Absolute
mode the video data is listed in the exact same way it comes out of the
Dump register.

Read servo data vertically.

Video Data Dump (Reference Mode)
EXAMPLE:
PC=1 LC=1
REF. LINE=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
ERR. LINE=
@@
VOLT LINE=FFFFOFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SERVO
=111111111111111111
DATA=777777778877777777
8 CLEAR COLUMNS

· .........................
· . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

,I,
"'.'

...1.....1......1......1......1......1..

""", "", ','" ',' ','" ','

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::~ ::::: ::!:: :::::. • • • • • ::::: ::::::: ::!:::: ::::::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!:: ::::::: ::!::: ::!:::.

• • • • • • • : : : : :::::: :::::: ::::::

· . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
· ................. ..............
· . .... .. . . .. .... .. ::::::. . . ..... ... . ..
· ................. ..............
~~~

'.'"

""",

~~~

""".

',' "," ""."

'," ""

· . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ..
• •

• • • •

','" ...,'"

::::::

:::::: :::::::

"'," ',"'

"'.' ','"

. . . . . . .. . . . ..

• • • • ::!:::: ::::::. • • :::::: ::::::. • :::::: :::::::. • •

:::::: ::::::.

• ::::::: :}: ::::::
::::::: :::::::::

:::::~::: • • CW = 15 IA = 8C6
00000000011111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
7 CLEAR COLUMNS
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::::::!:::: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

· . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .
•

...1......1...

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1'. '.""

~::: ~::: ~::: ::::: ::::: ~:::.

· .. . .. .. . .. ... . . . . ,... . ..
~~

'," ....

.. . . . . . . . . .

~~~~~~~~

....... "'.'

..................." ....... ....... ........

~:::

"'." ........

.................. ** ...... **********
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::::: :::'. • • • • • ~:, ~:::. • ::~ :::~ :::c ::::: :::c :;!:: :::~

.................. **** ... ************
CW=16 IA=91E

660-22

60182000 K

6 CLEAR COLUMNS

· .....................,'
·.................

...1", ..1,

'.'

...1.....1..

·.................

"'." "'.'

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!::: ::!:

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!:::. • • •

...1.....1..

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!::::. • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • .. • ::!::: ::!:::.

• • •

· ................. ....
. .1.........

'.' ',""

• • • •

• •

• • •

•

• •

• • • • • •

• • •

• •

•

::!::: ,!:::

..................... .

..1.....1...

'.'

::!:::: :::::::
:::!:::: ::::::::

. .1.....1..

'," ',"

• • • • • • ::::::: :::::::. • • • :::!::: :::!:::
• • • •

• • :::::::: :::::::. • • • :::!::: :::::::

· ................. ....
...1....1..

...1......1..

',' "'

'," ',"

CW=15 IA= 976

NOTE

60182000 K

PC (page count) refers to the document count in the secondary
pocket.

The ERR. LINE shows only the characters rejected or substituted.

The symbol @ indicates character reject.

SERVO DATA consists of two lines. Read servo data vertically.
Example: The servo data for the character C is 17, the servo
data for the I is 18.

CLEAR COLUMNS is the number of clear columns between
characters.

CW (character width) is the number of black columns the image is
composed of.

For every bad character a set of three characters images are
displayed. The bad character is preceded by the numbers 1
through 56 which represent the light pipes.

The program considers dirt anything less than four columns of
black.

The character images have been inverted for easier reading.

660-23

Sample of Video Data Dump in Reject Mode

PC=1 LC=27
ERR. LINE=ABCD FGH •••
VOLT LINE=FFFF3FFF •••
SERVO
=11111111
DA TA = 5 5 6 5 66 5 6
4 CLEAR COLUMNS
...1.....1....1........

•

'I'" '.' ','" '.'

............. ********

• • • • • • • • • • • • ~::: '::: :::< ::::::: :::::: :::::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::::::

..
...·...........
............. ....
·...............
~:::~:::~::

,.....,

...1.....1..

............. .
:::::::.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :J.::::~:::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::!:::: :::::::
:::::::

....1 ......1..

..•..... ******************
...•...... ******************

·............... ::::::. .... ... ... ...
:::::::

• •

• • • • • • • • ::!:::: :::::. • • •

• • • •

•

::::::: ::::::::

• • • • • ::::::: :::'

· •......•••.•••••••••••••••.•••.. : : : : CW =15 IA =8 C 6
00000000011111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
6 CLEAR COLUMNS
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • : : : : :::::: ::::::: ==::::. • • • • • • • • • • • ~::: :::::::

·...............
•

•

~~~~~~~~~

'.' '."" '.'" ',"" ',' '," '.' 'I"" ','. •

•

::::::: ::::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::::: :::::::.

....
•

•

','" ,,'

:::::: ::::::

................ ************ .... **
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • i.:::: ::!:::: ~:::: ::!:::: :::::: ::::::: :::!::: ::!::: ~::: ~:~~:::. ~:::~:::. • ~:::~:::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

~!~ ~!:::.

• • • • •

~::::

~:::: ~:::: ~:::: ~:::: ~::::

~:::: ~::::.

• • • • •

~:::: ~::::. ~::::~:::::!:::::!::: ~:::: :::::: :::::: ::::::

· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :; : :; :
• • •• • • • • • • • •

~:::: ~~ ~:::: ~:~ ~!::: ~::::. ~:~ ~:~ ~:~
~:::: ~:::: ~::: ~:::: ~::: ~:::: ~::::

~:::

.......•.... ** .•.•.. ** .• ********
• • • • • • •• • • • • • • • •

~:::: ~::::.

• • • • •

~:::: ::!:::.

• • ::!::::::::: :::::: ::!::: ~:::: ~:::: ~:::: ::::::

...•.......•.•.. *********************
.............•.. *********************
.......• *********************

CW=16 IA=91E

7 CLEAR COLUMNS

··...............
··...............
................
...·...................... ......
· . .. . . . . . . . . .. .
··.............................. ::::::. ......
··................
.............. ....
...
·............... ...
::::::~~

.............
'"','" '"',"

...1.....1..

','" ','"

~::::~:::.

~::::::::::

~:::: ::::::.

~:::: ~::::

~:::: ~::::.

~::: ~::::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ~::::. • • • :::::: ::!:::

~::::

~:::: ~::::

~:::: ~::::.

~::::::::::

~:::: ~:::.

::::::::::::

::::::~:::

::::::::::::

~::::::::::.

:::::: ~::::

••............•• ******************
.........•...... ******************
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~::: ~:::: :::::: ~:::: >:::: ::!::: ::!::: ::!::: ~~ ::!::: ::!:::

660-24

*: :

~::: ~::: ::!:::

CW=15 IA=976

60182000 K

h..

Sample of Hand Print Video Data Dump in Reference Mode

PC=1 LC=1
REF. LINE=12345678
NUMERIC
@
ALPHA
@
SYMBOL
@
16 CLEAR COLUMNS
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

~:::~:: ~c:

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~:c: ::::c ::::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::: :::::::

·............. ........................

:::::: ::::::: ::::::: ~::: ::::::: ::::::: ~::: :::::::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ,::::~::: :::!c. • • • : : : : : : : : ~:::
• • • • • •.• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::::::: ::::::: ~c. • • • • :::::::~:::~:::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~::::=::::~c: • • • • • • :::::::~:::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ~::::=:::: • • • • • • ::::::~:::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::::>::::>:::: • • • • • • :.::::>::::

· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~:::: *. . . . . . : : : :
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~::::=:::: • • • • • •
...........1......1..
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•

:::':=:'
.............

..."' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I ......, ....

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~':=:'~' ••••• :>:~:=:'
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :>!, -,:' ==!'. • • :=:,~, .:>!,
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :>~:=:'. • • • • • • • • • • • ~,:>:, :>:' :=:'. :>!, >:' :>:' :::'
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :>:' :>:'. • • • • • • • • • • • • :>:' :::' :;:, ::!, :::' >::: :>:'
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :>~ >:' :::'. • • • • • • • • • • • • :>:' >!:: ::::: ~:: :>: :
•••••••••••••••••••••••• :>::::=:,:>!:: ••••••••••• :>:';::::>!:::>'.c*:::'
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :>~::~:>~:>~. • • • • • :>!:: :>!:: ~:::: :>:' ~:: ~, :>:'

...•.....••••.•..••.... **************
.....•.........••.•....•.•.• ***********

• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~:,~::::>:,:::~ CW=21 IA=A5E
00000000011111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
10 CLEAR COLUMNS

· ............................. ..,

.........1..

....

...... ***********************
.......•.......•........ *** •..... **************

·.......................

...' .....1.........

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ",'" "I" ','"

•

..,......,...

.........1.....1..

',"

...1......1.......

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,......... "I"

•••••••••• *::::::
••••• :>!: : :>: : ::::::
• • • • • • • • • • -:>!' ::!::: :>:'

•••••••••••••••••• :>: : >:'
•••••••••• :>:::~::::>:::

...........

::::::;::::

• •••••••••••••••••••••••••• >:' >!:::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ;:!:::::!:::

CW= 17 IA=ADA

15 CLEAR COLUMNS
• • • • • • • • • • • • • :>;, :>: : ::::::. • •

....•.. ******** ...... ****** .. ****
........ ** ..... ******** ...
• • • • •• •• •• •• • •• • •• • • • •

~:, :>:' ~::::.

• • •• •

~:, ~:, ;:::: ;: : : :>!:: :>::::.

• • • • • • • • • :>:' ~:, :>!: :

........ ** ....... ****************
... ** ....•. ***.************
60182000 K

660-21:

NOTE

PC = Page count. LC = Line count.
in the secondary pocket.

PC refers to the document count

In the NUMERIC. ALPHA. AND SYMBOL line the symbol @ indicates
character reject.

The numbers 1 through 56 always precede a bad image.
correspond to the light pipes.

CW (character width) is the number of black columns that forms the
image.

IA (initial address) is the initial address in the BC of the video data
corresponding to the character image.

These numbers

Sample of Hand Print Video Data Dump in Absolute Mode
PC=1 LC=1
NUMERIC=012345678
ALPHA =@@Z@XS@@@
SYMBOL =@@@@+@@@@
39 CLEAR COLUMNS

.•. ******************

· ...................... ,..

~~~~~~

....

'.'" ;.'" "'.' '."" """.

........

~~~~~~~

'.' '.' '."" '." ','" "'." '."

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!::: ::::::: ::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ~::: ::!::: ::!::: ::::::

·.....................
·.................... ..
..1.....1....1..

'.'" ................

...I .......... .,J, ..I ...

','" ','" .... ... "'

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ~:::

~:::: ::::::.

• • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ::!:::: :::::: ::::::

~~~~~~

•

~~~~~~

"',' "'.'" "',,,, .., .... ',"" ',"'.

•

"'1"0 ' , ' ' , ' "'," ..,.... '.""

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::~::~ t.::: :::::: :::::: ::~ :::::: ::~ :::::: ::~. ::::::::~ t" ";: "" ~;: ::~ ";: ::!c ~:::
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~:::~:: :::::: ::!::: :::::: :::::: :::::: ~::: :::::: ~::: ::!::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::~ :::~ :::~ t.~

•....•...•........••....... ***************

·............................

660-26

,,' ..,.... "

....., ",'" ...... '""" . ,' ...... ",' .... .

..........1............... , ....' .............' .................' ...

....

60182000 K

20 CLEAR COLUMNS

...... *************************
.. *************************
21 CLEAR COLUMNS

·...........................
· ... ............ ....... ','. ................
..1......1..

~~~

',' ',"'"

~~~

...,.... ',' "','

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::::::: ::::::: ~:::. :::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::. ::::::: :::::: ::!::: ::}:::
•

•

·.............
•

•

:::!:::: :::::: ::::::::

::::::: :::::::

.......... . ...

::!:::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!::: :::::: :::::: ::!::: ::::::

::::::.

:::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::::: ::::::

.**** ..........•... ********

• • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ::!::: ::::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::: ::!::: *~

::::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::::~:: :::::: :::::: ::::: ::!::: :::::: :::::: :::::: :::'

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: ,,!::: :::::: >:< ::!'.

:::::: :o!::: *~

:::

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ::::::: :::::: ::::::. • • • • • • • • • • • :::::: :::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::::. • ::::::: ::::: ?:::: ::::::

·....................
·........... .........

.........
.......

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • : : : : : : : : :::~. • • • • • • • • • •
~~~

',' ',' "".
~~~~

~~~~~

",' ',' ',' "'''.

• • • • • • • • • • • • ••

~:~ ~:, ~:~ ~:, ~:'.

~~~~~

"," '," "'," ",' "".

~:, ~:, ~, ~:, :::~.

• •

• • >:' ~:, ~:, ~:,

.......

'," .... .. '," ',' "".

~:, ~!, ~:~ ~:, ::!{.

• • • • • • •

~~~~

',' '," '," ",'
~~~~

',' ',' ',' ","

~:, ~:, ~:,

...••..•...... ************ ••...•... ***
......•••....•. *********** ••.....•. ***
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~:, ~:, :::' :::' ~:, ::!, :::' ::~. • • • • • • • • • • ~,:::, ~!,

...............

60182000 K

.......

~~~~~

"," ,." "," ","

...........

~~~

"," "," ",'

660-27

NOTE
1.

PC (page count) refers to the document count in the secondary packet.

The symbol @ indicates character reject.

Character substitutions are not detected in this mode.

CW (character width) is the number of black columns the character
image is made up of.

IA (initial address) refers to the buffer controller initial address of
the image displayed.

The rejected character is always preceded by the numbers 1 through 56,
which correspond to the light pipes.
"-

Anything less than four columns of black data will be considered as
dirt by the RX4.

Character images have been inverted for easier reading.

Magnetic Tape Video Data Dump (Listing Format)
The purpose of this option is to save time.

On most systems video data

dumps are performed on TTY which takes a very long time.

If a line

printer should be available elsewhere in the plant, video data could then be
captured on magnetic tape and listed on the line printer available.
NOTE:

Data is written on MT in the format described in the previous figures.

Data is written on MT in BCD.

Use manual parameter

A tape mark is written at the end of each dump.

LI~:~

to dump' video data from magnetic tape.

Magnetic Tape Video Data Dump (Auxiliary Tape Format)
The following summary will be displayed on the line printer if one is available; otherwise the summary will be displayed on the TTY.
Example:
PC· = XXXX
REF.

LINE

ERR.

LINE

VOLT

LINE

SERVO

LC = XXXX
= ABCD •••
=
= FXFF

= FONT NAMED

(If in Reference mode)

1X11
DATA = 7X67

NOTE:

660-28

Data is written on magnetic tape in 466 binary.

Density, whichever is selected.

60182000 K

"Font Name" is the name which is defined.
The pr.ogram assigns the letters A-Z in order to make the name unique
for every dump performed.

Character images recorded on magnetic tape in auxiliary tape format
can be listed by using manual parameter ID':'.

The first record of every dump on magnetic tape consists of Name
Mask (sum of the ASCII codes describing the name) reference line
ASCII codes if in Reference mode.

If in Reject or Absolute mode, the

reference line consists of the ASCII codes generated by the 955 Reader.
6.

All the video data corresponding to the character read will be recorded
on magnetic tape.

The program does not attempt to separate the bad

images from the good ones, since this could affect the end result when
the images are read electronically with the RX3 module 1.
7.

A tape mark will be written at the end of each dump.

Handprint Optical Dump Specifications
1)

Restrictions
•

Optical dump in Reject mode is illegal.

•

The program will not handle leading ANSI characters.

•

A rescan parameter is available. However, this parameter
allows the same line to be read any number of times. It does not
allow the errors occurred in the first scan to be corrected.

The above restrictions are necessary if the program is to be effective.
The more sophisticated the program, the less useful it becomes.

other words, if the amount of core storage available for capturing
video data is too small, the diagnostic would become obsolete.
2)

Theory of Operation
a)

Absolute Mode
In Absolute mode the program upon sensing the READY switch
depressed will bring a document to the read zone and pOSition it
1 ·inch past read zone plus the amount of mils specified with the
document position parameter.

It scans between the specified read

coordinates and reports to the operator the information obtained
from the scan.

(Refer to the preceding figures. )

If a forward step has been specified (FS':'), the program performs

the step ignoring high and low characters and once again reports
the information to the operator.
60182000 K

660-29

Reference Mode
In Reference mode the program upon sensing the READY switch
depressed, brings a document to the read zone and positions it 1 inch
past read zone sensor plus the amount of mils.
document position parameter.

Specified with the

It scans only the character data.

this point the program monitors the first 3-character data ready words
for high and low signals.

If both high and low are detected, the pro-

gram will reject this document and bring up a new one.

If more than

one high signal is detected, the program performs a 64 mils reverse
step.

If more than one low signal is detected, the program performs

a 64 mils

forward step.

Once again, the program scans between the

read coordinates and checks for high and low signals.

If within six

attempts the program does not succeed to get rid of high or low signals,
the document will be rejected.
Upon succeeding in positioning the line, the program scans the line one
more time capturing character data and video data.
Character data is now analyzed and compared to the reference line.
If rejects or substitutions are detected, the program will report the

information to the operator.

(Refer to the preceding figures. )

If more lines must be read from the same document, the program will

perform the forward step specified with the FS':: parameter, check for
high or low Signals, and adjust the line if more than one signal is up,
and return one again to capture character data and video data.

660-30

60182000 K

Hand Print Operating Procedure to Simulate Controlware
1.

Parameters for Initial Scan
OD~:~=S

(Optical dump = Reference mode)

FE~:~=4

(Enable hand print font line)

HT~:~=O

(Disable horizontal line thicken)

VT~:~=30

(Vertical line thicken = 30)

QL~:~=78

(Quantize level = 78)

BF~:~=O

(Disable black fill)

DP~:~=

(Total mils (in decimal) from leading edge of document to the center
of the line you wish to read)
(Forward step length (total mils in decimal»
NOTE:

FS~:~=O

for stationary read.

(Steps per page or number of lines that you wish to read)
Execute test

EX~:~

Press 955 READY switch
If no substitutions or rejects are detected, change the following parameters to perform the

first rescan.
2.

First Rescan
VT~:~=

(Vertical line thicken = 21)

BF~:~=

(Enable black fill)

EX':~

(Execute test)

Press 955 READY switch
If no substitutions or rejects are detected after the first rescan, change the following param-

eters to perform the second rescan.
3.

Second Rescan
QL~:~=80

(Quantize level = 80)

BF':~=O

(Disable black fill)

EX~:~

(Execute test)

Press 955 READY switch
If no substitutions or rejects are detected after the second rescan, change the following

parameters to perform the third and final rescan.
4.

Third Rescan
VT':~=12

(Vertical line thicken = 12)

BF':~= 1

(Enable black fill)

EX':~

(Execute test)

Press 955 READY switch

60182000 K

660-31

NOTE:

If no errors (substitutions or rejects) are detected during the three rescans, hand

print errors were possibly caused by skew in the document.
To test this theory perform the following steps:
FS~:~=O

(Stationary read)

EX~:~

(Execute test)

Press 955 READY switch
Manually move the document as the program is performing stationary read.
NOTE: Skew of ± 1. 5 degree is normal.

660-32

60182000 K

Sample of Error Printout on the Forward Stepping Accuracy Test
EXPSD---ACTSD---MILS OFF---DRIFT-LC-PC--EID
15

+ 78
+ 66
+ 60
+ 54

+
+
+
+
+
+

FSE

+
+
+
+
+

FSE

+
+
+
+
+
+

FSE

+
+
+
+

FSE

+
+
+
+
+

FSE

NOTE
1.

The above e.rror printout was forced by defining a forward step of 400 mils instead of
336 mils (1/3 inch) which is the actual spacing between lines on the document.

No values are listed under drift, because it was within tolerance.

60182000 K

660-33

Subtest Number 5 Optical Dump
a.

Absolute Mode
RX4 module 1. upon sensing the READY switch depressed. will
initiate 40 IPS speed arid wait for a document to be sensed at read
zone. If a document is already covering read zone sensor at the
time the READY switch is depressed. the program will bypass it and
wait for a new one. As soon as a document is sensed at read zone.
the program will allow the document to move 1 inch (distance from
read zone sensor to read area) plus the number of mils specified with
the document position parameter (DP~:<).
Since this is an absolute dump. the program will not attempt to line
locate. The program will now perform a zero mirror and position
the mirror to the initial read coordinate (IC~<). Character peak reference. font lines, and read will now be enabled.
Due to the high frequency in which the video data comes out of the
Dump register. the program will not terminate the scan when the
mirror reaches the final read coordinate (FC*). This is due to the
fact that having to capture video data. character data. servo data.
and character voltage. the program cannot monitor the mirror encoder
without losing video data.

Therefore. the scan will be terminated.

based on a video data word count.
The formBla to compute the video data word count is:
(FC - IC)/2)
'Fe

IC
IW

(IW X 4)

Final read coordinate
Initial read coordinate
width (column count)

= Image

EXAMPLE:
IC

= 2A.

= 50.

= 22

Converting IC and Fe from hexadecimal.to decimal;
IC = 42

Fe = 80

U sing the formula

«80-42) /2) (22X4)

660-34

38/2X88

=
=

19 X 88

1672

60182000 K

After 1672 video data words have been taken. the program will drop
Scan Mirror Forward command and execute a Stop Mirror command.
The firmware will now inform the 1700 program that the video data is
ready for output. The 1700 program will request page count. iine
count. iine read, servo data. and character voltage and displays them
on the output device.
The 1700 program will now request the BC to transfer one column of
video data (four words). checks the four words for proper control codes
sequence and if they are in sequence. display the column of
data.

This process will continue until 1672 words or 418 columns of

video data have been listed. The 1700 program will now instruct the
BC program to continue with the test.
The BC program will now monitor the forward step (FS*) parameter.
If it is set to zero, it will perform another scan on the same line.
This is known as stationary read.

If the step is not set to zero. the

program will perform the step specified (FS~:c) before executing the
next scan. This process continues until the specified number of steps
have been executed on a single document. After the requested number
of steps have been executed. a new document will be brought into the
read area and the test starts over again.
NOTE
Stepping in Absolute mode may cause either bottomless
or topless. This is because the program in Absolute
mode does not adjust the step using servo data. it
actually performs an absolute step without any adjust~
ments whatsoever. This mode will allow you to test
how accurate the transport can step without using
servo data.
b.

Reject of Reference Mode
The Be program. upon sensing the READY switch depressed. will
initiate a 40 IPS speed and wait for a document to be sensed at read
zone. If a document is already covering read zone sensor at the time
the READY switch is depressed. the program will ignore it.

As soon

as a document is sensed at read zone sensor. the program will allow
the document to move 1 inch (distance from read zone sensor to read
area) plus the number of mils specified with the document position
parameter. The program will now line locate and position the line at
servo data 16~ 3 (16 = center). The mirror will now be positioned at
the initial read coordinate. Character peak reference. font lines. and

60182000 K

660-35

read are now enabled. The program will now begin to capture video
data, character data, servo data, and character voltage. When the
computed number of video data words have been captured,· the program
will drop the Scan Forward Mirror command and bring up Stop Mirror
command. If this is a dump on reject only, the program will analyze
the character data, and if any rejects are detected, the program informs the 1700 program.

If this is a dump on Reference mode, the

characters generated by the reader are compared against the reference
line and if any substitutions are detected, the program informs the
1700. The 1700 program, upon notification that either rejects or substitutions have been detected, will request the BC program to transfer
page count, line count, character data, character voltage, and servo
data and displays all the information on the selected output device.
The 1700 program will now begin to request 1 column of video data
(four words) at a time. Checks the four words for proper control code
sequence (EXP. = 3~ 2. 1. 0) and if they are found to be out of sequence,
the operator will be informed, the program checks to see if this is a
clear column (all 56 bits clear). If it is a clear column, a clear
column count will be incremented by 1 and a test is performed to determine if a black to white transition just occurred. If no transition
occurred, more video data will be requested. If the column of data
contains black data, the program transfers the four words to the video
data buffer and tests for an overflow (37 columns of black). If an
overflow is detected, the program informs the operator and no other
action is taken.
Upon a transition from white to black, the program determines if the
image residing in the video data buffer must be listed. The program
will list the image if so determined and checks to see if there are any
more to be listed.
If there are no more images to be listed, the program instructs the

BC program to continue with the test.

The BC program will now

monitor the forward step parameter and if set to zero will rescan the
same line (stationary read); otherwise the program will test to see if
the specified number of steps have been performed on this page. If
not, the program performs the specified step making the necessary
adjustments (by using servo data) so that the next line will be as close
as possible in the center of the optic. When the specified number of
steps have been executed on a page, a new page is brought in the read
area and the test is repeated allover again.

660-36

60182000 K

scI 17001 FR10l1 FR113 INTERFACE TEST
(BC3A59 Test No. 59)
(Non-Supported Class III Test)

OPERATING PROCEDURE
A.

RESTRICTIONS
1.

Requires an 8K 1700 system with a 608 or 609 MT and a TTY.

The diagnostic interfaces to SMM17 only for loading.

BC interrupt line must be on 4 or 7.

LOADING PROCEDURE
Manually enter the appropriate bootstrap (see SMM17 Reference Manual) starting at
address $1FCO.
1.

Set SELECTIVE STOP and SELEC TIVE SKIP switches.

Set P = 1FCO and run.

First halt, run.

Second halt.

Computer halts with A=3080, Q=0381.

Clear SELECTIVE SKIP switch.

Add 30 to A (30BO).

Run.

TTY prints.
SMM17 ED. 3.0
BUILD TEST LIST

60182000 K

Third halt.
a.

Set A = 5901 (BC3 Test Number 59).

Set Q = 0381.

Run.

Fourth halt.
a.

Clear A register.

Run.

661-1

8.
C.

TTY prints BC3 internal printout message.

BC3 TEST FUNCTIONS
1.

Section 1 Functions 'Control Lines Test'
a.

Director 1 write" expect reply.

Director 2 read" expect reply.

Director 2 write, expect reply.

Director 1 write" expect internal reject.

Section 2 Functions 'Autoload Test'
a.

Verify Autoload status bit.

Verify that it is possible to autoload 4K words to the BC with no hang-ups.

Verify data autoloaded to the BC.

Verify data received from the BC.

Section 3 Functions 'Status + Interrupts Test'
a.

Program Protect Switch Status test.

Director 1 Status test.

Director 2 Status test.

Data Interrupt + Status test.

EOP Interrupt + Status test.

Alarm Interrupt + Status test.

Lost Data Interrupt + Status test.

Section 4 Functions' Directors + Functions Test'
a.

Starting with Director 2 through 7" verify that the coupler decodes the
correct director.

b.
5.

Verify that the BC receives the correct function with each director.

Section 5 Functions 'Block Transfer ECO Test'
a.

Starting with one word and continuing up to 4K. verify that the BC always
accepts and transmits the correct number of words.

661-2

60182000 K

SECTION 1.

BC CONTROL LINES TEST

NOTE: To bypass this section set the SELECTIVE SKIP switch on the 1700 Console.
TTY types: Section 1 Running.
TTY types: Set BC Equipment to X.
Enter CR after setting the BC equipment switch to X.
Functions performed in Section 1:
1.

Director 1 Write. Expect Reply

Director 2 Read. Expect Reply

Director 2 Write. Expect Reply

Director 1 Write E

f. X Expect Internal Reject

Director 1 Write W

f. 0 Expect Internal Reject

If the responses to the functions listed above are correct, the program will request

that the BC equipment number be changed to a different combination and the test
repeated.
Combinations 2. 4. 8. F. and A are tested:
At the completion of the section the program types: END OF SECTION 1.
Section 1 Error Message
EXP = AA REC=BB F=X D=Y E=Z W=XX WHERE
EXP = AA
AA is the expected response on the function performed. AA takes the form of
RE (Reply). IR (Internal. Reject). or ER (External Reject).
REC = BB
BB is the actual response received.
(Internal

Reject)~

BB takes the form of RE (Reply). IR

or ER (External Reject).

F=X
X is the function performed.

X takes the value of R (Read) or W (Write).

D=Y
Y is the director used in the function.
E=Z
Z is the equipment number used in the function.

Z = 2, 4, 8. F, or A .

. .-

60182000 K

661-3

W =

XX is the converter number used in the function.

XX = 0-10

After typing the above error message, the program types ACTION (C, R)
The operator should now select C to continue or R to repeat the same function.
NOTE:

If an R is entered in response to ACTION(C, R)= the program will re-execute

the same function for as long as the function fails.
repeat on error only.

In other words, it will

To repeat the same function unconditionally, set the

SELECTIVE SKIP switch on the computer before entering R.
this unconditional loop, clear the SELECTIVE SKIP switch.

To exit from
The program

will now start processing the next function.
SECTION 2 AUTOLOAD TEST
TTY types: Section 2 Running.
Clear SKIP switch if it was set to skip Section 1.
Section 2 Error Messages
AUT BIT NOT SET
ACTION (C, R)=
Following a DIR 9 write, the autoload status bit was not a "1".
Enter R in response to ACTION (C, R)=.
until the problem is solved.

The program will perform a DIR 9 continually

The program will inform the operator by ringing the TTY

bell when it receives the proper status response.
AUT HANG UP.

WC=XXXX

(XXXX Range = 1 - 1000

)

EXP=RE REC=IR F=W D=8 E=A W=O
During the 4K Autoload Test, the program received an Internal Reject on a Director 8 at
WC (word count) XXXX.
Since no other .section can be processed unless the autoload works properly, enter R in
response to ACTION (C, R)=.
The program will perform the autoload continually until it succeeds to perform a 4K
autoload.
AUT. BIT NOT CLR
ACTION (C, R)=
Following a Director 1 Write (Master Clear BC), the autoload status bit was not a "0".
Enter R in response to ACTION (C, R)=.

661-4

60182000 K

A UTOLOAD TO BC FAILED
ACTION (C, "R)=
The data autoloaded to the BC is incorrect.
Enter C in response to ACTION (C, R)=
TTY types: Data=.
Define the data to be autoloaded to the BC as four hexadecimal digits or less, terminate
DATA selection with a (CR).
The program will now continually autoload the data defined until the operator presses
the TTY manual interrupt button.

The program upon sensing the TTY interrupt will

request a new data word.
To terminate, enter STOP in response to DATA=.
BLOCK TRANSFER FAILED
ACTION (C, R)=
The word count received from the BC is incorrect.
Section 5 will check Data Block Transfer Logic.

We cannot jump to Section 5 at this

time because D1 and D2 status and interrupts have not been checked yet.

Enter C in

response to:
ACTION (C, R)=, after the status is 'checked the cause of Data Block Transfer Failure
will be determined.
INCORRECT DATA FROM BC EXP=XXXX REC=YYYY
The data coming from the BC is incorrect.
If no errors are detected during the autoload test, the TTY types END OF SECTION 2.

SECTION 3 DIRECTOR 1 AND DIRECTOR 2 STA TUS CHECK
DATA, EOP, ALARM AND LOST DATA INTERRUPTS CHECK
NOTE:

BC interrupt line must be on interrupt line 4 or 7.

TTY types: Section 3 Running.
Section 3 Error Messages for D1 and D2 Status
EXP BIT 2/X SET DY
REC BIT 2/X CLR DY

60182000 K

661-5

ACTION (C, R)=
OR
EXP BIT 2/X CLR DY
REC BIT 2/X SET DY
ACTION (C, R)=
Where X is the bit being tested and Y the director.
See tables below for D1 and D2 status bits specifications.
If an R is entered in response to ACTION (C, R)=, the program will set and clear

continually the status bit in error.

Should the CE correct the status bit in error, the

program will ring the TTY bell, and proceed to test next status bit.
Interrupt Failure Error Messages
1.

NO DATA INTERRUPT

NO EOP INTERRUPT

NO ALARM INTERRUPT

NO LOST DA TA INTERRUPT

NOTE:

Additional information will be displayed if the status is incorrect.

Expected status before BC generates Data interrupt.
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/ 1 set)

Expect status after Be generates Data interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

INT.

(Bit 2/2 set)

DATA

(Bit 2/3 set)

Expected status before BC generates EOP interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

Expected status after BC generates EOP interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)

66i-6

INT.

(Bit 2/2 set)

EOP

(Bit 2/4 set)
60182000 K

Expected status before BC generates Alarm interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

Expected status after BC generates Alarm interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

INT.

(Bit 2/2 set)

ALARM (Bit 2/5 set)
Expected status before BC generates Lost Data interrupt:
READY (Bit 210 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

Expected status after BC generates Lost Data interrupt:
READY (Bit 2/0 set)
BUSY

(Bit 2/1 set)

INT.

(Bit 2/2 set)

ALARM (Bit 2/5 set)
LOST DATA (Bit 2/6 set)
DIRECTOR 1 STATUS

CHANNEL 0

Bit Position

Status Function

60182000 K

2/0

READY

2/1

BUSY

2/2

INTERRUPT

2/3
2/4

DATA
EOP (END OF OPERA TION)

2/5

ALARM

2/6

LOST DATA

2/7

PP (PROGRAM PROTECT)

2/8
2/9

AUTOLOAD

2/10

CHARACTER REJECT

2/11

LLF (LINE LOCATE FAILURE)

2/12

EOF (END OF FILE)

2/13
2/14

TRANSPORT STATUS FAULT
DOCUMENT NO SORT

2/15

DATA SKEWED

LINE DELETE

661-7

DIRECTOR 2 STATUS

CHANNEL 1

Bit Position

Status Function

2/0 - 2/7

MIRROR POSITION STATUS

2/8

UNUSED

2/9

UNUSED

2/10

DOCUMENT LENGTH FAULT

2/11

PARAMETER FAULT

2/12

MIRROR STOP FAULT

2/13

COORDINATE FAULT

2/14

MIRROR VELOCITY FAULT

2/15

SCAN GATE

SECTION 4
Starting with Director 2 through 7 the BC3 program will perform two functions for
every direc tor.
Example:
Function number 1 = Director 2, A = 0000
Function number 2 = Director 2, A = FFF8
Theory of Operation
The BC upon receiving the Director function, transfers back to the BC3 monitor the
actual director decoded by the coupler and the function.

BC3 monitor will verify that

the coupler decoded the correct director and that the correct function was received by
the BC.
Error Messages
BC DECODE WRONG DIRECTOR EXP=DX REC=DY
Where DX is the expected director and DY is the director actually decoded by the
coupler.
BC RECEIVED INCORRECT FUNCTION ON DX EXP=XXXX REC=YYYY
BC3 monitor after it displays one of the above error messages requests operator's
action by typing:
ACTION(C, R)=

Where

C = Continue
R = Repeat on error only

661-8

60182000 K

NOTE:

To repeat the same Director function unconditionally, set the SELECTIVE SKIP
switch before entering R in response to ACTION(C, R).

After Directors 2 through 7 have been verified, the BC3 monitor types END OF SECTIoN 4.
SECTION 5 ECO TEST
Data Block transfer to and from the BC, starting with a data block of one word up to
4000.

Each time the program verifies that the BC accepts only as many words as

instructed to, and transfers back the same number.
Error Messages
BC HANG UP ON DATA INPUT
During a Data Block transfer of X words (x 11~ x ~ 4000

) to the BC, the BC failed to

generate EOP interrupt.
BLOCK TRANSFER FAILED
FROM 1700 TO BC
EXP=XXXX ACT=YYYY
The BC accepted more or less than XXXX data words than instructed.

XXXX is the

number of words the BC should have accepted before generating an EOP interrupt.
YYYY is the number of words the BC actually accepted.
LOST DA TA STATUS
FROM 1 700 TO BC
EXP=XXXX ACT=YYYY
During a Data Block transfer of x words from the 1700 to the BC, the BC generated Lost
Data status.
This is a fatal error.

Once the 1700 initiates a data transfer to the BC it does not

terminate data output to the BC unless the BC generates an EOP interrupt or the 1700
detects timeout on data transfer.
ILLEGAL LOST DATA STATUS
FROM 1 700 TO BC
EXP=XXXX ACT=YYYY
The BC accepted as many words as instructed to, yet the BC generated a Lost Data
Status condition.
NOTE:· Under normal conditions, that is: following a successful Data Block transfer,
the condition bit in the BC should be true, if it is false the BC program will
generate a Lost Data status.

60182000 K

661-9

BC HANG UP ON DATA OUTPUT
During a Data Block transfer of x words from the BC to the 1700, the BC has failed to
terminate the data transfer with an EOP interrupt.

Data transfer has been terminated

by the 1700 upon detecting timeout on data transfer.
BLOCK TRANSFER FAILED
FROM BC TO 1700
EXP=XXXX ACT=YYYY
The BC has failed to transfer the correct number of words.
NOTE:

On anyone of the above messages, the BC3 types:

ACTION (C, R) = Where
C = Continue
R = Repeat on error only
NOTE:

To repeat the same function unconditionally, set the SELECTIVE SKIP switch
before entering R in response to ACTION(C, R).

To exit from this unconditional

loop clear the SELEC TIVE SKIP switch.
If no errors are detected in the Block Transfer ECO Test, the BC3 will type:

END OF SECTION 5
END OF TEST
ACTION(C, R)=
Enter R if the entire test is to be re-run.

661-10

60182000 K

COMMENT SHEET
CONTROL DATA® 1700 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MONITOR (SMM17

MANUAL TITLE

Volume 2

Reference Manual

60182000
PUBLICATION NO. _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

FROM:

REVISION _--=L:-._ __

NAME: ______________________________________________________
BUSINESS
ADDRESS: ____________________________________________________

COMMENTS.:
This form is not intended to be used as an order blank. Your evaluation of this manual will be welcomed
by Control Data Corporation. Any errors, suggested additions or deletions, or general comments may
be made below. Please include page number referen~es and fill in publication revision level as shown by
the last entry on the Record of Revision page at the front of the manual. Customer engineers are urged
to use the TAR.

lLI

:::i
(!)

I
I
I
I

a'i!:1

III
:·1
~I

SI
~I

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U. S. A.
FOLD ON DOTTED LINES AND STAPLE

STAPLE

FOLD

.--------------------------------------------~
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 8241
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

Z
:::::i

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U.S.A.

<
t-

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY

::)

CONTROL DATA CORPORATION

Technical Pupli~ations Department
4201 North Lexington Avenue
Arden Hills, Minnesota 55112

FOLD

FOLD.

CONTROL DATA
CORPORATION

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS, 8100 34th AVE. SO., MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 55440
SALES OFFICES AND SERVICE C~NTERS IN MAJOR CITIES THROUGHOUT THE WORLD
IITun

It..!

\I C A

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.13 Paper Capture Plug-in
Modify Date                     : 2009:08:29 11:30:54-07:00
Create Date                     : 2009:08:29 11:30:54-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:08:29 11:30:54-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:14e19075-dfe5-400b-a0b5-9bc861aa3c87
Instance ID                     : uuid:0b5e5f51-15c8-49de-967b-ca7fdcbb6121
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 776

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74 60182000L 1700 System Maintenance Monitor Volume 2 Feb74

60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74 60182000L_1700_System_Maintenance_Monitor_Volume_2_Feb74

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation